JP7214109B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (generally called "pachinko machines") and reel-type gaming machines (generally called "pachislot machines").

In such a game machine, decorative members and movable members (accessories) provided on the game board perform effects as the game progresses.

JP 2018-64776 A

In such a game machine, since the decorative members and movable members (accessories) are provided in a limited space in the game area, the range of motion and patterns of performance are limited. It may lead to a decline. In particular, when the decorative member protrudes from the periphery of the game area, the movable range of the movable member is narrowed, and the movement pattern of the movable member is limited.

Accordingly, an object of one aspect of the present invention is to suppress a decline in amusement in a game.

In order to solve the above problems, one embodiment of the present invention employs the following configuration. A game having a game plate portion having a game area formed thereon and a back unit provided behind the game plate portion, wherein a display means provided in the back unit can be visually recognized through an opening of the game plate portion board and
a body frame to which the game board is attached,
The body frame is provided with payout means for paying out game balls to a player and payout ball supply means for storing the game balls to be supplied to the payout means,
The back unit is
A unit base, a fixed decorative member attached to the unit base, and a movable body attached to the unit base, wherein the movable body supplies the payout balls in a state in which the game board is attached to the body frame. operable between an initial position below the means and an operating position;
The unit base is constructed using a transparent member capable of transmitting light, and the inner surface of the transparent member of the unit base is covered with the fixed decorative member below the payout ball supply means provided with the movable body. exposed areas without
At least a part of the payout ball supplying means is made of a member that can transmit light so that the stored game balls are visible,
With the game board attached to the body frame, the unit base is exposed when viewed from the front of the game board through the opening although the game board is invisible when the game board is viewed from the front. The inner surface is visible, and the game balls stored in the payout ball supply means are visible through the unit base at the portion of the exposed inner surface.
It is characterized by

According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement in a game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is at the raised position; It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with a door frame opened from a main body frame and a main body frame opened from an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right side view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the outer frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a left outer frame assembly and a right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. (a) is an exploded perspective view of an outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 and viewed from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed; (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame, viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit, viewed from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of a plate base unit in the plate unit; It is the perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in the dish unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in the dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; It is the top view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit in a dish unit from the forward-backward direction of the production|presentation operation part button unit. (a) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as seen from above, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as seen from below. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the bottom front. (a) is a front perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the rotary drive unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit, viewed from the front right. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit, viewed from the front left. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation button unit of the production|presentation operation unit, and was seen from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the production|presentation operation button unit, and was seen from the front lower side. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion; (a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation portion of the pressing operation portion. is a front view of the plate unit when is pressed. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame left side unit. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame top unit, and (c) is a state in which the top lower cover is removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in . It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when opening and closing the door frame with respect to the body frame; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. (a) is a front perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the dispensing base unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a payout unit in a body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. Fig. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction; (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball removing movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). . FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full-tank ball path unit; It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball in a main body frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from below; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear; It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. (a) is a plan view of a body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails, etc., viewed from above, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from below. Fig. 101(a) is exploded and is an exploded perspective view seen from the front; It is an explanatory view showing a region in which the game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame circulate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball to the detour passage in the main-body frame upper part. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side. In the pachinko machine, it is a front view of a game board showing a game area in which game balls circulate with the game panel made opaque. It is a front view which expands and shows the attacker unit vicinity in a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the back. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board with the game panel made transparent; FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board showing the decorative pattern of the game panel and the obstacle nail. It is a front view of the front structural member and the game panel in the game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the front structural member and the game panel from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front structural member and the game panel from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the front structural member and the game panel, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the front structural member and the game panel, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front view showing a panel plate, an upper left panel decorative substrate, and a lower left panel decorative substrate in a game panel; (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the panel plate at a specific obstacle nail; FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional view of the panel plate at the location of the obstructing nail overlapping the decorative pattern; FIG. 4 is a front view of a game board showing the relationship between decorative patterns and obstacle nails on the game panel; (a) is a front view showing the relationship between the decorative pattern on the panel board of the game panel and the back front decoration board of the back front effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a panel board and the panel decoration LED of the panel decoration board. It is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front in which the center accessory and the display effect unit of the front unit of the game board are disassembled. FIG. 11 is a front view showing a state in which the first picture is decorated with light emission in the display effect unit; FIG. 10 is a front view showing a state in which the second picture is decorated with light emission in the display effect unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the back unit of the game board, emphasizing the back front decorative board and the back front right decorative board; It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; It is the perspective view which looked at the back production|presentation unit in the back unit from the front. FIG. 10 is a front view of the back-back effect unit emphasizing the back-back movable mechanism with the back-back movable decoration body in a normal position; 134 is a front view of the back-back effect unit showing a state in which the back-back movable decorative body is locked by the locking member from the state of FIG. 133; FIG. 135 is a front view of the back effect unit showing a state in which the slide guide is moved downward from the state of FIG. 134 to near the lower end; FIG. FIG. 136 is a front view of the back-back effect unit showing a state in which the lock member is rotated to the release position by the slide guide from the state of FIG. 135 and the back-back movable decorative body is dropped. FIG. 11 is a front view of the back-side effect unit showing a state in which the back-side movable decorative body is vertically moved by a slide guide; FIG. 10 is a front view of the back-end effect unit showing a state in which the lock member is rotated from the lock position to the release position side by upward movement of the back-back movable decorative body by the slide guide; (a) is an exploded perspective view of a rear-back decorative effect unit in the rear-back effect unit and viewed from the front; It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 10 is a front view showing a state in which the fifth pattern is decorated with light in the rear-back decoration effect unit; FIG. 10 is a front view showing a state in which the sixth pattern is decorated with light in the rear-back decoration effect unit; (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back and middle effect unit of the back unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the back and middle effect unit of the back unit disassembled for each main member. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 10 is a front view showing a state in which the third pattern is decorated with light emission in the back and inside effect unit. FIG. 10 is a front view showing a state in which the fourth picture is decorated with light in the back and inside effect unit. It is a front view of the back right production unit in the back unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a back right effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is an exploded front perspective view of the back right effect unit disassembled into main members. FIG. 10 is a front view of the back right effect unit emphasizing the back right movable mechanism in a normal state in which the tip of the back right movable ornament is rotated upward and the bearing slider is positioned at the raised end. FIG. 148 is a front view of the back right effect unit showing a state in which the bearing slider is positioned at the lower end with the back right movable decorative body left as it is from the state of FIG. 147 ; 149 is a front view of the back-right effect unit showing a state in which the tip of the back-right movable decorative body is rotated downward from the state of FIG. 148; FIG. FIG. 150 is a front view of the back-right effect unit showing a state in which the bearing slider is positioned at the raised end while the back-right movable decorative body remains as it is from the state of FIG. 149 ; FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear-back movable decorative body of the rear-back effect unit in the back unit is moved from the retracted position to the standby position; 152 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-rear movable ornament is dropped to the lowered position from the state of FIG. 151; FIG. 153 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-rear movable decorative body is vertically moved between the standby position and the lowered position by the slide guide from the state of FIG. 152; FIG. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back right movable decorative body of the back right effect unit in the back unit is moved from the initial state to the first state; 155 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the back-right movable ornament is moved to the second state from the state in FIG. 154; FIG. 156 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-right movable ornament is moved to the third state from the state in FIG. 155; FIG. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the upper back movable decorative body of the upper back effect unit in the back unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position; FIG. 11 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-bottom movable decorative body of the back-bottom effect unit in the back unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position; In the back unit, move the back rear movable decoration of the back rear effect unit to the lowered position, move the back right movable decoration of the back right effect unit to the second state, move the back top movable decoration of the back top effect unit to the appearance position, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the underside movable decorations of the underside effect unit are respectively moved to the raised position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the first pattern is light-embellished on the front light guide plate of the display effect unit; FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front light guide plate of the display effect unit is decorated with the second pattern. FIG. 11 is a front view of the game board showing the state where the third pattern is decorated with light on the first back light guide plate of the back middle effect unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state where the fourth pattern is decorated with light on the first back light guide plate of the back middle effect unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the fifth pattern is light-embellished on the back second light guide plate of the back-back decorative effect unit in the back-back effect unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the sixth pattern is light-embellished on the back second light guide plate of the back-back decoration effect unit in the back-back effect unit. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an animation-like light emission effect with a plurality of patterns using the front light guide plate, the first back light guide plate, and the second back light guide plate; FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the first pattern is light-embellished on the front light guide plate of the front effect unit and the back right movable decorative body of the back right effect unit is moved to the second state. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit; It is a front view of a peripheral control unit. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the structure of a frame ground substrate; (a) is a flowchart showing the procedure of main processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment, and (b) is an interrupt processing periodically performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special design process processing performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a first starting opening passing process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the second starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design process processing performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design normal process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big-hit determination process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. (A) is a big win determination table used for lottery processing for big wins, and (B) is a symbol determination table used for lottery processing for types of big wins. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop design setting process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design variation process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot control processing performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a big winning opening opening/closing process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment; FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a second reception port opening/closing process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the normal design process processing performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing the procedure of gate passage processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment; It is a flow chart showing the procedure for normal symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing the procedure of sub-main processing executed by the peripheral control MPU of the same embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of 16 ms steady-state processing executed by the peripheral control MPU of the same embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of grayscale rendering; FIG. 195 is an explanatory diagram following FIG. 194; FIG. 196 is an explanatory diagram following FIG. 195; FIG. 10 is a time chart showing a period during which volume adjustment is prohibited when an operation effect using the rotary operation unit is executed; FIG. It is a time chart which shows the prohibition period of sound volume adjustment at the time of execution of the drive production|presentation using a rotary operation part. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing a period during which volume adjustment is prohibited when an operation effect using the pressing operation section is executed; FIG. It is an example of the effect display of the effect display device when the sound volume is adjusted by rotating the rotary operation unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine of another embodiment from the right front. FIG. 11 is a front view showing a plurality of light emitting regions on the back second light guide plate; It is explanatory drawing which shows the change of the light emission area|region at the time of execution of the light guide production|presentation using the back 2nd light-guide plate. It is a concrete production example at the time of execution of the light guide production using the back second light guide plate. FIG. 10 is a side cross-sectional view for explaining the positional relationship among the effect display device, the plurality of light guide plates, and the plurality of movable decorations; 4 is a time chart showing light emitting states of a plurality of light guide plates and operating states of movable decorations; FIG. 10 is a front view showing a transmission region formed in the decoration main body of the back-right movable decoration. 1 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine; FIG. In the pachinko machine, it is a front view of another example of the game board showing the inside of the game area in which the game panel is made opaque and game balls circulate. It is a block diagram showing another example of the outline of the control configuration of the pachinko machine. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a symbol determination table used in the lottery process for the big win, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the symbol determination table used in the lottery process for the big win. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a round distribution table; It is an explanatory view showing an example of a special winning opening opening pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the variation pattern table at the time of a big hit. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table when a match is lost; It is an explanatory view showing an example of a look-ahead effect table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of an L5 production|presentation promotion pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline|summary of L5 production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline|summary of L5 production|presentation. It is an explanatory view showing another example of the outline of the L5 effect. It is an explanatory view showing another example of the outline of the L5 effect. It is an explanatory view showing another example of the outline of the L5 effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of an L5 production|presentation promotion pattern table. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the outline of the end effect of the L5 effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an outline of a secret timer announcement effect; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timetable of a secret timer advance notice effect; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the outline of the secret timer announcement effect; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the outline of the secret timer announcement effect; It is a schematic diagram which shows the longitudinal section of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram which shows the longitudinal section of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram which shows the longitudinal section of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram which shows the longitudinal section of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the state which looked at the upper part of the pachinko machine from the upper visibility enabling area.

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. be. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame and outer frame and viewed from the front. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear after being disassembled into two parts; FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls B (see FIG. 90) are driven by.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction and extend vertically, and the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. a lower outer frame assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40 .

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 are connected to the main body frame 4 and the main body. It is for coaxially supporting the lower frame hinge assembly 520 so as to be rotatable, and attaching the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward about the left side in front view.

In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the door frame 3 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 so that the lower outer frame assembly 40 is part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. By inverting the phase of the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiating it forward, the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 182 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with a performance operating section 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player can operate the performance operating section 301 when the player participation type performance is executed. , the player can participate in the performance, and in addition to the game with the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by the operation of the performance operation unit 301.例文帳に追加

The body frame 4 has a frame-like body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame 4 is attached to the outer frame 2. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed, a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launching device 540 for hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 for putting out the ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the body frame base 501 are covered. A back cover 640 and a locking unit 650 for locking between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are provided.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). The body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side of the front so that it can be opened and closed. is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front constituent member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and a front constituent member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and peripherals arranged behind the game panel 1100. A control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12), an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the game panel 1100. , and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing movable effects and light emitting effects according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are a plurality of obstacle nails planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in contact with the game ball B, and a predetermined privilege ( For example, it has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 that provide a predetermined number of game balls B). The obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁A general winning opening 2001 , a first starting opening 2002 , a gate section 2003 , a second starting opening 2004 and a big winning opening 2005 are provided in the table unit 2000 .

A game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 by the player. As a result, the game ball B is received or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate part 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. In addition, the player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182.例文帳に追加

In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600, displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600, displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600, displays the effect image on the display effect unit 2600, and performs a reverse effect. A unit 3100, a back-middle effect unit 3200, a back-right effect unit 3300, a back-up effect unit 3400, a back-bottom effect unit 3500, and a back-front effect unit 3600 or the like perform movable effects and light-emitting effects to attract the player. can entertain.

[2. Overall configuration of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 which are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20. An outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends thereof, an outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 together, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

The outer frame 2 forms part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 when the main body frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2 , the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 . The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in the front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. A left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 each extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially support a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 2 . It is for attaching the body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 includes a left outer frame member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . and a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 .

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 includes a concave portion 11a that is flat and concave to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a portion that is opposite to the concave portion 11a on the right side surface. It has a bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The left outer frame member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of vertically extending grooves on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 to be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 connects the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 12b on the left side of the portion 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the left outer frame member 11, and the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the left outer frame member 11. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 while the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , is attached to the outer frame left member 11 . The upper left connecting member 12 has the horizontal fixing portion 12a in contact with the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left side cutout portion 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 13a extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. A fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion, and rightward from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. and a flat plate-like abutting portion 13d that extends short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the contact portion 13 d against the front surface of the bulging portion 11 b of the left outer frame member 11 and the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13 b against the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, thereby It is attached to the left frame member 11 . The left lower connecting member 13 has the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the upper surface of the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the left side cutout portion 41a of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the right outer frame assembly 20 includes a right outer frame member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, and the right outer frame member 21. and a lower hooking member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

The right outer frame member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The right outer frame member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed leftward at the rear portion of the right side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a recess portion 21a that is flat and recessed leftward from the portion opposite to the recessed portion 21a on the left side surface. It has a bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The right outer frame member 21 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the right outer frame member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces thereof. The plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10 .

The upper right connecting member 22 connects the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle of the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of the portion 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side into the hollow portion 21c of the right outer frame member 21, and the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the right outer frame member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21 while the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. , is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The upper right connecting member 22 has the horizontal fixing portion 22a in contact with the lower surface of the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a in the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. A horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion, and left from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. and a flat plate-like contact portion 23d that extends short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 has the rear surface of the abutting portion 23 d in contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21 b of the right outer frame member 21 and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23 b on the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a aligned with the lower end of the right outer frame member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The lower right connecting member 23 has the horizontal fixing portion 23a in contact with the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41, and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch portion 41a in the right side surface of the lower outer frame member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

An outer frame hook 653 of a locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 to be described later is hooked to the upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 . The upper hooking member 24 has a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The upper hooking member 24 extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 24b to which the outer frame hook 653 on the upper side of the cage is hooked is provided.

The lower hooking member 25 has a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 25a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction. and a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same lateral length as the lateral length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 has cutout portions 30a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively inserted into the cutout portions 30a on the left and right ends and attached.

In addition, the outer frame upper member 30 has a mounting stepped portion 30b at the left end portion, the upper surface and the front surface of which are recessed from the general surface. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment stepped portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and extends left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 which is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and whose rear is open is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped rear panel member 43 extending to the left and right, which is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear panel member 43 a mechanism 44;

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 has cutout portions 41a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left and right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted into the cutout portions 41a on both the left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower part of the panel rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends left and right, and extends from a position near the rear in the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The concave portion 41b maximizes the volume of the inner space 40a formed by the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43. As shown in FIG.

The front panel member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape with a short depth in the front-rear direction relative to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the panel front member 42 with the panel rear member 43, the panel interior becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the panel rear member 43. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 has an elongated opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

The rear panel member 43 extends in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front panel member 42 to the front surface of the panel rear member 43 , the panel internal space 40 a that forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is formed in cooperation with the panel front member 42 . The rear panel member 43 has a cylindrical connection tube portion 43a extending in the left-right direction, projecting upward, and communicating with the inner space 40a of the panel at the central portion in the left-right direction of the upper surface. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the rear panel member 43 . In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting tube portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 the length of the entire rear panel member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the rear panel member 43 as a whole. is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting tube portion 43a. When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection tube part 43a, thereby connecting the speaker unit. It communicates with the internal space of 620a to form an enclosure 624. FIG.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is arranged such that the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, thereby preventing the game ball B from being held between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. to prevent it from being caught.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so as to face the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting portion 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the placement portion 44a, An upright wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear and right sides of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion projecting forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d and having an upper surface inclined upward toward the rear. and a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position coinciding with a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size through which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate, and open to the rear surface of the rear panel member 43 . Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged behind the curtain plate rear member 43. As shown in FIG.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is designed to prevent an illegal tool such as piano wire from being inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, which will be described later. A standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the vertical wall portion 44d and bends upward, it will abut against the upper end projecting portion 44e that protrudes forward provided at the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity through the portion of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 .

By the way, in the case where the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B tends to stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B remains on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As a result, there arises a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is discharged from the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first Through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged behind the curtain board rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 arranged on the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43 with a left-right spacing, and closes the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear side. and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which is mounted inside the front panel member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. , and a frame-shaped sealing member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43 a of the rear panel member 43 .

The pair of guide members 45 are in contact with the lower end of the door frame 3 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 . The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is made of punching metal with numerous small holes. The port member 47 communicates the inner space 40a (enclosure 624) of the curtain board and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 with two cylinders. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the low-pitched sound emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (within the enclosure 624) according to the principle of Helmholtz resonance. , a rich low-pitched sound can be radiated forward of the outer frame 2 (toward the player). In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. and prevents the sound in the enclosure of the speaker from leaking from between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 and viewed from above, and FIG. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recessed portion 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and the outer frame upper hinge member 51. and a mounting screw 53 for mounting the locking member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 .

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is in the form of a horizontally extending flat plate and extends forward from an upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-like forward extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right side of the forward extending portion 51b to the center of the forward extending portion 51b toward the front and penetrates vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and an end edge extending downward from the left side of the forward extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. A flat edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d is provided. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a band plate-like lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and an operation piece 52b extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It has an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely forward left, and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by an attaching screw 53, at a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 , the lock body 52 a can block the bearing groove 51 c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the edge of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 . It extends forward so as to come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. The tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a abuts the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. As shown in FIG. The locking member 52 is biased in a direction in which the front end thereof rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 in the vicinity of the front end is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. By operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock body 52a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves leftward, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view. can be in a state in which the As a result, the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 has a flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-like raised portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction. , an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating vertically through the horizontal portion 60a and having a size through which only one game ball B can pass. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with a narrower upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a leftward position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. 60 d of discharge holes are formed in the horizontal part 60a so that it may contact|connect the center part of the front-back direction of the rising part 60b, and may extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal part 60a in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60 d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44 b of the ball jam prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 .

In the outer frame lower hinge member 60 assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is placed on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and screwed (not shown). It is fixed to the rear panel member 43 by . The raised portion 60b is attached to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, in the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) behind the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is separated from the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually narrows, the ball rolls to the rear side where the gap is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the ejection hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the part of the lower hinge member 60.例文帳に追加

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. FIG. 22 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 182 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

The door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 closing the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. a handle unit 180 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100; a door frame left side unit 400 attached to the tray unit, a door frame right side unit 410 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit, the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410 and a door frame top unit 450 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a vertically extending quadrangular (rectangular) outer shape when viewed from the front, and having a door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. A handle mounting member 102 mounted below, a speaker duct 103 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner when viewed from the rear, and mounted near the right end on the rear side of the door frame base 101 on the rear side. a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the door frame main relay board 104; The door frame relay board cover 107 covers the rear handle relay board 106, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the handle rear relay board 106 is covered from the rear side. It has a post-handle relay board cover 108 and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to it. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 .

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is for feeding the game balls B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 . The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is ejected into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing a game to hit into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. FIG. 31(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame, and FIG. 31(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 at the left side in front view, and closes the front surface of the main body frame 4 so as to be opened and closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a rectangular and flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 with an outer shape extending vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting a handle unit 180, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view.

The door-frame base unit 100 also includes a door-frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in the rear view of the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101, and a door-frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101. A door frame secondary relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in rear view, and a handle rear relay board mounted to the left side of the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 attached to the rear side and covering the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable are provided. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame top hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

This door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 at the bottom corner of the front surface, a plate unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 400 at the front surface of the door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1-1. door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame base 101 has a quadrangular (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 101 penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape with an inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door window 101 a has an upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery thereof, and is close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101 . It is located at about 1/3 of the height of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b, which is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. The insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted is recessed near the right end in the front view from the front to the front and the insertion recess 101c. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder main body 131 is inserted, the cylinder insertion hole 101d, and the handle mounting seat surface 101b are penetrated in the front-rear direction on the left side of the front view. and a ball feed opening 101e for facing the ball.

In addition, the door frame base 101 penetrates in the front and back at a position near the center in the left-right direction and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b. a passage opening 101f, a ball passage opening 101g for an upper tray that penetrates in the front-rear direction so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a in the vicinity of the left end in a front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, and a door. A glass unit mounting portion 101h recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted is provided.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of longitudinally long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner (below the upper tray ball passage opening 101g) when viewed from the front and penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of slits 101i are such that the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is positioned in front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is positioned behind. A speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the tray unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j. It is formed to match the portion 114b.

[3-1-2. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The handlebar mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a, and a tubular portion 102a. a plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c projecting into the portion 102a and extending over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a and arranged at uneven intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a; , and reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

The handle mounting member 102 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b with a screw while the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The cylindrical portion 102 a has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 . One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the remaining two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed in the handle base 181 at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181c. Therefore, in the handle mounting member 102, the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a only when the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be regulated.

Since the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend forward right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1-3. speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the tubular portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, the sound radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided forward. Through the speaker opening 211b in the plate unit base 211, the pachinko machine 1 can be favorably guided forward (toward the player).

Moreover, the speaker duct 103 has a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1-4. Door frame main relay board/Door frame secondary relay board/Handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the rear handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 (see FIG. 83). and FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape by combining a square extending left and right on the right side of the upper part of the square extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame secondary relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate unit 200, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410 side. It is for relaying the connection between the window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, etc., and the interface board 635 of the body frame 4, The remainder of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door-frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are arranged so that the vertically extending parts of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are connected to the door. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107 , and the rear side of the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150 .

The post-handle relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear handle relay board cover 108 when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1-5. Door frame relay board cover, rear handle relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board (inverted L-shaped portion extending up and down) can be covered. cover the sides. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape that is open at the front and the left side when viewed from the front. When assembled to the door-frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door-frame relay board cover 107 and can be opened. A connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side of the housing and connected to these terminals.

The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106 . The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 with a wiring cable (not shown). It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending in the left and right direction, and has openings formed near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction for passing the wiring cables.

[3-1-6. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100 . The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that connect the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 . An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end is attached at a position near the upper end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115, which are connected to the right reinforcing frame 112, are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 with a vertical separation therebetween, and door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 are engaged. and a hooking member 116 that is attached.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically by a length substantially equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101 . The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted through these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 . The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends in the left and right direction with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101 .

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends laterally with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113 . The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch portion 114a that is rectangularly cut downward from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end. The cut-out portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper tray ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the through portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a pair of rear piece portions which are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction and formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It has a pair of side pieces extending forward from the sides in a flat plate shape, and a flat front piece portion connecting the front ends of the pair of front extending portions to each other. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112 . A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 .

The hooking member 116 is attached to an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 . Door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are hooked to these hooking members 116 .

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are made by punching and molding metal plates. It is formed by bending. These are assembled with rivets.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 assembled along the left side, right side, and upper side of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114. , is assembled to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 are aligned with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

[3-1-7. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in a front view. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a locking spring 124 biasing the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like attachment piece 121a that is square in front view, and flat plate-like projecting pieces 121b that extend forward from the upper and lower sides of the attachment piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 at the attachment piece 121a. Hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end extends upward. The portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 .

The flange member 123 is an E-ring and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the flange member 123 and the lower projecting piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121 . The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the flange member 123 .

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower projecting piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount from the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, when the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is fully extended. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 or removed downward. can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 , so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 . can be supported as much as possible.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125, which will be described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 .

[3-1-8. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 includes a flat mounting piece 125a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and rectangular in front view, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. A door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22, etc.) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of the door frame 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and the projecting piece 125b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer circumference of the lower end portion is tapered and chamfered. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is positioned coaxially with the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the projecting piece 125b. installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 rotatably with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. can be done.

[3-1-9. cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650, which will be described later, to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing and locking with. The cylinder lock 130 includes a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end face of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131. and a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

A cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from behind and has a rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and the rotation transmission member 133 is formed in opposite positions across the central axis from the rear end toward the front. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252h of the plate unit body 252 of the plate unit 200 (see FIG. 22, etc.).

[3-1-10. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. FIG. 34(a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 34(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the tampering prevention member removed. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and also the game balls stored in the upper tray 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222. - 特許庁

The ball feeding unit 140 has an inlet 141a through which game balls B are supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the inlet 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open end and a box-shaped front cover 141 with a closed rear end and an open front, and a game ball entered from an entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a batted ball supply port 142a for supplying ball B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A ball extraction member 143 having a partition part 143a partitioning between an entrance port 141a and a ball extraction port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a rear cover 142 for game balls B on the partition part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 one by one. The ball feeding member 144 is rotatably supported about an axis extending vertically between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. A ball feed solenoid 145 is provided.

As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entry port 141a in a front view, and a ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144 .

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arcuate slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the center of rotation of the ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball extracting port 141b in front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball extracting member 143, which will be described later, extends forward from 141c. The upper side of the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entry port 141a. And, it is formed so as to close from the rear side the portion that is open rearward on the upstream end side of the ball removal guideway 241c.

The ball extraction member 143 has a partition portion 143a which partitions between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b on the lower side of the entrance port 141a and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and the partition portion 143a. Extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball outlet 141b. a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 143b; and the rotating rod 143b below the operating rod 143c. and a weight portion 143d projecting from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. An operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34(a)). The actuating rod 143c is the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 that moves downward when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 is pressed through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped cut-off portion 144a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the entrance port 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143, and a cut-off portion 144a behind the cut-off portion 144a. It has a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of the rotation shaft, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° around the rotation axis. Also, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding member 144 rotates about the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c, which is arranged at a position eccentric to the rotational axis, in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a feed position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a and the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the batted ball supply port 142a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is at the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540, and enters the partition portion 143a from the entry port 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the hit ball supply port 142a. As a result, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings vertically by driving (energization) of a ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip of the ball feeding working rod 146 which swings vertically. and a ball feeding crank 147 which rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by movement of the ball feeding member 144 and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding actuation rod 146 has an iron plate 146a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around the longitudinally extending axis. It is When the ball-feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball-feeding operating rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward (upward) the ball-feeding solenoid 145 due to the magnetic force generated, thereby feeding the ball around the right end. The left end near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. and return to the initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feed operating rod 146 near the ball feed crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feed solenoid 145 .

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction which can be engaged with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 which moves up and down, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b is disposed on the opposite side of the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the shaft portion 147b extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. , and a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35(b)) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

This ball feeding unit 140 operates a ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is positioned at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control section 633b (see FIG. 168) of the payout control board 633.

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the rotatably supported ball extraction member 143 or the weight 143d. However, the actuating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball extracting member 143 may contact the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper dish ball extracting slider 242 which is operated by pressing the upper dish ball extracting button 222 of the dish unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b in a normal state to partition the ball removal port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter into.

Then, when the player presses downward the upper tray ball removal button of the tray unit, the upper tray ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission section, and the operation rod 143c moves downward along with the movement of the operation transmission section. will also move relatively downward. When the operation rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball removal member 143 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b to form a partition. is released. As a result, the game ball B entering from the inlet 141a falls to the side of the ball outlet 141b, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guideway 241c of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 formed with the operation transmission part 242b with which the operation rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143 abuts is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition part 143a. Even if is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, and it is possible to prevent the ball extraction member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B can be inserted into the partition Rebounding at 143a can be prevented.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular attachment recess 142b (see FIG. 35(b), etc.) recessed forward and to the upper right when viewed from the back of the batted ball feed port 142a in the rear cover 142. An anti-tampering member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The tamper-proof member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is made of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The anti-tampering member 148 has a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. A lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other are provided. . The upper piece 148a of the anti-tamper member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-tamper member 148 so that the right end in a front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece 148b extends flush with the general surface of the tamper-proof member 148. As shown in FIG. As a result, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The anti-tampering member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to this tampering prevention member 148, an illicit game ball B to which a string is attached is hit into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper tray via the ball feeding unit 140, and attached to the illicit game ball B. The force of the illegal game ball B shot (hit ball) by the ball launching device 540 when a fraudulent act is performed such as operating the string to put the illegal game ball B into or out of the first start opening or the like. By inserting the string attached to the illegal game ball B between the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b, the V shape formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b It can be cut by the narrowed part of the string, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using an illegal game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1-11. foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. FIG. 36(a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 36(b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加As illustrated, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and having an open front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front side of the unit body 151. 152 and .

The foul cover unit 150 has a penetrating ball passage 150a that penetrates front to back at the upper left corner in a front view, and communicates the normal guide path of the lower full ball path unit of the main body frame 4 with the upper dish ball supply port of the dish unit; A full-tank ball receiving port 150b that opens rearward on the lower right side of the through-ball passage 150a in front view and can communicate with the full-tank guideway of the lower full-tank ball path unit of the body frame 4 is provided. .

In addition, the foul cover unit 150 is open upward on the right side of the full ball socket 150b when viewed from the front, and despite being shot by the ball launching device of the body frame 4, it did not reach the game area 5a. A foul ball receiving port 150c for receiving a game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B received in a full ball receiving port 150b and a foul ball receiving port 150c opened forward near the lower right corner in a front view. A ball discharge port 150d that discharges forward and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port of the plate unit is provided.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit main body 151 and the cover member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharge port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passageway 150e having a possible width is provided.

The ball-through passage 150 a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 . The full tank ball socket 150b and the foul ball socket 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. As shown in FIG. The ball outlet 150d is formed in the lid member 152. As shown in FIG. A storage passage 150 e is formed by a unit main body 151 and a lid member 152 .

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and the movable piece 153 and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are no longer discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is kept inside the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full-tank detection sensor 154 . As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the tank is full, the further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, the fact can be notified to the player, the staff of the game hall, or the like, and they can be urged to eliminate the full tank of the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the penetrating ball passage 150a. A door opening/closing abutting portion 150f with which the operating projection 613a of the door 613 can abut is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts against the door opening/closing abutment portion 150f, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b ( front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is detachably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. As shown in FIG. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front). It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 101h, and a glass frame that closes the inside of the glass frame 161 and has a glass frame on the outer periphery. 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for mounting the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. and a mounting member 163 .

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of flat mounting pieces 161a extending outward from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. and a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. A mounting piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can come into contact with a projecting portion 163 b of a glass unit mounting member 163 . The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space therebetween (see FIG. 97).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base portion 163a mounted rotatably about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-like member protruding from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. and a projecting portion 163b. The glass unit mounting members 163 are rotatably mounted outside the two upper corners among the four corners of the door window 101 a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101 .

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Then, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101 . After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the projecting portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101 .

When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the procedure can be reversed. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is regulated by the projecting portion 163b when the projecting portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the projecting portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally removed from the door frame base 101 .

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The crime prevention cover 170 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat plate-like rear projecting piece 172 projecting short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171, and is spaced apart from the left and right. and a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101 .

A main body portion 171 of the crime prevention cover 170 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward beyond the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100 . Further, the upper end of the body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1 . More specifically, the upper end of the body portion 171 is shaped along a portion of an inner rail 1002, an out guide portion 1003, a portion of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 171 . Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed into a shallow box-like shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171 . A rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 is formed along a portion of the outer rail 1001 of the front structural member 1000 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. ing.

In addition, the rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion positioned between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B shot by the ball shooting device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area is It does not hinder the hitting of the game ball B into 5a.

A pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100 .

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the part protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projecting piece 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front structural member 1000 . In addition, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front structural member 1000 . . As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38(b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by the player to hit the game ball B in the upper tray 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a thing.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, a handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and a handle 182 covering the front end side of the handle 182. A disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181, a handle decoration substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the handle decoration substrate 184 and a handle cover 185 attached to the cover base 183 .

The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and the handle 182 attached to the front end of the handle unit 180. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. and a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186 .

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to the initial rotation position (counterclockwise rotation end when viewed from the front). A biasing handle return spring 190, one end of which is attached to an inner base 186 and the other end of which is attached to a transmission gear 188, rotates a detection shaft 189a of a handle rotation detection sensor 189 clockwise when viewed from the front. and an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button 193 attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. and an operation sensor 194 .

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base portion 181a extending back and forth, a disc-shaped front end portion 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base portion 181a, and recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 181a. and three groove portions 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. A base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102 . Also, the three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, and the ridges 102c are positioned in the three grooves 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 becomes non-rotatable relative to the handle attachment member 102 .

The handle 182 has four first projections 182a, a second projection 182b, a third projection 182c, and a fourth projection 182d which protrude outwardly away from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotating shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape from the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center from the slit 182e. and a locking protrusion 182f.

The four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d are provided in order in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a protrudes outward from the portion protruding most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. The side surface in the direction of is recessed (gouged out) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second projection 182b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the first projection 182a that protrudes most in the clockwise direction at a rotational angle of about 85 degrees, and is further rotated than the first projection 182a. protrudes slightly lower. The second projection 182b protrudes so that the clockwise side surface in the front view of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the counterclockwise side surface, which is the opposite side, curves inward. and is formed in a shape similar to that of the first projection 182a.

The portion of the third protrusion 182c that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the second protrusion 182b that protrudes most in the clockwise direction at a rotational angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It protrudes at about half the height. Both side surfaces of the third projection 182c are inclined substantially linearly, and the clockwise side surface is inclined more gently than the opposite counterclockwise side surface. The portion of the fourth projection 182d that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the third projection 182c that protrudes most in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and is further rotated than the first projection 182a. It also protrudes slightly higher. Both sides of the fourth projection 182d are inclined substantially linearly, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle shape.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disc shape and has three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through slits 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within an angle of rotation of approximately 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 bulges forward and is translucent. The handle cover 185 is internally provided with a lens member that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The steering wheel cover 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LED on the front surface of the steering wheel decoration substrate 184 .

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. As shown in FIG. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is slanted so that the right end side is positioned more rearward than the left end side in a plan view, and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the hole is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the rotation operation without any sense of incongruity.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. - 特許庁

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the player and detects the static electricity acting on the player's handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is fired with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the shooting solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 in a manner different from the original to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

Also, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the ejection control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation of the single shot button 193. Firing solenoid 542 is de-energized. As a result, the shooting of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 182, and by canceling the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, the single-shot button 193 can be operated before the operation. The game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a again with the hitting strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 has four first projections 182a, a second projection 182b, a third projection 182c, and a fourth projection 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 can be rotated most clockwise when viewed from the front. so that the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right hit"), the fourth projection 182d is the first projection 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, the player can comfortably maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position by switching the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a. To reduce the player's feeling of fatigue and suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the tray unit viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into the main members and viewed from the rear. The plate unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 includes an upper plate 201 for storing game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and the upper plate 201 arranged below the upper plate 201 and game balls supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. and a lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower tray 202 attached to the front surface of the tray base unit 210. and a performance operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-like dish unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper dish body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and having the upper dish 201 , and a right side of the upper dish body 212 . A mounting base 213 that is attached to and protrudes forward, a plate unit relay board 214 that is attached to the right of the mounting base 213, a ball rental operation unit 220 that is attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, It has an upper tray before ball removal unit 230 attached below the mounting base 213 and an upper tray after ball removal unit 240 attached behind the upper tray before ball removal unit 230. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower part of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish main body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. a lower plate ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251; a plate upper left decoration unit 270 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit main body 252 with a space left and right; A plate upper right decoration unit 275 and a plate lower left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 are provided.

The performance operation unit 300 includes, as a performance operation unit 301 operable by the player, a rotary operation unit 302 rotatable by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 operable by the player. The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed in the performance operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 mounted on the upper surface. An annular performance operation ring 330 having a rotation operation portion 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation portion 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation portion 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 rotatably mounting the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decoration board 352 that lights up the effect operation ring 330, the decoration board cover 353 that covers the upper side of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the lower surface of the operation part base 320. an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation part base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330; and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320. and have.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the production operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the production operation unit 301 at the center in the left-right direction faces diagonally upward and forward, and the left side of the production operation unit 300 on the upper surface. An upper tray 201 is arranged on the right side of the performance operation unit 300, and a ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged, and a lower tray 202 is arranged on the left side of the production operation unit 300 under the upper tray 201. - 特許庁

[3-5-1. Fine plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is shaped like a container that bulges forward from the left-right center in a front view and opens upward. The upper tray 201 (upper tray main body 212) bulges most forward at about ⅓ of the width of the door frame 3 in the horizontal direction from the left end to the right. The upper plate 201 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes to the right in front view from the most bulging part, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ). The entire bottom surface of the upper tray 201 including the guiding passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the right end side of the guiding passage portion 201a in front view is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.例文帳に追加

When the upper tray 201 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper tray 201 is positioned below the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211, and the game balls touch the upper end of the upper tray ball supply port 211e. It inclines so that it may become low toward the position of a little lower side than the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper tray 201, and the received game ball B can be discharged from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper tray ball feeding port 211e.

In addition, the guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B contacts (rolls), the game ball Static electricity charged on B can be removed.

[3-5-2. lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower tray 202 is arranged below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. - 特許庁The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing the game balls B, and has a lower tray ball extraction hole 202a through which the game balls B can be discharged through the bottom wall in the vertical direction. A lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is closed by a lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in a plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically, which is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom plate 202 is inclined so that its bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is positioned below the production operation unit 300 in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c in the assembled state of the tray unit 200. - 特許庁

The lower tray 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a can be opened. The stored game balls B can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, when the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is open, since the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, the ball is moved forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c. The discharged game ball B can be rapidly discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5-3. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a front perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit, and FIG. 44 is a rear perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached on the front surface.

The dish base unit 210 includes a flat plate-like dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 mounted on the right side of the upper plate main body 212 on the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and protruding forward, and a mounting base 213 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213 on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. and a plate unit relay board 214 .

The plate base unit 210 includes a ball rental operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, and an upper plate ball extraction unit 230 attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. , and an upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear side of the tray unit base 211 behind the upper tray ball removal front unit 230. - 特許庁

[3-5-3a. Plate unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends laterally across the entire width of the door frame base 101. box).

The plate unit base 211 has an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view and extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear, and an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the front and rear direction below the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached on the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape at a lower portion on the left side of the left-right center in front view, and a lower plate. A notch portion 211d cut in the right side wall of the portion extending cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c to a size through which the game ball B can pass, and a front view upper right side of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. an upper tray ball feeding port 211e extending vertically and having an upper portion located at the right end of the upper tray main body 212. - 特許庁

The plate unit base 211 has a mounting projection 211f on which the mounting base is placed, which projects forward on the right side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, and an upper plate portion 211f on the left side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. A slider insertion opening 211g through which an operation transmission part 242b of an upper tray ball removal slider 242 in the upper tray ball removal unit 240 is inserted is passed through the lower part of the plate body in the front-rear direction, and a front-view lower right corner penetrates the plate body in the front-rear direction. A handle insertion opening 211h through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion opening 211h that penetrates in the front-rear direction near the right corner in front view and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted. and a mouth 211i.

The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 has its front end opened in the rear wall of the upper tray 201 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and its cylindrical rear end through which the upper tray balls of the door frame base 101 pass. The opening 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

The lower tray ball supply port 211c has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower tray 202 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a cylindrical rear end that passes through the lower tray ball passage opening 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and connects with the front end of the ball outlet 150 d of the foul cover unit 150 . As a result, the game balls B flowing through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. A notch portion 211d formed in a cylindrically extending portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is connected to the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are released by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222, the upper tray ball feed port 211e, the entrance port 141a and the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feed unit 140, and the upper tray ball feed port 211e. The ball is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 after tray ball removal, and the notch 211d.

The upper tray ball feeding opening 211e is positioned in front of the ball receiving opening 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240 in the state assembled to the tray base unit 210, and the game balls in the upper tray 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5-3b. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 . The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and bulges forward to a greater extent on the left side than the center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The front end of the upper plate body 212 recedes rearward as it goes rightward in front view from the most forwardly bulging portion, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The top plate main body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

The upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion near the right end, whose upper part is closed, slips under the ball lending operation unit 220 when assembled to the plate unit 200 . In addition, the upper plate main body 212 is formed with an effect operation unit attachment portion 212a in the middle portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5-3c. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the plate unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in the shape of a shallow box with an open top. The mounting base 213 has an insertion hole 213a vertically penetrating near the left end, and a through hole 213b vertically penetrating at the right corner of the rear end.

The insertion opening 213a of the mounting base 213 is through which the front slider 232 of the upper tray ball removal front unit 230 is inserted. A wiring cable for connecting the ball rental operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through hole 213b.

[3-5-3d. Plate unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 includes the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the plate upper left decorative board 273, the plate upper right decorative board 278, the plate lower left decorative board 283, and the plate lower right decorative board 288. , and the operation unit relay board 392 . The plate unit relay board 214 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f. The rear surface of the plate unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211 when attached to the plate unit base 211 .

[3-5-3e. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball rental operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 via the attachment base 213 . This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and cashes a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B are lent to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed, and the ball lending machine This is for returning the cash or prepaid card put into the machine after deducting the amount of the rented game ball B.例文帳に追加

The ball rental operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 attached to the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper tray ball ejection button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper tray ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A translucent disk-shaped ball rental operation base 223 arranged on the right side of the withdrawal button 222, a ball rental button 224 arranged on the front left side of the ball rental operation base 223, and a ball rental operation. A return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display section (not shown) arranged on the lower rear portion of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

The upper tray ball ejection button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball rental display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball rental operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball ejection button 222 . When the ball lending button 224 is pressed after cash or a prepaid card with a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201 . When a return button 225 is pressed, the rented game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card put into the ball lending machine and returned. The remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed on the ball lending display section. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display section when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5-3f. Unit before upper tray ball removal and unit after upper tray ball removal]
The unit 230 before ball removal and the unit 240 after ball removal of the upper plate in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper tray ball before unit 230 and the upper tray after ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper tray 201 when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. It is for discharging the game balls B stored inside to the lower tray 202 .

The upper tray ball extraction front unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the tray unit base 211 . The upper bowl post-ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion behind the upper bowl ball removal pre-unit 230 on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 .

The upper tray ball removal front unit 230 includes a cylindrical front base 231 attached to the front surface of the tray unit base 211 and extending vertically, and a front base 231 inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be vertically movable. and a slider 232 . The front base 231 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 near the front of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, and its upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper tray ball removal button 222, and its lower end is the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240. It abuts on the top surface.

The upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. an upper tray ball removal slider 242 slidably attached to the top, a spring 243 urging the upper tray ball removal slider 242 upward, a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241, It has

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward, and has a ball receiving opening 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving opening 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b for guiding the accepted game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guiding it backward, and a game from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241. A ball extraction guideway 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in the rear view is provided.

The ball receiving port 241a is installed in the plate base unit 210 and extends forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guiding passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an open position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entry port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is positioned at the rear of the lower portion in the assembled state of the door frame 3. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The laterally extending portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c protrudes to the right in rear view from the portion where the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. It has an opening on the right side in rear view. A rear cover 244 closes the rear side of the portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c extending to the left and right. The upper portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c that extends vertically below the ball feeding guideway 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 when assembled to the door frame 3. At the same time, the right end of the laterally extending portion as viewed from the rear is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211 . As a result, the game ball B ejected from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is ejected into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply opening 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper bowl ball removal slider 242 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an operation receiving portion 242a projecting forward from the upper left corner and a rear surface, which is the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a, projecting rearward. and an operation transmission portion 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b has an upper surface that is inclined downward toward the rear, and a lower surface that extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving section 242a protrudes forward through the slider insertion opening 211g of the tray unit base 211 from the rear side. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper tray ball extraction front unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the . When the upper tray ball extracting slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmission part 242b protrudes rearward from the rear base 241, and the operation of the ball extracting member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided on the upper surface. The rod 143c abuts.

The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper disk ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper disk ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring 243 and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring 243 .

In the upper bowl ball extraction front unit 230 and the upper bowl ball extraction unit 240, the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is moved upward. The front slider 232 abuts on the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a, and the upper tray ball ejection button 222 is positioned at the upper movement end. In addition, since the urging force of the spring 243 positions the upper disk ball removal slider 242 at the upper movement end, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. A partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b to separate the two.

Therefore, when the upper tray ball ejection button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection opening 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and the ball is fed from the upper tray 201 to the ball receiving opening 241a. The game ball B can be sent to the ball launching device 540 side from the hitting ball supply port 142a via the entrance port 141a and the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring 243, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is operated. The actuating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143, which is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b, can move downward, and the ball removing member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removing member 143, and the partition portion 143a. retreats from between the entry port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entry port 141a through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feed guide path 241b from the upper tray 201 is discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b that opens below the entry port 141a. It will be done. Then, the game ball B ejected forward from the ball extraction port 141b passes through the ball extraction guide path 241c and is guided into the lower dish ball supply port 211c from the notch 211d. The game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the tray 202 and discharged into the lower tray 202 .

When the downward pressure on the upper tray ball removal button 222 is released, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is moved through the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball removal button 222 rises, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operation rod 143c in contact with the operation transmission part 242b, and the partition part 143a is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to its original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 before the upper tray ball is removed and the unit 240 after the upper tray ball is removed. It can be discharged to the lower tray 202 side.

[3-5-4. Plate decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. 47 is a front perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit, and FIG. 48 is a rear perspective view of the dish decoration unit. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the production operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the horizontal direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire plate unit 200. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 includes a lower dish main body 251 attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and forming the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, and a dish unit base covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. 211, a lower tray ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower tray body 251, and the trays attached to the upper front surface of the tray unit body 252 with a space left and right. An upper left decorative unit 270 and a right upper plate decorative unit 275, and a lower left plate decorative unit 280 and a lower right plate decorative unit attached below the upper left plate decorative unit 270 and upper right plate decorative unit 275 on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252. 285 and .

[3-5-4a. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 . The lower plate main body 251 extends left and right and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that is open at the top and rear. The lower tray main body 251 is attached to the lower front portion of the tray unit base 211 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. In the lower plate main body 251, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is formed in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower tray body 251 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by a lower tray ball removal lid 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

When the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250 , the outer periphery and part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252 . In addition, the bottom surface of the lower tray main body is located below the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211 when assembled with the tray unit 200. 211c. As a result, the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5-4b. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200 . The plate unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. The top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The plate unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward.

The plate unit main body 252 has upper side protrusions 252a which bulge forward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the top and extend downward and are spaced apart from the left and right at the bottom. has a lower front decorative portion 252b protruding forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251, and a bottom plate portion 252c extending rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. .

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box-like shape with an open rear, and are provided on the front surfaces of the left and right plate decoration units 270, 280, 275, and 275, respectively. 285 is attached. The left upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b at the right end of the lower surface. In addition, the right upper side swelling portion 252a is connected at its lower end to the lower front decoration portion 252b.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side swelling portion 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulge 252a.

In addition, the plate unit main body 252 includes a front notch portion 252e cut upward from the front lower end of the portion covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decoration portion 252b, and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. and a bottom cutout portion 252f that is cut at a portion below the . A lower tray ball removal unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the plate unit main body 252 has a handle insertion opening 252g that penetrates the bottom right corner of the front decoration part 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylindrical part 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion opening 252g. The effect operation unit is formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are central in the left-right direction. A production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled with the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . In addition, when the plate decoration unit 250 is assembled, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is positioned. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed so that the bottom surfaces are flush with each other.

[3-5-4c. Lower tray ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removal unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower tray ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower tray main body 251, and by opening and closing the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a, the game ball B is stored in the lower tray 202 and the game ball B is discharged from the lower tray 202. It is intended for

The lower pan ball extractor unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower pan main body 251 and includes a flat plate-like lower pan ball extractor base 261 having a through hole penetrating vertically at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower pan ball extractor base 261 . A slider 262 attached to the upper surface of the base 261 so as to be slidable forward and backward, a lower dish ball release button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, a spring 264 biasing the slider 262 forward, A lower tray ball removal cover 265 that opens and closes the through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower tray ball removal cover 265 in an open state via the slider 262 are provided.

The lower tray ball extraction base 261 is formed in a size to close the bottom notch 252f of the tray unit main body 252, and is vertically aligned with the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 (lower tray main body 251). A penetrating through hole is formed. The through hole of the lower tray ball extraction base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to a portion of the lower dish ball removal base 261 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. The slider 262 has a projecting pin projecting upward in a cylindrical shape.

The lower tray ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower tray ball removal base 261 so as to be rotatable about a vertically extending axis at a position to the left of the slider 262 on the left end side, and is attached to the slider 262 on the right end side. , and the right end side is formed so as to be able to close the through hole. The lower disk ball removal lid 265 is formed with a laterally extending slit into which the projecting pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

When the lower tray ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower tray ball removal base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower tray ball removal base 261 is closed. It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower tray ball release button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the tray unit main body 252. As shown in FIG. In the normal state, the slider 262 is positioned at the front moving end by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the right end of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is positioned directly above the through hole. and closes the through hole (lower tray ball extraction hole 202a).

In this normal state, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball extraction lid 265, and the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加In addition, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower tray ball release button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b.

In a normal state, when the lower tray ball ejection button 263 is pushed backward to move backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower tray ball ejection button 263. becomes. As the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower disk ball removal cover 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower disk ball removal cover 265 moves rearward on the right side with the left side as the center. It rotates in the moving direction. Then, the right end side of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 positioned directly above the through hole moves rearward from the position of the through hole, thereby opening the through hole and opening the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. The game ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged downward from the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower tray ball eject button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower tray ball eject button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264 . As a result, the right end side of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 remains rotated backward, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is maintained in an open state, and the game ball B in the lower tray 202 is continuously released. It can be discharged downward.

In order to close the lower tray ball removal hole 202a from this state, the lower tray ball removal button 263, which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, is pushed backward, and the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. be. Then, when the pressure on the lower tray ball ejection button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower tray ball ejection button 263 returns to the state in which it is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is rotated so that the right end side is positioned directly above the through hole, and the lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by the lower tray ball removal lid 265 . Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[3-5-4d. Plate upper left decorative unit and plate upper right decorative unit]
The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252 a of the plate unit main body 252 . The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper part of the plate unit 200 .

The upper left dish decoration unit 270 includes a semi-cylindrical upper left dish decoration body 271 extending in the left and right direction and having translucency, an upper left dish reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the upper left dish decoration body 271, A plate upper left decorative substrate 273 attached to the rear side of the plate upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is provided.

The upper left decorative body 271 of the dish extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side swelling portion 252a. The upper left ornamental body 271 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending diagonally to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. The plate upper left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

The upper left plate reflector 272 is inserted into the upper left plate decoration body 271 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 . A plurality of LEDs mounted on the top left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the top left decorative body 271 of the plate can be decorated with light.

The left end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is continuous with Since the upper left plate decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the upper left plate decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the upper left plate decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate upper right decorative unit 275 includes a plate upper right decorative body 276 which is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, a plate upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the plate upper right decorative body 276, A plate upper right decorative substrate 278 is attached to the rear side of the plate upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The upper right ornamental body 276 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending obliquely to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. This plate upper right decoration 276 is formed in milky white.

The plate top right reflector 277 is inserted into the plate top right decoration 276 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate top right decoration substrate 278 corresponding to the LED. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper right decoration substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper right decoration body 276 can be decorated with light emission.

The right end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is continuous with Since the upper right plate decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the upper right plate decoration 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper right plate decoration substrate 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the upper right plate decoration 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-4e. Plate lower left decorative unit and plate lower right decorative unit]
The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252a of the plate unit body 252 so as to extend along the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively. be done. The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

The lower left plate decoration unit 280 includes a lower left plate decoration body 281 which is semicylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, a lower left plate reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left plate decoration body 281, A lower left plate decorative substrate 283 is attached to the rear side of the lower left plate reflector 282 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate lower left decorative body 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape centered rearward in a plan view. is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. The lower left plate decoration 281 is a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276. The shaft extends left and right, and is shaped like a bent semi-cylinder. The left end of the plate lower left decoration 281 is formed in a spherical shape. The lower left ornamental body 281 of the plate has a semicircular curvature that changes so as to become thinner toward the left end side. This plate lower left decorative body 281 is formed in milky white.

The lower left plate reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left plate decoration body 281 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the lower left plate decoration substrate 283 . A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower left decorative substrate 283 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate lower left decorative body 281 can be decorated with light emission.

The left end of the plate lower decoration unit 280 is positioned below the left end of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is located below the lower plate center decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. Contiguous with the left edge. Since the left end of the plate lower left decorative body 281 of the plate lower left decorative unit 280 is formed in a spherical shape, the left end looks as if it is hidden inside the door frame 3 . Since the lower left plate decoration unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the lower left plate decoration 281, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower left plate decoration substrate 283 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the lower left plate decoration 281 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate lower right decoration unit 285 includes a plate lower right decoration body 286 which is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, and a plate lower right decoration body 286 attached to the rear side of the plate lower right decoration body 286. A reflector 287 and a plate lower right decorative substrate 288 attached to the rear side of the plate lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

The plate lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a rearward center in a plan view, It is attached to the lower portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The lower right plate decoration 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276. The central axis extends to the left and right, and is shaped like a bent semi-cylinder. The right end of the plate lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape. The dish lower right ornament 286 has a semicircular curvature that changes so as to become thinner toward the right end side. This plate lower right decoration 286 is formed in milky white.

The plate lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the plate lower right decorative body 286 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate lower right decorative substrate 288 corresponding to the LED. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate lower right decoration body 286 can be decorated with light emission.

The right end of the plate lower right decorative unit 285 is located below the right end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is contiguous with the right edge of Since the right end of the plate lower right decorative body 286 of the plate lower right decorative unit 285 is formed in a spherical shape, the right end appears to be hidden inside the door frame 3 . The lower right plate decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the lower right plate decoration body 286. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower right plate decoration substrate 288 are caused to emit light, the lower right plate decoration body 286 The entire front surface of the display can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, making it look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-5. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as seen from the forward/backward direction of the effect operation button. FIG. 52(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 52(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. The performance operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the horizontal direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the performance when the player participation type performance is executed. It is possible. The performance operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250. - 特許庁

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation part 301, the rotation operation part 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation part 303 is arranged in the ring. . The pressing operation part 303 is arranged at the center of the rotating operation part 302, and has a central pressing operation part 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotating operation part 302. It is composed of an annular outer peripheral pressing portion 303b disposed between the inner peripheral portion and the inner peripheral portion.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed in the performance operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 mounted on the upper surface. An annular production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation part 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation part 302 of the production operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 for transmitting rotation to and from the portion 302 , and a gear mounting member 351 for rotatably mounting the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation portion base 320 .

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 includes a effect operation ring decoration board 352 attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and a effect operation ring decoration board 352. A decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit base 320, a vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330. A performance operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320 are provided.

[3-5-5a. Production control unit cover unit]
The effect operation section cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction. The effect operation section cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top and rear.

The effect operation section cover unit 310 includes a downwardly recessed hemispherical unit lower cover 311, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulging forward, and a unit front cover. A plate center upper reflector 313 attached from behind in the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a plurality of LEDs attached to the plate center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. a plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a plate center lower reflector 315 attached from the rear in a plate center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312, and a plate center lower reflector 315 attached to the plate center lower reflector 315 to direct light forward. and a plate center lower decorative substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical surface bulging downward on the front side from the center rear side in the front-rear direction, and the effect operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252 on the rear side thereof. 252i so as to be mounted from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in a slanted state so that the axis perpendicular to the imaginary plane formed on the upper edge extending in a semi-circular shape of the front portion is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 is formed with a plurality of drain holes 311a at the lowest portion when assembled to the dish unit 200. As shown in FIG.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 when viewed from above. installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a plate center upper decoration 312a in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semicircular shape, and a plate center upper decoration 312a that extends forward below the plate center upper decoration 312a. A dish center lower decorative body 312b is provided, the protruding semicircular arc extending in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. - 特許庁The unit front cover 312 is attached to the unit lower cover 311 at the lower end of the plate center lower decorative body 312b.

The upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 divide a cylinder of approximately the same thickness (radius) into halves, and extend in a semicircular shape with the divided surfaces facing the center. It is formed in a bent shape. The lower plate center decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the upper plate center decoration 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b is slightly thinner than the upper plate center decoration 312a. is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the front end of the upper plate center decoration 312a protrudes forward from the front end of the lower plate center decoration 312b. When the plate unit 200 is assembled, the left and right ends of the upper plate center decoration 312a are connected to the right ends of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the left ends of the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively, and the lower plate center decorations. The left and right ends of 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the left end of the lower right plate decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 is translucent and milky white.

Further, the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the front end of the door frame 3 when assembled to the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame The distance is about 1/2 of the full width of the base 101 in the horizontal direction.

The plate center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from behind. The plate center upper reflector 313 blocks the light from the LEDs mounted on the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking backward (inward). The upper plate center decoration substrate 314 is formed in a semicircular shape along the upper plate center decoration body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. A plurality of LEDs of the upper plate center decoration substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate center upper decoration body 312a can be decorated with light.

The lower plate center reflector 315 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is attached by being inserted into the lower plate center decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from behind. The plate center lower reflector 315 blocks the light from the LEDs mounted on the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 from leaking backward (inward). The lower plate center decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the lower plate center decoration body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. A plurality of LEDs of the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate center lower decoration body 312b can be decorated with light.

The production operation section cover unit 310 does not have reinforcing ribs in the middle of the plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 extending in a semicircular shape. When the LEDs of the upper center decoration substrate 314 and the LEDs of the lower dish center decoration substrate 316 emit light, the whole of each can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, making it look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The performance operation part cover unit 310 has a front end projecting farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200.例文帳に追加In addition, in the production operation section cover unit 310, the upper plate center decoration 312a is continuous with the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276, and the lower plate center decoration 312b is connected with the lower left plate decoration 281 and the right plate decoration. It is continuous with the lower decoration body 286 . As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous, and the integral decoration improves the appearance.

[3-5-5b. Operation unit base]
The operation section base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation part base 320 is inserted into the effect operation part cover unit 310 from above, and the lower end is attached to the effect operation part cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect operation unit of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to portion 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape with an open top.

The operation unit base 320 includes a body portion 321 that is formed in a substantially cubic box shape and has an open top, and a body portion 321 that extends outward from the upper end of the body portion 321 and has a circular outer periphery. a plurality of (here, four) leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321; and a gear bearing portion 325 that penetrates the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and opens upward to support the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a rotatable manner.

The operation part base 320 is formed such that the main body part 321 is sized to accommodate the production operation button unit 360 therein. The main body part 321 has a bottom wall to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached from below, and a portion of the bottom surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed to be flat. The bottom wall of the main body part 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibrations from the vibration speaker 354, so that the vibrations can be amplified, and the vibrations can be converted into sounds such as voice and music and output. can.

A leg portion 361 b of a button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 . Further, the body portion 321 has a through-hole formed in the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the body portion 321 . The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the body part 321, and the operating part relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The flange portion 322 has a diameter that substantially coincides with the inner circumference of the plate center upper decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 . An effect operation ring decoration board 352 and a decoration board cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and a ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation section cover unit 310 .

The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear mounting member to mount the transmission gear for the operation ring so as to be rotatable about an axis extending left and right. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the driving side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is positioned at the flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

When the operation part base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300 , the upper surface of the flange part 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the upper plate center decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 . In addition, in the state where the effect operation unit 300 is assembled, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body portion 321 in contact therewith.

[3-5-5c. Production control ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56 and the like. FIG. 55(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as seen from above, and FIG. 55(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as seen from below. FIG. 56(a) is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation ring viewed from above, and FIG. 56(b) is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation ring viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The effect operation ring 330 (rotational operation portion 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) approximately twice the size of the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and an inner diameter approximately 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the effect operation ring 330 has an outer diameter of approximately 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushings 333 are attached to the ring mounting base 331 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the ring mounting base 332, and are mounted on the ring mounting base 331 to prevent upward movement of the rotation base 332. and a regulating ring retaining member 334 .

In addition, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and attached to the ring outer upper cover 335 which constitutes a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 and a ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side of the ring outer cover 336 forming a part of the rotation operation part 302 and form a part of the rotation operation part 302. and a ring inner cover 337 that is in the ring. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a translucent annular shape.

The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320 and an inner diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the flange portion 322 . The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is mounted so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. A boss portion 331b for rotatably mounting the bushing 333 and a boss portion 331b for rotatably mounting the bushing 333 projecting upward from a plurality of (here, four) portions, and a space in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. and through-holes 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of sites. A plurality of through holes 331 c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 .

The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331 . The rotation base 332 has a ring gear 332a projecting downward from the bottom surface and extending in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward toward the center of the rotation base 332 . The ring gear 332 a has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331 , and faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331 when assembled to the effect operation ring 330 . The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring in a state assembled with the effect operation unit 300. As shown in FIG.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on an outer upper surface portion 335a in which an arc forming the outer and upper portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of outer upper surface portions 335a are arranged in the circumferential direction. and a plurality of outer cover attachment portions 335c extending downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extending toward the center side and arranged in the circumferential direction. there is An outer upper surface portion 335a of the upper outer ring cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc of a quarter of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The upper outer cover mounting portion 335 c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the upper outer surface portion 335 a and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 .

The ring outer and lower cover 336 has an outer and lower surface portion 336a in which an arc forming the outer and lower portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward and toward the center from the inner side of the outer and lower surface portion 336a. A plurality of outer and lower cover attachment portions 336b are provided. A lower outer surface portion 336a of the outer lower ring cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of ⅛ of a circle is annular. The lower outer cover attachment portion 336b is attached to the upper outer cover 335 of the ring.

The ring inner cover 337 has an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc forming the inside and upper portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder extending downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a parallel to the central axis. and a plurality of inner cover mounting portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. An inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of ⅛ of a circle is annular. The cylinder surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter equal to the inner diameter of the rotation base 332 . The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332. As shown in FIG.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a constitute a portion of a range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole is donut-shaped. The effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. - 特許庁

[3-5-5d. Rotation drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57(a) is a front perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the rotary drive unit. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation drive unit viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation drive unit viewed from the front left. The rotary drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and for detecting the rotary operation of the rotary operation portion 302 . The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 .

The rotary drive unit 340 includes a rotary drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side surface of the rotary drive base 341 so that the rotary shaft protrudes leftward. , a drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of an operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. 345, and a gear cover that rotatably mounts the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 to the rotary drive base and covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. 346 and .

The rotation drive unit 340 also includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 that are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. and a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is open leftward. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The driving gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates together with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. there is A second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with a gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 .

The transmission detection gear member 345 includes a gear portion 345a having a diameter larger than that of the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) and a left side surface of the gear portion 345a. and a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive-side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval at which they are separated in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345 b are detected by a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 .

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345 b of the transmission detection gear member 345 . The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart in the circumferential direction by an interval different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one detects the detection piece 345b first. It's like As a result, the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotation operation portion 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345 .

When the rotary drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the driving side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. engage with. In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 is entirely located inside the effect operation section cover unit 310 in a state where it is assembled to the effect operation unit 300 .

The rotation drive unit 340 is driven by an operation ring drive motor 342 to arbitrarily rotate the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via a drive gear 343, a transmission gear 344, a transmission detection gear member 345, and an operation ring transmission gear. can be rotated in the direction of In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 causes the drive gear 343 to repeat forward and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342, thereby reciprocatingly rotating and vibrating the rotary operation section 302. can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the player rotates the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, it is possible to change the contents of the player participation type presentation according to the direction of rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 .

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation part 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotational direction of the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the rotation operation of the player can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation of the rotation operation section 302, it is possible to apply a load to the player's rotation operation. Therefore, by appropriately combining these elements, it is possible to provide the rotary operation unit 302 with an operation feeling corresponding to the content of the player-participation type presentation or a click feeling.

[3-5-5e. Operation ring transmission gear]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation portion base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325 .

The operation ring transmission gear 350 includes a bevel gear-shaped ring side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the ring side gear portion 350a that rotates integrally with the ring side gear portion 350a to detect the transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. A spur-gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345 is provided. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the driving-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles with the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350 a narrows in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 .

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation portion base 320 so that its rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330 . The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320 by inserting it from above into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320 and then attaching the gear mounting member 351 to the operation portion base 320 . be done.

The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, and the ring side gear portion 350a is meshed with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b is engaged with the ring gear 332a. It meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotary drive unit 340 . Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and rotate the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5-5f. Production operation ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and can light-embellish the effect operation ring 330 (rotational operation unit 302) by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is formed in a shape in which a ring is divided into front and rear parts, and is composed of a front decoration board 352a on the front side and a rear decoration board 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged along the outer periphery of each of the upper surfaces of the front decoration substrate 352a and the rear decoration substrate 352b. A plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are full-color LEDs.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is positioned below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300 . The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is covered with a transparent decoration board cover 353 on the upper side. The decoration board cover 353 is formed in a form divided into the front and rear sides, similarly to the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and covers the front decoration board 352a from above and is attached to the flange part 322 of the operation part base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b attached to the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320 to cover the rear decoration substrate 352b from above.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, so that the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring mounting base 331 are passed through the ring outer side of the rotary operation unit 302. The cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be decorated with light from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to present the player with a light-emitting decoration such that an LED is provided in the rotary operation unit 302 .

[3-5-5g. vibration speaker]
Vibration speaker 354 in production operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and is capable of outputting vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output sounds such as voice, sound effects, and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Also, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire production operation unit 300 via the operation section base 320 . At this time, the player feels as if the effect operation unit 300 has shaken. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies compared to a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present more diverse effects to the player.

The purpose of the vibration speaker 354 is to give sound information to vibrate the effect operation unit 301, and to give sound information so that vibration is obtained by resonance. Here, in order to resonate, it depends on the characteristics of the vibration speaker 354 attached to the game machine, the material and hardness of the member to which the vibration speaker is attached, and the method of attachment. If this is the case, there are cases where vibration cannot be obtained due to non-resonance due to variations in characteristics. In this embodiment, in order to absorb the variations in these characteristics, the frequency of the sound information to be input is not a single frequency, but is input as a range of frequencies. Specifically, a sine wave of 40 Hz±2 Hz, 38 Hz to 42 Hz is changed (swept) 8 times in about 1 second for each period of 1 Hz. This is repeated intermittently by sweeping input for 1 second and then inputting again after 1 second.

In the assembly work of the game machine, for the inspection (operation check) of the vibration speaker at the time of shipment, the RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game is operated. It is designed to be done based on Specifically, when the inspector operates the RAM clear switch within a predetermined period when the gaming machine is powered on (or when the gaming machine is powered on while the inspector has operated the RAM clear switch), the main control board 1310 transmits (outputs) a command to clear and initialize the RAM to the peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500, which will be described later. When the peripheral control board receives this command, it performs vibration speaker operation confirmation processing for inspecting the vibration speaker (operation confirmation). Through this vibration speaker operation confirmation process, the inspector can confirm not only the sound (sound) such as voice or music from the vibration speaker 354, but also the vibration of the effect operation unit 300 from the vibration speaker 354. .

[3-5-5h. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit, viewed from above, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit, viewed from below. FIG. 62(a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is at the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is at the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation part base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation part 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation portion 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical central pressing operation portion 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing portion 303b formed so as to cover the outer circumference of the central pressing operation portion 303a. ing.

The performance operation button unit 360 is arranged symmetrically with respect to the button unit base 361 attached inside the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a columnar shape connects the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 to each other. Upper base 363 , and between upper base 363 and button unit base 361 , are attached so as to be vertically movable by means of a pair of guide shafts 362 . and a pair of lifting springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively inserted and biasing the lifting base 364 upward.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 extending upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a cylindrical shape, the upper end of which is attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation axis on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. An operation button lifting drive motor 367 attached to protrude upward, a spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 attached to the rotary shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and the lifting drive gear 368 are engaged with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevation cam drive gear member rotated by the driven gear 369 and rotatably mounted through the central shaft 366. 370, an elevation cam member 371, which is connected to the elevation cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end and rotatably mounted through a central shaft 366, and rotates to raise and lower the elevation base 364; 368, a driven gear 369, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevation cam driving gear member 370 from above.

Furthermore, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom extending vertically with an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base, and is mounted above the elevation base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button body 373 and the lift base 364 and biasing the central button body 373 upward; A central button cover 375 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom and closed at the upper end side, and is attached to the upper end of the central button main body 373 so as to cover the upper side of the upper base 363 . and a center button decoration substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted that are capable of emitting light upward. In the effect operation button unit 360, a central button main body 373 and a central button cover 375 constitute a central pressing operation portion 303a.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the center button main body 373 on the upper surface of the lifting base 364. An outer peripheral substrate cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration substrate 377 and the outer periphery of the central button body 373; A translucent cylindrical perimeter decorative lens 379 that is arranged above the perimeter button decoration substrate 377 on the outer perimeter side and that is three-dimensionally decorated, and lifts up and down so as to cover the outer periphery and upper surface of the perimeter decorative lens 379. and a transparent outer perimeter button cover 380 attached to the base 364 and having a center button cover 375 facing upward at the center. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute the outer peripheral press operating portion 303b.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 includes a pressing detection sensor 381 attached to the button unit base 361 for detecting pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303, and a lifting cam drive gear member 370 attached to the button unit base 361. and an elevation detection sensor 382 that detects elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

The button unit base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a and a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. A base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 . The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevation cam driving gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to its upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevation detection sensor 382 attached to its lower surface. is attached. The button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 at the lower end of the leg portion 361b.

A pair of guide shafts 362 are mounted on the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 at positions half the diameter of the base body 361a forward and rearward from the center. A pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods. A pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366 .

The upper base 363 is formed to have an outer diameter approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 . The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and have their lower ends in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 and their upper ends in contact with the elevating base 364 . The lifting spring 365 is a spring having a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374 .

The elevating base 364 is formed to have substantially the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 . The elevating base 364 has a pair of guide holes 364a into which the pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, a central hole 364b having a size through which the elevating cam member 371 can pass, A vertical wall portion 364c projecting upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting into the central hole 364b so as to face each other in the vicinity of the lower end of the vertical wall portion 364c. there is The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are mounted rotatably around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be vertically movable by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The lifting base 364 is restricted from moving upward by contacting the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c with the upper base 363, and a space is provided between the upper base 363 and the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 to move. forming. Also, the elevation base 364 is vertically moved by a pair of guide pins 364 d being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the elevation cam member 371 .

The elevation cam driving gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevation cam member 371, and the gear portion 370a. and an elevation detection piece 370c that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape from the top and is notched at two locations facing each other and is detected by the elevation detection sensor 382. The elevation cam driving gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevation cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevating cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer peripheral surface and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guides the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364. As shown in FIG.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. a second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis; a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d; (see Figure 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the distance between the adjacent cam portions 371a is smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364.

Further, the lift cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f that connects with the connecting portion 370b of the lift cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end.

The elevation cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. is formed as By rotating the elevation cam member 371, the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 can be guided by the cam portion 371a so that the elevation base 364 can be elevated.

The central button main body 373 has a vertically extending cylindrical cylindrical portion 373a, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the cylindrical portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts passing through the bottom portion 373b. 362 is slidably inserted into a pair of guide holes 373c, a central opening 373d passing through the center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364, and downward from the bottom portion 373b. A pressing detection piece 373 e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 , and a pair of guide bosses 373 f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373 b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 .

The center button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a tubular portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button main body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is arranged between the upper base 363 and the lift base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a protrudes above the upper base 363. As shown in FIG. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends short downward, and the lower end abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364, thereby restricting the downward movement of the central button body 373. As shown in FIG. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button main body 373 .

The center button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that their lower ends extend downward through the elevating base 364, and screws through which washers are inserted are attached to the lower ends. A washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f contacts the lower surface of the elevation base 364, thereby restricting the upward movement of the central button body 373. As shown in FIG.

The press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is activated when the bottom 373b (the lower end of the central opening 373d) of the central button body 373 contacts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374. 364 to protrude downward. This center button main body 373 is formed to be opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs with a weaker biasing force than the lifting spring 365 .

The center button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having approximately the same diameter as the cylindrical portion 373a of the center button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. and is formed to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. The central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373 at the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b.

A plurality of LEDs mounted on the top surface of the center button decoration board 376 are full-color LEDs. The center button decoration board 376 can light-embellish the center button cover 375 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the upper surface of the peripheral button decoration board 377 . The peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can light-embellish the peripheral decorative lens 379 and the peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 includes an annular substrate portion 378 a that covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 and is attached to the lift base 364 , and a cylindrical substrate portion 378 a that extends upward from the inner periphery of the substrate portion 378 a to cover the center button main body 373 . and a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The peripheral substrate cover 378 is transparent.

The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 has twisted portions extending upward so as to move in the circumferential direction and arranged in rows at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a of the peripheral substrate cover 378 . The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. The peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the lifting base 364 at the lower end of the cylindrical portion 380a. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 .

In the state where the effect operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. It is inserted into the engaging portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevation cam member 371 from below. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Also, in this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

Therefore, when assembled into the effect operation unit 300 , the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 , and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 . also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63, etc.).

In this state (state shown in FIG. 62(a)), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pushed downward to move downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 is pushed downward. is detected by the pressure detecting sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is substantially level with the upper surface of the peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65(c)).

In this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. Neither is detected by the detection sensor 381 . That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation drive gear 368 counterclockwise in plan view, the elevation cam is driven via the driven gear 369 meshing with the elevation drive gear 368 . The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the elevation cam member 371 connected to the elevation cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevation cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. The cam 371b rolls to the left of the engaging portion 371c, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b as the elevation cam member 371 rotates, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b toward the second cam 371d, the second Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is moved upward along the second cam 371d by the biasing force of the lift spring 365. Together with this, the elevating base 364 rises to the raised position.

In the elevated position, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the state of the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364 abuts the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevation base 364 is restricted. In addition, in the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (the central depressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral depressing operation portion 303b) at the lowered position is maintained. The entire pressing operation portion 303 including the peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes above the upper surface of the peripheral button cover 380 .

When the effect operation unit 300 is assembled into the effect operation unit 300 and moved to the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65(b), etc.). reference).

When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a ) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 are pressed against the button spring 374 . It moves downward against the force, and the center button main body 373 comes into contact with the lifting base 364 . When the center button body 373 is in contact with the lift base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 protrudes downward from the lift base 364. , the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, After the center button main body 373 abuts on the lift base 364, the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365, and the lower end of the lift base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the lifting base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the lifting base 364 is in the lowered position, and together with the lifting base 364, the peripheral button cover 380 (peripheral pressing portion 303b) is also in the lowered position.

In this way, when the central button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364 and the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the lifting base 364 is detected. is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing of the central button cover 375 (the central pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward with a force greater than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the state of the raised position, the lifting base 364 moves through the outer peripheral button cover 380 to the lifting spring. It moves downward against the urging force of 365 , and the lower end of the lift base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 . In this state, the lift base 364 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in the lowered position. The pressure detecting piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the lifting base 364, and the pressure detecting piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detecting sensor 381.

In order to return the central button cover 375 and the peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation portion 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. 62(b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364, moves rightward (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the guide pin 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the elevation cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevation base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d moves toward the first cam. 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the concave locking portion 371c by the urging force of the lift spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 by the button elevation drive motor 367, the state of the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5-5i. Operation section relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operating section relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operating section base 320 . The operating section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body section 321 of the operating section base 320 and an operating section relay board 392 attached inside the board box 391 .

The substrate box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled into the effect operation unit 300. As shown in FIG. The operation part relay board 392 includes the plate center upper decoration board 314, the plate center lower decoration board 316, the operation ring drive motor 342, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the vibration speaker. 354, operation button elevation drive motor 367, center button decoration board 376, peripheral button decoration board 377, press detection sensor 381, elevation detection sensor 382, and plate unit relay board 214 of plate base unit 210 are relayed. there is

[3-5-5j. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the action of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion. FIG. 65(a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing portion of the pressing operation portion. It is a front view of a plate unit when an operation part is pressed.

The performance operation unit 300 has a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player on its upper surface. The effect operating section 301 is composed of a large annular rotating operating section 302 and a pressing operating section 303 arranged in the ring of the rotating operating section 302 . The press operation portion 303 includes a cylindrical central press operation portion 303 a positioned at the center of the rotary operation portion 302 and an annular outer peripheral press operation portion disposed between the central press operation portion 303 a and the rotary operation portion 302 . 303b.

The rotation operation part 302 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335 , a ring outer lower cover 336 and a ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330 . The central pressing operation portion 303 a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360 , and the outer pressing operation portion 303 b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 .

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of the imaginary plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotary operation part 302 (the effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion 303 arranged in the ring of the rotary operation portion 302 is inclined so that it moves backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). .

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation portion 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302 . Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 clockwise in a left side view, the effect operation ring 330 rotates through the operation ring transmission gear 350 . , rotates clockwise in plan view. On the other hand, when the operation ring drive motor 342 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 counterclockwise in left side view, the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates counterclockwise in plan view. .

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeating forward and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range, the rotary operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated. This vibration is different from the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotary operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotary operation portion 302 is rotated clockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 rotates clockwise in left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and rotates. When the operating portion 302 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in left side view. This transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 .

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b with the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. FIG. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are spaced apart in the circumferential direction, is greater than the space between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in rows at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , is an interval that is not an integer multiple. Thereby, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, after the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected from the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

Since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected in this way, the content of the player participation type presentation can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 . Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring driving motor 342 rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. . Alternatively, the operation ring drive motor 342 rotates the rotary operation portion 302 in the direction opposite to the direction of the rotary operation, thereby making the rotary operation heavy or giving a click feeling.

The rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends annularly. ing. In other words, the rotation operation portion 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the drawing, the rotary operation unit 302 is attached with the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface exposed, so that it is formed in a shape that is easy for the player to grasp. .

As a result, the player can touch the rotary operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the player can rotate the rotary operation unit 302 in a way that is easy for the player to operate. is enhanced. Further, the rotary operation portion 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation portion 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. It should be noted that since the lower surface side of the rotary operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, it cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes a effect operation ring decoration board 352 below the effect operation ring 330, on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape. Thus, by causing the LED of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 to emit light, the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, in the effect operation ring decoration board 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a line are successively arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 can be decorated with light. As a result, the player can be given the illusion that an LED (decoration board) is provided inside the rotary operation unit 302 that rotates.

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 has a pressing operation part 303 arranged in a ring of the rotary operation part 302, and the upper surface of the rotary operation part 302 is larger than the upper surface of the rotary operation part 302, as shown in FIG. 65(a). It is in a state of a lowered position projecting slightly upward. In this state, the rotary operation section 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation section 303a of the pressing operation section 303 can be pressed. When the central push operation portion 303a is pushed downward, the upper surface of the central push operation portion 303a (center button cover 375) descends to approximately the same height as the upper surface of the outer circumference push operation portion 303b (perimeter button cover 380), and the push is detected. The pressure is detected by the sensor 381 .

In this normal (lowered position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressing is detected. The pressure is never detected by the sensor 381 .

In a normal state, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view, the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the urging force of the pair of lifting springs 365, the pressing operation portion 303 vigorously protrudes upward together with the lifting base 364 to reach the raised position (see FIG. 65(b)). In this elevated position, the upper surface of the pressing operation portion 303 is positioned significantly higher than the upper surface of the rotary operation portion 302 . In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upward to a greater extent than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 .

When the central push operation portion 303a is pushed downward while the push operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the central push operation portion 303a moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central push operation portion 303a moves downward. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b are at approximately the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect any pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operating portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b face the rotation operating portion 302. It will be in a state of approximately the same height as the upper surface (see FIG. 65(c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects pressure.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b becomes substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotary operating portion 302 (see FIG. 65(a)). . In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect any pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation portion 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed to the downward movement end, regardless of whether the pressing operation portion 303 is in the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to encourage the player to press the central pressing operation portion 303a firmly, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the effect operation portion 301 in the player participation type effect. , the player-participation type performance can be more enjoyable.

Note that the rotary operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the pressing operation portion 303 may be used as a clue to facilitate the rotation operation, or the pressing operation portion 303 may hinder the rotation operation. Therefore, it is possible to change the operability of the rotary operation unit 302, thereby making it possible to enjoy a wider variety of operations.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. FIG. 66(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, and FIG. 66(b) is a back perspective view of the door frame left side unit. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 is mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decorative board 402 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the cage, a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402, and a door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403 .

The door frame left side base 401 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens forward. The door frame left side decorative board 402 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and is composed of a left side upper decorative board 402a and a left side lower decorative board 402b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 402 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame left-side decoration substrate 402 can light-embellish the door-frame left-side decoration body 404 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The left side reflector 403 is formed with a through hole 403a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 . The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that its lower end is continuous with the left end of the upper left plate decoration body 271 of the upper left plate decorative unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and its upper end is the door frame top decoration body of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the left lower end of 453 .

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are approximately the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and looks as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. FIG. 69(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, and FIG. 69(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the back. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200, and a side window 410a penetrates in the left-right direction. and a plurality of luminous side window interior decorative portions 410b arranged in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in a game hall or the like in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and prevents a player playing with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 can be made difficult to see, and a player's personal space can be formed so as to protect the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b attached to the front surface and cylindrically extending forward and arranged vertically in rows, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on a portion corresponding to the window interior decoration portion 410b, and a side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and a plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 are mounted. and internal reflectors 414 respectively inserted into the interiors of the side window interior decorations 410b.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to a right side reflector 415 that is arranged in front of the front end of the side window interior decoration member 412 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the door frame. A door having a through hole 416a that extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and that penetrates in the left-right direction to form a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical direction and the front and back direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed with a through hole 417a extending in a shape and penetrating in the left-right direction to constitute the side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side decorative substrate 418 attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the right side reflector 415. and a door frame right side decoration 419 attached to the right side reflector 415 .

The door frame right side base 411 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (three in this case) side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in a row in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller on the front end side than on the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. The side window interior decoration member 412 is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416 at the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b. The side window inner decorative member 412 is attached to the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame from a lower position to an upper position with respect to the center in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration member 412 is formed in translucent milky white.

The side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 is attached to a portion behind the connection base 412 a of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 . A plurality of LEDs provided on the side window inner decorative portion decorative substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. The side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 has four LEDs arranged in a cross shape vertically and horizontally around the axial center of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at the rear portion of each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. It is

The internal reflector 414 has an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decorative portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four sections, upper, lower, left, and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and has a wavy shape in the front-rear direction that moves forward and then backward from the top end to the bottom end. It is The right side reflector 415 is formed with a plurality of through holes 415a penetrating in the front-rear direction and through which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 face forward.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and frontward and rearward. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and is connected to the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed opaque.

The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and frontward and rearward. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically extending deformed oval shape, and is connected to the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and is composed of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 418 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame right-side decorative substrate 418 can light-embellish the door-frame right-side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415 . As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward.

The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that its lower end is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decorative body 276 of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 in the plate unit 200, and its upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the right lower end of the body 453 .

The door frame right side unit 410, in a state assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the portion of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. It looks embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) extending forward in a wavy shape so that a quarter portion from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed like a screen. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be viewed through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (columnar) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending back and forth in the side window 410a. , the side window inner decorative portion 410b can be decorated with light. By luminous decoration of the side window interior decoration part 410b, the inside of the side window 410a can be brightened, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that illuminates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the edge of the island facility) through the three side window interior decoration parts 410b in 410a. Therefore, a player looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without moving to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities. This pachinko machine 1 can be used to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window inner decorative portion 410b can block the line of sight of a player located nearby. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if he is being watched by other players, so that the other players can play without hesitation. .

Furthermore, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are illuminated by the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the light can dazzle the inside of the side window 410a, thereby changing the visibility through the side window 410a. Let At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are cylindrical, the light is emitted in a belt-like and radial manner, so that the side window interior decoration portions 410b are dazzling and the opposite side is seen from between them. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player such as a neighbor to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for other players to look into the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to being unable to concentrate on the game and feeling lost due to mistakes being induced, and making the player concentrate on the game to make the game more enjoyable. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72(a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the rear, and (c) is a top lower cover removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the closed state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from above, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from below. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410 .

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and covering the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. a top upper cover 452 attached to a door frame top base 451, a door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top base 451. and a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the .

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top center decoration board 455 attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door frame top decoration board 455. a door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 in front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front; a door frame top right decoration board 457 attached to the right side of the door frame top central decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; I have.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a top central reflector 458 arranged between a door frame top decoration 453 and a door frame top central decoration substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and a door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and between the door frame top decoration 453 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457. and a top right reflector 460 located in and attached to the front of the top upper cover 452 .

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a center speaker box 461 attached to the center of the top surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top center speakers 462 attached downward to the center speaker box 461, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the left and right ends of the front surface of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. a top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454; a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below; A door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451, and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the upper side of the door frame top base 451. there is

The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-like body portion 451a extending in the left and right direction with the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left and right direction. and a forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape so that the lower side of the body portion 451a is aligned with the upper edge of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward. The left and right forward protruding portions 451b are inclined so that the front ends thereof move rearward as they go downward, and are formed in a box shape that is open rearward. The forward projecting portion 451b on the right side in front view is also open upward.

The top cover 452 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 when viewed from the front. The top upper cover 452 covers the outer sides of the left and right forward protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451, and is shaped to connect the upper front ends of the left and right forward protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 protrudes forward most at the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. The top cover 452 also has an opening 452a on the upper surface thereof, which is largely cut forward from the rear end. This opening 452 a is closed by a door frame top plate 468 .

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a semi-circular arc that protrudes forward, and the curvature decreases as it goes from both left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and it extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452 . formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward. The door frame top decoration 453 faces downward at both ends in the horizontal direction, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419 .

The door-frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door-frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door-frame top base 451, and bulges upward at the center in the left-right direction. , extending in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is spaced apart in the left-right direction. It has a pair of central speaker openings 454b facing the top central speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating vertically outside the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a in the horizontal direction and facing the top side speakers 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454 .

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top center decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decoration substrate 455 can light-embellish the central portion of the door frame top decoration 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip-like shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative board 456 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate the left portion of the door-frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are full-color LEDs. This door-frame top right decoration substrate 457 can light-embellish the right portion of the door-frame top decoration 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

Top center reflector 458 , top left reflector 459 , and top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, on door frame top center decoration substrate 455 , door frame top left decoration substrate 456 , and door frame top right decoration substrate 457 . Through-holes penetrating back and forth are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs.

The center speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and is attached so that a pair of top center speakers 462 face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. As shown in FIG. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker that outputs sounds such as speech and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right forward projections 451 b of the door frame top base 451 . The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter, and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Sounds output from the top central speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 are radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465 .

The door frame top relay board 467 includes the door frame top center decorative board 455 , the door frame top left decorative board 456 , the door frame top right decorative board 457 , the top center speaker 462 , the top side speaker 464 , and the door frame base unit 100 . It is for relaying the connection with the door frame secondary relay board 105 .

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452 , has a front end locked to the top upper cover 452 , and has a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. - 特許庁In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419, respectively, forming an integral decoration. there is In addition, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player through a pair of top central speakers 462 and a pair of top side speakers 464 .

[3-9. door frame decoration]
The decoration on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. The door frame 3 has, as shown in the figure, a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire periphery of the door window 101a.

A plate upper left decorative body 271, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate central upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and a door frame top decorative body surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, the upper left plate decoration 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the upper right plate decoration 276, the upper center plate decoration 312a, the left side door frame decoration 404, the right side door frame decoration 419, and the Behind the door frame top decoration 453 are a plate upper left decoration substrate 273, a plate upper right decoration substrate 278, a plate center upper decoration substrate 314, a door frame left side decoration substrate 402, a door frame right side decoration substrate 418, and a door frame top center decoration. Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 are arranged, by appropriately lighting the LEDs of these decoration substrates, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated, A player can be shown or given a light emitting effect such that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, on the upper surface, an annular donut-shaped rotary operation part 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotary operation part 302. A pressing operation portion 303 consisting of a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing portion 303b and a cylindrical central pressing portion 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotating operation portion 302 is provided below the rotating operating portion 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or half-tube) large-diameter plate center upper decorations 312a and plate center lower decorations 312b are mounted vertically apart from each other. A door-frame left-side decoration 404 of the door-frame left-side unit 400 and a door-frame right-side decoration of the door-frame right-side unit 410 have similar shapes so as to be continuous with both ends of the decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b. 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached outside the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the plate unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged by the rotation operation part 302 and the two plate center upper decorations 312a and plate center lower decorations 312b. Since the pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be made conspicuous.

In addition, the upper left plate decoration 271, the upper right plate decoration 276, and the lower left plate decoration 281, the lower right plate decoration 286, and the lower center plate decoration 312b, which are arranged below the upper plate center decoration 312a, are placed in half. The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 increases upward from the lower end, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 that is arranged on the upper side and can be operated by the player. The push operation part 303 can be made to look larger, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation part 302 and the push operation part 303 of the performance operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. can.

Further, on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, a doughnut-shaped rotary operation part 302 is rotatably mounted around an axis that extends forward as it goes upward. Since the state is tilted to be lowered, the top surfaces of the rotation operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 face the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player. The operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be fully visible, and the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to appear larger. In addition, as described above, since the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotary operation portion 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, so that the player can immediately rotate when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 allows the player to enjoy the player-participation type performance, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

In addition, the diameter of the rotary operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center decoration body 312a and the lower plate center decoration body 312b are made larger than the diameter of the rotation operation part 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation portion 302, the upper plate center decoration 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b protrude farther forward than the upper plate 201. Since the decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b decorate the outer periphery of the rotary operation part 302, the rotation operation part 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 can be improved by the plate center upper decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b. Therefore, the player can be made to recognize at a glance that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the appeal to the player can be made. can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The overall structure of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the body frame of the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the rear. Fig. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and Fig. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached openable and closable to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted possible.

The body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. a body frame top hinge member 510 attached to the upper end and rotatably attached to the outer frame top hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame top hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; A main body frame hinge assembly attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 in front view, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and rotatably attached to the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3. A solid 520 is provided.

The main body frame 4 includes a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and is positioned within the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launcher 540 for hitting a ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper and left sides of the body frame base unit 500 in front view, and the payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out game balls B to the player side, a substrate unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. a rear cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable; and a locking unit 650 for locking between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

The body frame base unit 500 includes a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a connection cable guide member for guiding a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502, and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a box-shaped ball tank attached to the payout base 551 extending left and right and opening upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 and extending leftward in an upwardly open groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, a second A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 away from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and a tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 are provided.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 according to instructions from the payout control board 633. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and a game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides to the board unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the body frame base 501 , a plurality of door frame hooks 652 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3 , and a unit base 651 protruding rearward. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be engaged with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that vertically moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653, and the door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It has a lock spring 655 that biases the outer frame hook 653 upward and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
Main body frame base unit 500 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when opening and closing the door frame with respect to the body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base 501 attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide a connection cable 503 . and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 which is rotatably attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth. ing.

The body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 includes a base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base body 501a. A game board insertion opening 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game board on which the game board 5 is placed, which forms the lower side of the game board insertion opening 501b. A placing portion 501c and a game board restricting portion 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placing portion 501c in the left-right direction and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rearward.

In addition, the body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the game board placing portion 501c in the front view of the base body 501a in front view, and has a launcher attachment portion 501e for attaching the ball launcher 540, and a launcher attachment portion 501e. A cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted is inserted in the right side of the portion 501e when viewed from the front. A circular speaker opening 501g that faces the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a at 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. It has a cable attachment recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h in front view.

Further, the body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base body 501a when viewed from the front. A rotatably attached rearwardly extending portion 501j is formed on the rear surface of the base body 501a near the upper and lower ends of the left end in the front view, for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l.

A game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 around a longitudinally extending axis below the game board placing portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 enables the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b to be detachable by regulating forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to a position to the right of the speaker opening 501g and below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable mounting recess 501h is sized to accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a flat plate-like guide body 502a extending left and right, and both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a projecting forward and extending rightward from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of protruding strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a guide body 502a are penetrated in the front-rear direction at the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a, and a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that an attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis extending vertically near the right end of the cable attachment recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503 . The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 and the opposite end of which is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3 and the door frame sub board. It is connected to the relay board 105 .

Next, the effects of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 is attached to the body frame base 501 at an end (right end) on the side opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the hinge in the left-right direction. ) is mounted rotatably around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3 .

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a side connected to the interface board 635 connected to the connection cable guide member. 502 is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and in a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 are installed. (see FIG. 84(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, bends back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 .

In this state, when the hinge is rotated to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (preferably, α/3≧β). (see FIG. 84(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but the increase stops when the opening angle α exceeds a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). transition as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501 . By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not caught between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. problems can be prevented.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees. You can get used to it. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the fold. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the crease of the door frame 3 can prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) can be prevented from moving. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Further, on the side of the door frame 3, the folded connection cable 503 is attached to the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a guides the leading end of the connection cable guide member 502 to the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis) side of the lower door frame hinge pin 126 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the center axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, and the door is positioned closer to the speaker duct 103 than the cable holder 103a. The angle between the tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion comes into contact with the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open through the connection cable 503. Since the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and effects similar to those described above can be achieved.

[4-2. Main body frame upper hinge member]
Main body frame upper hinge member 510 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the door frame 3. is rotatably mounted on the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the above.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending plate-like plate is bent downward into an L shape, and a columnar shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge body 511. and a main body frame hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame hinge assembly 50 . The upper hinge main body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a which penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in the horizontally extending portion and supports the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 pivotally. I have it.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501 k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The main body frame hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the main body frame hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 . The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 .

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to attach the main body frame 4 to the door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the door frame 3. A lower door frame hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521. The lower hinge second main body 522 is formed by bending the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member upward into an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 spaced upward from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 abuts against the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge body 521 .

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

The lower hinge second body 522 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. a hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position rearward of the door frame lower hinge hole 522a on the left side of the horizontally extending portion for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3; , is equipped with The door frame lower hinge hole 522 a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to attach the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 . can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcing frame]
Main body frame reinforcement frame 530 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500 . The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in plan view that is U-shaped with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is formed of a metal extruded profile.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a rear portion extending rightward from the front end thereof, which restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and up and down. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached with a space therebetween in the vertical direction.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also extends from the left side of the main body frame 4 through between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( Prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the game board 5).

[4-5. ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and FIG. 85(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. The ball shooting device 540 is attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and shoots the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 onto the game board attached to the main body frame 4. 5 is for hitting into the game area 5a. The ball launching device 540 can hit the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3 .

The ball launching device 540 includes a flat plate-shaped launching base 541 attached to the launching device attachment portion 501e of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front, and rotates. A firing solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through a firing base 541; A shooting rail 544 is attached to the front surface of the shooting base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is configured such that the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544. In this state, when the handle 182 is rotated, the shooting solenoid 542 is driven with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 . Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the shooting rail 544 and hit into the game area 5a.

It should be noted that if the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball B, etc., the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From the gap, the ball drops into the foul ball socket 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[4-6. payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86(a) is a front perspective view of the payout base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout base unit. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and attached to the rear side of the body frame base unit 500 .

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 . The dispensing base 551 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and includes a top plate portion 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a top plate portion having a width in the front-rear direction from the left side of the top plate portion 551a when viewed from the front. A left side plate portion 551b extending long downward with substantially the same width, and a right side plate portion 551c extending short downward with substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction from the front view right side of the top plate portion 551a. , a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and an approximately constant rightward direction from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b. A rear plate left portion 551e extending to the vicinity of the lower end in width, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the rear plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b, and a left side plate portion 551b. A bottom plate portion 551g extending rightward from the front portion of the lower side to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. and has. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open forward and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left and right direction with substantially the same length as the horizontal width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b extending above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with a length substantially equal to the height of the direction. The dispensing base 551 has front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the dispensing base 551 has a vertically extending shallow concave portion opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the left side portion 551e of the back plate, and the inner side plate portion 551f. A unit 560 is attached. In addition, the dispensing base 551 protrudes rightward from the upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and includes a box-shaped ball tank 552 that extends left and right and is open upward, and a part that extends left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape that is open upward.

In addition, the dispensing base unit 550 includes a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the middle in the left-right direction, and a first rail cover 554 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. and a ball stop member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The sphere tank 552 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color. In addition, the length in the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a rightward position in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

The tank rail 553 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, and is attached near the rear end on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is oblique to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and the shape extends straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560 .

In addition, the upper end of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left is steeper than the bottom surface with respect to the horizontal so that the height of the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side is lower at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. A first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stop member 557 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin, molded in an opaque white color, and attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. . The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are provided to prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from widening or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in an opaque white color. The end on the one rail cover 554 side is attached rotatably about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The ball rectifying member 556 has rectifying pieces 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). By delaying the flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B that are circulating in two stages, the rectification pieces 556a rectify the flow of the game balls B so that they flow in one stage on the downstream side. Even if the height is lowered, the balls will not be clogged.

The ball stop member 557 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in an opaque red color. , the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, and the game ball B can be prevented from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

Further, the payout base unit 550 is formed with a substrate accommodating portion 551aa for attaching an external terminal plate 558 and a frame ground substrate 559 to the left of the ball tank 552 in the front view of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 . The upper side of the external terminal plate 558 is covered with a terminal cover 551k made of transparent synthetic resin. The external terminal plate 558 includes a mounting surface and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (a plurality of external terminals (in this embodiment, external terminals XCN1 arranged in a row from the left side to the right side when viewed from the rear of the dispensing base unit 550). It has 10 external terminals named ∼XCN10.)), and the board is accommodated so that the mounting surface is perpendicular to the rear of the payout base 551 when viewed from the front so that the terminals )) are exposed. It is attached to the portion 551aa. On the other hand, the frame ground board 559 is arranged so that the mounting surface on which a plurality of ground terminals (in this embodiment, five ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 are mounted) is mounted is directed downward and is horizontal. When viewed from the front, the payout base 551 is arranged in front of the external terminal plate 558, attached to the substrate accommodating portion 551aa, and covered with the terminal cover 551k. Therefore, the frame ground substrate 559 is housed in the space formed by the substrate housing portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k. Since the terminal cover 551k is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, the frame ground substrate 559 accommodated in the space formed by the substrate accommodating portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k can be visually recognized from the outside of the terminal cover 551k. It has become.

Among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the height of the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is 13.4 mm (when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height becomes 18.6 mm). On the other hand, the height of the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is 7 mm (when housings corresponding to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 are inserted, the mounting height becomes 9.8 mm). In a state in which the frame ground board 559 is accommodated and attached inside the board accommodation portion 551aa and the external terminal plate 558 is attached to the rear surface of the board accommodation portion 551aa, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, the frame ground substrate 559 is hidden by the presence of the external terminal plate 558 and is difficult to see. 1 (see, eg, FIG. 77). The ground terminal ECN3 has a high height of 13.4 mm as described above, but when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, it is hidden by the presence of the ball straightening member 556 and is difficult to see. The ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 are as low as 7 mm in height as described above, and cannot protrude from the lower side of the external terminal plate 558. When the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the rear side, the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 are hidden by the presence of the external terminal plate 558. is difficult to see. A detailed description of the frame ground substrate 559 will be given later.

The external terminal plate 558 is for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The frame grounding substrate 559 is for once concentrating the electromagnetic noise generated in various places and grounding (grounding) it to the island facility of the game hall.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. FIG. 87(a) is a front perspective view of the payout unit in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. FIG. 88(a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. be. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551 e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 .

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570 and guided by the ball guiding unit 570. a payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and an upper full ball path unit A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through 600 to the side of the door frame 3 or the side of the board unit 620 is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580 . The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , Based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and the ball pull out lever 593 is operated from the ball pull out passage 580b to the upper full ball path unit A game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides down the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball withdrawal passage 580b. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7-1. ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The ball guide unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for

The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a meandering manner through which the game ball B flows, and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward, and the front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. A flat guide passage front cover 572, a movable piece member 573 that is movable by a game ball B flowing in the guide passage 570a, and a game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of (see FIG. 92).

In the sphere guide unit 570, the shape of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 when viewed from the front is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends rightward to guide the guide unit base 571. It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeating folding between the widths of the unit base 571 in the horizontal direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guiding unit base 571 .

The guide passage 570a is formed so that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the circulation direction in which the game ball B is circulated. Can be guided in a line.

The ball guide unit 570 has a movable piece member 573 attached near the top thereof so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guide passage 570a. Specifically, the upper portion of the movable piece member 573 is attached to the right outer side of the guide passage 570a in a front view so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. is formed to This movable piece member 573 is in a state where the game ball B abuts on the part protruding into the guide passage 570a, the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B, retreats from the guide passage 570a, and does not protrude. becomes.

The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and part of the movable piece member 573 retreats from the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball-off detection sensor 574 is in a state of detection when the game ball B exists in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B does not exist in the guide path 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guide unit 570, since the guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guide unit 570, and many games are played in the guide passage 570a. Ball B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guide unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball end detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7-2. dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 90(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 .

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a opened rearward and through which the game balls B can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a; A flat dispensing device rear lid 582 closing the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and opened rearward are provided. ing.

Dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between dispensing device main body 581 and dispensing device front lid 583. A spur-gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached thereto, and a spur-gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583 , a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached to the dispenser main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and the second transmission gear 587 meshes with the second transmission gear 587. and a plurality of detecting pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a. a payout gear member 588, a payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a rotating integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and protruding into the payout passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 is provided.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a. A movable ball removal piece 592 attached to a portion branched from the dispensing passage 580a by a lid 582 so as to be able to open and close the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. and a ball extracting lever 593 attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically in a plan view. Dispensing device 580 has a width in the left-right direction larger than the width in the left-right direction of ball guiding unit 570 toward the right in front view.

As shown in FIG. 89, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It is open downwards. The dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward by about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move leftward as it goes downward from the upstream end. It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotational axis) of the delivery blade 589 . Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer circumference of the payout blade 589 is formed, and extends downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the delivery blade 589 in the rear view.

A payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout vane 589 and right above the downstream end in the payout passage 580a.

The ball extraction passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and branches at a portion where it is bent to the right, and extends vertically along the left side of the rear view to the lower end. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b diverge. The body-side guide wall 581a protrudes backward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap than the main body side guide wall 581a, and is formed so as to be continuous with the left side walls of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball extraction passage 580b in the rear view. and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a branch from the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 of the height from the top. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed so as to mainly constitute the side walls of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball removing movable piece 592 rotates through between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end when viewed from the rear. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are arranged in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the dispensing device front lid 583. The dispensing gear member 588 is provided with three outwardly extending flat detection pieces 588b at angular intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The dispensing blade 589 is arranged between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 . The delivery blade 589 is provided with three blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The wing piece 589a extends from above in the payout passage 580a toward the rotating shaft and then extends rightward in rear view so that the distance between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Further, it protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The payout blade 589 has a ball housing portion 589b recessed in an arc with a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotates clockwise in the rear view. Thus, the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b can be moved downstream.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially attached to the payout device rear cover 582 and the payout device front cover 583 so as to be rotatable together. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotating shaft of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the delivery blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the delivery gear member 588 that rotates together with the delivery blade 589 .

The upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592 is rotatably attached to the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a around an axis extending back and forth. The ball removing movable piece 592 is bent in a V-shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball extraction movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It can protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat out of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 and to the left in the rear view. A portion of the ball removal lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extracting lever 593 at the lower end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball extracting movable piece 592, and the clockwise rotation of the ball extracting movable piece 592 in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal movable piece 592 can close the ball removal passage 580b. Further, by positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the upper end, the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be turned to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b, and the ball extraction passage 580b can be opened (Fig. 90).

When the ball extraction lever 593 is lifted to make the ball extraction movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which was in a state like a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball extraction movable piece 592, moves to the ball extraction movable piece 592. and flows down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout vane 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a side. will flow down quickly.

In this way, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball extraction passage 580b at a high speed. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the game ball B vigorously, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b due to the force of this contact. It is not caught between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the ball extraction movement due to the collision of the game ball B can be prevented. It is possible to suppress deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 .

For this reason, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be made difficult to break, so that more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island facility side on the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement, maintenance, etc. of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Also, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B, and the ball removal path 580b. Since the game ball B abuts on the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the back cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the gap is larger than the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward by the narrow gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the ball after that is released. Since the movement of the movable piece 592 is due to inertial force, no strong force acts on the movable piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable piece 592. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated downstream of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7-3. Upper full tank ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is attached from behind to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550 . The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610 . The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 includes a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the payout base 551 and has an open rear side, and a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full-tank base 601 and has an open front side. and a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full-tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in a front view, and has a back cover attachment portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

In addition, the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper delivery ball receiving passage 600a, extends rightward in front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c extending downward from the left-right center of the upper ball storage passage 600b in a front view and opening downward on the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. An upper full discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the ball storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the bottom surface, and an upper opening near the right end in the front view on the top surface and substantially perpendicular to the bottom. and an upper ball extraction passage 600e extending downward and opening downward near the right end of the lower surface (see FIG. 92).

On the lower surface of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side in front view, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball extraction passage 600e are arranged in order and open downward. When the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the upstream end of the upper disbursed ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600 e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580 b in the dispensing device 580 . As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full payout passage 600d. is emitted downward from any of Also, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7-4. Lower full tank ball path unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower portion of the upper full ball path unit 600 . The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c. 611, a lower full-tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full-tank base 611, and a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full-tank base 611 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth. A payout passage opening/closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full-tank payout passage 610b and a payout passage opening/closing door 613 are attached in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full-tank payout passage 610b. and a biasing closing spring 614 .

The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full-tank discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c arranged in order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the part extending upward at the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b extend forward side by side and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball passage unit 610. As shown in FIG. The lower full-fill dispensing passage 610b extends forward while being slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full-tank dispensing passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the middle in the front-rear direction.

The payout passage open/close door 613 is rotatably mounted between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b. The payout passage open/close door 613 is biased clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 614. In a normal state, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b have front end openings (downstream ends). opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 has an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape centering on the center of rotation of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and the front end surface of the actuating protrusion 613a approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is slanted to protrude forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed to contact the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4. As shown in FIG.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full payout passage 610b, and a lower ball extraction passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are arranged in the upper full position. It is located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d flows into the lower full payout passage 610b. , and the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

In addition, when the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank ball socket 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is open so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627, which opens leftward in the base unit 620b of the board unit 620. As shown in FIG.

In the normal state (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4), the lower full-tank ball path unit 610 is such that the actuating projection 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By coming into contact with the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As shown in FIG. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are open, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b of the foul cover unit 150. state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated clockwise in front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B will not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7-5. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 in the state assembled to the body frame 4 . In a normal state, the ball extraction lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is positioned at the lower end to close the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the dispensing passage 580a at the branched portion. Further, in the lower full-tank ball path unit 610, the dispensing passage open/close door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are supplied from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the detection of the ball running out by the ball running out detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 and sent through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580.例文帳に追加When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout vane 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout vane 589. becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570 a of the ball guide unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573 , and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573 . As a result, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589 .

In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b moves clockwise in the back view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a 589 is discharged downstream. After being detected by the payout detection sensor 591, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (ball housing portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The game balls B sent to the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 are arranged directly under the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. , is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 at .

When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the payout device. The game ball B paid out from 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full ball path unit 600 that is in communication. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are further paid out, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicated with the upper normal payout passage 600c on the upstream side. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down toward the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full ball payout passage 600d passes through the lower full ball payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving opening 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. can be received. After that, the game ball B received by the full ball socket 150b is discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball outlet 150d, and the lower tray ball supply opening 211c of the tray unit base 211. Thereby, when the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are put out, the game balls B can be automatically put out to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

In addition, when the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, and the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and the game balls B are further paid out, the lower tray The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with game balls B ( The player is notified that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detection state.

When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 are discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the state of the rising end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball removing movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

At this time, at the position of the ball extraction movable piece 592, the falling game ball B contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball extraction movable piece 592, so that the ball extraction movable piece 592 is less likely to break.

Then, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After passing through and discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide portion 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93(a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and FIG. 93(b) is a back perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from below. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 .

The substrate unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a includes a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board placing portion 501c, and a speaker cover 621 facing forward near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front. and a container-like speaker box 623 that is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and that opens forward. .

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed of a plurality of vertically extending slits penetrating in the vicinity of the left end in front view, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b is recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extends in the left and right direction, obliquely downward and rearward. and an open connecting portion 621c.

The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side so as to face forward. The connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs low frequencies.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that opens forward, and the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes rearward the most. is formed so that the protrusion of the As a result, a sufficient rear space on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620 a forms part of an enclosure 624 that encloses the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623 . In the enclosure 624, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a space front concave portion 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front. Even if it is formed stepwise so as to reduce the volume, a sufficiently wide space is ensured on the right side of the body frame speaker 622 .

When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a is connected to the connection cylinder part 43a so that the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the body frame speaker 622 is positioned behind the speaker unit 620a. and the inner space 40a of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication. Therefore, on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43 can form a wide enclosure 624. It is possible to output (radiate) the sound forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42. As shown in FIG.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body-frame speaker 622 (part of the enclosure 624) extends to the right in a front view with a relatively large depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the lower outer frame assembly 40 side is communicated through the connecting tube portion 43a, the lower outer frame assembly 40 can be connected to the lower outer frame assembly 40 without particularly attenuating the low frequency range in the sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear. In addition, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel member 42 .

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a phase-inverted state, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622, and the sound is output from the plate unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a loud sound with deep bass.

In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are produced. This allows the player to listen to sound with rich bass.

In the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is provided with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b. A through tube 623a extending in a cylindrical shape communicating with the through hole 621d and penetrating in the front and rear direction is formed. When the speaker unit 620a is assembled, the through hole 621d and the through cylinder 623a communicate with each other, and the enclosure 624 is independent. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through-hole 621d and the through-cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. and a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed by a front base 625 and a rear base 626 in cooperation, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a front view. A ball ejection guide portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharged ball receiving portion that opens upward on the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball ejection guide portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball ejection port 629 for ejecting downward the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the ejection ball receiving portion 628.

The ball ejection guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens leftward on the upper left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end that opens to the left end side of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 . The ball removal guide part 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a state where it is assembled to the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the ejected ball receiving portion 628. - 特許庁

The ejected ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends laterally. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 at the left end in front view, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 to the right in the front view after guiding the ball ejection guide part 627 and the ejected ball receiving part 628. Since the ink is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a wide space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in a front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer bass than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631 and .

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (Fig. 97) and The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 and payout commands from the main control board of the game board 5 or the like. Then, the instructed number of game balls B are paid out to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that traces of opening and closing remain. This makes it possible to detect unauthorized modifications to the payout control board 633, enhancing the deterrence against fraud.

The interface unit 620e includes a substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and a rear side of the interface substrate 635. and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634 .

The circuit board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at the rearward portion of the speaker box 623 , which projects most backward. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 . The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board, the peripheral control board, etc., and is connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends rightward in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. back cover]
The back cover 640 of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 . The back cover 640 has its right side in a front view attached to the rear end of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 extending vertically so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically. and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-tank ball path unit 600. As shown in FIG.

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward when viewed from the front. It is formed so as to be positioned substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the body frame 4 can be seen from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 .

[4-10. locking unit]
Locking unit 650 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 98(a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and FIG. 98(b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. The locking unit 650 is attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 and locks the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 .

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lock units that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude backward from the unit base 651 and can be engaged with the outer frame 2, and a door frame that protrudes forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 and rotates depending on the direction of rotation. and a transmission cylinder 654 for vertically moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the body frame 4 , a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 , transmission cylinders 654 , and outer frame unlocking levers 656 are positioned forward of the front surface of the body frame base 501 . Protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the body frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4, the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. Engaged with the transmission member 133, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are engaged with the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the door frame hooks 652 are locked. A frame hook 653 is engaged with the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2 .

When the lock unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise in a front view. The door frame hook 652 moves upward and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the body frame 4 . On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654 to unlock the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 . When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 , sliding the outer frame unlocking lever 656 downward causes the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 to move downward, thereby opening the main body frame relative to the outer frame 2 . 4 is unlocked. In this manner, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the front end sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are moved by the hooking member 116 and the upper hooking member. 24 and the lower hooking member 25, it is locked by the biasing force of the lock spring 655. As shown in FIG.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 106. FIG. FIG. 99(a) is a plan view of the body frame, and FIG. 99(b) is a sectional view taken along line BB in (a). FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper portion of the perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind. FIG. 101(a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails and the like viewed from the front and above, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from the front and bottom. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101(a) exploded and viewed from the front. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in which game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour path in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side.

As described above, the body frame 4 can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 at its rear portion, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 by means of the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 that is rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer circumference of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped body that is attached along the upper and left sides of the body frame base 501 in a front view on the rear side. A payout base 551, a sphere tank 552 that is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box shape (container shape) that extends left and right and opens upward, and a ball tank 552 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opens upward. A tank rail 553 extending leftward in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail separated from the first rail cover 554 leftward in front view. a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553; A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the payout base 551, a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 and for paying out game balls B to the player side, It has

The sphere tank 552 has a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from above. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a. It is The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is cut from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f extends from the end of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b to the opposite side (right side wall 552e side) of the front wall 552b with a length of about 3/4 of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction. It is formed over

The tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 on the right end side (upstream side) when viewed from the front, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552 . . The tank rail 553 extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom, and has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction orthogonal to the direction of circulation of the game ball B. have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. In a plan view, the main guiding portion 553a extends leftward from the right end parallel to the axis extending in the leftward and rightward direction from the right end to a position about 1/10 of the total length in the leftward and rightward directions, and then leftward. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move rearward as it goes, and extending from there to the left end parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction. . The main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 has a portion extending from the left end to the right in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction and extending to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. As shown in FIG. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the passage through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) at which only one can be circulated.

In addition, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main guide portion 553a is arranged so that a plurality of game balls B are arranged in the width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guide portion 553a and that changes in width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guide portion 553a. there is By means of this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes downstream. Moreover, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end toward the main guide portion 553a downward. Thus, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing in the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction is aligned in a row toward the downstream side and downward side.

The center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is arranged on the inner side, and the bulging portion 553b is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a slight bulge at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved swelling portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the swelling portion 553b acts depends on the position of the contacting swelling portion 553b. Since the direction changes in various directions, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of spheroids in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends constantly, the game ball B flowing through the bulging portion 553b is always subjected to reaction force in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force becomes difficult to disperse, and the game ball B inside is always pushed in a fixed direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and ball clogging (ball jam) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. By dispersing the directions in which the plurality of game balls B to be pushed are dispersed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball jam) can be made difficult to occur.

The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if a ball jam (ball jam) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the place where the ball is jammed can be specified quickly. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the clogging of the balls can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be enhanced. A decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen through the tank rail 553 from the rear. When a problem occurs in the movement of the movable effect unit or the like, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be checked while the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. It is possible to achieve the effects of

The body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552 and extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552 d of the ball tank 552 . In order to return the game balls B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is inclined so that the height is higher. and an overflow surface portion 501m extending rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to above the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. , and the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the horizontal direction is inclined to be lower, and a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m and a detour passage 552g that guides the

In addition, the body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 among both left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g. Discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion of tank rail 553 where the upper side is open, and a position lower than overflow surface portion 501m on the opposite side of detour passage 552g across discharge portion 551j. An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558) are covered, and the upper surface is an overflow surface portion. and a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the body frame base 501 . The overflow surface portion 501m is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The rear surface of the base body 501a has a flat plate shape extending from a position two to four times the outer diameter of the game ball B lower than the upper side of the rear surface. extended to The overflow surface portion 501m has a length in the left-right direction approximately 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in a front view extends from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is positioned to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the horizontal direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. This overflow surface portion 501m forms a gap of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B between the body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and includes a flat plate-like left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m, The upper end of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o is higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right outer sides, and extends in the front-rear direction in a strip shape. and a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. In addition, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower when viewed from the front. The right stepped portion 501o is longer in the left-right direction than in the front-rear direction. Further, the right stepped portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is raised. The gap between is formed at a height narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m is aligned with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the ball tank 552 in the front view. The right end of the right stepped portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG. Note that the container-like region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as the sphere tank 552 below. The detour passage 552g extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in a flat plate shape, and has a passage surface 552h that is inclined so that the front end is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is lower. and a dam portion extending upward from the opposite side of the passage surface 552h to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 at the left end side (the weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side when viewed from the front. It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes from the right end side. In addition, the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be horizontally inclined in the horizontal direction.

The detour passage 552g is arranged so that the rear end of the bypass passage 552g is aligned with the front end side of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank-like shape and that extends obliquely in the left-right direction. extended. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552g changes its circulation direction from the slanted rear end so as to be perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, from the rear end of the detour passage 552g, since the game ball B is released in a direction substantially perpendicular to the circulation direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552g A game ball B from can be received. In addition, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a substantially vertical direction (perpendicular direction) to the circulation direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552g Ball clogging in 553 can be made difficult to occur.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the obliquely extending rear end allows the game ball B to be released to the upstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrowed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball slugs in the tank rail 553 by discharging the fuel to a wide area.

In addition, the portion where the game ball B is guided by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the rear portion of the left wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outer left portion of the rear wall 552c of the tank rail 553 in front view. A game ball B that passes under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) from inside the ball tank 552 flows through this portion. For this reason, in the portion behind the detour passage 552g in the tank rail 553, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). height). Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured, so that the detour passage 552g The tank rail 553 can surely receive the game ball B guided backward by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.例文帳に追加

The sphere tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f of the left side wall 552d in the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side extending from the left end of the front wall 552b to about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to about 1/2 of the full length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d at about 1/9 of the full length, it extends in parallel with the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it extends parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

In the spherical tank 552, in plan view, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-described shape and the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side. and has an opening 552k penetrating in the vertical direction. In addition, the ball tank 552 has flat flanges extending laterally outward and vertically on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the detour passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper edge of the portion of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edge of the two flange portions 552l is equal to the upper edge of the left wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (body frame base 501). upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled together, the upstream end of the tank rail 553 (right end in front view) is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552 . In addition, the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are positioned (protruded) behind the ball tank 552 . )are doing. The rear end side of the left detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is positioned at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. As shown in FIG. The discharge part 551j is arranged in the ball tank 552 so that when assembled to the main body frame 4, the height lower than the bypass passage 552g is lowered rearward in a stepwise manner to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in front view to the tank rail 553, it extends leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). position in the vicinity), and then extends backward.

The external terminal plate 558 has a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a arranged in the left-right direction on its rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the gripping portion can be opened by operating a lever to grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551 . The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG.

Next, the function and effect of the upper portion of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lowered as indicated by the white arrows in FIG. The left stepped portion 501n has a rear right corner, and the right stepped portion 501o has a rear left corner. Also, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side thereof is lowered when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lowered.

Then, when the amount of the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island equipment, first, the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest in the upper edge of the outer periphery, is crossed. The game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can escape to the overflow surface portion 501m, and can be made to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 104). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from increasing further in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). , it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball jam) due to engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 .

Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 105, the game balls B overflowing the overflow surface portion 501m from the ball tank 552 can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressure on the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and clogging of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 can be avoided. can be prevented. In addition, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m can be prevented from spilling outside (rear side) of the body frame 4. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the game ball B spilled outside the body frame 4 is caught between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and the body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552 Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

In addition, since the height of the upper edge of the outer periphery of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than the overflow portion 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g The upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, after overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m over the overflow portion 552f, the game ball B circulating from the overflow surface portion 501m to the detour passage 552g is on the left side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from returning from the detour passage 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the side of the detour passage 552g presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the ball is released. It is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B in the tank 552 .

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is positioned from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). Since the height is also high, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) with respect to the detour passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552g is prevented from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a constant direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the detour passage 552g can be in a constant direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pushing each other and getting caught due to the direction of the pressure applied to the game balls B being varied, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B can be prevented. can be prevented.

In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guiding portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding portion 553a, thereby aligning in the horizontal direction. Since they are aligned, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the tank rail 553 has a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged in a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, the game ball released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the effects described above can be reliably achieved.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side so that the width of the main guiding portion 553a becomes smaller. Since they are changed so as to coincide with each other, a plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a line in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B circulates decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side) By circulating a plurality of game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the height direction to the downstream side through the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced and a row is formed. can be aligned. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide a plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the capacity inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552 .

An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far from the ball tank 552 to which the game balls B are supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island equipment bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to reach (abut) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , the contact of the game ball B does not cause a short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring.

In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed backward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is placed in the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent upstream of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 104) due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and clogging of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 occurs. can be prevented.

In addition, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m, and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 104, these inclinations can guide the game ball B to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g, and the game ball B spills outside the body frame 4, causing a problem. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B passes under the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game balls are piled up on the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) capable of stacking the game balls B upward can be secured. , the game ball B guided by the detour passage 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 107 to 115. FIG. FIG. 107 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine, showing the inside of a game area in which the game panel is made opaque and game balls circulate. FIG. 108 is a front view showing an enlarged vicinity of the attacker unit on the game board. 109 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front right, FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front left, and FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board with the game panel made transparent. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board showing the decorative pattern of the game panel and the obstacle nail.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which game balls B are hit by the player's operation of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 . In the game area 5a, there are a general prize winning opening 2001, a first start opening 2002, a gate portion, and a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B. 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a big prize winning port 2005 are provided. Therefore, in the game board 5, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. It is for playing a game that allows the user to enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182 and the circulation of the game ball B within the game area 5a.

The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 is provided. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 108) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a. In addition, the game board 5 includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is performed by hitting game balls B into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 97 and 168, etc.) for controlling the contents.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side. A drive board unit 1700, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided.

An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁A drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600 .

The game panel 1100 has a transparent flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000, and holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 113) which is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The drive board unit 1700 is provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit according to the command from the panel relay board 1710 which relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510. A performance drive board 1720 for driving the decoration board and the drive motor, and a drive board box 1730 housing the panel relay board 1710 and the performance drive board 1720 are provided. The drive board box 1730 is hinge-rotatably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 on the left side when viewed from the rear, and detachably attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 on the right side when viewed from the rear.

The table unit 2000 includes a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to receive the game ball B hit into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the game areas. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the 5a, a gate part 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, A second starting port 2004 that enables acceptance of the game ball B according to the ordinary lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 A big prize winning port 2005 that enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery that is drawn by receiving the game ball B, and the game balls accepted in the big prize winning port 2005 are distributed. A receiving space 2006 of a predetermined size, and a first receiving port 2007 and a second receiving port 2008 for receiving game balls in the receiving space 2006 are provided.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002 attached directly above the lower end of the playing area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the playing area 5a, and a front surface of the starting opening unit 2100. A side unit 2200 which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning openings 2001, and a side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the upper left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. A side slope 2300 and a general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening are attached to the right side of the starting opening unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. 2005, an attacker unit 2400 having a receiving space 2006, a first receiving port 2007, and a second receiving port 2008, and above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and approximately in the center of the game area 5a in front view A frame-like center accessory 2500 attached slightly above and a presentation unit 2600 attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the frame of the center accessory 2500 are provided.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. and a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600 . In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first starting sensor that detects the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. A mouth sensor 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting near the first starting mouth 2002 are provided (see FIG. 168).

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a back-back effect unit 3100 attached to the rear part in the back box 3010, a back-center effect unit 3200 attached to the front side of the back-back effect unit 3100, and a back-center effect unit 3200. A back right effect unit 3300 attached to the front right part, a back upper effect unit 3400 attached to the left side of the front upper part of the back middle effect unit 3200, and a back inner effect unit 3200 attached to the front lower part. A back bottom effect unit 3500, a back right effect unit 3300, a back top effect unit 3400, and a back front effect unit 3600 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 in front of the back bottom effect unit 3500 are provided.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 116 to 120. FIG. 116 is a front view of the front constituent members and the game panel in the game board, FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel as seen from the front, and FIG. 118 is the front constituent member and the game panel as seen from the back. is a perspective view. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel and viewed from the front, and FIG. 120 is an exploded perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel and viewed from the rear.

The front structural member 1000 is formed transparent as a whole. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc from a lower end on the left side of the center in the front view in a front view along the circumferential direction in a clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending obliquely upward to the right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc from the lower center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined from the right end of the out-guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004 . from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail An impact part 1006 which connects the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and contacts the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 is provided.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Furthermore, the front structural member 1000 has an out port 1008 penetrating back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view within the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide section 1003 passes through the out port 1008 and is discharged to the rear of the front constituent member 1000 (game panel 1100).

In addition, the front component member 1000 is provided on the outside of the portion near the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 extending substantially perpendicularly from the lower ends thereof, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1009 projects backward from the security cover 170 on the door frame 3. inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch 1010 is aligned with the notch of a panel holder (not shown) in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch pass through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

Further, the front structural member 1000 includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 formed in the upper left corner in a front view, to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp pasting portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. there is

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 115 to 123 and the like. FIG. 121(a) is a front view showing the panel board, the upper left panel decorative board and the lower left panel decorative board in the game panel, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the panel board at the site of the specific obstacle nail, and (c) ) is a partial cross-sectional view of the panel plate at the location of the obstructing nail overlapping the decorative pattern. FIG. 122 is a front view of a game board showing the relationship between decorative patterns and obstacle nails on a game panel. FIG. 123(a) is a front view showing the relationship between the decoration pattern on the panel plate of the game panel and the back front decoration substrate of the back front effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a panel decoration of the panel plate and the panel decoration substrate. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship with an LED for use.

The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front structural member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

In addition, the game panel 1100 includes a panel decoration substrate 1130 mounted with a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a for emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110, and a substrate mounting the panel decoration substrate 1130 to the panel holder 1120. a cover 1135; The panel decoration substrate 1130 includes an upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 arranged at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front, and a lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 arranged at the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front. The board cover 1135 is composed of an upper left board cover 1136 for attaching the upper left panel decoration board 1131 to the panel holder 1120 and a lower left board cover 1137 for attaching the lower left panel decoration board 1132 to the panel holder 1120 .

A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder, and is the minimum required thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is implanted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that In addition, in this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a and corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000 . In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed through the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

In addition, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes 1113 formed in the form of round holes and short elongated holes penetrating in the front and rear direction, and the upper edge and the lower edge are spaced apart in the left and right direction, respectively, and the thickness of the panel plate 1110 is thin. and a plurality of engagement steps 1114 . The positioning hole 1113 is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting the projecting pin 1124 of the panel holder 1120 . The engaging stepped portion 1114 is engaged with the engaging claw 1125 and the engaging piece 1126 of the panel holder 1120 to be detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 .

As shown in FIG. 121(a) and the like, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500 offset to the upper right from the center in front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game ball B (the circumferential direction of the frame shape) has a plurality of left and lower sides from the center. It has a wide width in which the balls B can be lined up, and the upper side and the right side have a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be lined up. In the present embodiment, in the panel plate 1110, as shown in FIG. 121(a), the widened portion is designated as the decorative pattern forming region 1101, and the narrowed portion is designated as the decorative pattern forming region 1101. A decorative pattern non-formation region 1102 is provided.

This panel plate 1110 has a decorative pattern forming area 1101 on the rear surface thereof with a decorative pattern 1150 in which a predetermined pattern is formed by a plurality of linear grooves (that is, a plurality of linear recessed grooves). The decorative pattern 1150 of the present embodiment is a design that looks like cracked glass. Decorative pattern 1150 has a V-shaped cross section. The decoration pattern 1150 can be seen from the front side of the player even when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is not illuminated, and decorates the inside of the game area 5a. In addition, when the panel board 1110 emits light from the panel decoration LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 to allow light to enter the inside of the panel board 1110, the decoration pattern 1150 formed in a crack-like pattern is decorated with light. can be done.

The decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 includes a radiating portion 1151 that mainly reflects forward the light emitted from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 to the inside, and a radiating portion 1151 that mainly reflects the light emitted from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 to the inside. and a radiation guide portion 1152 that reflects and guides light along a line. The radiating light guiding portion 1152 satisfies at least one of a deeper groove depth and a longer circumferential length in cross section than the radiating portion 1151 . Radiation light guide part 1152 is formed so as to connect (or intersect) a plurality of radiation parts 1151 , and diffusely reflect light emitted from the peripheral surface of panel plate 1110 into the interior of panel plate 1110 . , the light can be guided in the direction in which the groove extends. In other words, the radiating light guide part 1152 plays a role of guiding light from one of the plurality of radiating parts 1151 connected to itself to the other. Within limits, the photosensitivity of the entire decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 (proportion of the amount of light emitted (reflected) forward) is increased. More specifically, as indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 121( a ), the radiant light guide part 1152 normally emits light from the panel decoration LED 1130 a of the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 and the panel decoration LED 1130 a of the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 . The light is guided to the radiation portion 1151 arranged outside the range of the light guide region 1103, and the radiation portion 1151 is caused to emit light, thereby increasing the photosensitivity of the decoration pattern 1150 as a whole.

As a result, the radiating light guide portion 1152 of the decorative pattern 1150 formed in a portion where the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is difficult to reach (usually a portion outside the light guide region 1103) is formed by the radiant light guide portion 1152. It is possible to allow light to reach the radiating portion 1151 and decorate it with a sufficient amount of light. Therefore, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is caused to emit light, the light incident on the inside of the panel plate 1110 is reflected forward from the radiation portion 1151 and the radiation light guide portion 1152, resulting in a crack-like pattern. The formed decorative pattern 1150 can be illuminated with uniform brightness over substantially the entire area.

The panel plate 1110 has a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement. The plurality of obstacle nails N has a specific obstacle nail N1 which plays an important role in the game. The specific obstacle nail N1 is arranged near the warp entrance 2501, the general winning entrance 2001, the first starting entrance 2002, and the gate section 2003, as shown in FIG. If the specific obstacle nail N1 is distorted or bent due to contact with the game ball B, the probability that the game ball B will be accepted into the warp entrance 2501 or the general winning opening 2001 will change. It is subject to constant maintenance so that there is no distortion or the like.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121(b) and 122, a predetermined range (for example, a radius of 1.5 mm to 3 mm) around the specific obstacle nail N1 is defined as the decoration prohibited area 1104. The radiation part 1151 and the radiation guide part 1152 of the decorative pattern 1150 are not formed inside. As a result, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, the specific obstacle nail N1 can be easily seen, and whether or not the specific obstacle nail N1 is distorted can be easily confirmed. In addition, since the grooves of the radiating part 1151 and the radiating light guide part 1152 are not formed in the decoration prohibited area 1140 around the specific obstacle nail N1, the specific obstacle nail N1 is adjusted during maintenance or the like. When the obstacle nail N1 is hit, the force is transmitted from the specific obstacle nail N1 to the radiation part 1151 and the radiation light guide part 1152, and the panel plate 1110 can be prevented from breaking or cracking.

Among the obstacle nails N other than the specific obstacle nail N1, the obstacle nail N planted in the portion overlapping the decorative pattern 1150 is planted in the panel board 1110 as shown in FIG. 121(c). The tip of the groove protrudes into the groove (radiation light guiding portion 1152 in the figure) forming the decorative pattern 1150 . Therefore, when the LED 1130a for panel decoration of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is caused to emit light to allow light to enter the inside of the panel plate 1110, light is emitted from the groove of the decoration pattern 1150 to the tip of the obstructing nail N protruding inside the groove. The light is reflected by the inclined tip of the obstructing nail N, and the tip of the obstructing nail N can be brightened. As a result, the obstacle nail N can be illuminated, and the player can see a luminous effect which has not been seen in the past pachinko machines. In addition, in the game area 5a, the decorative pattern 1150 may be intentionally overlapped with the obstructing nail N planted at a special site. The obstacle nail N in a special part can be illuminated, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the obstacle nail N in a special part, and the game ball B can be driven aiming at the special obstacle nail N. can be operated.

In addition, the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 is such that part of the radiating portion 1151 and the radiating light guide portion 1152 formed in the linear grooves is, as shown in FIG. The back front decoration board 3603 of the back front effect unit 3600 is formed along the inner outer edge facing the central side of the front view game area 5a. As a result, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 causes the decoration pattern 1150 (the radiation portion 1151 and the radiation light guide portion 1152) to emit light, the inner outer edge of the back front decoration substrate 3603 can be seen from the player side. Can be decorated with luminescence. In addition, as a result, the inner outer edge of the back front decoration substrate 3603 is decorated with light emission in the front view, so that the back front decoration substrate 3603 can be relatively darkened and difficult to see, and the game area in the front view. The appearance inside 5a can be improved.

In this embodiment, the decorative pattern 1150 consisting of linear grooves is formed on the panel plate 1110 by cutting. Also, the decorative pattern 1150 is formed before forming the implantation holes for implanting the obstructing nails N. As shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to avoid clogging the implantation hole with cutting debris discharged by the formation of the decorative pattern 1150, and the obstructive nail N can be implanted in a favorable condition.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a holding stepped portion 1123 which is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and the holding stepped portion 1123 is substantially the same size as the game area 5a and extends in the front-rear direction. It has a through hole 1121 that penetrates.

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a notch portion 1122 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch portion 1122 is formed to match the notch portion 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion are penetrated to penetrate the lower portion. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full ball path unit 610 face forward.

The panel holder 1120 has a plurality of protruding pins 1124 that protrude forward from the holding stepped portion 1123 and are inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110 , and arranged outside the holding stepped portion 1123 . Three engaging claws 1125 elastically engage with the engaging stepped portions 1114 at the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and the holding stepped portion 1123 protrudes upward from the lower outer side of the panel. A pair of engaging pieces 1126 that respectively engage with the two engaging stepped portions 1114 on the lower side of the plate 1110 are provided. The panel holder 1120 engages the engagement stepped portion 1114 on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement piece 1126 from diagonally above the front, and then moves the upper portion of the panel plate 1110 rearward to move the upper and lower left corners. By elastically engaging the engaging stepped portion 1114 of the inclined portion with the engaging claw 1125 , the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being accommodated in the holding stepped portion 1123 . At this time, the projecting pins 1124 of the panel holder 1120 are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110 to position the panel plate 1110 at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120 .

The panel holder 1120 has two board mounting recesses 1127 that are recessed from the front to the rear outside the holding stepped part 1123 at the upper left corner and the upper right corner in front view, and the rear side of each board mounting recess 1127 . and two connecting recesses 1128 that are recessed forward from the . An upper left board cover 1136 to which an upper left panel decoration board 1131 is attached and a left lower board cover 1137 to which a lower left panel decoration board 1132 is attached are attached to the two board mounting recesses 1127 from the front. The upper board mounting recess 1127 is located behind the function display unit 1400 . In addition, the lower board mounting recess 1127 is located behind the certificate stamp pasting portion 1012 in the front component 1000 . In the board mounting recess 1127 on the lower side, an engaging claw 1125 that engages with the engaging stepped portion 1114 at the lower left oblique portion of the panel plate 1110 protrudes from the boundary side with the holding stepped portion 1123 .

In the connecting recess 1128 of the panel holder 1120, the connection connector 1131a of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 attached to the board mounting recess 1127 and the connection connector 1132a of the lower left panel decoration board 1132 pass through the rear wall of the board mounting recess 1127. 1131b and 1132b. This facilitates connection and removal of connection cables (not shown) to and from the connectors 1131b and 1132b.

The panel decoration substrate 1130 is composed of an upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 and a lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 . The upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 has a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on its front surface. The plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a of the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 are arranged along the upper left oblique portion of the peripheral edge of the panel plate 1110, with the uppermost side directed rightward and the lowermost side directed downward. It is mounted so as to irradiate light, and the rest is mounted so as to irradiate light downward and to the right so that it is perpendicular to the oblique portion on the upper left of panel plate 1110 . The upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 has a connector 1131a attached to the rear surface thereof, the connector 1131a protruding rearward.

A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a are mounted on the front surface of the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 . The lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 is notched so as to avoid the lower engaging claw 1125 of the panel holder 1120, and in a state where the notched portion is avoided, the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a are arranged above and to the right. It is mounted so as to irradiate light upward and upward. The lower left panel decoration board 1132 has a connector 1132a attached to the rear surface thereof, the connector 1132a protruding rearward.

The panel decoration substrate 1130 is made of a white member and is inconspicuous from the front. In addition, the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 are side-view type wide-angle full-color LEDs, and can also emit light forward.

As shown in FIG. 123(b), the panel decoration substrate 1130 is arranged such that the front surface (plate surface) on which the side-view type panel decoration LED 1130a is mounted is parallel to the surface of the panel plate 1110. there is As a result, the dimension of the panel decoration substrate 1130 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner than the panel plate 1110, and the panel decoration substrate 1130 can be attached to the panel holder 1120 without any problem, and the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) can be installed. The decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 can be decorated with light while suppressing an increase in the dimension in the front-rear direction.

In addition, the panel decoration substrate 1130 has its plate surface parallel to the surface of the panel plate 1110, and has a size that is more than sufficient for the size of the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the plate surface (front surface). The plate surface of In other words, the panel decoration substrate 1130 has another area (surplus) that is 40 to 100 times larger than the LED mounting area occupied by the plurality of mounted panel decoration LEDs 1130a, where the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a are not mounted. area). As a result, the attachment strength of the panel decoration substrate 1130 can be increased, and the panel decoration substrate 1130 and the panel plate 1110 can be securely attached to each other even if vibrations and shocks generated during transportation, installation, maintenance, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 act. It is possible to suppress the deviation of the optical axis of the panel decoration LED 1130a and prevent the incidence of light on the panel plate 1110 from being defective.

Furthermore, since the panel decoration board 1130 is attached to the board mounting recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120 through the board cover 1135, vibrations and impacts that occur during transportation, installation, maintenance, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 are minimized. is difficult to be transmitted to the panel decoration substrate 1130 . Therefore, it is possible to reduce the vibration or the like acting on the panel decoration substrate 1130 (the panel decoration LED 1130a), and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the durability of the panel decoration LED 1130a. and the panel plate 1110, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the optical axis of the panel decoration LED 1130a and prevent troubles in the incidence of light on the panel plate 1110. .

The panel decoration substrate 1130 is attached to the rear side of the substrate cover 1135 . The board cover 1135 is formed in a translucent frosted glass shape so that the panel decoration board 1130 attached to the rear side is difficult to recognize, and is formed so as to diffuse the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a. there is As a result, the light emitted (leaked) forward from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 illuminates the player, thereby reducing the possibility that the player feels dazzled. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The game panel 1100 of the present embodiment has a crack-shaped decorative pattern 1150 formed in the decorative pattern forming area 1101 of the transparent panel plate 1110, and is transparent and has a three-dimensional effect compared to the conventional decoration using a printed sheet. A certain decoration can be shown to the player. When the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is caused to emit light, the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 can be illuminated, and the game ball B in the game area 5a, which has not been seen in the past pachinko machines, can be illuminated. A player can see the luminous decoration in the distribution area.

In addition, since the decorative pattern 1150 is formed only in the decorative pattern forming region 1101 in which the game ball B circulates in various flow paths in the game region 5a, the decorative pattern 1150 is formed in the entire game region 5a. The cost for forming the decorative pattern 1150 can be reduced compared to the case of forming the decorative pattern 1150 .

Furthermore, in the game panel 1100 of the present embodiment, the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 is arranged behind the function display unit 1400. Therefore, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 is caused to emit light, the function display unit 1400 is displayed. It is possible to illuminate from behind, and the player can see the luminescence performance in which the function display unit 1400 (function display part), which has not been found in the conventional pachinko machines, is decorated with luminescence.

In addition, since the game panel 1100 of the present embodiment has the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 behind the certificate stamp pasting portion 1012, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 is caused to emit light, the certificate stamp pasting portion 1012 A stuck certificate stamp (not shown) can be illuminated from the rear to emit light, and a player can see a luminous performance in which the certificate stamp is decorated with light, which has not been seen in the past pachinko machines.

Also, in the game panel 1100 of this embodiment, no condensing lens, diffusion lens, or the like is arranged between the panel decoration LED 1130 a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 and the side surface of the panel plate 1110 . As a result, the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is directly irradiated to the side surface of the panel plate 1110 over a wide range, and the light can be incident on a wide range inside the panel plate 1110, thereby forming the decorative pattern 1150. It can be beautifully decorated with light emission.

Furthermore, in the game panel 1100 of this embodiment, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a panel decoration substrate 1130 (panel decoration LED 1130a) for luminous decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 formed on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. When changing to a panel board 1110 having a different decorative pattern in order to change the model of the game board 5 or make a minor change to the model, the panel board 1110 can be replaced only by replacing the panel board 1110. Holder 1120, front component 1000, panel decoration substrate 1130, and substrate cover 1135 can be used as common parts. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has high versatility with other models having the panel board 1110 with the other decoration pattern 1150, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is suppressed. be able to.

Also, in the game panel 1100 of this embodiment, the panel decoration substrate 1130 is mounted in the substrate mounting recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120 via the substrate cover 1135, and the panel decoration substrate 1130 and the panel plate 1110 are separately attached. I am trying to install it. As a result, the panel holder 1120 from which the board cover 1135 and the panel decorative board 1130 are removed can be used for a pachinko machine (game board) having a normal panel board 1110 on which the decorative pattern 1150 is not applied. 1120 and front component 1000 can be common parts. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has high versatility with other models having the panel board 1110 with the other decoration pattern 1150, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is suppressed. be able to. When using a model having a panel plate 1110 with no decorative pattern 1150, a dummy board cover 1135 may be attached to the board mounting recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120. The board cover 1135 and the panel decoration board 1130 may be left attached.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched rearward from the front end at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 in the state assembled to the game board 5 from the lower side and the rear side, and the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 , the ejecting portion 1201 is located directly above the ejected ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620 b of the substrate unit 620 of the body frame 4 . As a result, all the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. The ball can be discharged from the discharge part 1201 formed in the lower part to the discharge ball receiving part 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Main control unit 1300 in game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 111 to 113 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 168) for controlling game content, payout of game balls B, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. and has.

The main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When one sealing mechanism is used to close the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be traced. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

A main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second starter sensor 2402, a big prize winner sensor 2403, a first entry sensor 2404, a second entry sensor 2405, a starter solenoid 2412, and an attacker. The solenoid 2414, the distribution solenoid 2416, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, and the magnetic sensor 3003 are connected.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 107 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the ordinary lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400 is composed of a status indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the gaming status (not shown in detail), and two LEDs for displaying the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate section 2003. A normal symbol display made up of LEDs and a normal reservation display made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the passage of the game ball B through the gate portion 2003 are provided.

In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002. The first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2004 A second special pattern indicator consisting of eight LEDs to be displayed, and a second special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004. ing.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 has five LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the big winning opening 2005 when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a "jackpot" or the like. It has a display.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc., can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 111 and 113 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the performance display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 168) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Box 1505 and . The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control part 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the side of the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. FIG. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at substantially the center. The performance display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 . The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

The performance display device 1600 includes two upper fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the upper surface and a lower fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the lower surface. This performance display device 1600 has a liquid crystal screen facing forward, and two fixed grooves 3010c that are open to the upper inner peripheral surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, are fitted into the back box. After inserting the two upper fixed pieces 1601 obliquely behind the 3010, the lower fixed piece 1602 side is moved forward to insert the lower fixed piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right at .

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end part of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. , and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 .

The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving the game ball B struck into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 A first starting port 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate part 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. , to the second starting port 2004 that allows the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a big prize winning port 2005 which enables reception of the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B.

A plurality of (here, four) general winning holes 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and three are arranged on the left side and one is arranged on the right side with respect to the center in the horizontal direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowest end at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged near the right end in the front view in the game area 5a and below the center in the vertical direction. The second starting port 2004 is arranged directly below the gate portion 2003 . The big winning opening 2005 is arranged at a height between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 on the upper right side of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the center in the horizontal direction.

The table unit 2000 is attached directly above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start opening 2002. On the other hand, there is a side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 and has three general prize openings 2001, and a side slope that is attached along the inner rail 1002 at the upper left of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300, which is attached to the right side of the starter unit 2100 in front view, which is the lower right corner in front view in the game area 5a. An attacker unit 2400 having a receiving space 2006, a first receiving port 2007, and a second receiving port 2008, and above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 attached to the side and a presentation unit 2600 attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the frame of the center accessory 2500 are provided.

[5-8-1. starting unit]
The starting port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received. The starting port unit 2100 is transparent except for the front surface of the first starting port 2002, and the rear side (the back unit 3000 through the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100) can be visually recognized.

By attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the panel plate 1110, the general prize winning port 2001 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and is opened upward, and the first starting port 2002 is positioned at the center, which will be described later. It is positioned directly below the center of the stage 2503 of the role object 2500 . Therefore, when the game ball B is released downward from the center of the stage 2503, it will be received in the first starting port 2002 with a very high probability. This starting port unit 2100 can guide the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the panel plate 1110 and deliver it to the guideway of the back front effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000. - 特許庁A game ball B received in the first starting hole 2002 is detected by the first starting hole sensor 3002 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 168).

[5-8-2. side unit]
The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 is provided with three general prize winning openings 2001 which are open to receive game balls B at all times. The three general prize winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002 .

In the side unit 2200, the rightmost general prize winning opening 2001 opens upward at the same height as the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, and the general winning opening 2001 on the middle side in the horizontal direction is on the right side. The leftmost general prize-winning opening 2001 is higher than the middle-side general prize-winning opening 2001 and opens upward to the upper left when viewed from the front. there is

The side unit 2200 is transparent except for the front surfaces of the three general winning holes 2001, and the rear side (the back unit 3000 through the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100) can be seen. By attaching the side unit 2200 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 , the three general winning openings 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 . This side unit 2200 guides the game ball received in the general winning hole 2001 to the rear of the panel plate 1110 and can transfer it to the guideway of the back front effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 . A game ball received in the general winning hole 2001 is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 168).

[5-8-3. side slope]
The side slope 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the upper left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. The side slope 2300 has a shelf 2301 that slopes downward at the right end when viewed from the front. The side slope 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 , and the shelf portion 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 .

The side slope 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right. The side slope 2300 is entirely transparent, and the rear side (the back unit 3000 through the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100) can be seen.

[5-8-4. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a to the right of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 from the front. This attacker unit 2400 includes one general winning opening 2001 out of four general winning openings 2001, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, a receiving space 2006, a first receiving opening 2007, and a second opening. A receiving port 2008 is provided (see FIG. 108, etc.).

The attacker unit 2400 has an L-shaped outer shape in a front view in which the upper end on the right side extends upward from the approximate center in the left-right direction. This attacker unit 2400 has a gate portion 2003 in the upper right corner through which the game balls B circulate (pass) up and down, and a second starting port 2004 that can be opened forward directly below the gate portion 2003 is arranged. It is In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a large winning opening 2005 that can be opened upward at the lower left of the second starting opening 2004, and is always open obliquely rightward at the lower left of the large winning opening 2005. One general prize winning opening 2001 is arranged. Further, in the attacker unit 2400, a receiving space 2006 having a predetermined size is arranged below the big winning hole 2005 in which the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 circulates. In the receiving space 2006, the attacker unit 2400 is provided with a first receiving port 2007 that can be opened upward. Two receptacles 2008 are located.

In the attacker unit 2400, the general prize winning opening 2001 is slightly larger than the game ball B, and the gate part 2003 is slightly larger than the game ball B and penetrates vertically. In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a second start opening 2004 that is slightly larger than the game ball and opens forward, and a large winning opening 2005 that is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball in the horizontal direction. It is five times wider and opens upwards.

The attacker unit 2400 includes a gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B passing through the gate section 2003, a second start opening sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005. A big winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the received game ball B, a first reception opening sensor 2404 for detecting the game ball B received in the first reception opening 2007, and a game ball received in the second reception opening 2008. and a second inlet sensor 2405 that detects B (see FIG. 168).

The attacker unit 2400 opens and closes the second starter door 2411 capable of opening and closing the second starter 2004 and the second starter door 2411 according to the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003. A starting opening solenoid 2412, a large winning opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the large winning opening 2005, and a large winning opening door 2413 are selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. The attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to the result of one special lottery or the result of the second special lottery and the first receiving port 2007 are opened and closed (the game ball B that is received in the big winning port 2005 and circulates in the receiving space 2006 is first 2007 or second receiving port 2008), and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. A distribution solenoid 2416 that opens and closes according to the result of one special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is provided.

The attacker unit 2400 extends vertically from the upper right corner when viewed from the front, and has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 at the upper end and the lower end, respectively. , the left side passage 2422 extending vertically to the lower side than the second starting port 2004 on the left side of the gate portion 2003 and through which the game ball B can flow, and the second starting port 2004 after extending vertically on the right side of the gate portion 2003 A right side passage 2423 that is bent to merge with the gate passage 2421 above and through which the game ball B can flow, below the gate passage 2421 and left side passage 2422, and above the big winning opening 2005 It extends leftward from below the gate passage 2421 so that the left end side is low, and extends leftward so that the left end side is low from the left end of the attacker passage 2424 through which the game ball B can flow and the big winning opening 2005. and a discharge shelf 2425 .

As shown in FIG. 108, the gate passage 2421 communicates with the left side passage 2422 and the right side passage 2423 at the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 so that the game ball B can pass therethrough. there is Therefore, the game ball B entering the gate passage 2421 from above passes through the gate portion 2003 and then passes in front of the second starting port 2004 and flows down to the attacker passage 2424 . In addition, the game ball B that has entered the left side passage 2422 from above flows down to the attacker passage 2424 through the left side of each of the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004, and after passing through the left side of the gate portion 2003, There is a pattern in which it bends to the right, enters the gate passage 2421 , passes in front of the second starting port 2004 and flows down to the attacker passage 2424 . On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the right side passage 2423 from above passes through the right side of the gate portion 2003, bends to the left, enters the gate passage 2421, passes in front of the second starting port 2004, and passes through the attacker passage. 2424. When the game ball B passes in front of the second start port 2004, the game ball B is received in the second start port 2004 if the second start port 2004 is open.

The second starting opening door 2411 can close from the front the second starting opening 2004 that opens forward, and near the lower end of the second starting opening 2004, the lower side is rotatable around an axis that extends left and right. installed. The second starter door 2411 is driven by the starter solenoid 2412 to rotate (pivot) such that the upper side moves forward, thereby opening the second starter door 2004 and closing the gate passage 2421. , The game ball B that has flowed down to the front of the second starting port 2004 can be guided to the second starting port 2004 side and accepted by the second starting port 2004. The second starter door 2411 closes the second starter port 2004 when the starter solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the second starter port 2004 when the starter solenoid is ON (when energized). Let

The grand prize opening door 2413 is formed in a plate-like shape extending to the left and right so as to extend forward and backward and the left end is lowered, and by moving forward and backward, the grand prize gate 2005, which is open upward, is opened and closed. It is possible. The big winning opening door 2413 moves forward to close the big winning opening 2005, guides the game ball B that has circulated through the attacker passage 2424 to the left, and can deliver it onto the release shelf 2425. . In addition, the large winning opening door 2413 is driven back by the attacker solenoid 2414 to open the large winning opening 2005, and after flowing through any of the gate passage 2421, the left side passage 2422, and the right side passage 2423, the attacker The game ball B that has circulated through the passage 2424 can be received by the big winning opening 2005 . The big winning opening door 2413 closes the big winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the big winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when energized).

In the receiving space 2006, the distribution piece 2415 is formed in a plate-like shape that extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction so that the right end is lowered, and opens upward by advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction. The first receiving port 2007 (V winning port) can be opened and closed. The sorting piece 2415 moves forward to close the first receiving port 2007, guides the game ball B received in the big winning port 2005 to the right, and the second receiving port is always open upward. 2008 can be accepted. In addition, the sorting piece 2415 is driven by the sorting solenoid 2416 to move backward to open the first receiving port 2007, and the game ball B received in the big winning port 2005 is transferred to the first receiving port 2007 with a high probability. can be accepted by This sorting piece 2415 closes the first receiving port 2007 when the sorting solenoid 2416 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the first receiving port 2007 when the sorting solenoid 2416 is ON (when energized). Let In other words, the sorting piece 2415 can sort the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 so that it can be received in either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 .

With this attacker unit 2400 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the gate passage 2421 is located below (slightly to the left of) the downstream opening of the right guide passage 2510 in the center accessory 2500, which will be described later. In addition, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005 are located above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500. Also, the general prize winning opening 2001 is located at substantially the same height as the first starting opening 2002 . In addition, when attached to the panel plate 1110, a plurality of obstructing nails N are present between the lower end of the right guide passage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 and the upper end (gate portion 2003).

Next, the flow of the game ball B in the attacker unit 2400 will be explained. Since the gate portion 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 is located above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 when assembled on the game board 5, even if the game ball B is released from the stage 2503, the gate portion 2003 does not pass through Therefore, only the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 (the right guide passage 2510) can pass through the gate portion 2003. Downstream of the right guide passage 2510, a left side passage 2422, a gate passage 2421, and a right side passage 2423 are opened side by side from the left. It will enter into something.

Then, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 passes in front of the second start opening door 2411 that closes the second start opening 2004 directly below, and is discharged from the gate passage 2421 to the attacker passage 2424 . At this time, if the second start door 2411 is rotated forward and is in the open position, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 comes into contact with the back surface of the second start door 2411 and It is guided to the second starting port 2004 side and is received in the second starting port 2004 . The second start door 2411 is selected according to the ordinary lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003 (the game ball B is detected by the gate sensor 2401) (the ordinary lottery result is "ordinary winning ”), by appropriately setting the lottery time of the normal lottery result, the opening and closing timing of the second start opening door 2411, etc., the game ball B itself that has drawn the “normal hit” can also be accepted into

The game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2402 and discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. FIG.

This gate passage 2421 communicates with the downstream end of the right side passage 2423 on the right side of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004, so that the right side passage 2423 on the right side of the gate portion 2003 The game ball B that has entered is allowed to circulate to the front side of the second starting port 2004 without passing through the gate portion 2003 . Therefore, in the state in which the second starting port door 2411 moves to the open position and the second starting port 2004 can be received, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 or the game that has passed through the right side passage 2423 Ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 with a very high probability. The gate passage 2421 communicates with the middle of the left side passage 2422 at the left side of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004. There is a possibility that the game ball B that has entered is accepted by the second starting port 2004 .

If the game ball flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 is not accepted by the second starting port 2004, it is released from the lower end of the gate passage 2421 or the left side passage 2422 to the attacker passage 2424.

The game ball B released to the attacker passage 2424 is guided to the left along the slope, and is released downward from the left end of the release shelf 2425 through the large winning opening door 2413 closing the large winning opening 2005. be done. At this time, if the big winning gate door 2413 closing the big winning gate 2005 is retracted to open the big winning gate 2005, the game ball B released into the attacker passage 2424 wins the big prize with a high probability. It is received in mouth 2005 . The game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 is sent to the receiving space 2006 after being detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403, and is sent to either the first receiving opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008 by the sorting piece 2415. distributed to

The game ball B received in the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 is detected by the first receiving port sensor 2404 or the second receiving port sensor 2405, and is located below the back side of the game panel 1100 (substrate). holder 1200).

A game ball B released downward from the release shelf 2425 may be received in one general winning hole 2001 arranged below. A game ball B received in the general prize winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is guided to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 and then delivered to the guideway of the back front effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000. - 特許庁On the other hand, game balls that are not accepted in the general prize winning opening 2001 pass through the out opening 1008 at the lower end of the game area 5a and are discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100.

[5-8-5. Center role]
The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged above the starting unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a, and slightly above the center when viewed from the front. It is attached to the front of 1110. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and through the frame, the production display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 and various production units provided in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front. can.

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, except for the lower side, so that the game ball B hit into the game area 5a is positioned within the frame. to prevent intrusion into

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2501 which is open to allow the game ball B in the game area 5a to enter, and a frame which can release the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2501 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view. A warp exit 2502 opened inside and a stage 2503 capable of releasing the game ball B released from the warp exit 2502 into the game area 5a after rolling in the horizontal direction are provided.

The stage 2503 of the center role 2500 has a curved shape with the central side in the left-right direction depressed, and is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the starter unit 2100. 1110), the center position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. This stage 2503 is tilted so that a portion (top) slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction and the lowest portion (valley) on both left and right sides are lowered forward. , and the game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5 , the elevated part (top) in the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2503 is located directly above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 . As a result, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503, it will be received by the first starting port 2002 with a very high probability.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 has a right guide passage 2510 that guides the game ball B flowing down along the outer peripheral surface on the right side in front view slightly to the left and then releases it downward. The right guide passage 2510 is formed such that the downstream end of the right guide passage 2510 is located slightly to the right of the gate portion 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 when the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. there is

The center accessory 2500 is formed so that the outer peripheral surface on the right side is separated from the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 by a little larger than the outer diameter of the game ball when assembled on the game board 5 . Therefore, when the game ball B circulates on the right side of the center role 2500, it circulates along the outer peripheral surface of the right side of the center role 2500, and all the game balls B circulating on the right side of the center role 2500 are on the right guide path. Enter 2510 and be guided. As a result, when the game ball B hits the game area 5a so as to circulate on the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit), the game ball B is passed through the gate portion 2003 with a high probability. can be made, and the game ball B can be accepted into the large winning opening 2005 which is open (open) with a high probability.

[5-8-6. display unit]
Next, the display presentation unit 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 124 to 126 and the like. FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory and display effect unit of the front unit of the game board, viewed from the front. FIG. 125 is a front view showing a state in which the first picture is decorated with light in the display effect unit, and FIG. 126 is a front view showing a state in which the second picture is decorated with light in the display effect unit.

The display effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the center role 2500 so as to close the frame of the frame-like center role 2500 . The display effect unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500, and includes a transparent flat front light guide plate 2610 that closes the frame of the center accessory 2500, and A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2611a capable of emitting light are mounted, and light can be emitted toward the first pattern substrate 2611 attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500 and the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2612a are mounted, and a second picture board 2612 attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500 is provided.

The front light guide plate 2610 has a first pattern 2621 (see FIG. 125) formed by a large number of concave-convex first reflecting portions that reflect only light from the upper and lower directions forward, and only light from the left and right directions. and a second pattern 2622 (see FIG. 126) formed by a large number of uneven second reflecting portions that reflect light forward. That is, when the light guide plate LED 2611a of the first pattern substrate 2611 is caused to emit light, the display effect unit 2600 can cause the first pattern 2621 to emit light, and the light guide plate LED 2612a of the second pattern substrate 2612 emits light. By doing so, the second pattern 2622 can be displayed by light emission.

In the front light guide plate 2610, the countless first reflecting portions forming the first pattern 2621 and the countless second reflecting portions forming the second pattern 2622 are formed with minute unevenness. , the light guide plate LED 2611a of the first pattern substrate 2611 and the light guide plate LED 2612a of the second pattern substrate 2612 are not illuminated, they appear transparent, and various types of the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side The decorative body, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the like can be visually recognized in good condition.

The first pattern 2621 is, as shown in FIG. 125, a pattern imitating one eye of a predetermined character in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 . 126, the second pattern 2622 is a pattern in which radial and concentric cracks appear in the glass. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 are full-color LEDs.

In the display effect unit 2600 of this embodiment, the plate surfaces of the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 are directed parallel to the peripheral surface of the front light guide plate 2610. is arranged parallel to the surface of the front light guide plate 2610, the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 are difficult to see when viewed from the front (player side). can improve the appearance of the game area 5a.

[5-9. back unit]
The back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 127 to 131 and the like. FIG. 127 is a front view of the back unit of the game board, emphasizing the back front decorative board and the back front right decorative board. 128 is a front perspective view of the back unit of the game board, and FIG. 129 is a rear perspective view of the back unit. FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 131 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500, the performance display device 1600, and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. and a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600 . In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first start sensor that detects the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002. A mouth sensor 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting near the first starting mouth 2002 are provided (see FIG. 168).

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a back-back effect unit 3100 attached to the rear part in the back box 3010, a back-center effect unit 3200 attached to the front side of the back-back effect unit 3100, and a back-center effect unit 3200. A back right effect unit 3300 attached to the front right part, a back upper effect unit 3400 attached to the left side of the front upper part of the back middle effect unit 3200, and a back inner effect unit 3200 attached to the front lower part. A back bottom effect unit 3500, a back right effect unit 3300, a back top effect unit 3400, and a back front effect unit 3600 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 in front of the back bottom effect unit 3500 are provided.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front, and has a square opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall and a plate frame-like shape protruding rearward from the periphery of the opening 3010a at intervals. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b into which upper fixing pieces 1601 of the effect display device 1600 are inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. A cutout portion 3010d is provided near the center of the lower side in the left-right direction from the rear end to the rear wall of the back case 3010 and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600 . Also, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the performance display device 1600 to be fitted within the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the cutout portion 3010d on the rear side as viewed from the rear so as to be slidable to the left and right.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting each movable effect unit and the like at appropriate positions.

[5-9-1. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 to 141 and the like. FIG. 132 is a front perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 133 is a front view of the back-back effect unit emphasizing the back-back movable mechanism in the normal position of the back-back movable decorative body. 134 is a front view of the rear-back effect unit showing a state in which the rear-back movable decorative body is locked by the lock member from the state of FIG. 133. FIG. 135 is a front view of the rear effect unit showing a state in which the slide guide is moved downward from the state of FIG. 134 to near the lower end. FIG. FIG. 136 is a front view of the rear-back effect unit showing a state in which the lock member is rotated to the release position by the slide guide from the state of FIG. 135 and the rear-back movable decorative body is dropped. FIG. 137 is a front view of the back-back effect unit showing a state in which the back-back movable decorative body is vertically moved by the slide guide. FIG. 138 is a front view of the back-back effect unit showing a state in which the lock member is rotated from the lock position to the release position side by upward movement of the back-back movable decorative body by the slide guide.

FIG. 139(a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear-back decorative effect unit in the rear-back effect unit and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the rear-back decoration effect unit in the rear-back effect unit from the rear. 1 is an exploded perspective view as seen; FIG. FIG. 140 is a front view showing a state in which the fifth pattern is decorated with light emission in the rear-back decoration effect unit, and FIG. 141 is a front view showing a state in which the sixth pattern is light-emitting decoration in the rear-back decoration effect unit.

The back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the rearmost part in the back box 3010. - 特許庁The back-side effect unit 3100 has a substantially square shape in front view and is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010 . The rear rear effect unit 3100 includes a rear rear movable effect unit 3110 having a rectangular frame shape, and a rear rear effect unit 3110 attached to the rear side of the rear rear movable effect unit 3110 and mounted in the back box 3010. A decoration presentation unit 3150 is provided.

First, the back behind movable effect unit 3110 in the back behind effect unit 3100 will be described in detail. The back rear movable effect unit 3110 extends in the horizontal direction with a length substantially equal to the total width in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600, and is formed in a shape imitating a machete as an item along the concept of the pachinko machine 1. and a rear movable mechanism 3130 for attaching the rear movable decorative body 3120 so as to be movable in the vertical direction.

The back movable decorative body 3120 includes a decorative body body 3121 that extends in the left-right direction and resembles a machete, and a pair of movable mechanisms 3130 that protrude outward from the left and right ends of the decorative body 3121 to be described later. A left slider 3122 and a right slider 3123 are attached to the slide shaft 3132 so as to be vertically slidable. In addition, although not shown, the rear movable decorative body 3120 is attached to the rear side of the decorative body 3121 and has a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs) mounted on the front and rear surfaces. Before diffusing the light from the LED attached to the front surface of the back-rear movable decorative body decoration board and mounted between the board and the back-rear movable decorative body decoration board and the decoration main body 3121 and irradiating it forward. The lens and the part that guides the light from the LED attached to the rear side of the back-rear movable ornament decoration substrate and attached to the rear surface of the back-rear movable ornament decoration substrate and becomes the lower part of the decoration main body 3121. a rear lens for illuminating from the rear to the front.

A decoration main body 3121 of the rear movable decoration 3120 is formed in a shape that imitates a hatchet, and in a front view, the left end side is the tip of the hatchet, and the lower side is the blade of the hatchet. The decoration main body 3121 has a transparent portion that imitates the blade of a machete. In addition, the decoration main body 3121 is formed with a crack pattern decoration that spreads radially and concentrically around a portion near the lower end at the center in the left-right direction.

The left slider 3122 protrudes forward from the front surface, and has a lock projection 3122a capable of coming into contact with a regulation portion 3141c and a guide portion 3141d of a lock member 3141 of the back-rear movable mechanism 3130, which will be described later. Although not shown, the left slider 3122 includes a pair of sliding bushes that are separated vertically and through which the left slide shaft 3132 of the back-rear movable mechanism 3130 is slidably inserted. The sliding bushing has a plurality of bearing steel balls inside that come into contact with the slide shaft 3132, and can smoothly slide on the inserted slide shaft 3132 without backlash. The left slider 3122 can smoothly move the back rear movable decorative body 3120 only on the left side in the vertical direction by means of a pair of sliding bushes. The left slider 3122 also has a detection piece that protrudes rearward, although not shown. The detection piece of the left slider 3122 is detected by the decoration object detection sensor 3154 of the rear decoration effect unit 3150 .

The right slider 3123 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the vertical dimension of the decoration main body 3121, and has a cylindrical shape with a rectangular cross section so as to sandwich the right slide shaft 3132 of the back rear movable mechanism 3130 from the left and right. formed.

The rear movable ornament decoration substrate is attached above a part of the ornament main body 3121 that imitates a hatchet blade. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear movable decorative body decoration substrate are arranged concentrically around the lower side of the substantially center in the left-right direction, and each of them radiates outward from the center. It is installed in the direction in which light is emitted. In addition, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-rear movable decorative body decoration substrate are arranged in rows along the lower side and the right side in rear view, and parallel to the rear surface of the back-rear movable decorative body decoration substrate. It is installed so that light is emitted toward the sides.

The rear movable decoration 3120 can be visually recognized rearward through a part of the decoration main body 3121 that resembles a hatchet blade. In addition, when the rear rear movable decoration 3120 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear rear movable decoration decoration substrate, a crack pattern decoration is formed on the front surface of the decoration main body 3121 through the front lens. It is possible to luminously decorate the part where it is attached, and when a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface emit light, the tip of the machete and the blade part of the decoration main body 3121 can be luminous-decorated through the rear lens. .

A back-back movable mechanism 3130 in a back-back movable effect unit 3110 of the back-back effect unit 3100 includes a unit frame 3131 which is formed of a metal plate and has a rectangular outer shape and has a frame shape, and extends vertically and is separated in the left-right direction. A pair of slide shafts 3132 each attached to a unit frame 3131 and the slide shaft 3132 on the left side in a front view extend vertically in parallel, and a spiral groove is formed on the outer periphery. A spiral shaft 3133 rotatably attached to a unit frame 3131, a slide guide 3134 screwed to the spiral shaft 3133 and capable of coming into contact with the lower surface of the rear movable decorative body 3120, and the rotating shaft upward. A back rear drive motor 3135 attached to the lower left corner of the unit frame 3131 in front view, a spur gear-shaped motor gear (not shown) attached to the rotation shaft of the back rear drive motor 3135, and a motor gear. and a spur gear-shaped drive gear (not shown) that is in mesh with and attached to the lower end of the spiral shaft 3133 .

In addition, the rear rear movable mechanism 3130 includes a lock member 3141 which is rotatably attached to a portion slightly below the upper left corner of the unit frame 3131 when viewed from the front and which extends forward and backward around an axis extending vertically and which extends vertically from the unit frame. A transmission slider 3142 is attached to 3131 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction for rotating the lock member 3141; and a rotation restricting member 3144 attached to and restricting rotation of the lock member 3141 .

Furthermore, the back rear movable mechanism 3130 is attached to the unit frame 3131, and has a rear rear drive motor 3135 attached to the bottom surface thereof. A damper 3146 attached to the gear box 3145 facing upward and a protective stopper 3147 projecting upward from the gear box 3145 so as to surround the outer periphery of the damper 3146 are provided.

The unit frame 3131 is formed in a frame shape by four strip-like members forming each side. The unit frame 3131 has a vertical height approximately equal to the height inside the back box 3010 and a horizontal length approximately equal to the horizontal width inside the back box 3010 . The pair of slide shafts 3132 are cylindrical metal shafts that extend vertically with substantially the same length as the height of the unit frame 3131 . The pair of slide shafts 3132 are attached to the unit frame 3131 at their upper and lower ends.

The spiral shaft 3133 is rotatably attached to the unit frame 3131 at both upper and lower ends on the left side of the left slide shaft 3132 . The spiral shaft 3133 is made of metal.

The slide guide 3134 includes a guide body 3134a to which the spiral shaft 3133 is screwed, and a guide protrusion 3134b that protrudes from the guide body 3134a to the right in front view and can contact the lower surface of the back rear movable decoration 3120. I have. Although illustration is omitted, the slide guide 3134 is recessed leftward from the front end surface of the guide projection 3134b and penetrates vertically. and a detection piece protruding rearward.

The slide guide 3134 is prevented from rotating about the axis of the spiral shaft 3133 by inserting the slide shaft 3132 into the guide groove at the tip of the guide protrusion 3134b. can move up or down. In addition, the slide guide 3134 allows the lower surface of the left slider 3122 of the back rear movable decorative body 3120 to contact the upper surface of the guide projection 3134b. The detection piece of the slide guide 3134 is detected by a plurality of (two) slide detection sensors 3155 provided in the rear decoration effect unit 3150 .

The lock member 3141 includes a main body portion 3141a extending vertically, a bearing hole 3141b penetrating in the front-rear direction at a base end portion which is a lower portion of the main body portion 3141a, and a front end portion which is an upper portion of the main body portion 3141a. A planar restricting portion 3141c protruding rightward in front view and facing upward, a guiding portion 3141d obliquely extending from the tip of the restricting portion 3141c toward the vicinity of the base end portion of the main body portion 3141a, and a main body portion. A stopper 3141e protruding upward from the upper end surface of the body portion 3141a, a transmission protrusion 3141f protruding leftward in front view from the base end of the main body portion 3141a, and a transmission protrusion 3141f penetrating in the front-rear direction. and a transmission elongated hole 3141g extending in the direction in which the projection 3141f protrudes.

A shaft pin (not shown) of the unit frame 3131 is inserted into the bearing hole 3141b of the lock member 3141 . Thereby, the locking member 3141 is attached so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward. The locking projection 3122a of the left slider 3122 of the rear movable decorative body 3120 can come into contact with the restricting portion 3141c from above. The lock projection 3122a of the left slider 3122 can contact the guide portion 3141d from below. The surface of the stopper 3141e facing right in a front view can come into contact with the rotation restricting member 3144. As shown in FIG. A transmission pin 3142a of a transmission slider 3142 is slidably inserted into the long transmission hole 3141g.

The transmission slider 3142 is formed of a metal band plate extending vertically, and is formed slightly shorter than the height within the frame of the unit frame 3131 . The transmission slider 3142 is attached to a portion forming the left side of the unit frame 3131 so as to be vertically slidable. The transmission slider 3142 has a cylindrical transmission pin 3142a that protrudes in the front-rear direction near the upper end and is slidably inserted into the transmission elongated hole 3141g of the lock member 3141, and a guide projection of the slide guide 3134 that is formed at the lower end. 3134b and a release contact portion 3142b that can contact with the lock spring 3143; The release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142 is located below the height of the upper end of the protective stopper 3147. As shown in FIG.

The lock spring 3143 is a coil spring. The lock spring 3143 has its upper end locked to the upper end of the portion forming the left side of the unit frame 3131 , and its lower end locked to the locking portion 3142 c of the transmission slider 3142 . A lock spring 3143 biases the transmission slider 3142 upward.

The damper 3146 includes a columnar damper body 3146a attached to the gear box 3145, a piston rod 3146b extending upward from the damper body 3146a, and a columnar body attached to the tip (upper end) of the piston rod 3146b. and a contact receiving portion 3146c. Although not shown, the damper body 3146a of the damper 3146 has a columnar space extending in the vertical direction (axial direction) inside, and is slidable in the vertical direction (axial direction) in the space. A piston rod 3146b extends upward and outward from the piston, a spring biasing the piston upward, and a viscous fluid filled in a space therein.

The damper 3146 has a contact receiving portion 3146c at the upper end so that the left slider 3122 of the back rear movable decorative body 3120 can contact from above. In the damper 3146, when the back rear movable decoration 3120 abuts against the abutment receiving portion 3146c from above, the piston inside the damper main body 3146a moves downward via the piston rod 3146b. The impact can be absorbed by the viscous resistance of the viscous fluid. The damper 3146 is configured such that the upper surface of the contact receiving portion 3146c is positioned above the height of the upper end of the protective stopper 3147 when the back rear movable decorative body 3120 is not in contact with the contact receiving portion 3146c (free state). there is

Next, the operation of the back rear movable effect unit 3110 will be described. In the normal state, the back rear movable effect unit 3110 is in a retracted position where the back rear movable decorative body 3120 is raised to the maximum, as shown in FIG. , it is in the lock position, which is the end of rotation in the clockwise direction. In this state, the lower surface of the left slider 3122 of the back rear movable decorative body 3120 is in contact with the guide projection 3134b of the slide guide 3134, and the locking projection 3122a of the left slider 3122 is positioned further than the restricting portion 3141c of the locking member 3141. located above.

In addition, in a normal state, the detection piece of the left slider 3122 in the rear movable decorative body 3120 is detected by the decorative body detection sensor 3154 of the rear rear decorative effect unit 3150, and the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 is detected in the rear side. It is detected by the upper slide detection sensor 3155 in the rear decoration effect unit 3150 .

The lock member 3141 in the lock position has a vertical main body 3141a and a horizontal transmission protrusion 3141f projecting leftward from the base end of the main body 3141a. In addition, the locking member 3141 has a restricting portion 3141c protruding rightward from the upper end of the main body portion 3141a, which is positioned directly below the locking projection 3122a of the back rear movable decorative body 3120, and a stopper 3141e protruding upward. is in contact with the rotation restricting member 3144 . Further rotation of the lock member 3141 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front is restricted by the contact of the stopper 3141e with the rotation restriction member 3144 .

When the stopper 3141e of the lock member 3141 comes into contact with the rotation restricting member 3144, the upward rotation of the transmission projection 3141f is restricted. The transmission pin 3142a inserted in the hole 3141g does not move upward any more. Therefore, the transmission slider 3142 urged upward by the lock spring 3143 is restricted from further upward movement via the transmission pin 3142a by the lock member 3141 in the lock position.

In this normal state, the slide guide 3134 restricts the downward movement (fall) of the back movable decorative body 3120 . If, in this state, the slide guide 3134 were to move downward to some extent for some reason such as malfunction, the lock protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 of the back rear movable decorative body 3120 would move to the restricting portion of the lock member 3141. Since it abuts against 3141c, it is possible to restrict movement (fall) below the locking member 3141 (restricting portion 3141c). That is, in a normal state, the slide guide 3134 and the lock member 3141 prevent the back movable decorative body 3120 from falling.

In this normal state, when the spiral shaft 3133 is rotated in a predetermined direction (here, counterclockwise direction in plan view) by the rear rear drive motor 3135, the guide body 3134a screwed to the spiral shaft 3133 causes Slide guide 3134 moves downward. Due to the downward movement of the slide guide 3134, the back movable decorative body 3120 in contact with the upper surface of the guide projection 3134b of the slide guide 3134 moves downward together with the slide guide 3134.

Then, when the lock protrusion 3122a of the back movable decorative body 3120 moving downward together with the slide guide 3134 comes into contact with the restricting portion 3141c of the locking member 3141, the downward movement of the back movable decorative body 3120 is stopped. The movement of the back movable decorative body 3120 is regulated, and the back movable decorative body 3120 stops moving and enters the standby position (see FIG. 134). In this standby position state, the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 is positioned below the slide detection sensor 3155 on the upper side of the back decoration effect unit 3150, and is in a non-detection state. On the other hand, the detection piece of the left slider 3122 of the back rear movable decoration 3120 remains detected by the decoration detection sensor 3154 of the back rear decoration effect unit 3150 . Although illustration is omitted, the detection piece of the left slider 3122 moves up and down so that it can be detected by the decoration detection sensor 3154 of the rear decoration effect unit 3150 while the back rear movable decoration 3120 is between the retracted position and the standby position. extends to

After that, when the slide guide 3134 is further moved downward by the back driving motor 3135, the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 is separated from the lower surface of the left slider 3122 of the back movable decoration 3120, and the back movable decoration 3120 is moved. While remaining at the standby position, only the slide guide 3134 moves downward (see FIG. 135).

In this state, the load of the back rear movable decorative body 3120 acts on the restricting portion 3141c protruding to the right of the locking member 3141. Therefore, the load applied to the restricting portion 3141c causes the locking member 3141 to move toward the bearing hole 3141b. is about to rotate in a clockwise direction in a front view. However, since the stopper 3141e of the locking member 3141 is in contact with the rotation restricting member 3144 from the left side, the rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted, and the lock projection 3122a of the back rear movable decorative body 3120 is restricted. does not come off the restricting portion 3141c.

Then, when the lower surface of the guide projection 3134b of the slide guide 3134 that is moving downward contacts the upper surface of the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142 (see FIG. 135), the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 moves to the rear side. It is detected by the slide detection sensor 3155 on the lower side of the rear decoration effect unit 3150 . In this state, the upper surface of the guide projection 3134b of the slide guide 3134 is lower than the height of the upper end of the protective stopper 3147. As shown in FIG.

From this state, when the slide guide 3134 is further moved downward via the spiral shaft 3133 by the rear driving motor 3135, the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 presses the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142 downward. , the transmission slider 3142 slides downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 3143 .

When the transmission slider 3142 slides downward, the transmission pin 3142a of the transmission slider 3142 also moves downward, so the long transmission hole 3141g of the lock member 3141 into which the transmission pin 3142a is inserted is pressed downward by the transmission pin 3142a. The lock member 3141 rotates about the bearing hole 3141b counterclockwise in a front view (see FIG. 136).

When the locking member 3141 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the restricting portion 3141c with which the locking protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 of the back rear movable decorative body 3120 abuts from above moves toward the front end side (right end side). ) moves upward and rotates to move leftward. That is, as the lock member 3141 rotates counterclockwise, the rear movable decorative body 3120 rises via the lock projection 3122a by the rising tip side of the restricting portion 3141c, and the tip of the restricting portion 3141c moves upward. side slides leftward on the lower surface of the lock projection 3122a.

After that, when the locking member 3141 is further rotated counterclockwise and the tip of the regulating portion 3141c moves to the left of the left end of the lock projection 3122a of the back rear movable decoration 3120, the back rear movable decoration is moved to the left. 3120 loses the support from below by the restricting portion 3141c, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 falls due to the acting gravity (see FIG. 136). That is, the lock member 3141 moves from the locked position where the upper surface of the restricting portion 3141c is in contact with the lower surface of the locking projection 3122a to the position (release position) where the tip of the restricting portion 3141c is to the left of the left end of the locking projection 3122a. When the back movable decoration 3120 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the back movable decoration 3120 whose downward movement is restricted (locked) is unlocked, and the back movable decoration 3120 is moved to the standby position. free fall from

When the rear movable decorative body 3120 has fallen from the standby position, the lower surface of the left slider 3122 contacts the contact receiving portion 3146c of the damper 3146, and the piston rod 3146b sinks into the damper main body 3146a through the contact receiving portion 3146c. , the impact of falling of the rear movable decorative body 3120 is absorbed by the spring and the viscous fluid in the damper main body 3146a. Then, before the lower surface of the left slider 3122 contacts the upper surface of the protective stopper 3147, the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 stops falling and enters the lowered position.

When the back rear movable decoration 3120 is in the lowered position, a gap is formed between the lower surface of the left slider 3122 and the upper surface of the protective stopper 3147, and the upper surface of the guide projection 3134b of the slide guide 3134 is aligned with the left side. It is positioned sufficiently below the lower surface of the slider 3122 (the upper end of the protective stopper 3147). In other words, the back movable decorative body 3120 free-falling from the standby position to the lowered position is configured so as not to abut against anything other than the damper 3146 .

As a result, even if the large rear back movable decorative body 3120 extending left and right with substantially the same length as the entire width of the effect display device 1600 is allowed to freely fall from the top to the bottom of the effect display device 1600, the damper 3146 It does not come into contact with other members, and other members will not be damaged by a large impact. In addition, even if the damper 3146 cannot sufficiently stop the free-falling rear-back movable decorative body 3120, the kinetic energy is attenuated by the damper 3146, so that the damper 3146 contacts the protective stopper 3147. As a result, the falling of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 can be stopped without damaging the protective stopper 3147 . In addition, since the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 is positioned below the upper end of the protective stopper 3147, the back rear movable decorative body 3120, which has freely fallen, does not come into contact with the guide protrusion 3134b. It is possible to prevent damage to the slide guide 3134 due to contact with the decorative body 3120 .

After the back rear movable decoration body 3120 is dropped to the lowered position, the spiral shaft 3133 is rotated in the opposite direction (here, clockwise in plan view) by the back rear drive motor 3135, and the slide guide 3134 is rotated. rises. When the slide guide 3134 is lifted while the transmission slider 3142 is being slid downward by pressing the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142 downward by the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134, the transmission slider 3142 is released by the lock spring. Since it is urged upward by 3143, transmission slider 3142 slides upward together with slide guide 3134 (guide projection 3134b).

When the transmission slider 3142 slides upward, the transmission pin 3142a moves upward, so that the long transmission hole 3141g of the lock member 3141 into which the transmission pin 3142a is inserted is pushed upward by the transmission pin 3142a, and the lock member 3141 is disengaged. It rotates clockwise in a front view about the bearing hole 3141b. When the transmission slider 3142 further slides upward along with the slide guide 3134, the stopper 3141e of the lock member 3141 comes into contact with the rotation restricting member 3144, preventing further clockwise rotation of the lock member 3141. As well as being regulated, the transmission slider 3142 is regulated from sliding upward. As a result, the lock member 3141 returns from the unlocked position to the locked position.

From this state, when the slide guide 3134 is moved upward by the rear driving motor 3135, the upward movement of the transmission slider 3142 is restricted as described above. The guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 moves upward, and only the slide guide 3134 moves upward. Then, the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 moving upward contacts the left slider 3122 of the back movable decoration 3120 in the lowered position from below, and the back movable decoration 3120 moves through the left slider 3122. moves upward together with the slide guide 3134 (see FIG. 137).

In this back rear movable effect unit 3110, after the back rear movable decoration 3120 is dropped, it is moved upward from the lowered position by the slide guide 3134, and the back rear movable decoration 3120 is moved between the standby position and the lowered position. 137, the back movable decorative body 3120 can be arbitrarily moved vertically by the slide guide 3134 by appropriately changing the rotational direction of the back driving motor 3135 (see FIG. 137). ).

Then, when the back rear driving motor 3135 moves the slide guide 3134 upward, and the back movable decorative body 3120 moving upward from the lowered position together with the slide guide 3134 moves to a height near the standby position, The lock protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 of the back rear movable decoration 3120 abuts from below the guide portion 3141d of the lock member 3141 in the locked position. From this state, when the lock protrusion 3122a (back rear movable decorative body 3120) is further moved upward by the slide guide 3134, the guide portion 3141d of the lock member 3141 is slanted. A leftward force acts on the abutting portion.

Therefore, as the lock projection 3122a moves upward, the leftward force acting on the guide portion 3141d rotates the lock member 3141 about the bearing hole 3141b counterclockwise in front view. (See Figure 138). At this time, in the lock member 3141, the transmission protrusion 3141f protruding leftward from the base end of the main body 3141a moves downward due to the counterclockwise rotation. The lock member 3141 is rotated counterclockwise against the biasing force of the lock spring 3143 acting clockwise through the transmission pin 3142a of the transmission slider 3142 inserted into the long transmission hole 3141g of the portion 3141f. rotate to.

After that, when the lock protrusion 3122a moves further upward, the lock member 3141 is further rotated counterclockwise in a front view, so that the restriction portion 3141c and the guide portion 3141d projecting rightward from the main body portion 3141a are locked. The lock projection 3122a moves to the release position to the left of the projection 3122a, and the upper surface of the lock projection 3122a moves above the restricting portion 3141c. Then, when the lock projection 3122a moves further upward and the lower surface of the lock projection 3122a moves above the tip of the guide portion 3141d of the lock member 3141, the contact with the guide portion 3141d is released. As a result, the lock member 3141 rotates clockwise in front view due to the biasing force of the lock spring 3143, and shifts from the unlocked position to the locked position. When the lock member 3141 is rotated to the lock position, the bottom surface of the lock protrusion 3122a is positioned above the top surface of the restricting portion 3141c.

Then, the slide guide 3134 moves the locking projection 3122a (the rear movable decorative body 3120) further upward, and the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 is detected by the upper slide detection sensor 3155 of the rear rear decorative effect unit 3150. Then, the driving of the rear driving motor 3135 stops, and the movable decorative body 3120 stops at the retracted position. In other words, the back rear movable decorative body 3120 returns to the normal state.

In this way, when the slide guide 3134 is moved downward by the back driving motor 3135, the lock member 3141 is rotated from the lock position to the release position via the transmission slider 3142, and the back movable decorative body 3120 is put into standby. It can be allowed to fall freely from the position to the lowered position. As a result, the player can see a movable effect in which a large hatchet (rear rear movable decorative body 3120) straddling the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the horizontal direction freely falls while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600.例文帳に追加Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game) in which the player has an advantage over the player is generated. It is possible to make the player think that the game is not possible, and to increase the expectation for the game.

Next, the back-side decoration effect unit 3150 of the back-side effect unit 3100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 139 to 141 and the like. The rear rear decorative effect unit 3150 includes a frame-shaped unit base 3151 having a rectangular outer shape, and a transparent plate-shaped rear second light guide plate that is attached to the front side of the unit base 3151 and closes the frame of the unit base 3151. 3160, a transparent frame-shaped back rear decorative lens 3152 attached to the front side of the unit base 3151 in front of the back second light guide plate 3160 and decorated in a shape that looks like broken glass; and a rear upper decoration substrate 3153 attached between the unit base 3151 and the rear rear decorative lens 3152 above the rear second light guide plate 3160 .

In addition, the back rear decoration effect unit 3150 includes a decoration detection sensor 3154 that detects the detection piece of the left slider 3122 in the back rear movable decoration 3120, and two detection pieces of the slide guide 3134 of the back rear movable mechanism 3130. A slide detection sensor 3155 and a condensing lens 3156 arranged below the rear second light guide plate 3160 and extending to the left and right are provided.

In addition, the back rear decoration effect unit 3150 is attached between the unit base 3151 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 on both the left and right outer sides of the back second light guide plate 3160, and is directed toward the left and right sides of the back second light guide plate 3160. Between a pair of left and right fifth pattern substrates 3171 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a capable of emitting light are mounted, and a unit base 3151 and a rear decorative lens 3152 below the rear second light guide plate 3160 and a pair of sixth picture substrates 3172 mounted with a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3172a capable of emitting light toward the lower surface of the rear second light guide plate 3160 mounted thereon.

A unit base 3151 of the rear-back decoration effect unit 3150 is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the unit frame 3131 . The back rear decorative lens 3152 is formed in a quadrangular outer shape slightly smaller than the outer shape of the unit frame 3131 . The unit frame 3131 protrudes upward (inward) from the lower side, and has a transparent plate-like decorative lens formed in a shape such that a broken window glass leaves fragments of glass on the window frame. The inside of the frame-shaped rear decorative lens 3152 protrudes into the frame of the unit base 3151 when viewed from the front, and is formed in such a shape that the window glass is broken and glass fragments remain on the window frame. In the back rear decorative lens 3152, the edge of the inwardly projecting portion is formed obliquely with respect to the front-rear direction.

A plurality of LEDs 3153a are mounted on the front surface of the rear upper decorative substrate 3153. The LEDs 3153a are arranged in rows in the left-right direction and can irradiate light downward. The rear surface of the rear rear decorative lens 3152 abuts on the front surface of the rear upper decorative substrate 3153 , and the plurality of LEDs 3153 a are directed toward the inside of the rear rear decorative lens 3152 from the side surface side of the frame-shaped rear rear decorative lens 3152 . It is mounted so that light is emitted to the inside.

The decoration body detection sensor 3154 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the left fifth pattern substrate 3171 so as to detect the detection piece of the rear movable decoration body 3120 positioned between the retracted position and the standby position. ing. The two slide detection sensors 3155 are arranged at the top of the front surface of the left fifth pattern board 3171 and the slide guide 3134 so as to detect the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 when the rear movable decorative body 3120 is at the retracted position. It is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the left fifth pattern substrate 3171 so that the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 can be detected when the guide projection 3134b is at a height where it contacts the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142. It is

A pair of fifth pattern substrates 3171 has a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a mounted on the rear surface in a state of being arranged in a row in the vertical direction. A pair of fifth picture substrates 3171 are mounted with a plurality of LEDs 3171b arranged vertically in a line on the front surface for decorating the rear decorative lens 3152 with light. The fifth pattern substrate 3171 on the left side has a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a mounted on the rear surface so as to emit light rightward, and a plurality of LEDs 3171b on the front surface emit light rightward. It is mounted so that it can be irradiated. The rear surface of the rear decorative lens 3152 is in contact with the front surface of the fifth pattern substrate 3171 on the left side. The decorative lens 3152 is mounted so that the interior of the decorative lens 3152 is irradiated with light.

In addition, on the fifth pattern substrate 3171 on the right side, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a on the rear surface are mounted so as to irradiate leftward light, and a plurality of LEDs 3171b on the front surface are mounted so as to irradiate leftward light. It is mounted so that light can be emitted. The rear surface of the back rear decorative lens 3152 is in contact with the front surface of the fifth pattern substrate 3171 on the right side, and the plurality of LEDs 3171b on the front surface are arranged inward from the side surface side of the frame-shaped rear rear decorative lens 3152 toward the rear surface. It is mounted so that the inside of the rear decorative lens 3152 is irradiated with light.

A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3172a are mounted on the rear surface of the sixth pattern substrate 3172 so as to be able to irradiate light upward, and the front surface thereof is arranged in rows in the left-right direction to emit light upward. A plurality of LEDs 3172b capable of irradiating are mounted. When the sixth pattern substrate 3172 emits light upward from the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3172 a on the rear surface, the light can enter the inside of the back second light guide plate 3160 via the condenser lens 3156 . The rear surface of the back rear decorative lens 3152 is in contact with the front surface of the sixth pattern substrate 3172, and the plurality of LEDs 3172b on the front surface of the rear rear decorative lens 3152 are directed inward from the side surface side of the frame-shaped rear rear decorative lens 3152. 3152 is mounted so that light is emitted to the inside thereof.

With the above configuration, the back rear decorative lens 3152 emits light from the LED 3153a of the rear upper decorative substrate 3153, the LED 3171b of the pair of fifth pattern substrates 3171, and the LED 3172b of the sixth pattern substrate 3172. The light irradiated to the frame can be reflected forward by the inclined portion of the edge projecting inward of the frame. As a result, it is possible to present the player with a luminescence effect in which the edge of the glass fragment left on the window frame after the window glass is broken is shining.

The rear second light guide plate 3160 has a fifth pattern 3161 (see FIG. 140) formed by a number of uneven fifth reflecting portions that reflect only light from the left and right directions forward, and light from the top and bottom directions. and a sixth pattern 3162 (see FIG. 141) formed by a number of uneven sixth reflecting portions that reflect light forward. That is, when the light guide plate LED 3171a of the fifth pattern substrate 3171 is caused to emit light, the back rear decoration effect unit 3150 can cause the light guide plate LED 3172a of the sixth pattern substrate 3172 to emit light. When illuminated, the sixth pattern 3162 can be illuminated.

In the back second light guide plate 3160, countless fifth reflecting portions forming the fifth pattern 3161 and countless sixth reflecting portions forming the sixth pattern 3162 are formed with minute unevenness. When the light guide plate LED 3171a of the fifth pattern substrate 3171 and the light guide plate LED 3172a of the sixth pattern substrate 3172 are not emitting light, they appear transparent and are displayed on the effect display device 1600 on the rear side. It is possible to visually recognize the effect image or the like in a good state.

As shown in FIG. 140, the fifth picture 3161 is a picture having a guidance (message) for the player consisting of characters "Chance!" in a sandstorm-like pattern. The sixth pattern 3162 is a pattern in which pieces of broken glass are scattered, as shown in FIG. This sixth pattern 3162 has fewer scattered glass fragments than the third pattern 3211 of the back and inside effect unit 3200, which will be described later.

The character "Chance!" of the fifth pattern 3161 is arranged in the center in the vertical direction, as shown in the figure. Only the characters "Chance!" can be illuminated. Alternatively, when the three light guide plate LEDs 3171a in the center in the vertical direction are turned off and the remaining light guide plate LEDs 3171a are turned on, the characters "Chance!" .

In addition, the LEDs mounted on the rear-back top decoration substrate 3153, the pair of fifth pattern substrate 3171, and the sixth pattern substrate 3172 in the rear-back decoration effect unit 3150 are all side-view type full-color LEDs. .

As shown in the figure, the rear-back decoration effect unit 3150 of the present embodiment includes a rear-back upper decoration board 3153, a pair of fifth pattern boards 3171, and a sixth pattern board 3172, each of which has a rear second board surface. It is arranged parallel to the surface of the light guide plate 3160 . As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the dimension in the front-rear direction of the back decoration effecting unit 3150, and the fifth pattern 3161 and the sixth pattern 3162 of the back second light guide plate 3160, the rear rear decoration lens 3152, etc. are decorated with light emission. can be made

In addition, the back rear decoration effect unit 3150 of the present embodiment arranges a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3172a for emitting light to display the sixth pattern 3162 of the back second light guide plate 3160 only on the lower side of the back second light guide plate 3160. The number of LEDs 3171a for the light guide plate is smaller than that of the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a that emit light to display the fifth pattern 3161, but the condenser lens 3156 is arranged between the light guide plate LEDs 3172a and the rear second light guide plate 3160. Therefore, the light spreading from the light guide plate LEDs 3172a can be condensed and prevented from being diffused unnecessarily. can be done.

[5-9-2. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the inside effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 to 144 and the like. Fig. 142(a) is an exploded perspective view of the back and middle effect unit of the back unit, disassembled into main members, and viewed from the front; and is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 143 is a front view showing a state in which the third pattern is decorated with light in the back and middle effect unit, and FIG. 144 is a front view showing a state in which the fourth picture is decorated with light in the back and middle effect unit.

The back middle effect unit 3200 is attached to the front surface of the back back effect unit 3100 inside the back box 3010 . The back inside effect unit 3200 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010 . The back and middle effect unit 3200 includes a frame-shaped unit base 3201 with a rectangular outer shape, and a transparent flat back first light guide plate 3210 that is attached to the front side of the unit base 3201 and closes the frame of the unit base 3201. , a transparent frame-shaped back-center decorative lens 3202 attached to the front side of the unit base 3201 in front of the back first light guide plate 3210 and decorated in a shape that looks like broken glass; A back center left decorative substrate 3203 attached between the unit base 3201 and the back center decorative lens 3202 on the left side of the first light guide plate 3210, and a back center left decorative substrate 3203 arranged on the right side of the back first light guide plate 3210 and vertically and an extending condenser lens 3204 .

In addition, the back-center effect unit 3200 is attached between the unit base 3201 and the back-center decorative lens 3202 on the right outer side of the back first light guide plate 3210, and emits light toward the right side of the back first light guide plate 3210. A third pattern substrate 3221 on which a plurality of irradiable light guide plate LEDs 3221a are mounted, and a unit base 3201 and a back and middle decorative lens 3202 on both upper and lower sides of the back first light guide plate 3210. A pair of upper and lower fourth pattern substrates 3222 are mounted with a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3222 a capable of emitting light toward both upper and lower surfaces of the rear first light guide plate 3210 .

A unit base 3201 of the back middle effect unit 3200 is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the unit frame 3131 of the back back effect unit 3100 . The unit base 3201 protrudes upward (inward) from the lower side, and has a transparent plate-shaped decorative lens formed in a shape such that the window glass is broken and glass fragments remain on the window frame. The back inside decorative lens 3202 is formed in a quadrangular outer shape slightly smaller than the outer shape of the unit base 3201 . The inside of the frame-shaped back-center decorative lens 3202 protrudes into the frame of the unit base 3201 when viewed from the front, and is formed in such a shape that the window glass is broken and glass fragments remain on the window frame. The inner-back decorative lens 3202 has an inwardly protruding peripheral edge formed obliquely with respect to the front-rear direction.

A plurality of LEDs 3203a are mounted on the front surface of the back center left decorative substrate 3203. The LEDs 3203a are arranged vertically in rows and can irradiate rightward light. The back-center-left decorative substrate 3203 has a front surface in contact with the rear surface of the back-center decorative lens 3202 , and a plurality of LEDs 3203 a on the front surface are arranged inward from the side surfaces of the frame-shaped back-center decorative lens 3202 toward the inner side of the back-center decorative lens. It is mounted so that the inside of 3202 is irradiated with light.

A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3221a are mounted on the rear surface of the third pattern substrate 3221 so as to be able to irradiate leftward light. A plurality of LEDs 3221b capable of emitting light are mounted. When the third pattern substrate 3221 emits light leftward from the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3221 a on the rear surface, the light can enter the rear first light guide plate 3210 via the condenser lens 3204 . The third picture substrate 3221 has a front surface in contact with the rear surface of the back-inside decorative lens 3202, and a plurality of LEDs 3221b on the front surface are arranged inwardly from the side surfaces of the frame-shaped back-inside decorative lens 3202. It is mounted so that the inside of 3202 is irradiated with light.

A pair of fourth pattern substrates 3222 has a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3222a mounted on the rear surface thereof in a row in the left-right direction. A pair of fourth pattern substrates 3222 are provided with a plurality of LEDs 3222b arranged in rows in the left-right direction on the front surfaces thereof for decorating the back-center decorative lenses 3202 with light emission. On the upper fourth pattern substrate 3222, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3222a on the rear surface are mounted so as to be able to irradiate light downward, and a plurality of LEDs 3222b on the front surface can irradiate light downward. is implemented in The front surface of the upper fourth picture substrate 3222 is in contact with the rear surface of the back-inside decorative lens 3202, and the plurality of LEDs 3222b on the front surface are arranged inwardly from the side surfaces of the frame-shaped back-inside decorative lens 3202. The decorative lens 3202 is mounted so that the interior of the decorative lens 3202 is irradiated with light.

In addition, on the lower fourth pattern substrate 3222, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3222a on the rear surface are mounted so as to emit light upward, and a plurality of LEDs 3222b on the front surface emit light upward. is mounted so that it can irradiate The front surface of the fourth pattern substrate 3222 on the lower side is in contact with the rear surface of the back-center decorative lens 3202, and the plurality of LEDs 3222b on the front surface are arranged to extend inward from the side surfaces of the frame-shaped back-center decorative lens 3202. It is mounted so that the inside of the back inside decorative lens 3202 is irradiated with light.

With the above configuration, the back-center decorative lens 3202 emits light from the LED 3203a of the back-center left decorative substrate 3203, the LED 3221b of the third pattern substrate 3221, and the LEDs 3222b of the pair of fourth pattern substrates 3222. The light irradiated to the frame can be reflected forward by the inclined portion of the edge projecting inward of the frame. As a result, it is possible to present the player with a luminescence effect in which the edge of the glass fragment left on the window frame after the window glass is broken is shining.

The rear first light guide plate 3210 has a third pattern 3211 (see FIG. 143) formed by a large number of uneven third reflecting portions that reflect only light from the left and right directions forward, and light from the upper and lower directions. and a fourth pattern 3212 (see FIG. 144) formed by a large number of uneven fourth reflecting portions that reflect light forward. That is, when the light guide plate LED 3221a of the third pattern substrate 3221 is caused to emit light, the back and inside effect unit 3200 can cause the third pattern 3211 to emit light, and the light guide plate LED 3222a of the fourth pattern substrate 3222 emits light. By doing so, the fourth picture 3212 can be displayed by light emission.

In the back first light guide plate 3210, countless third reflecting portions forming the third pattern 3211 and countless fourth reflecting portions forming the fourth pattern 3212 are formed with minute unevenness. When the LED 3221a for the light guide plate of the third pattern substrate 3221 and the LED 3222a for the light guide plate of the fourth pattern substrate 3222 do not emit light, they appear transparent, and the rear side of the rear side of the rear effect unit 3100 The effect images and the like displayed on the rear movable decorative body 3120 and the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized in good condition.

The third pattern 3211 is, as shown in FIG. 143, a pattern in which the glass is divided into a plurality of fragments after radial and concentric cracks are formed. Compared with the sixth pattern 3162 of the back second light guide plate 3160 in the back rear decoration effect unit 3150, the third pattern 3211 has many scattered pieces of glass. As shown in FIG. 144, the fourth pattern 3212 is a pattern in which a plurality of streaks of light extend obliquely upward or obliquely downward.

The fourth pattern 3212 is formed such that diagonally extending streaks correspond to the respective light guide plate LEDs 3222a mounted on the upper and lower fourth pattern substrates 3222, as shown in FIG. In other words, when one light guide plate LED 3222a emits light, the center of the back first light guide plate 3210 in the vertical direction starts from the portion closest to the emitted light guide plate LED 3222a on the upper side or the lower side of the back first light guide plate 3210. Two streaks of light (V-shaped streaks of light) extending obliquely so as to be separated from each other toward the edge are decorated with light emission.

This fourth pattern 3212 becomes farther from the light guide plate LED 3222a toward the center of the back first light guide plate 3210 in the vertical direction. It becomes darker toward the center in the vertical direction. As a result, when the fourth pattern 3212 is viewed from the front (player's side), the lines of light appear to extend rearward toward the center of the back first light guide plate 3210 in the vertical direction, and the light appears three-dimensional. It is possible to create an illusion that the light is radiated to the outside, and the light emission performance by the rear first light guide plate 3210 can be enjoyed.

The LEDs mounted on the back center left decorative board 3203, the third pattern board 3221, and the pair of fourth picture boards 3222 in the back center effect unit 3200 are all side-view type full-color LEDs.

In the back-center effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, a back-center left decorative board 3203, a third pattern board 3221, and a pair of fourth picture boards 3222 each have a back first guide. It is arranged parallel to the surface of the light plate 3210 . As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the dimension in the front-rear direction of the back and middle effect unit 3200, and the third pattern 3211 and the fourth pattern 3212 of the back first light guide plate 3210, the back and middle decorative lens 3202, etc. are decorated with light emission. be able to.

In addition, in the back and middle effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3221a for emitting light to display the third pattern 3211 of the back first light guide plate 3210 are arranged only on the right side of the back first light guide plate 3210. Although the number is smaller than the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3222a that light up and display the fourth pattern 3212, the condenser lens 3204 is arranged between the light guide plate LEDs 3221a and the rear first light guide plate 3210. Therefore, the light spreading from the light guide plate LEDs 3221a can be condensed and prevented from being diffused unnecessarily. can.

[5-9-3. Back right production unit]
Next, the back right effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 to 150. FIG. FIG. 145 is a front view of the back right effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 146(a) is a front perspective view of the back right effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is an exploded front perspective view of the back right effect unit disassembled for each main member. FIG. 147 is a front view of the back-right effect unit emphasizing the back-right movable mechanism in a normal state in which the tip of the back-right movable ornament is rotated upward and the bearing slider is positioned at the raised end. is. 148 is a front view of the back-right effect unit showing the state in which the bearing slider is positioned at the lower end with the back-right movable decoration in the state of FIG. 147. FIG. 149 is a front view of the back-right effect unit showing a state in which the tip of the back-right movable ornament is rotated downward from the state of FIG. 148. FIG. 150 is a front view of the back-right effect unit showing the state in which the bearing slider is positioned at the raised end with the back-right movable decoration in the state of FIG. 149. FIG.

The back right effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the upper right part of the front surface of the back middle effect unit 3200 inside the back box 3010 . The back right effect unit 3300 includes a back right movable effect unit 3310 attached to the front surface of the back middle effect unit 3200 and a back front right decoration unit 3350 attached to the front surface of the back right movable effect unit 3310. I have.

First, the back right movable effect unit 3310 of the back right effect unit 3300 will be described. The back-right movable effect unit 3310 extends in a length shorter than the full width of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction, and is formed in a shape imitating a machete as an item in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. A movable ornament 3320 and a back right movable mechanism 3330 attached rotatably around the base end side of the back right movable ornament 3320 and attached movably in the vertical direction are provided.

The back-right movable decoration body 3320 extends in the left-right direction and is attached to the rear side of the decoration body 3321 having the same external size as the decoration body 3321 and the flat plate-shaped decoration body 3321 that resembles a hatchet. A transparent plate-like decoration base 3322, and a back-right movable decoration decoration board 3323 (Fig. 145) and

The decoration main body 3321 of the back-right movable decoration 3320 is formed in a shape that imitates a hatchet. The decorative body main body 3321 has a transparent upper half portion in the vertical direction. In addition, the decoration main body 3321 is formed with a decoration of a crack pattern that spreads radially around the central part in the vertical direction near the tip.

The back-right movable decoration 3320 has a shaft hole 3324 penetrating in the front-rear direction on the base end side, which is the right end side in a front view of the decoration main body 3321 and the decoration base 3322, and a lower side to the left of the shaft hole 3324. A columnar decorative body-side link pin 3325 protruding rearward in the vicinity thereof is provided.

The back-right movable ornament decoration board 3323 has a plurality of central LEDs 3323a that irradiate light forward at a portion behind the central portion of the radially expanding crack pattern of the ornament main body 3321 on the front surface. Center LED 3323a is a high brightness LED. In addition, the back-right movable decorative body decoration board 3323 has a plurality of peripheral LEDs 3323b for irradiating light in the direction along the surface of the board on the front surface and the rear surface.

The back-right movable decoration 3320 can be decorated by lighting the central LED 3323a of the back-right movable decoration decoration base plate 3323 so that the central part of the crack pattern of the decoration main body 3321 shines. By causing the peripheral LEDs 3323b of the decorative body decoration substrate 3323 to emit light, the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3321 and the crack pattern can be decorated with light emission.

The back right movable mechanism 3330 of the back right movable effect unit 3310 extends vertically and is attached to the upper right part of the front surface of the back middle effect unit 3200, and about 3/4 of the total height from the bottom of the unit base 3331. A bearing having a columnar bearing pin 3332a which is mounted movably in the vertical direction at a height portion, protrudes in the front-rear direction and is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 3324 of the back-right movable ornament 3320. and a slider 3332 .

In addition, the rear right moving mechanism 3330 includes a rear right driving motor 3333 mounted on the upper part of the unit base 3331 with its rotational axis directed forward and backward, and a spur gear-shaped motor 3333 mounted on the rotational shaft of the rear right driving motor 3333. and a motor gear 3334, which is engaged with the motor gear 3334 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3331. A transmission projection 3335a projecting in the front-rear direction and a detection piece (not shown) projecting in the front-rear direction are provided. , and a link drive gear 3335 having a spur gear shape.

In addition, the rear right moving mechanism 3330 is attached to the unit base 3331 at a position obliquely lower right of the link driving gear 3335 in a front view so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. a transmission link gear 3336 having a transmission arm 3336a extending to abut on a transmission protrusion 3335a of a link drive gear 3335 and a transmission gear portion 3336b extending in an arc around a rotation axis; A spur-gear-shaped second gear is attached to the base 3331 below the rotation shaft of the transmission link gear 3336 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and meshes with the transmission gear portion 3336b of the transmission link gear 3336. A two-stage gear 3337 having a first gear portion 3337a and a second gear portion 3337b in the shape of a spur gear that rotates integrally with the first gear portion 3337a and has a larger diameter than the first gear portion 3337a. .

Further, the rear right moving mechanism 3330 is attached to the unit base 3331 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and is formed in a vertically extending rack body 3338a and a second gear portion 3337b of the two-stage gear 3337. a slide rack 3338 having a rack gear portion 3338b extending linearly in the vertical direction and a cylindrical movable mechanism side link pin 3338c projecting in the front-rear direction from the lower portion of the rack body 3338a; A link arm extending vertically, into which the decorative body side link pin 3325 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is rotatably inserted at the upper end side and into which the movable mechanism side link pin 3338c of the slide rack 3338 is rotatably inserted at the lower end side. 3339 and .

In addition, the rear right movable mechanism 3330 is attached to the unit base 3331, and the rear right movable mechanism 3330 is movable by detecting a shock absorbing rubber 3340 that can come into contact with the rear right movable decorative body 3320 and a detection piece of the link driving gear 3335. and two movable position detection sensors (not shown) for detecting the position of the decoration 3320 .

Next, the operation of the back right movable effect unit 3310 by the back right movable mechanism 3330 will be described. In the normal state of the back-right movable effect unit 3310, as shown in FIG. The back right movable ornament 3320 rotatably attached to the base end side is inclined so that the front end side is positioned higher than the base end side (initial state). In this state, the center of the decoration-side link pin 3325 of the back-right movable decoration 3320 is positioned slightly above the center of the shaft hole 3324, and the detection piece of the link driving gear 3335 It is detected by the movable position detection sensor of one eye.

In this normal state, the transmission projection 3335a of the link drive gear 3335 is located slightly above the center of rotation of the link drive gear 3335 on the right side in front view, and the transmission link gear 3336 is positioned at the transmission projection 3335a. Arm 3336a abuts from the right side. More specifically, the rotation center point of the transmission link gear 3336, the transmission protrusion 3335a and the transmission arm 3336a are relative to a straight line connecting the rotation center point of the link drive gear 3335 and the point of contact between the transmission protrusion 3335a and the transmission arm 3336a. The straight line connecting the point of contact with 3336a is orthogonal. As a result, the force acting on the transmission projection 3335a from the transmission arm 3336a passes through the center of rotation of the link drive gear 3335, so even if the force acts on the transmission projection 3335a from the transmission arm 3336a, the link drive gear 3335 will not rotate. However, the transmission link gear 3336 does not rotate in the direction in which the transmission arm 3336a moves leftward in front view (counterclockwise direction in front view). In other words, in a normal state, the link drive gear 3335 restricts (locks) the transmission link gear 3336 from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

By the way, since the bearing pin 3332a of the bearing slider 3332 is inserted through the shaft hole 3324 on the base end side of the back right movable ornament 3320, the load of the back right movable ornament 3320 acts via the bearing pin 3332a. are doing. In a normal state, since the bearing slider 3332 is positioned at the raised end, the load of the back-right movable decorative body 3320 acts to force the bearing slider 3332 to move downward.

On the other hand, since the bearing pin 3332a of the bearing slider 3332 is inserted through the shaft hole 3324 on the base end side of the rear right movable decoration 3320, the weight of the rear right movable decoration 3320 causes the shaft hole 3324 (bearing pin 3332a ) in the direction in which the distal end side moves downward (counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). A counterclockwise rotating force due to the weight of the back right movable decoration 3320 acts on the movable mechanism side link pin 3338c via the link arm 3339 from the decoration side link pin 3325 . In other words, the force that causes the back right movable decorative body 3320 to rotate counterclockwise due to its own weight acts through the link arm 3339 to move the slide rack 3338 downward.

The force to move the slide rack 3338 downward is transmitted by the rack gear portion 3338b of the slide rack 3338 to the two-stage gear 3337 via the second gear portion 3337b that meshes with the rack gear portion 3338b. It acts to rotate the gear 3337 clockwise when viewed from the front. Since the first gear portion 3337a of the two-stage gear 3337 meshes with the transmission gear portion 3336b of the transmission link gear 3336, the force acting to rotate the two-stage gear 3337 clockwise is , to rotate the transmission link gear 3336 counterclockwise via the transmission gear portion 3336b. In other words, the transmission link gear 3336 tries to rotate counterclockwise due to the force of the rear right movable decorative body 3320 trying to rotate counterclockwise due to its own weight.

In a normal state, the transmission link gear 3336 is locked against counterclockwise rotation by the link driving gear 3335 as described above, so that it meshes with the transmission gear portion 3336b of the transmission link gear 3336. The two-stage gear 3337 does not rotate, and the slide rack 3338 does not move downward due to the rack gear portion 3338b meshing with the second gear portion 3337b of the two-stage gear 3337.

Since the downward movement of the slide rack 3338 is restricted in this way, the link arm 3339 whose lower end is attached to the slide rack 3338 also does not move downward as a whole. Therefore, the back right movable decoration 3320 tries to rotate counterclockwise so that the tip side moves downward around the upper end side of the link arm 3339 (decoration body side link pin 3325). Since the bearing slider 3332 attached to the base end side of the movable decoration 3320 is positioned at the upper end, the rotation in the counterclockwise direction about the decoration-side link pin 3325 is regulated. The movable decorative body 3320 is maintained in an oblique state in which the distal end side is positioned higher than the proximal end side.

In this normal state, when the rear right driving motor 3333 rotates the link driving gear 3335 clockwise through the motor gear 3334, the transmission projection 3335a of the link driving gear 3335 moves leftward and downward. It revolves in the moving direction. Then, as the transmission protrusion 3335a revolves clockwise and changes its position, the transmission link gear 3336, on which a force in the counterclockwise direction is acting due to the weight of the back-right movable decoration 3320, is transmitted. As the projection 3335a slides on the transmission arm 3336a, the transmission arm 3336a and the transmission projection 3335a are rotated counterclockwise while changing the abutting portion (see FIG. 148). ).

When the transmission link gear 3336 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the slide rack 3338 moves downward via the two-stage gear 3337, and the link arm 3339 also moves downward together with the slide rack 3338. It will be done. Since the load of the back right movable ornament 3320 is supported by the bearing slider 3332 attached to the base end side, when the link arm 3339 moves downward, the bearing slider 3332 is also moved through the back right movable ornament 3320. They will move downward together.

As a result, the back-right movable decorative body 3320 moves downward from the normal state (initial state) until the bearing slider 3332 reaches the lower end, with its tip end side being raised. . That is, in the state (first state) in which the rear-right movable ornament 3320 has moved downward from the initial state and the bearing slider 3332 has reached the lower end (first state), the tip side is higher than the base end side, as in the initial state. It is in a slanted state.

After the bearing slider 3332 reaches the lower end, when the link drive gear 3335 is rotated clockwise by the rear right drive motor 3333, the slide rack is moved through the transmission link gear 3336 and the two-stage gear 3337. 3338 will move further downward. Due to this downward movement of the slide rack 3338, the decoration-side link pin 3325 of the back-right movable decoration 3320 is pulled downward via the link arm 3339, and the back-right movable decoration 3320 moves toward the base end side shaft. It rotates counterclockwise around the hole 3324 so that the distal end moves downward (see FIG. 149).

Subsequently, when the back right driving motor 3333 rotates the link drive gear 3335 clockwise, the back right movable ornament 3320 further rotates counterclockwise around the shaft hole 3324, and the bottom surface of the back right movable ornament 3320 rotates in the counterclockwise direction. By coming into contact with the shock absorbing rubber 3340 attached to the base 3331, further rotation in the counterclockwise direction is regulated, resulting in an oblique state in which the distal end is lower than the proximal end (second state), the back-right movable decorative body 3320 stops. At this time, the detection piece of the link drive gear 3335 is detected by the second movable position detection sensor, and the driving of the rear right drive motor 3333 is stopped based on the detection by the second movable position detection sensor.

After the back right movable decorative body 3320 is in the second state, the back right drive motor 3333 rotates the link drive gear 3335 counterclockwise in front view, which is the opposite direction to the above. When the transmission projection 3335a revolves counterclockwise together with the link drive gear 3335, the transmission link gear 3336 is rotated clockwise by the transmission arm 3336a in contact with the transmission projection 3335a. The slide rack 3338 moves upward through the .

When the slide rack 3338 moves upward from the lower end, the back right movable decoration 3320 is pushed upward by the link arm 3339, and the back right movable decoration 3320 moves upward together with the bearing slider 3332. becomes. That is, the back-right movable decorative body 3320 moves upward while the tip side remains low until the bearing slider 3332 reaches the rising end. Therefore, the back-right movable decorative body 3320 moves upward together with the bearing slider 3332 from the second state, and when the bearing slider 3332 reaches the rising end (third state), as in the second state, It is in an oblique state in which the distal side is lower than the proximal side (see FIG. 150).

Then, when the link drive gear 3335 is further rotated counterclockwise by the rear right drive motor 3333, the transmission link gear 3336 is further rotated clockwise and the slide rack 3338 is moved upward via the two-stage gear 3337. As it moves, the link pin 3325 of the back right movable decoration 3320 is pressed upward by the link arm 3339 attached to the slide rack 3338, and the back right movable decoration 3320 moves through the shaft hole 3324 on the base end side. It rotates clockwise around the center.

After that, when the detection piece of the link drive gear 3335 rotated counterclockwise by the rear right drive motor 3333 is detected by the first movable position detection sensor, the rear right drive motor 3333 is driven. Being stopped, the rotation of the link drive gear 3335 stops. In this state, the bearing slider 3332 and the slide rack 3338 of the rear right movable mechanism 3330 are positioned at the raised end, and the rear right movable decorative body 3320 whose base end side is rotatably attached to the bearing pin 3332a of the bearing slider 3332 is positioned. , is inclined such that the distal side is positioned higher than the proximal side. That is, the back-right movable decorative body 3320 has returned to the normal state (initial state).

In a normal state, when the rear right drive motor 3333 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise direction when viewed from the front), the link drive gear 3335 rotates counterclockwise, thereby causing the transmission projection 3335a to rotate. moves upward, the contact between the transmission projection 3335a and the transmission arm 3336a is released, and the restriction on the counterclockwise rotation of the transmission link gear 3336 by the transmission projection 3335a is immediately released. be. As a result, the back-right movable decorative body 3320 changes (moves) from the initial state to the second state at once.

When the back-right movable decoration 3320 is in the second state, as shown in FIG. When the link drive gear 3335 is further rotated counterclockwise by the right drive motor 3333, the revolving transmission projection 3335a contacts the transmission arm 3336a from below. When the transmission projection 3335a further revolves counterclockwise, the transmission link gear 3336 rotates clockwise via the transmission arm 3336a by the transmission projection 3335a. The movable decoration body 3320 returns to the initial state after passing through the third state from the second state.

In this way, by driving the back right driving motor 3333, the back right movable decorative body 3320 is rotated around the shaft hole 3324 on the base end side, so that the hatchet modeled by the back right movable decorative body 3320 swings. It is possible to show the player a movable presentation as if the robot was lowered. In addition, the movement of the back-right movable decorative body 3320 from the initial state to the second state via the first state and the movement from the second state to the third state to the initial state are different. , a plurality of movements can be shown to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored.

In addition, when the back-right movable decorative body 3320 moves from the initial state to the second state in which the hatchet is swung down, the base end side (shaft hole 3324) where the center of rotation is located is moved downward by the bearing slider 3332. Therefore, compared to the case where the base end side is not moved downward, more of the back-right movable decorative body 3320 can be made to appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600, and the back-right movable decorative body 3320 can be conspicuous. be able to. In addition, when the back right movable decoration 3320 is moved to the initial position, the base end side where the rotation center is located is moved upward by the bearing slider 3332, so that the rotation center of the back right movable decoration 3320 is moved upward. moves to the upper side of the effect display device 1600 in the front view, the back-right movable decorative body 3320 in the initial state becomes less likely to block the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the display area that can be visually recognized well is increased. It can be made wider, and the player can enjoy the performance image more.

Next, the back front right decoration unit 3350 of the back right effect unit 3300 will be described. The back front right decorative body unit 3350 is attached to the front of the unit base 3331 of the back right movable mechanism 3330 in front of the back right movable decorative body 3320 and extends vertically. A transparent plate-like back front right ornament 3352 which is attached to the front surface of the body base 3351 and is formed in a shape like broken glass, and is attached between the back front right ornament 3352 and the ornament base 3351. A back front right decorative board 3353 (see FIG. 145) on which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the left are mounted on the front surface, and a back front right decorative body 3352 attached to the lower rear surface of the and a magnetic sensor 3003 .

The back front right decorative body 3352 extends upward and downward in an arc so as to be positioned leftward as it goes upward. The back front right decorative body 3352 has a jagged left side that looks like broken glass, and a crack pattern decoration on the front side. The back front right decoration unit 3350 can illuminate the left edge and the crack pattern by causing the LED mounted on the back front right decoration substrate 3353 to emit light.

[5-9-4. Backstage production unit]
Next, the back effecting unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131 and the like. The back upper effect unit 3400 is attached to the upper left side of the front surface of the back middle effect unit 3200 in the back box 3010 . The back side effect unit 3400 is formed in a shape imitating a machete as an item in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and has a back side movable decoration body 3410 extending in the horizontal direction and the left end of the back side movable decoration body 3410. and a rear upper movable mechanism 3420 which is rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the base end side which is the side and which is attached to the front surface of the rear middle production unit 3200 . The back top movable decoration 3410 of the back top effect unit 3400 is arranged in front of the back rear movable decoration 3120 and behind the back right movable decoration 3320 .

The back upper movable decoration 3410 extends in the left-right direction and is attached to the rear side of the decoration main body 3411 having the same external size as the decoration main body 3411 and the flat plate-shaped decoration main body 3411 that resembles a hatchet. A decoration base 3412 in the form of a transparent flat plate, a movable decoration decoration substrate 3413 mounted between the decoration base 3412 and the decoration main body 3411 and having a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the rear surface thereof, and a decoration. A cylindrical shaft pin (not shown) protruding rearward from the rear surface of the base end side of the base 3412, and a spur gear-shaped decoration gear (not shown) that rotates integrally with the decoration base 3412 and rotates around the shaft pin. omitted), and

A decorative body main body 3411 of the back upper movable decorative body 3410 is formed in a shape in which broken glass is combined to imitate a machete, and the upper side and the lower side are formed to be jagged. The decoration main body 3411 is entirely transparent. The decorative body main body 3411 has jagged upper and lower peripheral surfaces that are inclined so that the rear side protrudes more than the front side, and the front surface is formed with a recessed decoration in the form of a crack pattern.

The decoration base 3412 has the same outer shape as the decoration main body 3411, and the peripheral surfaces of the upper and lower sides are inclined so as to be positioned forward toward the end side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the rear upper movable decoration decoration substrate 3413 so as to emit light in a direction along the surface of the decoration base 3412 . The back upper movable decoration body 3410 can illuminate the peripheral edge of the decoration main body 3411 by causing the LED of the back upper movable decoration decoration base plate 3413 to emit light.

The upper back movable mechanism 3420 includes a unit base 3421 attached to the front surface of the back and middle effect unit 3200 and to which the shaft pin of the upper back movable decorative body 3410 is rotatably attached. A rear upper drive motor 3422 protruding rearward, and a transmission gear (not shown) that rotates by transmitting rotation from the rear upper drive motor 3422 and meshes with the decoration gear of the rear upper movable decoration 3410. and have.

In the normal state, the back side effect unit 3400 is in a retracted position state in which the back side movable decoration body 3410 extends horizontally, and by rotating the transmission gear by the back side driving motor 3422, the back side movable decoration is displayed. The body 3410 can be in a state of appearance position in which the distal end side, which is the right end side, is positioned lower than the proximal end side and extends obliquely.

[5-9-5. Behind the scenes production unit]
Next, the back side effect unit 3500 in the back side unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131 and the like. The back bottom effect unit 3500 is attached in the center of the front lower part of the back inside effect unit 3200 in the left-right direction in the back box 3010 . The back-bottom effect unit 3500 includes a back-bottom movable decorative body 3510 imitating a flower having a plurality of petals, and a back-bottom movable decorative body 3510 attached to the front lower part of the back-center effect unit 3200 to move the back-bottom movable decoration body 3510 in the vertical direction. a mechanism 3520;

The underside movable decorative body 3510 is composed of a decorative body body 3511 which is three-dimensionally formed and resembles a flower having a plurality of petals, and a back side mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs for luminous decoration of the decorative body body 3511. and a lower movable decoration decoration substrate 3512 . The back bottom movable decoration 3510 is arranged in front of the back right movable decoration 3320 .

The back and bottom movable mechanism 3520 includes a unit base 3521 attached to the front surface of the back and middle effect unit 3200 and to which the lower part of the decoration body 3511 of the back and bottom movable decoration 3510 is attached so as to be vertically movable, and the unit base 3521. The underside drive motor 3522 is attached to the rear surface and has a rotating shaft protruding forward, and the underside drive motor 3522 revolves around the axis extending in the front-rear direction to move the decoration body 3511 in the vertical direction. a lift drive gear (not shown) having a drive pin;

In the normal state, the back side effect unit 3500 is in the lowered position where the back side movable decorative body 3510 is lowered most, and the revolving drive pin of the lifting drive gear is positioned at the bottom dead center. In this state, when the driving pin is caused to revolve by rotating the elevating drive gear by the underside drive motor 3522, the underside movable decorative body 3510 is lifted together with the upward movement of the revolving drive pin. When the drive pin reaches the top dead center, the drive motor 3522 is stopped to stop the rotation of the elevation drive gear (revolution of the drive pin). As a result, the underside movable decorative body 3510 is moved to the highest position and is in the raised position.

[5-9-6. Back front production unit]
Next, the back front effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131 and the like. The back front effect unit 3600 is formed in a C shape along the inner shape of the game area 5a and attached to the front end of the back box 3010. - 特許庁The back front effect unit 3600 is formed in a substantially C shape when viewed from the front. A transparent plate-shaped front decoration body 3601 formed in a jagged shape protruding like broken glass, and a flat plate-shaped decoration base 3602 attached to the rear side of the back front decoration body 3601. , and a front decoration substrate 3603 attached between the decoration base 3602 and the front decoration 3601 for decorating the front decoration 3601 with light.

The back front effect unit 3600 guides the game ball B received by the general prize winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 of the front unit 2000 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 downward and discharges it onto the substrate holder 1200. A guideway (not shown) is provided. In addition, the back front effect unit 3600 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 and a first starting opening for detecting the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. A sensor 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting in the game area 5a are attached.

The back front decorative body 3601 of the back front effect unit 3600 has an inner peripheral surface inclined so that the rear side protrudes more than the front side, and a recessed decoration like a crack pattern is formed on the front surface. . The back front decoration substrate 3603 is composed of three parts, a back front upper decoration substrate 3603a, a back front left decoration substrate 3603b, and a back front lower decoration substrate 3603c (see FIG. 127). A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the back front decoration substrate 3603 so as to face the central side of the C shape. The back front effect unit 3600 can light-embellish the inner circumferential surface and the crack pattern of the back front decoration body 3601 by causing a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front decoration substrate 3603 to emit light.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main movable presentations on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 159 and the like. FIG. 151 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the rear-back movable decorative body of the rear-back effect unit in the back unit is moved from the retracted position to the standby position. 152 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the back-rear movable decoration is dropped to the lowered position from the state of FIG. 151. FIG. 153 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back movable decorative body is vertically moved between the standby position and the lowered position by the slide guide from the state of FIG. 152. FIG. FIG. 154 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-right movable ornament of the back-right effect unit in the back unit is moved from the initial state to the first state. 155 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the back-right movable ornament is moved to the second state from the state in FIG. 154. FIG. 156 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the back-right movable ornament is moved to the third state from the state in FIG. 155. FIG.

FIG. 157 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the upper back movable decorative body of the upper back effect unit in the back unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position. FIG. 158 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the back-bottom movable decorative body of the back-bottom effect unit in the back unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. Fig. 159 shows the back rear movable decoration of the back rear effect unit in the back unit to the lowered position, the back right movable decoration of the back right effect unit to the second state, and the back top movable decoration of the back top effect unit to appear. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-bottom movable decoration body of the back-bottom effect unit is moved to the position and to the raised position, respectively;

The game board 5 includes a panel plate 1110 of a game panel 1100 that defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a starting unit 2100, a side unit 2200, a side slope 2300, a center accessory 2500, and the like. Since they are formed transparent, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. The back front right decorative body 3352 of the back right effect unit 3300, the back front decorative body 3601 of the back front effect unit 3600, and the like can be visually recognized well.

In this normal state, the back-right movable decorative body 3320 of the back-right effect unit 3300 is positioned in the initial state, and is positioned lower than the inner side of the C-shaped back front decorative body 3601. Department faces forward. In addition, the back top movable decoration 3410 of the back top effect unit 3400 arranged behind the back right movable decoration 3320 is in the retracted position and positioned below the back right movable decoration 3320. A part of the lower part that is doing is facing forward.

In addition, the back rear movable decoration 3120 of the back rear effect unit 3100 arranged behind the back upper movable decoration 3410 is in the retracted position, and is positioned below the back upper movable decoration 3410. A small part of the tip that imitates a machete facing forward. That is, in a normal state, the back rear movable decorative body 3120 is almost invisible. In addition, the back bottom movable decorative body 3510 of the back bottom effect unit 3500 is in the state of the lowered position, and a part of the part located above the inner side of the C-shaped back front decorative body 3601 is facing forward.

The game board 5 performs the rear back production of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. A back-back movable effect unit 3110 of the unit 3100, a back-right movable effect unit 3310 of the back-right effect unit 3300, a back-up effect unit 3400, and a back-down effect unit 3500 perform a predetermined movable effect.

Specifically, as a movable effect using the back rear effect unit 3110 in the back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. Then, the large back movable decorative body 3120 extending in the horizontal direction so as to straddle the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is placed in a normal state (retracted position state), and the lock protrusion 3122a is in the restricting portion 3141c of the lock member 3141. and the state of the standby position in which it abuts on the upper and lower sides. In this movable effect, most of the rear movable decorative body 3120 cannot be seen well from the player's side, so that the upper part of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 can make the player feel as if something is shaking up and down. This allows the player to have a sense of anticipation that something will happen.

Then, the slide guide 3134 is moved downward by the back drive motor 3135 to abut against the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142, and then the slide guide 3134 presses the release contact portion 3142b downward. , the lock member 3141 is rotated from the locked position to the unlocked position, and the rear movable decorative body 3120 in the state of the waiting position above the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the front view is moved to the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. to its lowered position (see FIG. 152). As a result, the player can see a movable effect in which a large hatchet (rear rear movable decorative body 3120) straddling the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the horizontal direction freely falls while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600.例文帳に追加Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game) in which the player has an advantage over the player is generated. It is possible to make the player think that the game is not possible, and to increase the expectation for the game.

After that, the slide guide 3134 is lifted by the rear rear driving motor 3135, and the rear rear movable decorative body 3120 in the lowered position is returned to the state of the normal retracted position. At this time, as shown in FIG. 153, by appropriately changing the rotational direction of the rear driving motor 3135, the rear movable decorative body 3120 is moved through the slide guide 3134 in the vertical direction of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. In the vicinity of the center, it may be reciprocated up and down. As a result, the rear back movable decorative body 3120 moves up and down while blocking the center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the vertical direction. The movable decorative body 3120 can be focused on, and the movement of the rear movable decorative body 3120 can be enjoyed.

As a movable effect using the back right movable effect unit 3310 of the back right effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. Move from the state of the state to the position of the first state. As a result, the entire back-right movable decoration 3320 is positioned below the inner side of the C-shaped back-front decoration 3601, and the player can see the whole of the back-right movable decoration 3320 imitating a machete. Therefore, it is possible to make the player excited and excited by whether or not the machete (rear-right movable decorative body 3320) will be swung down after this, and the player's sense of anticipation can be heightened.

Then, the back right driving motor 3333 is further driven to move the back right movable decorative body 3320 from the position of the first state to the position of the second state (see FIG. 155). As a result, it is possible to show the player a movable effect as if the machete being picked up by the back-right movable decorative body 3320 is swung down, so that the player can be surprised by the swinging down of the machete. The player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back-right movable decorative body 3320, and the swinging down of the machete can make the player think that something good will happen, thereby enhancing the player's expectation for the game. can be raised.

After that, the back right movable decorative body 3320 in the second state is returned to the initial state through the third state by the back right drive motor 3333 . When the back-right movable decoration 3320 moves from the position of the second state to the position of the third state, as shown in FIG. The back-right movable decorative body 3320 rotates about the base end side so that the tip side of the machete moves upward from the third state to the initial state. On the other hand, it can be made to recognize that it is a movement that is clearly different from when the machete is swung down, and it returns to the initial state with a movement different from the first movement from the initial state to the second state. The movement of the right movable decorative body 3320 can be enjoyed.

In the back-right movable effect unit 3310, the back-right movable decorative body 3320 may be moved from the initial state to the second state all at once without temporarily stopping in the first state. Since the created movable presentation can be shown to the player, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player.

As a movable effect using the upper back effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. side) to the front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 . This allows the player to see a movable effect in which the back upper movable decorative body 3410 imitating a machete appears in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 . Since this back upper movable decorative body 3410 is formed as if the modeled hatchet is composed of fragments of broken glass, it appears to be integrated with the back front decorative body 3601 in the state of the normal retracted position. , the existence of which is difficult to notice, so that by moving it to the appearance position, it is possible to make it look as if a part of the back front decorative body 3601 has moved, so that the player can be surprised and entertained.

As a movable effect using the lower back effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. As a result, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 behind the C-shaped front front decorative body 3601 is lifted, so that the flower modeled by the lower back movable decorative body 3510 can be easily seen. It is possible to make the player think that something good will happen, and to heighten expectations for the game.

Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the back rear movable effect unit 3110 of the back rear effect unit 3100, the back right movable effect unit 3310 of the back right effect unit 3300, the upper back effect unit 3400, and the lower back effect unit 3500 It is also possible to perform a movable effect in which the above-described movable effects using , are appropriately combined. For example, first, after moving the back upper movable decoration 3410 from the retracted position to the appearing position, the back right movable decoration 3320 is moved from the initial state to the position of the second state, and then the back rear movable decoration 3120 is moved. After being dropped to the lowered position, the underside movable decorative body 3510 is moved to the raised position (see FIG. 159). Due to this movable effect, all the movable decorations are positioned in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player is convinced that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game) will occur. It is possible to increase the interest of the player. In addition, in this movable effect, a plurality of movable decorations sequentially move to the front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, after one movable decoration moves to the front of the display screen, the next movable decoration moves forward. Depending on whether or not the body moves to the front of the display screen, the player can feel nervous and pounding, and the player's expectation can be heightened, and the player can hardly get bored.

Next, the main lighting effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 160 to 166 and the like. FIG. 160 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the front light guide plate of the display effect unit is decorated with the first pattern. FIG. 161 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the front light guide plate of the display effect unit is decorated with the second pattern. FIG. 162 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the third pattern is decorated with light on the first back light guide plate of the back and middle effect unit. FIG. 163 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the fourth pattern is decorated with light on the first back light guide plate of the back middle effect unit. FIG. 164 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the fifth pattern is light-embellished on the back second light guide plate of the back-back decoration effect unit in the back-back effect unit. FIG. 165 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the sixth pattern is light-embellished on the back second light guide plate of the back-back decoration effect unit in the back-back effect unit. FIG. 166 is an explanatory diagram showing an animation-like light emission effect with a plurality of patterns using the front light guide plate, the back first light guide plate, and the back second light guide plate. FIG. 167 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front light guide plate of the front effect unit is illuminated with the first pattern and the back right movable decoration body of the back right effect unit is moved to the second state.

The game board 5 is a display performance unit of the front unit 2000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. 2600, the back rear decoration effect unit 3150 of the back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and the back middle effect unit 3200 perform a predetermined light emission effect.

Specifically, as a light emission effect using the display effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000, for example, as shown in FIG. The plurality of LEDs 2611a for the light guide plate are caused to emit light, and the first pattern 2621 is decorated with light emission. As a result, the eye of a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is illuminated in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600, thereby surprising the player and changing the game state. It is possible to make the player think that the player will play the game, and to increase the expectation for the game.

Further, as a light emission effect using the display effect unit 2600, for example, as shown in FIG. Light is emitted to decorate the second design 2622 with light. As a result, the second pattern 2622 is luminous-displayed, so that it is possible to make the player feel as if a cracked glass is provided in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. can make you wonder and entertain. In addition, for example, if the second pattern 2622 is illuminated during the ready-to-win effect, the player can be made to think that the ready-to-win will develop, and the expectation for the game can be heightened.

162, for example, as shown in FIG. 162, a third pattern substrate 3221 arranged on the right side of the rear first light guide plate 3210 in front view is mounted. The plurality of LEDs 3221a for the light guide plate are caused to emit light, and the third pattern 3211 is decorated with light emission. As a result, in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, a plurality of broken and scattered pieces of glass are displayed with light emission as the third pattern 3211, so that the player can be amused by being puzzled.

In addition, as a light emitting effect using the back and middle effect unit 3200, for example, as shown in FIG. The light plate LED 3222a is appropriately illuminated to decorate the fourth pattern 3212 with light emission. As a result, in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, a plurality of V-shaped light streaks with a sense of perspective are displayed as the fourth pattern 3212, so that the front of the display screen can be clearly displayed. , the player can enjoy the luminous decoration.

As a light emitting effect using the back rear decorative effect unit 3150 in the back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a mounted on the pattern substrate 3171 are caused to emit light, and the fifth pattern 3161 is decorated with light emission. As a result, in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, a guide (message) for the player consisting of the characters "Chance!" It is possible to suggest the arrival of the game and increase the expectation for the game.

In addition, as a light emitting effect using the back rear decoration effect unit 3150, for example, as shown in FIG. LED 3172a for the light guide plate is caused to emit light, and the sixth pattern 3162 is decorated with light emission. As a result, a plurality of broken and scattered pieces of glass are luminescently displayed as the sixth pattern 3162 in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player can be amused by being puzzled.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the front light guide plate 2610, the back first light guide plate 3210, and the back second light guide plate 3160 are sequentially decorated with patterns that are related to each other, thereby creating animation-like movement. It is possible to perform lighting effects. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 166, the second pattern 2622 of the front light guide plate 2610, the third pattern 3211 of the back first light guide plate 3210, and the sixth pattern 3162 of the back second light guide plate 3160 are arranged in this order. When (luminous display) is activated, the player can see a luminous effect with movement such that the broken glass pieces are scattered after cracks appear in the transparent glass. At this time, since the front light guide plate 2610, the rear first light guide plate 3210, and the rear second light guide plate 3160 are arranged rearward in this order, when viewed from the player's side, broken glass pieces scatter rearward. It is possible to show a three-dimensional and continuous luminous decoration, which can entertain the player.

As a lighting effect using the front effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 and the back right effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. In the back right driving motor 3333, the back right movable decorative body 3320 is moved from the normal initial state to the second state position where the hatchet simulating the back right movable decorative body 3320 is swung down, and the front A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2611a mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 arranged on the right side of the light guide plate 2610 in front view are caused to emit light, and the first pattern 2621 is decorated with light emission. In this state, as shown in the figure, the center portion of the radial crack pattern formed on the front surface of the back-right movable decorative body 3320 is behind the pupil portion of the eyes of the predetermined character following the concept of the pachinko machine 1. is located. In this state, when the central LED 3323a of the back-right movable decorative body decoration substrate 3323 is lit, the eyes of the first pattern 2621 displayed by light emission shine brightly, giving a strong impact to the player. In addition, it is possible to make the player think that an advantageous game state such as a "jackpot game" will occur, thereby increasing expectations for the game.

Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately combine the movable effect and the light emitting effect as described above, and the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600 can also be combined. be able to. As a result, various patterns of effects can be presented to the player by appropriately combining light emitting effects, movable effects, display effects, etc., making it difficult for the player to get bored. The player can be entertained, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

[6. Configuration of Peripheral Control Unit]
Next, a peripheral control unit 1500 arranged behind the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 168 to 170. FIG. 168 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 169 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 170 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500 .

As shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a cover body 1501 having an open rear and a box shape that is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction, and a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. A peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the performance based on commands from the main control board 1310, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a peripheral control board 1510 and an electric It has a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 which is directly connected, and a base body 1502 which closes the opening of the cover body 1501 . Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions in the internal space of the cover body 1501, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502. A peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) is composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 .

[6-1. Cover body]
In addition to the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data (peripheral data) that can store various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 is stored in the various boards mounted in the inner space of the cover body 1501. There is a ROM board 1520 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 capable of outputting drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600 . Peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape with an area of about two-thirds of cover body 1501 when viewed from the back, and is arranged close to the left side of cover body 1501 . Peripheral data ROM board 1520 and liquid crystal output board 1530 are located on the upper right side of cover body 1501, and peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a square shape. On the other hand, the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a square shape two times larger than the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and is placed on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 .

The peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector to be described later, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector to be described later. properly connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to form the same ground. (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 shown in FIG. properly connected.

The cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color. , bottom side, and right side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e protrude rearward (toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1) to form a box shape having an opening.

The cover flat plate 1501a has an air-cooling fan FAN attached at a slightly upper right side of the center when viewed from the front and corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of cover body 1501 . A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa are formed in the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa along a plurality of concentric circles centered at the center of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. Further, at the four corners of the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa, there are provided cylindrical predetermined through holes th1 to th4 at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the square air cooling fan FAN. Guide protrusions 1501aab1 to 1501aab4 having a height (distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air cooling fan FAN) are formed so as to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, respectively. By forming the arc-shaped slit holes 1501 aaa , it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 from the peripheral control board 1510 .

A pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 are formed in the cover flat plate 1501a in the vicinity of the fan mounting recess 1501aa and diagonally. When the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the fan mounting recess 1501aa and attached, the front surface of the air-cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal pan head screw with a seat (not shown) (screw having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated) is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the seated pan head screw, comes into contact with the front surface of the cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the cooling fan FAN protrudes from the fan mounting recess 1501aa. can be prevented.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap ( In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

The cover plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, and is located at a position higher than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a shorter distance than the distance from the front surface of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). ), a wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is formed so as to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501 . When the air-cooling fan FAN is attached and fixed to the fan mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wirings from the air-cooling fan FAN can be pulled out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab.

When viewed from the front, the cover flat plate 1501a is aligned along its lower side by 1 position corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510d attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The connector concave portion 1501ac is defined as two closed substantially horizontally long rectangular regions (more precisely, a convex region with the volume control switch 1510d and the connector CN1 at the top and the connectors CN2 to CN7 at the bottom). It is formed to protrude toward the opening side of cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface (position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of fan mounting recess 1501aa). there is Connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d. The bottom surface of the connector concave portion 1501ac generally occupies the lower right region when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front. Therefore, as a countermeasure against insufficient strength and warping of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac has connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a sound volume adjuster. Two vertically elongated reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 are formed at positions that do not interfere with the hole 1501ac8 and protrude forward at a predetermined interval.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are connected to the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. and are exposed from the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8.

When viewed from the front, the cover plate 1501a has, along its lower side, one closed oblong rectangular area corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. The opening of the cover body 1501 is located at a position where the connector recess 1501ad is lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. Connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed in the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively.

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad. .

Also, the cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed along the left side of the cover plate 1501a at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the front. A mounting recess 1501af for mounting a wiring cover body 1503 having a laterally long rectangular shape that communicates with the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae and can close the wiring draw-out opening 1501ae is compared with the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa. It is formed to protrude toward the opening of cover body 1501 at a high position (a position having a shorter distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of fan mounting recess 1501aa). The mounting recess 1501af is formed in a cylindrical shape at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover 1503, and is inserted into the through hole 1503a. dimension) is formed so as to project toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and mounting holes 1501afb1 are formed at positions corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2 are respectively formed.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover 1503. , the wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, the wiring drawer opening 1501ae is closed and a plurality of wirings (for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600) connected to the connector CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected. The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover that protects the plurality of wirings from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color.

Plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left cover side wall 1501c when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, and protrude upward and downward respectively outward with a predetermined interval in the center. In addition, a hinge hooking portion 1501cc that is arranged above the guide portion 1501ca and projects outward, and a hinge hook portion 1501cd that is arranged below the guide portion 1501cb and projects outside are formed. The left ends of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are chamfered on the rear surface side. On the other hand, L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda projecting forward are formed on the front side of the left ends of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd. A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea projecting outward is formed in the center of the cover body 1501 of the right cover side wall 1501e.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the rear so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged close to the left side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. Four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed at positions protruding from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. As shown in FIG. The four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are surrounded by circular soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral control Circular soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are formed on the back side of the substrate 1510, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are respectively formed on the peripheral control substrate. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of 1510 .

When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing them toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4, the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are in contact with each other. At the same time, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the rear surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seating surfaces of the metal pan head screws are brought into contact with each other. Further, the shafts (screw portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan head screw. are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. As a result, the cover body 1501 is circuit grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 . The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 as described above. Therefore, the cover body 1501 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 by being circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal round head screw. GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . In addition, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, as described above. Since the cover body 1501 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 , the circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 .

Note that when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 become the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are arranged so as not to protrude outward from the opening side end surfaces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when viewed from the back so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the back of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 are diagonally projected from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions where It is The four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are surrounded by circular soldering copper foils (so-called lands) 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 on the surface side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, Circular soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed on the back side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed respectively. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 .

When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are fitted to the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and inserting metal round screws (not shown) into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Thus, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front side of peripheral data ROM board 1520, mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a, and mounting boss holes are formed. The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 are in contact with each other, lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, seating surfaces of metal pan head screws, are in contact with each other. Further, the shafts (screw portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, as described above, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan head screw. lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are electrically connected. As a result, the cover body 1501 is circuit grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 . The ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 as described above. Therefore, the cover body 1501 is circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal round head screw, thereby connecting the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 ( GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . In addition, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, as described above. Since the cover body 1501 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 , the circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 .

When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are attached to the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end face on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and on the back side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the back side of the flat cover plate 1501a. The rear surface of the fixed peripheral control board 1510 is arranged on the same plane.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the rear so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed at positions that are diagonally projected from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. The four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are surrounded by copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 for soldering having a circular shape on the surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and liquid crystal output Circular soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are formed on the back side of the substrate 1530, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are respectively formed on the liquid crystal output substrate. A wiring pattern is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of 1530 .

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , metal pan screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to output the liquid crystal. A substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the mounting boss holes 1501am1 are formed. , 1501am2 are brought into contact with each other, and the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the rear surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the seat surfaces of the metal pan head screws are in contact with each other. It will be in a contact state. Further, the shafts (threaded portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, as described above, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a metal pan head screw. are electrically connected to the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4. As a result, the cover body 1501 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . The ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 as described above. Therefore, the cover body 1501 is circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a metal round head screw, thereby grounding the peripheral control board 1510 (GND). ) and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 . In addition, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, as described above. Since the cover body 1501 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 , the circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 .

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 become the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. side (that is, so as not to protrude outside the opening side end surfaces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and fixed to the back surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surface of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane.

In this way, when various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the surfaces of the various boards (the cover plate 1501a A space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, a gap (2.3 mm in this embodiment) having the above-described predetermined distance dimension is provided between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model type are printed) and the rear surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa. is formed.

A cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 has a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the fan mounting recess 1501aa. When the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. By taking in air from the outside of the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover body 1501 (especially the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed with a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width of 6.5 mm in the horizontal direction, and a pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm in the vertical direction.

[6-2. Base body]
The base member 1502 that closes the opening of the cover member 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color. Base side walls 1502b to 1502e project forward (back side of the pachinko machine 1) on the left side, the bottom side, and the right side to form a box shape having an opening. The size of the opening formed by base side walls 1502b to 1502e of base body 1502 is one size larger than the size of the opening formed by cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of cover body 1501 . Thus, in a state where the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by covering the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are located inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. are fitted and inscribed (surface contact).

When viewed from the front, the base plate 1502a has wirings for the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 at predetermined intervals along the lower side so as not to interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7. Disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 elongated in the vertical direction are formed to prevent the electrical wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from being broken due to the bending of the peripheral control board 1510 due to the force when inserting the connector for connection. The force when inserting the connector for connecting the wiring to the connector CN1 at a position where it does not interfere with the connector CN1 and the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, or the force when operating the volume control switch 1510d An elongated disconnection prevention rib portion 1502aa4 is formed in the left-right direction to prevent the peripheral control board 1510 from being warped and the electrical wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from being disconnected.

An engaging portion 1502ca projecting outward is formed near the opening side of the base body 1502 on the left side wall 1502c when the base body 1502 is viewed from the front. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed at corresponding positions. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

The plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab, and the above-described L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. Then, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. By wrapping, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are hooked on the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. Engageable.

A base side sealing portion 1502ea projecting outward is formed in the center of the right base side wall 1502e at a position corresponding to the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. As shown in FIG. Through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 are formed on the upper and lower sides of the right base side wall 1502e, respectively.

[6-3. Various connectors]
A peripheral control board 1510 mounted in the inner space of the cover body 1501 includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as "SATA controller"), and various I/O interfaces. etc. are integrated on a single semiconductor chip, various programs that can control the progress of game effects and demonstrations (demonstration effects that are performed while the player is waiting), and the progress of effects. A control ROM 1510b that stores various schedule data in advance, and an SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) that can transfer and store various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. SDRAM 1510c composed of 1510c1 and 1510c2, a slide-type volume control switch 1510d capable of adjusting the volume, a backup power supply 1510e capable of supplying power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when power is cut off, and various other components. It is provided with a power source generation circuit (not shown) that generates a power source voltage and various connectors CN1 to CN7.

The control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbits, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbits. A peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

Various I/O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I/Os, various parallel I/Os, and the like. Various serial I/O include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

In this embodiment, UART communication is adopted as a communication method for receiving commands from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5). SPI communication or I2C communication is adopted as a communication method for transmitting control data to (communication is performed via the corresponding connector among connectors CN3, CN6, and CN7).

In this embodiment, using SPI communication or I2C communication, the electric drive source provided on the game board 5 side (for example, back rear effect unit 3100, back right effect unit 3300, back upper effect unit 3400, back lower effect unit 3500 etc., and communicates via the connector CN6.) and an electric drive source provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the operation ring drive motor 342 provided in the production operation unit 300 and the operation button elevation drive It is a motor 367, etc., and communicates via the connector CN3.), and transmits drive data to the drive control IC that drives the game board 5 side (communicates via the connector CN7). ) and a plurality of LEDs provided on the side of the door frame 3 (communicating via the connector CN3). (For example, various detection sensors provided in the back rear effect unit 3100, the back right effect unit 3300, the back upper effect unit 3400, the back lower effect unit 3500, etc., and communicate through the connector CN6.) It receives as detection data, and receives signals from various sensors provided on the side of the door frame 3 (for example, various detection sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 and communicating via the connector CN3) as detection data. or In this embodiment, the transfer rate for SPI communication is set to 250 kbps, and the transfer rate for I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

Various parallel I/O include GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output). In this embodiment, a signal from the air cooling fan FAN that transmits the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), or is provided on the game board 5 side. Signals from various sensors for confirming the operation of non-controlled objects and the origin position are input to GPIO (via connector CN6), and control signals for controlled objects (not shown) provided on the game board 5 side are sent from GPIO (connector CN6 ), or output a signal from the GPIO to the LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

In this embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to connector CN1, and SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to connector CN3 (that is, connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , connector CN5 is assigned UART communication, connector CN6 is assigned SPI communication and GPIO (that is, connector CN6 is assigned as a connector with both SPI communication and GPIO), and connector CN7 is assigned SPI communication. is assigned.

The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, realizing a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (up to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed according to instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2.

The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory), and can achieve a high data communication speed. Various control information (peripheral data) from a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

The peripheral control board 1510 further includes a special connector SCN1 for inter-board connection with the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a special connector SCN2 for inter-board connection with the liquid crystal output board 1530. FIG. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a special connector SCN3 for inter-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510 . The liquid crystal output board 1530 has a special connector SCN4 for inter-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510 .

The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 in a plurality of types of video signal formats. Examples of the multiple types of video signal systems include RGB, LVDS, MIPI (Mobile Industry Processor Interface), eDP (Embedded Display Port), and clockless systems. , four systems (four systems in total) are adopted: one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system. In addition, in the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. In addition, instead of the MIPI method, for example, the eDP method is adopted, and the RGB method is one system, the LVDS method is two systems (first LVDS method, second LVDS method), and the eDP method is one system Peripheral control board 1510 can also be created.

The peripheral control board 1510 further includes LEDML1 near the control ROM 1510b, LEDML2 near the SDRAM 1510c, LEDML3 near the special connector SCN1, and LEDML4 near the special connector SCN2. The peripheral control board 1510 is directly supplied with various voltages (+37 V DC, +12 V DC, and +5 V DC) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described later. LEDML1 confirms (monitors) the state of DC +5V being supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state of DC +5V being supplied. The LEDML2 confirms (monitors) the state in which +12V DC is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which +12V DC is supplied. The LEDML3 is for confirming (monitoring) the state of DC +37V being supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state of DC +37V being supplied. The LEDML4 confirms (monitors) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and is kept lit while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surfaces of the various boards (cover A space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface facing the rear surface of the flat plate 1501a and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The space thus formed can be illuminated brightly by lighting the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are provided on the peripheral control board 1510 in that they have a floating mechanism. The structure is completely different from the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the connectors CN8 to CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. FIG. These connectors CN1 to CN10 are sockets, and the sockets and the plugs are fitted by inserting and pushing in the plugs of the corresponding connectors in the direction perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. FIG. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 are so structured that they do not move vertically when viewed from the front of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 at the time of fitting.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, and the special connectors SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connectors SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are sockets.

By inserting and pushing the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the socket and the plug are engaged. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front, the socket is oriented forward and backward (the back and front of the pachinko machine 1). ) direction), and is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing by moving within a predetermined distance range. The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is connected to the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the (peripheral control board 1510) is moved to the maximum within the above-described predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 should not come into contact with the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Moreover, a gap is formed between the front face (upper face) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back face of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. As shown in FIG.

By inserting and pushing the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the socket and the plug are engaged. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front, the socket is oriented forward and backward (in the direction of the back and front of the pachinko machine 1). ), the structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing by moving within a predetermined distance range. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is set in a state in which the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached and fixed to a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control 1510), the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 does not come into contact with the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, even if the substrate 1510) is moved to the maximum extent within the above-described predetermined distance range when viewed from the front. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of connector SCN4 and the rear surface of cover flat plate 1501a of cover body 1501 .

Here, the reason for adopting the special connector SCN3 for the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 for the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be briefly explained. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a peripheral data ROM 1520 a capable of storing various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 . Various types of control information (peripheral data) include image data such as background images, character images, and pattern images for drawing various effects images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative substrates provided for the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Emission data that defines the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs etc. mounted in a plurality, Sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, door frame 3 and game board 5 Driving data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effects provided can be mentioned.

The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory, which is less expensive than a NOR flash (nonvolatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

By adopting a NAND type flash (non-volatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a in this way, it is possible to reduce the cost, contribute to the suppression of power consumption, and read various stored data at a high transfer speed. can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can reduce power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is susceptible to noise due to its low operating voltage. In addition, it is necessary to transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520 a from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510 accurately and reliably. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 are not electrically connected via wiring (harness). By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected by an inter-board connector, the influence of noise entering the inter-board transmission line is reduced.

The procedure for installing various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the peripheral data ROM board 1520 inserts the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on itself into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. After pressing in, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 must be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the floating mechanism described above is adopted. By doing so, a plurality of connecting terminals formed on the plug and the socket can be absorbed by absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. can be prevented from being damaged, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be reliably formed.

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, although the distance is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. be. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above floating mechanism, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when connecting, damage to the connection terminals formed in the plug and socket is prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is secured. It can be formed reliably.

The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, which is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510, from the connector CN10, thereby causing the effect display device 1600 to display the progress of the effect (for example, to the player). An image to convey that a jackpot game state more advantageous than the normal state will occur, an image to convey that the jackpot game state will not occur, and a state in which a jackpot game state will occur compared to the normal state although the jackpot game state will not occur. It is an important substrate for drawing an image such as an image that tells you that you are approaching. Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit drawing data of an image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530 . Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are not electrically connected via a wiring (harness). 1510 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector, thereby reducing the influence of noise entering the board-to-board transmission path.

The procedure for installing various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the liquid crystal output board 1530 has its special connector SCN4 socket inserted into the special connector SCN2 plug of the peripheral control board 1510 . Since it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a after pushing it in, the special connector SCN4 socket provided with the floating mechanism described above is adopted. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are absorbed in the back-and-forth direction error caused when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is possible to prevent breakage and reliably form a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 .

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, although the distance is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. be. Even in such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above floating mechanism. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs at that time, damage to the connection terminals formed in the plug and socket is prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is secured. can be formed.

When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the back side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are connected as described above. Since the rear surface and the rear surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the same plane, it is said that the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the front surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Since the distance dimension in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be reduced compared to the case of performing a three-dimensional arrangement, for example, a large movable effect unit (movable effect body can be operated) can be attached to the game board 5. It can contribute to securing the distance dimension in the depth direction for arranging the electrical drive source and drive mechanism that can be used, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position.

[6-4. Assembling method of peripheral control unit]
Here, a method for assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the cover plate 1501a. The mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side are inserted into the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. insert into As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The arrangement corresponds to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in .

Subsequently, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by , and metal round head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a pan head screw made by the manufacturer and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. In this way, out of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is restrained from moving vertically and horizontally by being inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the rear surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 to constrain movement in the vertical and horizontal directions. No boss protrusion is formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the vertical and horizontal directions are restrained, and the dimensional error caused by such restraint is eliminated. 1501a are absorbed by the dimensional tolerances of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. You can do it.

Subsequently, with the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are It is inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed in the cover body 1501 are engaged with the base body. It is inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of 1502 .

Subsequently, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. In the state where the base body 1502 is wrapped around the cover body 1501 so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501 and the cover body 1501 is covered with the base body 1502, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 is covered with a metal (not shown). A metal one-way screw with an anchor rivet inserted is inserted and screwed toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502 . A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the base body 1502 are formed by screwing in the metal one-way screw and expanding the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet toward the outside at the base-side sealing portion 1502ea. The base-side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed is sealed.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 fit inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in contact with each other. As described above, since the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are brought into a conducting state. In order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be destroyed with a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and it is possible to deter unauthorized acts on the peripheral control board box 1505. is raised.

Subsequently, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the fan mounting recess 1501aa formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN are drawn out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal pan head screw with a seat (not shown) is screwed into each of the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a.

Subsequently, for connecting a plurality of wires (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 through the wire lead-out opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Then, the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 . Metal round head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 respectively from the front of the wiring cover body 1503 to the rear, whereby the wiring cover body is assembled. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

When attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) when viewed from the front. The engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the side) is inserted into a mounting groove (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. is inserted and screwed into a mounting hole (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100 to fix it.

Among the above-described assembling methods, in the procedure for mounting various boards in the inner space of the cover body 1501, for example, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is first placed at the above-described predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. (The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the rear side of the cover body 1501.) side (the liquid crystal output board 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back), and then the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is prepared. The socket of the special connector SCN3 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. It is also possible to insert and push in to fix the peripheral control board 1510 to the above-described predetermined position (the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged close to the left side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the rear side). . In the procedure for mounting various substrates as described above, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-described floating mechanism, errors in the front-rear direction that occur when the plugs and sockets are pushed in can be absorbed. 1520 and peripheral control board 1510 can be reliably formed, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and peripheral A transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board can be reliably formed.

By the way, there are a plurality of types of game boards mounted on pachinko machines with different game specifications. In this embodiment, various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 can be divided into three and attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common regardless of the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 stores the peripheral data ROM 1520a for each game specification of the game board. , and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a board dependent on the format of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 .

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board and does not depend on the system of the video signal that is input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused). In addition, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 having the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which the peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the board-to-board connector described above. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

As described above, there are, for example, multiple types of methods of video signals input to a display device such as an effect display device, such as the RGB method, the LVDS method, the MIPI method, the eDP method, and the clockless method. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these multiple types of systems are electrically connected by the board-to-board connector described above. That is, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be easily replaced according to the format of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 . In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is used as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. is employed, the liquid crystal output board 1530 adapted to the video signal system (LVDS system) input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the board-to-board connector described above.

In this embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the side with metal pan head screws, the circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of these various boards. is configured to In addition, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, as described above. properly connected. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise entering from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is applied to the ground (GND) of various substrates, the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630, and the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 as a circuit ground. It can be removed from the frame ground board 559 shown in FIG. As a result, there is no need to equip each board (including the power supply board 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such electromagnetic wave noise, which contributes to cost reduction of the various boards (including the power supply board 630). can be done.

Here, the arrangement of a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 will be described. These plural circular ventilation holes 1501az can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 as described above, and also have the function of confirming the presence or absence of tampering.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided, the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, IC direction, part number, pin numbers, etc.), that is, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be checked from multiple angles. As much as possible, they are arranged in a dispersed manner so as to form an area larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. As a result, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510b and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. In addition, the LEDML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b maintains the lighting state when DC +5V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Therefore, the DC +5V is originally supplied. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the state of the control ROM 1510b, it also has a spotlight function to brightly illuminate the control ROM 1510b, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins. and the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 .

In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az arranged on the left side of the fan mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be checked. An area larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape constituted by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and the peripheral data provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, connectors pin number, IC direction, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and 1520 are distributed and arranged so as to form a large area in which the silk-printed contents can be almost confirmed from multiple angles. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 In addition to the correspondence relationship, the modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the modification of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, It can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. In addition, the LEDML3, which is arranged near the special connector SCN1, maintains its lighting state when +37V DC is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the state of supply, it serves as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. By further having the function of , the visibility of the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a is improved, the visibility of the state of the IC pins is improved, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. and the visibility of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. .

In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be checked. The area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530), and the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are distributed so that the silk-printed contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, and the correspondence between the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the contents silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 In addition to the correspondence relationship, the alteration of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. can be done. In addition, the LEDML4, which is arranged near the special connector SCN2, is maintained in a lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. Although it has a function, it has a function as a spotlight to brightly illuminate the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530. Improvement of the visibility of contents silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and improvement of visibility of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. , can contribute to

In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa correspond to the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. The state of the IC pins and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.), that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, In order to check the state of the IC pins and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 from multiple angles, they are distributed and arranged so as to have areas larger than the shape of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. ing. As a result, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. . In addition, the LEDML2 arranged near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lighting state while the +12V direct current from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied. Originally, it has a function to confirm (monitor) the state of DC +12V supply, but it also has a spotlight function to brightly illuminate the SDRAM 1510c, so that the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) , the visibility of the state of the IC pin, and the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510. there is

In addition, among the plurality of blades constituting the vanes of the air cooling fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades when the inspector rotates the vanes of the air cooling fan FAN) , the product number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. As a result, it is possible to confirm through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az whether or not an unauthorized board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a.

In this embodiment, the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are surface-mounted, with a wide angle of about 120 degrees, and weak directivity. Also suitable for lighting applications. When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the surface of the various boards (cover A space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface facing the back surface of the flat plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. By turning on the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting, the space thus formed can be illuminated brightly.

In addition, the light emitted from the LEDML1 to LEDML4 is reflected back to the area on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and its surroundings, which face the light emitting surfaces of the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. A reflecting portion (not shown) directed toward the peripheral control board 1510 is formed. These reflecting portions (not shown) may be colored paint having a bright color such as white, or colored paint having gloss, or a metallic sheet having luster may be adhered.

4, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, and a payout unit 560 is arranged on the side of the game board 5. As shown in FIG. are arranged, the game balls rub against each other in the ball paths formed by these and are charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby becoming a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game balls. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall. Thus, the environment around the game board 5 is extremely susceptible to electromagnetic noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data A circuit ground configuration is adopted in which the ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to the same ground (GND). In this embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the ground of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 as described above. (GND) line and the same ground (GND) is used.

Thereby, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and/or Electromagnetic wave noise that enters through the base body 1502 and the like is used as a circuit ground, the ground (GND) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630. ), and can be removed from the frame ground board 559 shown in FIG. In other words, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and/or Electromagnetic wave noise entering through the base body 1502 can be eliminated by guiding it from the frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG.

[7. control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1, as shown, is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls game operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of production based on various commands from the main control board 1310 . The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182.

[7-1. Main control board]
Although not shown in detail, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control board that is a microprocessor that contains a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. An MPU, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a first start opening sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002, and a second start opening that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004. An opening sensor 2402, a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2401 for detecting the gaming ball B passing through the gate section 2003, and a game ball received in the big winning opening 2005 A big winning hole sensor 2403 that detects B, a first receiving hole sensor 2404 that detects game ball B received in the first receiving hole 2007 after being detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403, and a first receiving hole sensor 2404 that detects game ball B, and a big winning hole sensor 2403. Detected signals from the second receiving port sensor 2405 that detects the game ball B received in the second receiving port 2008 after the second receiving port 2008, and the magnetic sensor 3003 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, etc. are each main control input Input to the main control I/O port via a circuit.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I/O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby driving the starter solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, and the distribution solenoid 2416. Signals can be output from the main control I / O port to the function display unit 1400 status indicator, normal symbol indicator, normal pending indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special pending number indicator, second special It outputs drive signals to the symbol display, the second special reserved number display, the round display, and the like.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first start sensor 3002, the second start sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, the big winning sensor 2403, the first entrance sensor 2404, and the second entrance sensor 2405 have non- While a contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, the general winning hole sensor 3001 is a contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 and frequently passes through the gate part 2003, so the first starting hole sensor 3002 and the second starting hole sensor 2402 , and the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2401 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starter sensor 3002, the second starter sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401. FIG.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state ("big win" game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning hole 2005 is opened and the game ball B enters frequently. Detection of the game ball B by the inlet sensor 2404 and the second inlet sensor 2405 also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used for the big winning opening sensor 2403, the first receiving opening sensor 2404, and the second receiving opening sensor 2405 as well. On the other hand, detection by the general winning hole sensor 3001 does not occur frequently in the general winning hole 2001 into which the game ball B does not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used for the general winning hole sensor 3001 .

In addition, the main control MPU transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 from the main control I/O port. In addition, when the main control MPU receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, it shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Various voltages (DC +37 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 . A power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when power is cut off. described.). This capacitor allows the main control MPU to store various information in the RAM during power-off processing even when the power is off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633 .

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control I/O port of the main control MPU, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[7-2. Payout control board]
A payout control board 633 that controls the payout of game balls B includes a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, a launching control unit that performs shooting control by a shooting solenoid 542, and a ball feeding control by a ball feeding solenoid 145. It has a control unit 633b, an error LED indicator for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1, and an error release switch for releasing the error displayed on the error LED indicator.

[7-2-1. Payout control unit]
The payout control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to payout in the payout control board 633, is a microcontroller that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout It has a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. The payout control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner at the payout control I/O port. In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch to the payout control I / O port through the payout control input circuit, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection from the ball cut detection sensor 574 A signal, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control I/O port through the payout control input circuit.

A detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are sent to the payout control input circuit via a payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control I/O port of the MPU.

A detection signal from the door frame open switch for detecting opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and a detection signal from the main body frame open switch for detecting opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are sent to a payout control input circuit. to the payout control I/O port of the payout control MPU.

A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control I/O port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 from the payout control I/O to the payout motor 584 via the payout motor drive circuit, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator. output a signal to the error LED display from the payout control I/O port, or send a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control I/O port to the main control board 1310 in a serial manner Alternatively, the number of game balls B actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 558 from the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

An error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the boards with the payout control board 633), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is cut Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it informs that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "ball is caught" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 591 has malfunctioned based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , when the number "5" is displayed, it informs that a "retry error" has occurred (specifically, that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, the tank is full with game balls B stored in the foul cover unit 150 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). Notifies that when the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR unconnected" (that the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), When the number "9" is displayed, it is notified that the game is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number). .

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a return requesting signal for the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port of the payout control MPU. . In addition, the CR unit updates the residual of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a residual display signal to the ball rental operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball rental display section of the operation unit 220 .

[7-2-2. Launch control unit]
The shooting control unit 633b performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit that receives detection signals from various detection switches related to firing, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for firing the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing control circuit, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, the launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , a ball-feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or fingers are touching the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. A detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit and the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the intensity of hitting the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 182, is input to a launch solenoid drive circuit.

Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, this firing solenoid drive circuit applies a driving current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182. Triggered by the input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542 . On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feed reference pulse, thereby causing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 to move. One ball of B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side by stopping the output of the constant current. send. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

Various voltages (DC +37 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are directly supplied to the payout control board 633 . The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 has a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when power is cut off. Due to this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[7-3. Peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of production based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, SATA controller, and various I/O interfaces. is integrated on a single semiconductor chip, a control ROM 1510b pre-stores various schedule data that defines the progress of various programs and effects, and a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. SDRAM 1510c composed of SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 capable of transferring and storing control information (peripheral data), a slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d capable of adjusting volume, and a real-time clock IC (not shown). It has a backup power source 1510e capable of supplying power even at times, a power generation circuit (not shown) that generates various power supply voltages, and a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Examples of various I/O interfaces include various serial I/O ports, various parallel I/O ports, and the like.

[7-3-1. Peripheral control IC]
The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stores various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 when the power is turned on (including when the power is restored after a power failure). Control to transfer. Between the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, as described above, the transfer speed is 2 Gbps. transferred at high speed. The control information (peripheral data) includes, as described above, image data such as a background image, a character image, a pattern image, and a pending image for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, the door frame 3, and the game board. Light emission data, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, etc., door frame 3 and drive data for controlling various movable effects provided on the game board 5, and the like. The background image, character image, pattern image, reserved image, etc. are full-color images.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a to temporarily store information associated with processing or delete the information. In addition, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes starting up its own system, based on various commands from the main control board 1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 to proceed with the effect. .

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes starting up its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b. Various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are read out according to the schedule data, and control is performed to draw an image on the effect display device 1600, and various LED light emission modes according to various effects are performed. Various performances are progressed by performing control so that sounds such as music and sound effects in accordance with various performances are played.

The VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, generates drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600, and outputs the drawing data to the liquid crystal output board 1530. Control output. This drawing data is transmitted to the effect display device 1600 via the liquid crystal output board 1530, and various images are drawn on the effect display device 1600. FIG.

The VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a employs a frame buffer system. This "frame buffer system" holds drawing data for one screen (one frame) in the frame buffers (built-in VRAM) of the corresponding peripheral control ICs 1510a. VRAM) for one screen (one frame) of drawing data is output from the corresponding VDP output channel of the peripheral control IC 1510a. There are four channels CH1 to CH4 as VDP output channels of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In this embodiment, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs control to output drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600 to the liquid crystal output board 1530 from channel CH1 of the four channels. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a allocates and secures a frame buffer (built-in VRAM) area corresponding to these four channels when activating its own system.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a activates its own system, and the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a generates drawing data for one screen (one frame) in a predetermined area on the corresponding built-in VRAM and outputs it to the outside. When output (sent), the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a accepts the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. A V-blank signal is output to the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a to notify that it is ready for operation.

The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, generates and outputs the sound data, thereby generating vibration speakers provided in the door frame 3, the body frame 4, and the like. 354, the top central speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4, and the like are controlled so that sounds such as music and sound effects are played in accordance with various presentations. When a slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is operated, this volume adjustment operation signal is input to various parallel I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a can adjust the volume according to the input volume adjustment operation signal based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4 to output acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or 4.1ch surround signal, etc.). By doing so, it is possible to provide a sound effect (sound performance) with a more realistic feeling than before.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes starting up its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on these various commands, and stores the read schedule data. A lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal is output to the color LEDs provided on each decorative substrate of the game board 5 and the LEDs for the light guide plate provided on each pattern substrate of the game board 5 along the The game board side emission data for the purpose is read from the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2 and sent from various serial I/O ports to each decoration board of the game board 5 and each picture board of the game board 5 via the effect drive board 1720 of the game board 5. Or, the game board side drive data for outputting the drive signal to each drive motor and each drive solenoid provided on the game board 5 is read from the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2, and the performance drive of the game board 5 is performed from various serial I / O ports. Door-side driving data for transmitting to the substrate 1720 or for outputting driving signals to the operation ring driving motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lifting driving motor 367, etc., and each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 door-side drive light-emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal for color LEDs provided in the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2, and various serial I/O data. It is transmitted from the O port to the door frame 3 side.

A detection signal from each detection sensor for detecting the position of the movable decorative body in the back rear effect unit 3100, the back right effect unit 3300, the upper back effect unit 3400, and the lower back effect unit 3500 provided on the game board 5 is sent to the peripheral area. It is received by various serial I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the control input circuit. In addition, the detection signal from the press detection sensor 381 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3, the detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the detection signal from the second rotation detection sensor 348 are peripheral control inputs. It is received by various serial I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via circuits. Also, signals from the air cooling fan FAN that transmit the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 are input to various parallel I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. .

Various voltages (DC +37 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) are directly supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 . A power generation circuit (not shown) provided on the peripheral control board 1510 converts one of the various voltages from the power supply board 630 (for example, DC +12 V) into a plurality of control voltages corresponding to various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510. We produce and supply types.

The peripheral control board 1510 has an external WDT (watch dog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the external WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is running out of control.

[7-3-2. Control ROM]
As described above, the control ROM 1510b is capable of pre-storing various programs and various schedule data that define the progression of performances. In the various schedule data, a plurality of various data for progressing effects according to a plurality of types of patterns of effects are defined respectively. The various schedule data include, for example, multiple types of screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn (displayed) on various display devices such as the effect display device 1600, and multiple types of light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs. There are schedule data, multiple types of sound generation schedule data for generating music, sound effects, etc., and multiple types of electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electrical drive sources such as drive motors and drive solenoids. Based on various commands from the main control board 1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets (determines) one of a plurality of types of performance patterns, and selects this setting ( Determined) patterns and corresponding schedule data are set (determined).

Here, the screen data arranged in time series that constitute the screen generation schedule data will be briefly described. The screen data defines the configuration of the screen to be drawn (displayed). Specifically, the screen data is configured by arranging a command and a parameter for the command for each line. Note that some commands do not have parameters. A sprite in the description here is composed of character data, and one sprite may be composed of one character data, or one sprite may be composed of a plurality of character data. For example, one graphic including a background image may be composed of one character data, or may be composed of a plurality of character data aligned.

Commands constituting screen data include an object addition command, an object insertion command, an object movement command, an object processing command, an object deletion command, an object replacement command, an object replacement command, a 1-frame end command, and the like.

An object addition command is a command for adding one sprite. An object addition command is specified, and one piece of sprite information (a sprite name or a pointer indicating an address where the sprite is stored) to be added to the parameter is specified. When one sprite is added by an object addition command and parameters, a sprite index value is assigned and registered as a number for individually identifying this one sprite. The sprite index value starts at a value of 0 (zero) and increases by 1 each time a sprite is added. As the value of this sprite index is smaller, the screen is arranged and displayed on the farthest back side. In other words, the sprite having the largest sprite index value is arranged and displayed on the frontmost side.

The object insert command is a command for specifying a sprite index value and inserting one sprite among a plurality of sprites when there are a plurality of sprites already added by the object addition command. An object insert command is specified, one piece of sprite information (sprite name or a pointer indicating the address where the sprite is stored) to be inserted in the parameter is specified, and the sprite index value to be inserted is specified. When a sprite whose sprite index value is specified by an object insertion command and parameter is inserted, a value equal to or greater than the specified sprite index value and the corresponding sprite index value registered immediately before being inserted increases by one. For example, if 8 sprites have already been added as a plurality of sprites by the object addition command, the sprite index values are assigned and registered from 0 to 7, and the object insertion command is executed. If you specify the sprite information in the parameter and specify the value 6 as the sprite index value to be inserted, a new sprite is inserted with the sprite index value of 6 and the specified sprite The sprite index values 6 and 7, which are values greater than or equal to the sprite index value registered immediately before the index value and the corresponding index value, are shifted one by one to increase the value to 7, and so on. It will be re-registered as a value of 8.

An object movement command is a command for setting the coordinates and size of one sprite. An object movement command is issued, a sprite index value (that is, one sprite) is specified as a parameter, and the coordinates and size of the specified sprite are specified. The coordinates specify the XY coordinates of the screen, and the size specifies the size (width and height) of one sprite. One sprite whose sprite index value is designated by the object movement command and parameter is moved (arranged) at the designated size at the coordinates.

The object processing command is a command for setting an arrangement (adaptation processing (work processing)). Specify an object processing command, specify a sprite index value (that is, one sprite) as a parameter, specify an arrangement (adaptation processing (work processing)) for the specified sprite, and specify various values for the arrangement. . Arrangement (dramatization processing (work processing)) includes transparency setting mode, noise addition setting mode, mosaic setting mode, oil painting style setting mode, ink painting style setting mode, stereoscopic setting mode, gray scale setting mode, monochrome 2 gradation There is a setting mode, etc.

For example, to briefly explain the transmittance setting modes, the transmittance setting modes include a sprite individual transmittance setting mode, a specific area transmittance setting mode, a screen transmittance setting mode, and the like. In sprite individual transmittance setting mode, one sprite added by the object addition command is specified, and a value for setting the transmittance (0 (zero)% to 100%) of this one sprite is specified. It is a mode in which In the specific area transmittance setting mode, one sprite added by the object addition command is specified, and the screen area corresponding to this one sprite is set as a specific area. % to 100%) can be specified. The screen transmittance setting mode is a mode in which a value for setting the transmittance (0 (zero)% to 100%) of the entire screen can be specified. In this screen transmittance setting mode, as described above, the transmittance of the entire screen is set. )) and specify the transmittance of the entire screen (0% to 100%). In addition, 0% is the lowest transmittance, and the transmittance increases toward 100%. When the transmittance is set to 0%, it is opaque without transmitting light, and the transmittance is set to 100%. , almost all of the light passes through, making it transparent. A sprite whose transmittance is set by this transmittance setting mode or the entire screen can be rendered three-dimensionally because it is possible to express a sense of depth that allows the user to visually recognize behind the sprite.

Also, for example, to briefly explain the noise addition setting mode, the noise addition setting mode designates one sprite added by the object addition command, and adds a noise amount (0.1%) to this one sprite. 50%), the distribution method (uniform distribution, Gaussian distribution), and the ON/OFF setting of grayscale noise. The amount of noise is the smallest at 0.1% and increases toward 50%. When grayscale noise is set to ON, noise is represented as grayscale, while when grayscale noise is set to OFF, noise is represented as color noise. The sprite or the entire screen for which noise is set by this noise addition setting mode is rendered two-dimensionally.

Also, for example, to briefly explain the mosaic setting mode, the mosaic setting mode designates one sprite added by the object addition command, and the size of the mosaic (value 1 to value 15) for this one sprite. ), the shape of the mosaic area (the size of the rectangular area, the size of the elliptical area including the circular area), and the coordinates (X coordinate, Y coordinate) within the sprite. The value 1 is the smallest as the size of the mosaic, and the size of the mosaic increases toward the value 15. A value of 1 corresponds to a cell size of 1 square pixel and a value of 15 corresponds to a cell size of 15 square pixels. The larger the mosaic size, the coarser the image within the mosaic area at the coordinates specified in the sprite. The sprite or the entire screen for which mosaic is set by this mosaic setting mode is two-dimensionally rendered.

Also, for example, to briefly explain the oil painting style installation mode, the oil painting style installation mode designates one sprite added by the object addition command, and the type of brush to be processed with the brush for this one sprite ( Narrow, standard, wide), value to set brush size (value 1 to value 50), value to set sharpness strength (value 0 (zero) to value 30) , and mesh effect settings can be specified. A value of 1 is the smallest brush size, and the brush size increases toward a value of 50. A value of 0 is the smallest sharpening intensity (no sharpening intensity), and the sharpening intensity increases toward a value of 30. A sprite designated by this oil painting installation mode is rendered three-dimensionally with unevenness.

Also, for example, to briefly explain the ink painting style setting mode, the ink painting style setting mode specifies one sprite added by the object addition command, and the stroke width (value 1 to value 1) for this one sprite. 15), a value for setting pen pressure (value 1 to value 15), and a value for setting contrast (value 0 (zero) to value 40). be. A value of 1 is the smallest stroke width, and the stroke width increases toward a value of 15. A value of 1 is the smallest writing pressure, and the writing pressure increases toward a value of 15. A value of 0 is the smallest contrast, and the contrast increases toward a value of 40. The sprite or the entire screen that is processed to look like a sumi-e style in this sumi-e style setting mode becomes a Japanese-style image that looks like it was drawn on Japanese paper, and is rendered two-dimensionally.

Further, for example, to briefly describe the stereoscopic setting mode, the stereoscopic setting mode includes a specific area stereoscopic setting mode, a screen stereoscopic setting mode, and the like. In the specific area stereoscopic setting mode, one sprite added by the object addition command is specified, and the screen area corresponding to this one sprite is set as a specific area. By alternately arranging the right image, which is the image for the right eye of the player, and the left image, which is the image for the left eye of the observer (player), the observer (player) can view the image in the specific area in 3D. It is a mode that can be viewed. The image within the specific region designated by the stereoscopic view setting mode within the specific region is rendered three-dimensionally in a three-dimensional manner that stands out (protrudes) in front of the display area of the screen. In the stereoscopic screen setting mode, the entire screen is alternately arranged with a right image for the right eye of the observer (player) and a left image for the left eye of the observer (player). In this mode, the observer (player) can stereoscopically view the entire screen. The image of the entire screen specified by this screen stereoscopic setting mode is rendered three-dimensionally in a three-dimensional manner that stands out (pops out) in front of the display area of the screen. In addition, when specifying the stereoscopic setting mode, it is necessary to further provide a switch liquid crystal behind the liquid crystal panel provided in various display devices such as the effect display device 1600 . In the switch liquid crystal, a plurality of strip-shaped parallax barriers having a predetermined width extending in the vertical direction are arranged in a row in the horizontal direction at predetermined intervals in correspondence with the strips constituting the TFT liquid crystal, which is the liquid crystal panel. It is a liquid crystal, and this parallax barrier can be controlled to be in a transparent state or an opaque state, and by switching between them, it can work as an optical shutter. When the parallax barrier is controlled to be in a transparent state, the illumination light from the backlight arranged behind the switch liquid crystal uniformly illuminates the TFT liquid crystal, whereas the parallax barrier is controlled to be in an opaque state. In this case, the illumination light from the backlight arranged behind the switch liquid crystal is separated by the parallax barrier. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be configured to directly control the parallax barrier of the switch liquid crystal to control it to a transparent state or an opaque state. By including information for controlling the parallax barrier of the switch liquid crystal to be transparent or opaque in the drawing data, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be configured to directly control the parallax barrier of the switch liquid crystal.

Also, for example, to briefly explain the grayscale setting mode, the grayscale setting mode designates one sprite added by the object addition command, and grayscale bit width (8 bits) for this one sprite. , 16 bits) can be specified. Setting the grayscale bit width to 8-bit converts the image to 8-bit wide grayscale, while setting the grayscale bit-width to 16-bit converts the image to 16-bit wide grayscale. A sprite or the entire screen converted to grayscale by this grayscale setting mode is rendered two-dimensionally.

For example, to briefly explain the monochrome two-tone setting mode, the monochrome two-tone setting mode designates one sprite added by the object addition command, and adds two monochrome colors to this one sprite. This mode allows you to specify the value to set. As two monochrome colors, white and black can be specified, white and red can be specified, and green and black can be specified. These two colors are each specified as a full color, 24 bits wide with 8 bits each for red (R), green (G) and blue (B). The sprite or the entire screen set to monochrome 2-gradation by this monochrome 2-gradation setting mode is two-dimensionally rendered.

As described above, the three-dimensional rendering modes include the transmittance setting mode, the oil-painting installation mode, and the stereoscopic vision setting mode. On the other hand, as a mode for two-dimensional rendering, one sprite added by the object addition command is processed two-dimensionally. A wind setting mode, a gray scale setting mode, a monochrome two-gradation setting mode, etc. are prepared. A sprite added by an object addition command for which no arrangement (adaptation processing (work processing)) is set by an object processing command is a flat figure (picture, photograph, sentence, value, and diagram). etc.) and is represented in two dimensions.

The object deletion command is a command for deleting one sprite added by the object addition command. An object addition command is specified, and the sprite index value of one sprite added by the object addition command is specified as a parameter. When one sprite specified by the object deletion command and parameter is deleted, the specified sprite index value and the value larger than the corresponding sprite index value registered immediately before deletion are shifted by one. becomes smaller. For example, if 8 sprites have already been added as a plurality of sprites by the object addition command, the sprite index values are registered with values 0 to 7, and the object deletion command is executed. If the sprite index value of the sprite added by the sixth object addition command is specified as the parameter, one sprite whose sprite index value is specified is deleted and the sprite index value is also specified. The sprite index value 6, which is larger than the sprite index value registered immediately before the value corresponding to the value, and the value 7 are shifted one by one to become smaller values 5 and 6. will be re-registered as

The object replacement command is a command for replacing one sprite already added by the object addition command with another sprite when there are a plurality of sprites already added by the object addition command. Instruct an object exchange command and specify two sprite index values as parameters. When two sprites to be exchanged are designated by an object exchange command and parameters, the values of the two sprite indexes are exchanged. For example, if 8 sprites have already been added as a plurality of sprites by the object addition command, the sprite index values are registered with values 0 to 7, and the object replacement command is executed. One sprite added by the object addition command first to the parameter (the sprite index value of the first sprite added by the object addition command is 0) and the fifth object addition command (The sprite index value of the 5th sprite added by the object addition command is 4), and if you specify the 1st sprite added by the object addition command The sprite index value is changed from 0 to 4 and re-registered, and the sprite index value of the fifth sprite added by the object addition command is changed from 4 to 0 and re-registered. They will be replaced by each other. As a result, the first sprite added by the object addition command and the fifth sprite added by the object addition command are reversed in order.

The object replacement command is a command for replacing one sprite already added by the object addition command with another sprite. An object replacement command is instructed, and one sprite added by the object addition command and another sprite (one sprite for replacement) are designated as parameters. The sprite index value is not changed by the object replacement command and parameter, and only the sprite is replaced. For example, if eight sprites have already been added as a plurality of sprites by the object addition command, the sprite index values are assigned and registered from 0 to 7, and the object replacement command is executed. Specify one sprite added by the 8th object addition command (the sprite index value of the 8th sprite added by the 8th object addition command is 7) and another sprite (replacement If you specify , the value 7, which is the value of the sprite index, will not be changed, and only the sprite will be replaced. As a result, when eight sprites have already been added as a plurality of sprites by the object addition command, one sprite added eighth by the object addition command is displayed on the frontmost side. Therefore, by replacing the one sprite displayed on the frontmost side with another sprite (one sprite for replacement), for example, when using numbers as sprites, countdown or count It can be a screen with an area that moves up.

The 1-frame end command is a command for notifying that the configuration of all screen data for 1 frame has been instructed. The 1-frame end command is a single command that does not require parameter setting.

Next, an example in which commands are arranged as screen data of one frame will be briefly described. As described above, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data, shifts the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data by one from the top screen data each time the V blank signal is input. One frame of screen data is output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Placement, movement, and arrangement of sprites based on screen data of one frame are performed in a work area provided in the built-in VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and sprite data for each sprite is created. Then, the sprite data of each sprite is superimposed to form one screen, and the data is written in areas (areas for drawing data generation) of the built-in VRAM corresponding to VDP channels CH1 to CH4 of the peripheral control IC 1510a. .

Here, the configuration of one frame of screen data that defines the screen displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600 will be briefly described. It should be noted that sprites in the description here include one sprite composed of one piece of image data, and one sprite composed of a plurality of pieces of image data. Sprite placement, movement, arrangement, etc., are performed based on this one-frame screen data in a work area provided in the built-in VRAM corresponding to VDP channel CH1 of the peripheral control IC 1510a to create sprite data for each sprite. . In this work area, the sprite data of each sprite is superimposed as one screen for drawing in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and is stored in the internal VRAM area corresponding to the channel CH1 of the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Drawing data is generated by writing. Drawing data output from the channel CH1 is drawn (displayed) in the display area of the effect display device 1600 as a screen such as that shown in FIG. 194(a), which will be described later.

For example, one frame of screen data defining a screen such as that shown in FIG. One frame of screen data defining a screen such as that shown in FIG. Since it is drawn, the screen data of one frame on this screen is arranged in the hundreds or thousands of lines from the top line (first line) of the screen data. 194(d) to be described later, and a screen to be described later in FIG. , are described below. In addition, since the same command is arranged multiple times in the screen data, for the convenience of explanation, the command will be followed by a number and explained below.

The effect display device 1600 has the upper left corner of the display area viewed from the front as the origin coordinates (the origin of the X coordinate and the origin of the Y coordinate). An XY space is set in which the Y coordinate increases downward from the coordinates, and the lower right corner of the display area when viewed from the front is the maximum coordinate (maximum value of the X coordinate, maximum value of the Y coordinate). .

A screen such as that shown in FIG. First, in the order from the sprite that is arranged on the farthest side to the sprite that is arranged on the front side, in the first line of the screen data of one frame, an object addition command 1 is arranged and specified as a parameter. Information of the background image (background image 1640 in FIG. 194(d) to be described later) (background image name or pointer indicating the address where the background image is stored) is arranged as sprite information to be added. . This background image is composed of image data created in advance as one background image (the background image may be composed by arranging drawing data of a plurality of original images). As a result, a value of 0 (zero) is automatically assigned to the sprite index as a number for identifying the background image and registered.

Object addition command 2 is placed on the second line of the screen data of one frame, and the first pending image (red 1655a) information (the name of the pending image or a pointer to the address where the pending image is stored). As a result, a value of 1 is automatically added to the value of the sprite index as a number for identifying the first reserved image and registered. On the third line of the screen data of one frame, an object addition command 3 is arranged, and as one piece of sprite information to be added to the parameter, a second reserved image (a second reserved image having white in FIG. 194(d) described later) is placed. Reserved display 1655b) information (the name of the reserved image or a pointer indicating the address where the reserved image is stored) is arranged. As a result, a value of 2 is automatically added to the value of the sprite index as a number for identifying the second reserved image and registered. The object addition command 4 is arranged in the fourth line of the screen data of one frame, and the first design image (the left decorative design 1650a in FIG. The information (the name of the reserved image or the pointer indicating the address where the reserved image is stored) of the pattern 4) to be displayed still is arranged. As a result, the value 3 is automatically added to the value of the sprite index as a number for identifying the first symbol image and registered. An object addition command 5 is arranged in the fifth line of the screen data of one frame, and a second pattern image (a middle decorative pattern 1650b in FIG. The information (the name of the reserved image or the pointer indicating the address where the reserved image is stored) of the pattern 5) to be displayed still is arranged. As a result, a value of 4 is automatically added to the value of the sprite index as a number for identifying the second pattern image and registered. An object addition command 6 is arranged on the sixth line of screen data of one frame, and a third pattern image (a right decorative pattern 1650c in FIG. The information (the name of the reserved image or the pointer indicating the address where the reserved image is stored) of the pattern 6) to be displayed still is arranged. As a result, a value of 5 is automatically added to the value of the sprite index as a number for identifying the third pattern image and registered.

By setting the value of the sprite index in this way, the third symbol image having a large sprite index value is arranged on the frontmost side, and the second symbol image, the first symbol image, the third symbol image are arranged in the rearward direction. The second reserved image, the first reserved image, and the background image are arranged in this order (the background image with the smallest sprite index value is on the farthest side).

In line 7 of the screen data of one frame, an object movement command 1 is arranged, and the value 0, which is the value of the sprite index of the background image, which is specified as a parameter, coordinates, size (width, height ) are placed. In the eighth line of the screen data of one frame, an object movement command 2 is arranged, and the sprite index value 1, coordinates, size (width, height), are located. On the ninth line of the screen data of one frame, an object movement command 3 is arranged, and the sprite index value 2, coordinates, size (width, height), are located. An object movement command 4 is arranged on the tenth line of the screen data of one frame, and the value 3, which is the sprite index value of the first pattern image, coordinates, size (width, height), are located. On the eleventh line of the screen data of one frame, an object movement command 5 is arranged, and the value 4, which is the value of the sprite index of the second pattern image, which is specified as a parameter, coordinates, size (width, height), are located. On the 12th line of the screen data of one frame, an object movement command 6 is arranged, and the sprite index value 5 of the third pattern image specified as a parameter, coordinates, size (width, height), are located. A 1-frame end command 1 is arranged in the 13th line of the 1-frame screen data, and indicates that the configuration of all the 1-frame screen data has been instructed.

Thereby, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the first pattern image, the second pattern image, the third pattern image, the first reserved image, and the second reserved image are arranged without interfering with each other, A screen of a full-color image without gray scale rendering is displayed as shown in FIG.

Next, a screen such as that shown in FIG. The 1st line to the 12th line of the 1-frame screen data contain 1-frame screen data that constitutes a screen as shown in FIG. Since they are the same, the description is omitted, and the contents of the 13th to 19th lines of the screen data of one frame will be described below.

Among the contents of the 13th to 19th lines of the screen data of one frame, the contents of the 13th to 18th lines are not actually incorporated in advance into the screen data of one frame, and gray scale rendering is performed. Between the 12th and 13th lines of the 1-frame screen data, among the 1st to 13th lines of the 1-frame screen data described above when not performed, peripheral control The CPU of the IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a in real time to arrange (adaptation processing (work processing)) independently selected. Specifically, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines by lottery whether or not to perform the grayscale rendering. The contents of the 13th to 18th lines following the 12th line of the screen data of the 1st to 1st frames are arranged independently in real time (adapted processing (work processing)). Select the grayscale setting mode. Instruct VDP of peripheral control IC 1510a.

When performing a grayscale effect, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a first selects the grayscale setting mode as an arrangement (adaptation processing (work processing)), and the contents of the 13th line of the screen data of one frame include object processing. Command 1 is placed, and the value 0, which is the value of the sprite index of the background image, is specified as a parameter, and the grayscale setting mode and bit width are used as an arrangement (drafting process (crafting process)) for one sprite to be specified. (16 bits) are arranged. In the contents of the 14th line of the screen data of one frame, an object processing command 2 is arranged, and the value 1, which is the sprite index value of the first reserved image, is specified as a parameter, and one sprite to be specified. A grayscale setting mode and bit width (16 bits) are arranged as an arrangement (adaptation processing (work processing)) for . In the content of the 15th line of the screen data of one frame, an object processing command 3 is arranged, and the value 2, which is the sprite index value of the second reserved image, specified as a parameter, and one sprite to be specified. A grayscale setting mode and bit width (16 bits) are arranged as an arrangement (adaptation processing (work processing)) for . In the content of the 16th line of the screen data of one frame, an object processing command 4 is arranged, and the value 3, which is the sprite index value of the first pattern image, which is specified as a parameter, and one sprite to be specified. A grayscale setting mode and bit width (16 bits) are arranged as an arrangement (adaptation processing (work processing)) for . In the contents of the 17th line of the screen data of one frame, an object processing command 5 is arranged, and the value 4, which is the sprite index value of the second pattern image, which is specified as a parameter, and one sprite to be specified. A grayscale setting mode and bit width (16 bits) are arranged as an arrangement (adaptation processing (work processing)) for . In the contents of the 18th line of the screen data of one frame, an object processing command 6 is arranged, and the value 5, which is the sprite index value of the third pattern image, which is specified as a parameter, and one sprite to be specified. A grayscale setting mode and bit width (16 bits) are arranged as an arrangement (adaptation processing (work processing)) for . In the 19th line of the 1-frame screen data, the 1-frame end command 1, which is the contents of the 13th line of the 1-frame screen data described above when the grayscale rendering is not performed, is arranged. I am telling you that I have instructed you to configure all the data.

Thereby, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the first pattern image, the second pattern image, the third pattern image, the first reserved image, and the second reserved image are arranged without interfering with each other, While using the same screen data as one-frame screen data that constitutes a screen such as shown in FIG. A screen of an image converted to grayscale is displayed as shown in FIG. 194(s) to be described later.

[8. Ground wire system]
As described above, the frame grounding substrate 559 shown in FIG. 86 can collect electromagnetic noise generated in various places once and ground it to the island facility of the game hall. Here, the system of the ground line by the frame ground board 559 will be described with reference to FIG. 172A and 172B show the configuration of the frame ground substrate 559, FIG. 172A is a side view of the frame ground substrate 559, FIG. 172B is a mounting surface of the frame ground substrate 559, and FIG. c) is a circuit diagram of the frame ground substrate 559, and FIG. As shown in FIG. 172(a), the frame ground board 559 is mounted with its mounting surface facing downward (that is, with the connector insertion openings of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 facing downward). It is accommodated and attached inside a substrate accommodating portion 551aa formed in the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 shown in FIG. 86(b).

As shown in FIG. 172(b), the frame ground substrate 559 has ground terminals ECN1, ECN5, ECN4, and ECN2 arranged in a line from the right side to the left side along the upper side, and the center of the left side. A lower ground terminal ECN3 is arranged. Briefly describing the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, as shown in FIG. The connection terminal and the interface ground wire are electrically connected to each other, and the ground terminal ECN2 serves as the island equipment ground and electrically connects the island equipment of the game hall via the ground connection terminal and the island equipment ground wire. The ground terminal ECN3 is connected as a ball tank ground to the ball tank 552 shown in FIG. One end of the sphere tank ground wire is attached by a metal screw (not shown), and the other end of the sphere tank ground wire is electrically connected. The ground terminal ECN4 is shown in FIG. One end of the main body frame metal ground wire is attached to the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 (specifically, the upper side of the main body frame reinforcing frame 530) in the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 with a metal screw (not shown). , is electrically connected to the other end of the body frame metal ground wire, and the ground terminal ECN5 serves as a power source ground provided on the power board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected through the connection terminal and the power ground wire.

In the circuit of the frame ground board 559, as shown in FIG. 172(c), the ground terminal ECN3 as the sphere tank ground is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER1, and the other end of this resistor ER1 is used as the power ground. The ground terminal ECN5, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground, and the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground are electrically connected to each other, and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER2. In addition, the other end of the resistor ER2 is electrically connected to the ground terminal ECN5 as the power ground, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground, and the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground. That is, the other end of the resistor ER1 and the other end of the resistor ER2 are electrically connected. In this embodiment, 510 ohms (Ω) and 2 watts (W) are used as the resistors ER1 and ER2.

Electromagnetic wave noise flowing through the ground terminal ECN1 as an interface ground is removed by being guided to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground and the island facility ground wire, and is removed by the ground as the ball tank ground. Electromagnetic wave noise flowing through the terminal ECN3 is guided to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire, and is removed, and flows to the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground. Electromagnetic noise is removed by being guided to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall through the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire, and the electromagnetic noise flowing through the ground terminal ECN5 as the power supply ground is removed from the island equipment. Through the ground terminal ECN2 as a ground and the island facility ground wire, it is guided to the ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed.

As shown in FIG. 82, a ball tank 552, a payout unit 560, and the like are attached to the payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4. As shown in FIG. The ball tank 552 is supplied with the game balls B from the island facilities of the game hall, and the game balls B are supplied from the ball tank 552 to the payout unit 560 . The game ball B is ground in the island equipment of the game hall, rubs against each other in circulation between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1, and emits electromagnetic noise by being charged and electrostatically discharged. For this reason, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 that can retain the game balls B are attached.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the frame ground substrate 559 is arranged near the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity tends to accumulate, and as a result of which static electricity tends to accumulate, the ball tank 552 and the payout unit are strongly affected by electromagnetic noise. In the frame earth substrate 559, the earth terminal ECN3 as a ball tank ground and the body frame metal The earth terminal ECN4 as a ground is gradually passed through the resistors ER1 and ER2 to attenuate the electromagnetic wave noise, thereby suppressing the instantaneous discharge of the high voltage, and the earth terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground is connected to the island facility. It can be led to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the ground wire. In other words, the electromagnetic wave noise entering from the sphere tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity tends to accumulate is transferred from the frame ground board 559 through the sphere tank 552 and the metal body frame reinforcement frame 530 as a frame ground called frame ground. By leading to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall, the electromagnetic noise entering from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 can be flowed to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removed.

On the other hand, when electromagnetic wave noise enters cover body 1501 and/or base body 1502 constituting peripheral control board box 1505 shown in FIG. 1530, flows into the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630, and passes from the ground connection terminal of the power supply substrate 630 through the power supply ground wire to the frame ground substrate 559, the ground terminal serving as the power supply ground. It flows to the ECN5, is guided from the earth terminal ECN2 as the island equipment earth to the earth of the island equipment of the game hall through the island equipment earth wire, and is removed. In other words, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and/or Electromagnetic wave noise that enters through the base body 1502 is guided from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall as a circuit ground called circuit ground. Electromagnetic noise that enters through the game hall can be removed by flowing it to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall.

In this embodiment, among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground are located in a region strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise as described above. (around it), a large ground terminal is adopted, and the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground is used to prevent electromagnetic noise that has flowed into the frame ground board 559 from the game hall, as described above. A large ground terminal is used because it is to be removed by leading to the ground of the island facility. The earth terminals ECN2 to ECN4, which employ this large earth terminal, have a square cross-sectional shape with one side of 1.14 mm, rated current: 7 A (when using AC/DC, AWG#18), rated voltage: 250 V (AC/DC), applicable wire range: AWG #22 to #18, and has a general specification of 13.4 mm in height (earth terminal ECN2 to When the housing corresponding to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height becomes 18.6 mm).

On the other hand, the electromagnetic wave noise flowing into the ground terminal ECN1 as an interface ground and the ground terminal ECN5 as a power supply ground is smaller than the above-described ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4, and the current is small. As for the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5, small ground terminals are employed. The earth terminals ECN1 and ECN5, which employ this small earth terminal, have a square cross-sectional shape with a side of 0.64 mm, rated current: 3 A (when using AC/DC, AWG#22), rated voltage: 250V (AC/DC), applicable wire range: AWG #30 to #22, and as shown in FIG. When the corresponding housing is inserted, the mounting height is 9.8 mm).

In this embodiment, the ground wires (island facility ground wire, ball tank ground wire, body frame ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 are electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. Since the current due to electromagnetic noise is large compared to the ground wires (interface ground wire, power supply ground wire), which are electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 The ground wire, body frame ground wire) is thicker than the ground wires (interface ground wire, power supply ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. In this embodiment, the thickness of the frame ground substrate 559 is 1.6 mm, as shown in FIG. 172(a).

In this way, the electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places is temporarily collected on the frame ground substrate 559 and guided from the frame ground substrate 559 to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall so that it can be removed. The substrate 559 has a function of removing electricity.

In addition, since the electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places can be collected once on the frame ground substrate 559 and guided from the frame ground substrate 559 to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removed, the pachinko machine 1 can be used. The ground wire (wiring) from the ball tank 552 arranged on the upper side is routed to the power supply board 630 arranged on the lower side of the pachinko machine 1, and the electromagnetic wave noise is temporarily collected on the power supply board 630 to make the island equipment of the game hall. Compared to the configuration of leading to the ground and removing it, the routing of the ground wire (wiring) becomes extremely simple.

In addition, since the external terminal plate 558 and the frame grounding substrate 559 are configured to be placed in the substrate accommodation portion 551aa of the dispensing base 551 in close proximity, a plurality of wire connections provided on the external terminal plate 558 can be connected. Terminal 558a (a plurality of external terminals (in this embodiment, ten external terminals XCN1 to XCN10 are arranged in a row from the left side to the right side of the payout base unit 550 when viewed from behind).) ) and a hall computer provided in the game hall, respectively, the work of electrically connecting them with wiring, the earth terminal ECN2 as the island equipment earth in the frame earth board 559, and the earth connection terminal provided in the island equipment of the game hall. , can be performed as a series of operations, such as the work of electrically connecting , with the island facility ground wire (wiring), which contributes to the improvement of workability.

In addition, since the frame ground board 559 is configured to be able to be arranged in the board accommodation portion 551aa of the payout base 551, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground of the frame ground board 559 and the island facility of the game hall are connected. Various control boards provided on the game board 5 (for example, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game, the production , peripheral data ROM board 1520 and liquid crystal output board 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which can control the progress of the peripheral control board 1510). It is possible to eliminate adverse effects on electronic components (including connectors) and the like provided for.

In addition, by arranging the frame ground board 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity tends to accumulate, the body frame 4 near the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560, which are strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise, can be used. In the frame ground board 559, the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the body frame metal ground are respectively connected to the metal body frame reinforcement frame 530 in the body frame base unit 500. The length of the ground wire (ball tank ground wire, body frame metal ground wire) to be electrically connected is extremely shortened, and electromagnetic wave noise is guided from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removed. can be done.

In addition, by arranging the frame ground substrate 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 where static electricity tends to accumulate and the payout unit 560, the ball tank 552 where static electricity tends to accumulate and the frame ground substrate 559 exhibiting the static elimination action are electrically connected. The length of the sphere tank ground wire (wiring) is determined by the length of the main body frame metal ground wire (wiring) that electrically connects the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the frame ground substrate 559 that exerts the static elimination action, and the length of the power supply. The length of the power supply ground wire (wiring) that electrically connects the substrate 630 and the frame ground substrate 559 that exhibits static elimination, and the interface that electrically connects the interface substrate 635 and the frame ground substrate 559 that exhibits static elimination. It can be configured to be the shortest length compared to the length of the ground wire (wiring).

In addition, by arranging the frame ground board 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity tends to accumulate, the body frame 4 near the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560, which are strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise, can be used. For the metal body frame reinforcement frame 530 in the body frame base unit 500, in the frame ground board 559, the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the body frame metal ground are Although a large current flows, it is reduced by the resistors ER1 and ER2 of the frame ground board 559, so that the operation of the power supply board 630 is not affected. It can be removed by leading to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the ground wire.

By the way, conventionally, as disclosed in , each ground is once aggregated to the power board placed on the CR unit side at the bottom of the main body frame so as to easily supply the CR unit power supply AC 24V, and through the power board A game machine has been proposed that is grounded by connecting to the ground of the island facility (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-120593 (paragraph [0335], FIG. 68, FIG. 69)). Since the power supply board is generally heavy, it is often arranged at the bottom of the gaming machine. Therefore, in order to collect the ground on the power supply board, it is necessary to route the ground wire from the ball tank, the prize ball device, etc. on the upper part of the game machine toward the power supply board below. By routing the ground wire in this manner, there is a risk that electromagnetic noise will be transmitted to various control boards located along the way, resulting in an unexpected effect. In addition, since the ground wire is concentrated on the power supply board, if there is a problem with the power supply board, the ground may be affected, or conversely, the operation of the power supply board may be affected by the current flowing through the ground wire. there were. In addition, when the grounding point of the island equipment is located above the gaming machine, the grounding wire aggregated on the power supply board must be rerouted from the bottom to the top for connection, which is sometimes complicated.

[9. Game content]
The game contents of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, whereby game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 are played. is hit into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game balls B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the more the handle 182 is rotated clockwise, the more strongly the game balls B can be hit. , that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Also, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstructing nail N, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball B abuts is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 from the highest part in front view, it hits a plurality of obstacle nails N, The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down. When the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2501 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2502 to the stage 2503.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 to move left and right, and is released forward from the center in the left and right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted by the first start hole 2002 with a high probability because the part is located right above the first start hole 2002. - 特許庁When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 or the general winning opening 2001.

By the way, if the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it will be pulled toward the center in the left-right direction by the side slope 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and will enter the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. Alternatively, there is a possibility that it will be accepted in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the general prize winning port 2001, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 (so-called right-handed hitting). , is released from the right guide passage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400 . Below the downstream end of the right guide passage 2510, the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 are provided, and the gate portion 2003 is passed through with a certain probability.

Then, when the right-handed game ball B passes through the gate part 2003, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and when the lottery result of the normal lottery is "normal hit", the closed second start opening. 2004 will be in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and reception of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 will be possible. Then, when the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game ball B from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, to the upper tray 201. paid out.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the indication of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0 .01-60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The second starting port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

If the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 before the normal lottery result is indicated after the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, the normal lottery result cannot be suggested. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is put on hold until the previous suggestion of the ordinary lottery result ends. Further, the upper limit of the number of retained lottery results is set to four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, it is discarded without being retained. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 enters an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot") that is advantageous to the player. A special lottery result will be drawn. Then, the special lottery result of the lottery is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special fluctuation time). The special lottery results drawn when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include "lost", "15R big win A", "15R big win B", and the like. .

The special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is the special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the elapse of the special fluctuation time, the large winning opening 2005 is in a state in which it is possible to receive the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the big winning opening 2005 when the big winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is sent from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. , are paid out to the upper tray 201. Therefore, when the big winning hole 2005 is capable of receiving the game ball B, by allowing the big winning hole 2005 to accept the game ball B, a lot of the game balls B can be paid out and the player can be entertained. can.

If the special lottery result is a "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the large winning opening 2005 is in an open state capable of accepting the game ball B, or a predetermined time to the large winning opening 2005 An opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) in which, when any of the conditions of acceptance of the number (for example, 10) of the game balls B is satisfied, the game balls B are put into a closed state in which the game balls B cannot be accepted; Repeat for a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, if it is a "15R big hit", 15 rounds are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the "big hit", when the big winning opening 2005 is in the open state due to the big winning game state, if the game ball received in the big winning opening 2005 is distributed to the second receiving opening 2008 by the distribution piece 2415, the big winning game is played. After the state ends, ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous game state. This ST is a probability change that changes the probability that a special lottery result such as a "big hit" will be drawn during a predetermined specific number of fluctuations, and a time reduction that changes the display time of a performance image suggesting the special lottery result. state is maintained.

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 until the special lottery result drawn is suggested, the first start port 2002 and Since the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started when the game ball B is accepted in the second start port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started until the suggestion of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. Reserved. The number of pending special lottery results to be held is up to four for the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, it is discarded without holding the special lottery result. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 . The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the special lottery. Suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs to flash for a predetermined time, and then suggesting the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is suggested as a effect image. A performance image suggesting a special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 is a pattern row displayed in a state in which three pattern rows made up of a plurality of patterns are arranged in the horizontal direction and each pattern row is varied. are successively stop-displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stop-displayed so that the patterns of the three stop-displayed pattern rows are combined corresponding to the result of the special lottery. When the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a confirmation image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is executed. An advantageous game state (for example, 15R big win game A, 15R big win game B, etc.) occurs according to the special lottery result.

Note that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image does not appear). The time until display is different), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is operated according to the special lottery result. A player-participation type effect can be performed in which the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the unit 301 are operated. In the player participation type performance, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate the rotary operation unit 302, vibrate it, assist the rotary operation, or inhibit the rotary operation, and the operation button elevation drive motor By 367, the pressing operation section 303 can be raised to make it stand out, and the operation of the production operation section 301 can entertain the player participation type production.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided on the door frame 3, each decoration board provided on the game board 5, and the front effect unit 2600, the back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back middle Effect unit 3200, back right effect unit 3300, back upper effect unit 3400, back lower effect unit 3500, back front effect unit 3600, etc. can be used as appropriate to perform light emission effects, movable effects, and the like. The player can also be entertained by the performance, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 is designed to allow the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake in performing the operation to be performed or does not perform the operation in the player participation type presentation in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated. to notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is requested, the pressing operation of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b or the rotation operation of the rotating operation portion 302 causes the vibration speaker 354 to vibrate. The effect display device 1600 is made to display that effect.

In the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the display effect unit of the front unit 2000 on the game board 5 is displayed according to the special lottery result. 2600, the back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back middle effect unit 3200, the back right effect unit 3300, the upper back effect unit 3400, the lower back effect unit 3500, the back front effect unit 3600, etc. are appropriately used to perform light emission effect. , movable effect, display effect, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained with various effects, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

[10. Control processing of the main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU in particular) will be described. FIG. 173(a) is a flow chart showing the procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 173(a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment first stores data in various registers and RAM as the processing of step S1 on the condition that the RAM clear switch is operated. Initialize the data that is stored. A RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the body frame 4 is opened. In addition, the RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 in response to operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has passed since the power was turned on, and the clear signal is input to the main control MPU when the power is turned on. When it is determined that it is, an initialization process (step S1) is executed to initialize the data stored in various registers and the RAM of the main control MPU.

Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process is executed to store information indicating the progress of the game (such as various flags) in the RAM of the main control MPU. If the RAM clear switch is not operated when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). , a restoration process is executed to restore the state according to the information. Further, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process, and the pachinko machine 1 is set to the initial state.

Next, as the process of step S2, random numbers, which are numbers updated within a predetermined numerical range, are updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) provided for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, the special symbol A variable random number provided for the lottery process for a predetermined time (variable time) required for variable display control, and a variable display of decorative symbols executed by the effect display device 1600 in response to the variable display of the special symbols. (The left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed with the same pattern, and the middle decorative pattern is not yet stopped, or the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are synchronously displayed so that they are all the same pattern. The reach random number provided for the lottery process of whether or not to play), and the pattern random number (first pattern random number, second pattern random number), a random number (normal random number) provided for lottery processing related to the hit that triggers the operation of the second start door 2411, and a random number counter that holds random numbers. .

In addition, in this example, so as to use a common reach random number for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even if the first start opening 2002 is started and won, the second start opening 2004 is started and won. Even in the case, it is configured to obtain reach random numbers from the same counter that updates reach random numbers, but by obtaining from counters with different ranges of random numbers that update reach random numbers, the execution ratio of reach effects It may be made different, and the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol as a reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number corresponds to the second special symbol and is different from the first reach determination table By providing a second ready-to-win determination table in which the determination value is set, the execution ratio of the ready-to-win effect may be varied.

In the process of step S2, the random number counter is operated such that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) that are not related to winning or losing among these random numbers are updated. After the processing of steps S1 and S2 is performed in this way, only the processing of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 ms, for example.

FIG. 173(b) is a flow chart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 173(b), in this interrupt control, first, register save processing is performed as the processing of step S11. Next, as the process of step S12, the gate sensor 2401, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the big winning opening sensor 2403, the first entrance sensor 2404, the second entrance sensor 2405, detection signals from various switches such as the general prize winning opening sensor 3001 are input. Then, as the process of step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above random numbers, the random number (special random number, normal random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol and the normal symbol is stopped is updated, and the random number counter is updated. A counter operation is performed.

After the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs special symbol process processing including lottery processing related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped as the process of step S14. to run. Although this special symbol process will be described later, here, basically, special symbol process flags (first special symbol process flag, second Two special design process flag) corresponding processing will be selectively executed based on.

Next, the main control MPU of the same main control board 1310 executes normal symbol process processing including lottery processing related to the hit that triggers the operation of the second starting door 2411 as the processing of step S15. It should be noted that, even in this normal design process processing, basically, corresponding processing is selectively executed according to the normal design process flag indicating the progress of the game. In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is configured to execute the lottery process so that the driving frequency of the second start door 2411 becomes higher within a predetermined period after the end of the big win game state. (so-called short working hours). In addition, in this embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbols is increased only within a predetermined period after the end of the big win game state, the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbols is shortened, and the lottery of the normal symbols is performed. When the result is a hit, by extending the opening time of the second starting door 2411, such a time-saving state is realized.

In addition, when the special symbol process processing (step S14) and the normal symbol process processing (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 next performs the special symbol process processing as the processing of step S16. Then, a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like. Next, as the process of step S17, the process of transmitting the command set in the predetermined area of the RAM in the normal symbol process process to, for example, the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed.

In addition, the main control MPU of the same main control board 1310 performs information output processing of outputting data such as winning information (15R big win A, 15R big win B) supplied to the hall management computer, for example, as the processing of step S18. I do.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the processing of step S19, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the big winning opening sensor 2403, and the general winning opening sensor 3001. When detection signals such as . As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board 633 outputs a drive signal from the payout control section 633a to the payout motor 584, and pays out prize balls to the player.

Further, the main control MPU of the same main control board 1310 next executes storage processing for checking increase or decrease in the start storage number as the processing of step S20. Next, as the process of step S21, a test terminal process, which is a process of outputting a test signal for checking the control state of the pachinko machine 1 outside the game machine, is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that always operates is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24), this control is terminated. becomes.

By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In addition, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

FIG. 174 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol process (step S14).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. On the condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and stored in the RAM. A first start opening passing process such as storing in one special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S32). Also, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2402 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number A second starting opening passing process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM is executed (step S34).

Next, it is determined whether or not a big win execution flag indicating that the big win game state is being controlled is set (step S35), and if the big win execution flag is set, the big win game state is controlled. A jackpot control process (step S39) is executed. In addition, in the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) at the time of stopping the variable display is a mode suggesting "15R big hit A", A distribution piece 2415 that controls the opening and closing of the big winning opening 2005 according to the 15R jackpot game state A, and distributes the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 to either the first receiving opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008. Drive control is performed, and the process of setting the active state in the 15th round in which the game ball B can be distributed to the second receiving port 2008 is executed. Further, when the state of suggesting "15R big win B" is reached, the big winning hole 2005 is controlled to open and close according to the 15R big win game state B, and the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is transferred to the first receiving hole. 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 to drive and control the sorting piece 2415, and execute the process of setting to the valid state in the 15th round in which the game ball B can be sorted to the second receiving port 2008.

Here, the "valid state" and the "invalid state" will be explained. First, in this embodiment, as a state when the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008, it has an "effective state". Here, the "effective state" means that in the 15th round in which the game ball B can be distributed to the second receiving port 2008, the game ball B is received by the second receiving port 2008, and after the jackpot game state is completed, It is a state in which control to a stochastic state is allowed (enabled). Therefore, by receiving the game ball B in the second receiving port 2008 in the "effective state", it will be controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state. Further, in this embodiment, as a state in which the game ball B is not received in the second receiving opening 2008, there is an "ineffective state" different from the "effective state". Here, the "invalid state" is a state in which the game ball B is not received in the second receiving port 2008 in principle, such as the 1st to 14th rounds in which the game ball B is distributed to the first receiving port 2007. Even if the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008, it is not permitted (invalidated) to control to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, even if the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 in the "invalid state", it is not controlled to the high probability state after the big hit game state is finished. In addition, the "invalid state" enables notification of information on the occurrence of such an abnormality to the hall management side when the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 due to an abnormality such as fraud. Therefore, it is a period during which it is monitored whether or not the game ball B has been received by the second receiving port 2008 . In addition, in this embodiment, in a predetermined round (15th round) that allows the game balls B to be distributed to the second receiving port 2008, the game ball B is set to the "effective state", and the second receiving port 2008 Whenever the ball B is accepted, the game is controlled to a high probability state after the jackpot game state is finished. Also, in a predetermined round (1st to 14th rounds) in which game balls B are not distributed to the second receiving port 2008, it is set to "disabled state", but may be set to "enabled state". Even if the "effective state" is set in all the rounds in the jackpot game state, in principle, the game ball B is not accepted in the second receiving port 2008 in the 1st to 14th rounds. As in the case of setting the "invalid state" in the 14th round, it is important whether or not the game ball B can be received by the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round when the "valid state" is set.

In addition, in the jackpot control process (step S39), after performing the opening control of the big winning opening 2005, each setting process of the high probability flag, the time saving flag, and the time saving number counter is executed. A high-probability flag is a flag indicating a high-probability state. During the execution of the jackpot game state based on the jackpots (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B), game balls B can be distributed to the second receiving port 2008 in the 1st to 15th rounds in which the jackpot 2005 is opened. When the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round, the high probability flag is set by controlling to the high probability state (high probability time saving state) after the end of the jackpot game state. Although it is set, when the game ball B is not received in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round, it is controlled to a high probability state (high probability time saving state) after the end of the jackpot game state. Since it does not, the high probability flag is not set. Then, when the high probability flag is set, when the next big hit, or when the counter value of the time saving number counter becomes "0", the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 126 described later or A high probability flag is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown).

In addition, the time saving flag is a flag indicating that it is a time saving state, and after the end of the big hit game state, the big hit (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B) that is controlled to the time saving state (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state) It is set when ending the big hit game state based on. Then, the time saving flag is the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. Reset by processing.

In addition, the time-saving number counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of variable display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of times the time-saving state continues, and after the end of the jackpot game state, the time-saving state (high probability When the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B) controlled in the time saving state, the low probability time saving state) is ended, the number of continuations of the time saving state is set, and the time saving number counter is set. , the counter value is counted down every time the variable display of the special symbol is executed until the counter value reaches "0". is reset by the first special symbol stop processing or the second special symbol stop processing (not shown) (returns the counter value to "0").

Also, if the jackpot execution flag is not set, on the condition that the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is "0" (Step S36), executes the first special symbol process processing including the lottery processing related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped (step S37), and the second stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S36), the second special design including the lottery process related to the display mode when the fluctuation display of the second special design is stopped Process processing is executed (step S38). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reservation number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 175 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first starting port passing process (step S32).

Now, in the process of step S31, if it is determined that the first starting hole sensor 3002 is in the ON state and the game ball B has entered the first starting hole 2002, the process shown in FIG. Thus, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S41.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special reservation number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area from the main control built-in RAM, and this Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is the maximum value (upper limit) of "4" (step S42). In the processing of this step S42, when it is determined that the first pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S43- The process of S45 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S44, each random number obtained in step S41 is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. store in

In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number acquired in step S41, the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit, whether the ready-to-win effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( Variation pattern type) and other advance determination information is executed before the start of the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S45), and then the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of step S42, when it is determined that the first reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of step S43 to step S45, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended.

In addition, when the number of the first reserved memory changes based on the game ball B entering the first start port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is first reserved. Along with updating to correspond to the number of memories, set a command (first reservation number designation command 0 to 4) for instructing the first reserved number of memories in the above-mentioned memory processing (step S20) and send it to the peripheral control board 1510 It is designed to In addition, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0-4.

FIG. 176 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S45). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random number obtained in the above step S41, specifically the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation By comparing with the random number, it is determined whether or not a big win will occur, if a big win will occur, the type of the big win will occur, and if a big win will not occur, a ready-to-win performance will be executed as a game performance executed by a performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加The mode type of the game presentation is specified (step S61).

Then, the specified advance determination information (whether or not it will be a big hit, if it will be a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it will not be a big hit, whether to execute a ready-to-win production as a game production executed by the production display device 1600) Aspect type of game production to be played), type of special random number obtained (first special random number), and reserved memory number (value of reserved number counter) stored corresponding to the obtained special random number Set the pre-determination command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process related to the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first starting opening passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reservation memory number (the One special reservation number counter value) and the corresponding first special symbol pre-determination command are set (step S62).

Then, by transmitting a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the special symbol command control process (step S16), it is stored corresponding to the first start opening 2002 where the start winning has occurred. In addition to the number of pending memories, whether or not the display result of the variable display of special symbols based on the generated starting winning is a big win, the kind of big win when it becomes a big win, and executed by the performance display device 1600 when it does not become a big win. Peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on peripheral control board 1510 prior to start of variable display according to start winning, to execute ready-to-win effect as game effect to be executed, or advance determination information such as mode type of game effect to be executed. becomes comprehensible.

When the peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is provided with a first reservation storage area for storing pre-determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol.

The first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories. Store in order from the area. Then, when the advance judgment command is received when the advance judgment information is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, the advance judgment information notified to the (n+1)th storage area (n=1 to 3). is stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area according to the first variation pattern command received when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is received. Discard the determination information and move the advance determination information stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area to the N-1th (N=2 to 4) storage area (to the reserved storage area). shift the stored pre-determined information). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to specify the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

When the variable display control is placed in a suspended state in this way, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (suspended state), the degree of expectation for the big hit (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control ) can be notified at a predetermined timing such as, for example, when the pending display is newly output or when the pending display is shifted according to the completion of the pending display. .

FIG. 177 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second starting port passing process (step S34).

Now, in the process of step S33, if it is determined that the second starting hole sensor 2511 is in the ON state and the game ball B has entered the second starting hole 2004, the process shown in FIG. Thus, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reservation storage number is set to its maximum value (upper limit value ) is "4" (step S52). In the processing of this step S52, when it is determined that the second pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S53- The process of S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S54, each random number obtained in step S51 is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. store in

On the other hand, in the process of step S52, when it is determined that the second reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S53 to S54, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended.

In addition, when the number of second reserved storage changes based on the game ball B entering the second start port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the second reserved state. Along with updating to correspond to the number of memories, set a command (second reservation number designation command 0 to 1) for instructing the second reserved number of memories in the above-mentioned memory processing (step S20) and send it to the peripheral control board 4140 It is designed to In addition, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0-4. It should be noted that the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 may execute, after step S54, the effect pre-determining process similar to step S45 in the first starting opening passage process. By replacing "first" in the description of FIG. 176 with "second", the effect prior determination process in the second start opening passage process is realized.

FIG. 178 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S37). In addition, the first special symbol process processing executed in step S37 of the special symbol process processing and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol process processing are similar program modules, and random numbers used for determination And only the table is different, here only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S37 of the special symbol process processing will be described. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed according to the above-described first special symbol process flag.

1. Read the first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU, based on the read first special random number, lottery processing and the like for the display mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol is performed first special Design normal processing (step S80)
2. First special symbol stop design setting process (step S81 )
3. Variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and variation mode of the effect display executed corresponding to the special symbol on the effect display device 1600. First variation pattern setting process (step S82) in which lottery process etc. are performed for
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S83) to wait until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. Regarding the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped determined based on the result of the lottery process is displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing (step S84) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol so that

The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 173).

FIG. 179 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of 2, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the pending state, then as the process of step S102, it is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. Random numbers (for example, first special random numbers, first pattern random numbers, reach random numbers, variable random numbers) related to the display mode of the first special symbol that is stored in the first storage area out of the random numbers are read out from the RAM. . And next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of special symbols is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning in order from the first (first) area. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs is memorized so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become.

After that, as the process of step S105, a big win determination process, which is a lottery process for winning or losing the big win, is performed based on the first special random number of the read first special symbol. After that, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated (step S106) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), this process is terminated.

FIG. 180 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S105).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, if the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state) (step S111), at the time of high probability shown in FIG. 181 (A) A big hit determination table is selected (step S112), and if the current game state is a low probability state (step S111), a big hit determination table for low probability shown in FIG. 181 (A) is selected (step S113) and selected. The big hit determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process are compared (step S114).

The big hit determination table shown in FIG. 181 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and when the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and time saving state (low probability time saving state)) and a jackpot determination table for high probability used when the game state is high probability (high probability time saving state). In the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability, the first special random number of one type matches the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and the first special random numbers of 299 types are the loss determination indicating the above-mentioned loss. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the values (probability of jackpot at low probability: 1/300). In addition, in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number is compared with the first special random number. As with the low-probability jackpot determination table referred to for this purpose, one type of second special random number matches the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 299 types of second special random numbers are outliers. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the deviation judgment value indicating that (jackpot probability at low probability: 1/300).

In addition, in the high-probability jackpot determination table, 10 types of first special random numbers including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the low-probability jackpot determination table match the jackpot determination value, 290 types of first special random numbers are associated with each other so that the first special random numbers match the loss judgment value (jackpot probability at high probability: 1/30). Thus, in this embodiment, in the high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state), the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot was won is low probability (normal state (low-probability non-time-saving state) and time-saving state (low It is increased to 10 times the probability time saving state)). In addition, in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol process processing, in the high probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, it is compared with the first special random number. 10 types of second special random numbers, including the same second special random number as the second special random number set in the low probability jackpot determination table, are used to hit the jackpot. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so that it matches the big hit judgment value indicating that you have won, and that the 290 types of second special random numbers match the loss judgment value that indicates that you have lost (at high probability jackpot probability: 1 in 30).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected big hit determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process, and when it is determined to be a big hit (step S115 ), set a jackpot flag indicating that the variation is winning a jackpot, and end the process (step S116), the selected jackpot determination table and the first special symbol read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process As a result of the comparison with the random number, when it is determined that the hit is lost, the reach determination table (not shown) is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S117). Then, as a result of comparing the reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S102, if it is determined that the reach is out of reach (step S118), a reach flag indicating that the change is the reach is set and the process is performed. End (step S119).

FIG. 182 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 182, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the big hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S121).

If the big hit flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. (Step S122), the type of big win is determined, and the mode (stopped pattern of the first special symbol) of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of big win is determined (step S123). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S121, it is determined to be a lost symbol as a mode when the variation of the first special symbol is stopped (step S124).

As shown in FIG. 181(B), the symbol determination table stores symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) associated with each determination result (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B). ing. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the obtained symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number and the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different. ing.

in particular,
1.15R Opens and closes the big winning hole 2005 in accordance with the big win game state A. In the 15th round, the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a short time (opened so that the game ball B is difficult to enter. 5 seconds) and for a long time (opening that allows the game ball B to enter (easy). For example, 20 seconds), the effective state state to be controlled to a high probability state after the end), and when the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round, special after the end of the jackpot game state While controlling the high probability time saving state until the fluctuation display of the pattern (first special pattern and second special pattern) is executed 100 times, the game ball B is placed in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round. If not accepted, the 15R jackpot A is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state until the variable display of special patterns (first special pattern and second special pattern) is executed 100 times after the end of the jackpot game state.
2.15R Opening and closing control of the big winning hole 2005 according to the big winning game state B, and the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a short time in the 15th round (opened so that the game ball B is difficult to enter. 5 seconds), it is set to an effective state (a state in which the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 and the state is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state), and the effective state is set in the 15th round. When the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 during the state, after the end of the jackpot game state, the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is performed 100 times. While controlling to the probability time saving state, if the game ball B is not accepted in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round, special symbols (first special symbol and second One of the two types of jackpots, 15R jackpot B controlled to a low-probability time-saving state until variable display of two special symbols) is executed 100 times, is determined.

In the 15R jackpot game state A of the present example, as the operation schedule of the big winning opening 2005 in the 15th round, the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds), and the intra-round interval time is a predetermined time (4.5 seconds). Seconds) are set to open the big winning opening 2005 for a long time (20 seconds). Further, as an operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 in the 15th round, when starting the short opening (0.5 seconds) of the big winning opening 2005, the short time operation (0.2 seconds) of the sorting piece 2415 is started. However, when starting the long-time opening (20 seconds) of the big winning opening 2005, the long-time operation (10 seconds) of the sorting pieces 2415 is started, and during the operation period of the sorting pieces 2415, the second receiving port 2008 It is set so that the game ball B can be accepted at . In addition, as the state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round, the effective state (the state in which the game ball B is received by the second receiving port 2008 is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state ).

On the other hand, in the 15R jackpot game state B of this example, the operation schedule of the big winning opening 2005 in the 15th round is set so that the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds). In addition, as an operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 in the 15th round, when the short opening (0.5 seconds) of the big winning opening 2005 is started, the short time operation (0.2 seconds) of the sorting piece 2415 is started. However, it is set so that the game ball B can be received in the second receiving port 2008 during the operation period of the sorting piece 2415 . In addition, as the state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round, the effective state (the state in which the game ball B is received by the second receiving port 2008 is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state ).

As described above, both the 15R jackpot game state A and the 15R jackpot game state B are valid in the 15th round (when the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008, the high probability state is reached after the jackpot game state ends). However, in the 15R jackpot game state A, the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (20 seconds) when it is opened for the second time in the 15th round. It is extremely easy for the game ball B to be received, and furthermore, the sorting piece 2415 is operated for a long time (10 seconds) during the period in which the big winning hole 2005 is open for a long time (20 seconds). It is extremely easy for the received game balls B to be distributed (accepted) to the second receiving port 2008 . Thus, in the 15R jackpot game state A, since the probability that the game ball B is accepted in the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round set in the valid state is extremely high, control is performed to a high probability state after the jackpot game state ends. The odds of doing so are extremely high. On the other hand, in the 15R jackpot gaming state B, since the big winning hole 2005 is only opened for a short period of time (0.5 seconds) in the 15th round, it is extremely difficult for the game ball B to be accepted into the big winning hole 2005. Since the sorting piece 2415 is operated only for a short time (0.2 seconds) during the period in which the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds), the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is second. It is extremely difficult to be distributed (accepted) to the receiving port 2008 . Thus, in the 15R jackpot game state B, since the probability that the game ball B is accepted in the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round set in the valid state is extremely low, control is performed to a high probability state after the jackpot game state ends. The odds of doing so are extremely low.

The operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 is as follows: the sorting piece 2415 is operated for a short time (0.2 seconds), and after a predetermined time (4.8 seconds) has passed, the sorting piece 2415 is released for a long time (10 seconds). second), and when starting the 15th round in the 15R jackpot game state A and the 15R jackpot game state B, such an operation of the sorting piece 2415 I'm trying to start scheduling. In this way, by setting the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 to a single operation schedule, the amount of data regarding the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 is kept from increasing as much as possible.

In the 15R jackpot game state A and the 15R jackpot game state B of this example, the big win port 2005 is opened for a long time (20 seconds) as the operation schedule of the big win port 2005 in each of the 1st to 14th rounds. is set to In addition, as the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 in each of the 1st to 14th rounds, the sorting piece 2415 is not operated, and the game ball B is placed in the first receiving port 2007 instead of the second receiving port 2008 during that period. is set to accept In addition, as the state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2008 in each of the 1st to 14th rounds, the invalid state (in principle, the game ball B is not accepted in the second receiving port 2008, and after the jackpot game state state that is not controlled to a high probability state). Thus, in both the 15R jackpot game state A and the 15R jackpot game state B, in the 1st to 14th rounds, the game balls B are distributed to the second receiving port 2008 when the big winning port 2005 is opened as in the 15th round. A game is simply played to see if the game ball B can be accepted when the big winning hole 2005 is opened, without playing a game as to whether or not it can be accepted.

In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. And, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the allocation of the judgment value is set differently compared to the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, so that the decision ratio of each jackpot is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 181(B), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, the 15R jackpot A (15 rounds), which is relatively advantageous to the player, is selected from the 15R jackpot A and the 15R jackpot B. 50 determination values are distributed for a jackpot with a high probability that the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state of the eyes and a high probability of controlling to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state. is set, 15R jackpot B (the probability that the game ball B is accepted in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round is low, and the jackpot game state ends 50 judgment values are set for a jackpot with a low probability of being controlled to a high probability state later. On the other hand, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, among the 15R big win A and the 15R big win B, 65 determination values are set for the 15R big win A, which is relatively advantageous to the player. On the other hand, 35 determination values are set for the 15R jackpot B, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. In this way, at the time of the first special symbol side big win, either the 15R big win A or the 15R big win B with different degrees of advantage for the player is determined, so what kind of big win is determined at the time of the first big win. can draw attention to. In addition, in the time saving state controlled after the end of the big hit game state, the game on the second special symbol side (the game that allows the game ball B to enter the second start port 2004) is performed, but the second special At the time of the big hit on the pattern side, the 15R big hit game A is determined with a higher probability than at the time of the first special pattern side, so that attention can be paid to how much prize balls can be obtained at the time of consecutive games. can. Therefore, the game does not become monotonous because the game characteristics change between the time of the first big win and the time of consecutive games.

Further, when the type of the big win is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of the big win is determined as the mode of the stop of the first special symbol. Specifically, when the 15R big win A is determined, the 15R big win A pattern is determined as the big win pattern, and when the 15R big win B is determined, the 15R big win B pattern is determined as the big win pattern. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when the 15R big hit A is determined, the 15R big hit A symbol is determined as the big hit symbol.

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, as the process of step S125, these lottery results (type of jackpot, reach loss, or loss) are indicated (specify the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that )) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . And after that, as the process of step S126, this process ends when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82). Peripheral control IC 1510a starts variable display of left, middle, and right decorative patterns based on the received determination result notification command and variable pattern command, and stops and displays in the order of left decorative design → right decorative design → middle decorative design. The display of the effect display device 1600 is controlled as follows.

Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a selects 15 R out of the jackpots related to the first special symbol from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the variation of the decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped. When the jackpot A is specified, the 15R jackpot A pattern (combination of the same decorative patterns) is determined, and when the 15R jackpot B is specified, the 15R jackpot B pattern (common with the 15R jackpot A pattern) is decided and fluctuated. When the fluctuation time specified from the pattern command has passed (at the end of the ready-to-win effect), the determined stop pattern is displayed on the effect display device 1600. FIG. In this way, when the decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600 are changed and stopped in either the 15R big win A symbols or the 15R big win B symbols, it is possible to determine from the stopped symbols of the decorative symbols that it is a big win. However, since common symbols are used for the 15R big win A symbol and the 15R big win B symbol, it is impossible to distinguish between the 15R big win A and the 15R big win B.

In addition, the peripheral control IC 1510a, as a mode (stop pattern) when the variation of the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped, specifies a reach loss from the received determination result notification command, and a lost pattern accompanied by a reach. (Combination of decorative patterns that are not the same. However, the left and right decorative patterns are the same.) If the deviation is specified, the lost pattern that does not involve reach (a combination of decorative patterns that are not the same. However, the left and right decorative patterns are the same.) are not the same), and display control is performed on the effect display device 1600 for the determined stop symbol when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect).

FIG. 183 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 183, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag. If it is (step S141), the type of big hit determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and the variation pattern table at the time of big hit according to the current game state are selected (step S142), and reach If the flag is set (step S143), select the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach according to the current game state (step S144), and if neither the jackpot flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, normal In the case of a loss (a loss in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed), the variation pattern table at the time of loss is selected (step S145).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S146), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set to start the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 (step S147). In addition, the main control MPU sets the variable time set corresponding to the determined variable pattern to the variable timer (step S148). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 only for the fluctuation time thus determined.

In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). It is stored in such a way that it is associated with each variable random number. Thus, the main control MPU, among the plurality of types of variation pattern table according to the determination result based on the special random number and symbol random number, the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process is compared, and the variation time information associated with the read-out variation random number is obtained from this table to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, it is set so as to determine the mode type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect is to be executed and the fluctuation random number. . For example, in the super ready-to-win performance among the ready-to-win performances, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than that in the normal ready-to-win performance, and when the super ready-to-win performance is executed, the player's expectation for the big winning game state is increased.

Also, when the variation display control of the first special symbol is started, next as the process of step S149, the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is set so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S83). This process ends when the update is completed.

In this example, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, while the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second during time saving is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), non A variation pattern of special symbols is set in such a way that variation time information of special symbols set to about 12 seconds is associated with the special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol) when the time is reduced. That is, the variation pattern at the time of loss selected during time saving, compared to the variation pattern at the time of loss selected during non-time saving, so that the time required for the variation display control of the special symbol is extremely short, the special Design fluctuation time information is set.

FIG. 184 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of (1), 1 is subtracted from the variable timer in which the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variable pattern is set. When it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the selected variable time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, this process is terminated when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so as to shift to the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

FIG. 185 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of , display control is performed to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing derivation display of the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern of the first special pattern is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the time saving flag is set and the counter value of the time saving number counter for which the number of times the time saving state continues is set is "0". (Step S183). Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time saving number counter (step S184), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short number counter is "0" (step S185). . As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving flag is reset, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset (step S186). In addition, when it is determined that the counter value of the time saving number counter is "0" in the process of step S183, or when it is determined that the time saving number counter is not "0" in the process of step S185 , at that point, the process proceeds to step S187.

Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S187), a big win start command indicating starting a big win game state is set (step S188), and a big win game state is started (a big win round start command is set). A waiting time (a period for displaying the start of the jackpot game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S189). And next, when the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, when the time saving flag is set, the time saving flag is reset, and the counter value of the time saving number counter is When it is not "0", after resetting the counter value (returning to "0"), a jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game state is being executed is set (step S190), and a first special symbol process is performed. When the flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S191), this process is terminated.

Incidentally, the jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B). In step S188, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot A start command, 15R jackpot B start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot is set. As a result, an effect corresponding to the kind of the big win instructed by the big win start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like.

FIG. 186 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S39).

In step S189, the interval timer is set for the waiting time until the jackpot game state is started. As shown, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 controls the opening and closing of the big winning opening 2005, and in the 15th round the effective state (the big winning game state by receiving the game ball B in the second receiving opening 2008). After the end of the large winning opening opening and closing process (step S402), and the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 in the 15th round to the second receiving opening 2008 Driving control of the sorting piece 2415 so as to enable sorting, and opening and closing of the second receiving port for monitoring whether or not the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round. process (step S403) and are executed in order.

FIG. 187 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big winning opening opening/closing process (step S402).

Now, in the process of step S411, if it is determined that the big winning hole 2005 is in the open state, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 opens the big winning hole 2005 as shown in FIG. according to the operation schedule, when a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds when open for a long time and 0.5 seconds when open for a short time) has passed since the opening of the big winning opening 2005 (step S412), or When the maximum winning number (for example, 9) of game balls B is won in the open state big winning hole 2005 (step S413), the open state big winning hole 2005 is controlled to be closed (step S414). Then, when it is determined that the current round is to end by closing the big winning port 2005 (step S415), the command sent to the peripheral control board 1510 is the type of jackpot and the number of current rounds. A jackpot round end command corresponding to is set (step S416), and the process proceeds to step S428.

Also, in the process of step S411, if it is determined that the big winning hole 2005 is in a closed state, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 opens the big winning hole 2005 as shown in FIG. When it is time to open the big winning hole 2005 according to the operation schedule (step S417), it is determined to start a new round by controlling the big winning hole 2005 to open. (step S418), sets a jackpot round start command corresponding to the type of jackpot and the number of new rounds as a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S419). Then, according to the state setting schedule of the second reception port 2008, when it is determined that it is time to set the valid state flag, that is, the 15th round of the 1st to 15th rounds to open the big winning port 2005 If it is time to start (step S420), a valid state flag is set (step S421). If the valid state flag is set at the start of the 15th round in step S420, it is necessary to reset the valid state flag at the end of the 15th round. Then, the large winning opening 2005 in the closed state or the large winning opening 2005 is controlled to open (step S422), and the process proceeds to step S428. If it is determined that a new round will not be started by controlling the large winning opening 2005 to the open state (second opening in the same round, etc.) (step S418), or the valid state flag (not at the start of the fifteenth round) (step S420), the closed state big winning port 2005 is controlled to be opened (step S422), and step S428 transition to Thus, an effect corresponding to the type of big win and the current number of rounds indicated by the big win round start command and the big win round end command can be executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like.

It should be noted that the valid state flag indicates that it is set to a valid state (a state in which the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 and the state is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state). flag to indicate In the 15th round out of the 1st to 15th rounds for opening the big winning opening 2005, the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 in the second receiving opening opening/closing process (step S403) described later is transferred to the first receiving opening 2007. Alternatively, by driving and controlling the distribution piece 2415 distributed to one of the second receiving ports 2008, the second receiving port 2008 can receive the game ball B and is set to the valid state.

Also, in the process of step S428, if it is determined that the game ball B has been received in the big winning hole 2005, as shown in FIG. A large winning hole entry command is set as a command to be sent to 1510 (step S429), and this process is terminated. As a result, when the command for entering the game ball B into the big winning hole 2005 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, etc. can be executed by

Also, in the processing of step S417, if it is determined that it is not the timing to open the large winning port 2005, as shown in FIG. When all rounds are completed by repeating the open state and closed state of the prize winning opening 2005 (step S423), the jackpot execution flag is reset (step S424). Then, when it is determined that the second acceptance port passing flag described later is set (step S425), the high probability flag is set (step S426), the time saving flag is set and the counter value of the time saving number counter When the initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of continuations of the time saving state (step S427), this process is terminated. In addition, when it is determined that the second acceptance port passage flag is not set (step S425), the high probability flag is not set, and the time saving flag is set to the counter value of the time saving number counter. When the initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of continuations of (step S427), this process ends. Thus, when it is determined that the second receiving port passage flag is set (the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round), a high probability flag And the time saving flag is set and controlled to a high probability time saving state, but the second acceptance port passage flag is not set (the game ball B is not accepted at the second acceptance port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round If it is determined that, only the time-saving flag is set, and control is performed to a low-probability time-saving state.

FIG. 188 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second reception port opening/closing process (step S403).

Now, in the process of step S431, if it is determined that the second receiving port 2008 is in the open state (the state in which the game ball B is distributed to the second receiving port 2008 side by the distribution piece 2415), then the same FIG. , the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 follows the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 from the open state of the second receiving port 2008 for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds when open for a long time). , 0.2 seconds when it is open for a short time) has passed (step S423), or when the current round (15th round) is ended by controlling the big winning port 2005 to be closed (step S433), the second receiving port 2008 in the open state is controlled to a closed state (a state in which the game ball B is distributed to the first receiving port 2007 side by the distributing piece 2415) (step S434).

Further, in the process of step S431, if it is determined that the second receiving port 2008 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. According to the operation schedule of 2415, when it is time to open the second receiving port 2008 (step S435), the closed second receiving port 2008 is controlled to open (step S436).

Next, in the process of step S437, if it is determined that the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 in the open state, as shown in FIG. 188, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the game ball B has been received in the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the fifteenth round while the valid state flag is being set (step S438). Then, when it is determined that the game ball B has been received in the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round (step S438), the second receiving during the valid state in the 15th round. When the second receiving port passing flag indicating that the game ball B has been received at the entrance 2008 is not set (step S439), the second receiving port passing flag is set (step S440), and the peripheral control board 1510 When the command to pass through the second receiving port is set as the command to be transmitted (step S441), this process ends. Thus, as long as the game ball B is not received in the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round, the second receiving port passage flag is not set, and the high probability flag is set in step S426. is not set, there is no control to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, when the second receiving port passing command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the effect display device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speakers, etc. can be executed by

FIG. 189 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol process (step S15).

Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 is in the ON state and the game ball B has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the processing of step S802, first, obtains the normal random number of the normal symbol from the random number counter and stores it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. Run.

Then, in the normal design process processing, one of the following five process processing is selectively executed according to the normal design process flag.

1. Ordinary symbol normal processing (step S803) in which the ordinary random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read out, and lottery processing for the display mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the ordinary symbol is performed based on the read ordinary random number.
2. Ordinary design fluctuation time determination processing (step S804) in which lottery processing etc. are performed for the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the ordinary design displayed on the ordinary design display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the normal design fluctuation random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing (step S805) to wait until the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
4. The normal symbol display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process. Normal design stop processing to stop the fluctuation display of the design (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal pattern becomes a mode suggesting "normal pattern winning", the second start gate door 2411 rotates to open the game to the second start gate 2004. Ordinary electric accessary product opening processing (step S807) for executing processing to control acceptance of ball B

In addition, the normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 173).

FIG. 190 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the gate passage processing (step S802).

Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 is on and the game ball B has passed through the gate section 2003, as shown in FIG. 190, The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value of the normal holding number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU as the process of step S811. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value of "4".

In the processing of this step S811, when it is determined that the number of reserved normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed in order to newly suspend the variable display control of the normal symbols. processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S812, the normal pending number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S813, the normal random number and the normal pattern fluctuation random number are obtained from the random number counter. Then, as the process of step S814, each random number thus acquired is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal reservation number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU.

However, in the process of step S811, when it is determined that the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly reserved. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S812 to S814, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not put on hold again.

It should be noted that the gate portion passage processing (step S802) may be performed in another example described below. For example, if the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 is now ON and it is determined that the game ball B has passed through the gate section 2003, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first The normal random numbers and the normal pattern fluctuating random numbers are obtained from the random number counter and stored in the temporary storage area. After that, the counter value of the normal reserved number counter is obtained from the RAM of the main control MPU, and based on this counter value, it is judged whether or not the number of reserved memory of normal symbols is the maximum value "4". conduct. Then, when it is determined that the number of pending memories of the normal symbols is not the maximum value, the normal pending number counter is counted up (adding 1 ), then, the previously acquired normal random numbers and normal pattern fluctuation random numbers (the normal random numbers and the normal pattern fluctuation random numbers stored in the temporary storage area) are stored in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal reservation number counter. On the other hand, as a result of acquiring the counter value of the normal holding number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU, when it is determined that this counter value is the maximum value "4" (the number of holding storage of the normal symbol is that If it is the maximum value), the previously acquired normal random number and the normal pattern fluctuation random number are discarded without being stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area, and the fluctuation display control of the acquired normal pattern is newly performed. It may be configured not to be held.

FIG. 191 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal process (step S803).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. Based on the counter value of the normal reserved number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the reserved state. As a result, if it is determined that there is variable display control of the normal symbols in the pending state, then as the process of step S822, the normal symbols stored in the normal symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU The random number stored in the first storage area among the random numbers related to the display mode of the pattern (for example, normal random number, normal pattern fluctuation random number) is read out from the same RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, the normal reservation number counter is counted down, and when the fluctuation display of the normal symbols stored in each storage area of the normal reservation storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stopped Random numbers related to the display mode (normal random numbers, normal fluctuation random numbers) are shifted in the first-in first-out mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random number extracted according to the passage of the game ball B to the gate section 2003 is stored from the first (foremost) area. Store in order. When the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003 when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the (n+1)-th (n=1 to 3) storage area. is stored, and when the condition for starting the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is established, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage is performed. Various random numbers stored in the area are moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbols occurs is memorized so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, if the current game state is a time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state) (step S826) ) is selected (step S826), and if the current gaming state is a non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state) (step S825), select a normal figure per determination table (not shown) during non-time saving (step S827), the selected normal pattern per determination table and the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal pattern normal process are compared (step S828).

In addition, the normal pattern hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and is used when the game state is time saving (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state). It is provided with a normal pattern hit determination table for non-shortening working hours used when the game state is non-shortening working hours (low probability non-shortening working hours state). Then, in the time-saving normal pattern hit determination table that is referenced for comparison with the normal random numbers, all 251 types of normal random numbers match the normal pattern per decision value, which indicates that the normal pattern has been elected. The normal random numbers are associated with each other so as not to coincide with the normal pattern deviation judgment value indicating that it is lost. In this way, in the time saving, when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, it is always elected per normal figure, and the second start opening door 2411 rotates to the second start opening 2004 is controlled to allow acceptance of the game ball B.

In addition, in the non-short-time general pattern hit determination table that is referred to for comparison with normal random numbers, it is possible that all 251 types of normal random numbers match the normal pattern per determination value indicating that they have been elected per normal pattern. Instead, the normal random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the normal pattern deviation determination value indicating that the normal pattern is out. In this way, in the non-working time, even if there is a passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003, because there is no winning per normal pattern, the second start door 2411 rotates to the second There is no possibility to control the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. - 特許庁

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected normal pattern hit determination table with the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal pattern normal process, and when it is determined to be a normal pattern hit (step S829 ), after setting the normal pattern per flag indicating that the variation is elected per normal pattern (step S830), per normal pattern as a mode of stopping the variation control of the normal pattern (stop pattern of the normal pattern) Design is determined (step S831), on the other hand, as a result of comparison with the normal random numbers read out in step S822 of the normal design normal process with the selected normal design hit determination table, when it is determined that it is lost, the fluctuation of the normal design A normal pattern loss pattern is determined as a mode (normal pattern stop pattern) at the time of control stop (step S832). And after that, when the above-mentioned normal design process flag is updated (step S833) so that the process shifts to the normal design fluctuation time determination process (step S804), this process is finished.

In this example, in the control of the time saving state, the winning probability of the normal design is set to 251/251, the lottery result of the normal design always wins, and the time required for the variable display control of the normal design is extremely is shortened to a much shorter predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). Then, when the lottery result of the normal pattern becomes a hit, the second starting port 2004 is controlled by an opening/closing pattern in which the opening state is closed for an extremely long predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds). . In other words, during the control of the time-saving state, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will win is extremely high, the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is constant and short, and the second start port 2004 is open. Due to the long time, etc., it is much easier to win the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and it is more efficient to aim at the second start port 2004 than the first start port 2002. You can win B. In addition, in the control of the non-time-saving state, the winning probability of the normal pattern is set to 0/251, and the lottery result of the normal pattern does not always hit, and the second start port 2004 is aimed. Also, the game ball B cannot enter the second starting port 2004.

As described above, during the control of the non-time saving state, even if the second start port 2004 is aimed, the game ball B cannot be won in the second start port 2004, so the first start port 2002 In order for the game ball B to win a prize, the game ball B must be shot aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called "left hitting"). In addition, in the game area 5a on the left side of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball B is attached to the obstacle nail. By coming into contact with N, the game ball B is given various movements and flows down. Therefore, even if the game ball B is hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the first starting port 2002, the first starting port 2002 is not necessarily won, and the first starting port 2002 is won. The game balls B that have not been played are discharged to the outside from an out port 1008 provided at the lower end of the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, during the control of the time saving state, since it is possible to efficiently win the game ball B by aiming at the second start port 2004 rather than the first start port 2002, the game is played at the second start port 2004 In order for the ball B to win a prize, the game ball B must be shot toward the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called "right hit"). In addition, due to the structure of the game board 5, when the second starting port 2004 is opened, if the game ball B is hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2004, the gate part 2003 The passing game ball B wins the second starting port 2004 with an extremely high probability. Therefore, during the control of the time-saving state, the game ball B hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is hardly wasted (exhausted to the outside from the out port 1008), and the control of the non-time-saving state is performed. Compared to the first starting port 2002 in the inside, the game ball B comes to win the second starting port 2004 very efficiently.

Further, during control of the time saving state, in addition to the structure of the game board 5, when passing through the gate part 2003, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will win is extremely high, and the variable display of the normal symbol The time required for control is constant and short, and the time of the open state of the second start port 2004 is long. When the game ball B wins, the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol is set to about 1 second, which is extremely short compared to the range of 10 to 120 seconds during the control of the non-time saving state. The variable display control of the special symbols (suspension of the variable display control of the special symbols) can be digested. That is, when the time-saving state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state, by hitting the game ball B on the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second start port 2004, it becomes a jackpot again in a short time. It is possible to expect to obtain many game balls B by controlling to a big winning game state. In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls B to be paid out by the winning of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 is set to one, so the game to the second start port 2004 Even if the winning of the ball B occurs frequently, the burden on the game hall side can be reduced while increasing the interest of the player.

[11. Control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 192 is a flow chart showing the processing procedure for the control performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 192, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a performs initial setting processing (step S501). In this initial setting process, for example, various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. Note that interrupts are disabled during this initial setting process, and interrupts are enabled after the initial setting process. When the initialization process (step S501) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T has been set is started (step S502).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control IC 1510a generates an interrupt every 2 ms, and executes steady processing for 2 ms. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed. Along with setting the flag T, a process of resetting (setting to 0) the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter is executed. Thus, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to "0". When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and then 16 ms steady processing is performed (step S504).

In this 16ms steady process, based on the command received from the main control board 1310, the process of controlling the effect display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speakers and the like is executed. When the 16ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S502 again, and steps S503 to S504 are repeated each time the 16ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16ms. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "0"), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

FIG. 193 is a flow chart showing an example of 16ms steady process executed every 16ms in the sub-main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control IC 1510a executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process of step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, in the variation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first variation pattern setting process, the process corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second variation pattern setting process)) Control processing related to the effect display device 1600 is executed based on the reception of the variation pattern command transmitted by being set.

Also, in the sound control processing in step S603, control processing related to speakers and the like is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, the control process related to the lamps/LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In information output processing of step S605, the processing and the like which transmits the lighting signal of the lamp/LED to production drive baseplate 1720 and the like are executed. In the random number update process of step S606, the process of updating the random number used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) (for example, the random number used for the pending prefetch related effect) is executed.

Note that the processes of steps S601 to S606 in the 16ms steady process are completed within 16ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is started immediately after 16 ms has passed since the start of the 16 ms steady process (command from analysis processing) is not executed. That is, when 16 ms has elapsed during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapsed flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms elapsed flag has been set after the 16 ms steady process is completed, the 16 ms steady process is performed. to start.

Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing of updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, it may be configured to update various random numbers in either one or both of loop processing and 16 ms steady processing in sub-main processing.

[12. Production related to pending change]
In this embodiment, based on the pending number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the pending display before digestion (pre-digestion pending display) is executed in the effect display device 1600, and when the pending display is digested , a post-digestion suspension display (post-digestion suspension display) is executed in the decoration main body 3511 . That is, as the "holding display" of the present embodiment, there are a "pre-digestion holding display" representing a holding before digestion that is not yet used in a game, and a "digestion display" showing a holding that has been consumed in the current game. By executing the post-retention display, even after the start of the variable display of the decorative design (variable display of the special design), the deferred display will continue to be displayed. , the degree of expectation for a big hit, and the like.

Specifically, when the game ball wins the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (the start condition is satisfied), the hold display of the present embodiment is the number of holds specified from the hold number designation command (hold storage number) increases, one pre-digestion pending display (pre-digestive pending display) is added to the effect display device 1600 and displayed. On the other hand, when the variable display of decorative patterns (variable display of special patterns) based on the reserved display is started (the start condition is satisfied) and one reserved display before digestion is digested, the reservation specified from the reserved number designation command Decrease the number (number of pending memories) by 1 to erase one pending display before digestion in the effect display device 1600, and display the pending display to be digested as a pending display after digestion. 3511 lighting decoration is to be updated. In addition, in this embodiment, as a pending display before digestion, a circular display body (see FIG. 194) is displayed in the pending display area set in the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 1600. As for the display of suspension after digestion, the luminous decoration of the decoration main body 3511 is indicated by luminous display in a predetermined color. Regarding the circular display body displayed in the reserved display area (see FIG. 194), since the colors of the decorated parts are expressed in multiple antique colors, the colors of the parts other than the decorated parts is one of the four colors.

In addition, in the present embodiment, by changing the display mode of the pending display after the pre-digestion pending display is executed as the pending display until the execution of the post-digestion pending display is completed, It is possible to execute a suspension notice performance suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit with respect to the variable display of decorative patterns (variable display of special patterns).

In this embodiment, based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (starting conditions are established), the number of pending designation command and the prior determination command are transmitted from the main control board 1310 . Then, in the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, in the command analysis processing of step S601, when the hold number designation command and the advance determination command are received, the hold specified from the hold advance notice determination table corresponding to those commands, that is, the hold number designation command number (holding memory number) and advance judgment information (jackpot, reach loss, loss, etc.) specified from the advance judgment command. By comparing with a random number for determination of suspension notice, a suspension change pattern (holding change scenario) set in a suspension notice determination table is determined, and suspension notice performance is performed based on the determined suspension change pattern. In addition, in the pending notice determination table, the judgment value for each pending change pattern is different for each advance judgment information (jackpot, reach loss, loss, etc.) specified from the advance judgment command, and the appearance rate of each hold change pattern are different.

In this way, in the suspension notice effect, during the display period from when the pre-digestion suspension display is displayed on the performance display device 1600 until the suspension display changes to the post-digestion suspension and ends, the suspension change pattern (suspension change scenario ), the display mode of the reserved display is updated based on the reserved display, and each time the variable display of the decorative pattern (variable display of the special pattern) based on the reserved display different from the reserved display is started (the start condition is met), the hold The display mode of display can be changed.

Next, the pending notice determination table will be described. The pending notice determination table is stored in the control ROM 1510b of the peripheral control board 1510, in which a plurality of types of pending change patterns are set for each pending number (holding storage number) specified from the pending number designation command. As the hold notice decision table, hold notice decision table 1 used when hold 1 is lit (hold number before digestion = 1), hold notice decision table 2 used when hold 2 is lit (hold number before digestion = 2), hold There are provided a pending notice determination table 3 used when 3 lighting (pre-digestion pending number = 3) and a pending notice determination table 4 used when pending 4 lighting (pre-digesting pending number = 4). A plurality of types of pending change patterns are defined in these pending notice determination tables 1 to 4, respectively. It is set how the display mode of the pending display changes (what display mode it changes to and at what timing it changes).

For example, in the suspension notice determination table 1 used when suspension 1 is lit (the number of suspensions before digestion = 1), the display mode of the suspension display on the effect display device 1600 does not change from the initial mode. A suspension change pattern 1B or the like is provided that changes only once from the initial mode when the suspension display on the effect display device 1600 is extinguished and the post-digestion suspension display is displayed on the decoration main body 3511 . In addition, the suspension notice determination table 2 used when the suspension 2 is lit (the number of suspensions before digestion = 2) includes a suspension change pattern 2A in which the display mode of the suspension display on the effect display device 1600 is digested without changing from the initial mode. , Hold change pattern 2B in which the hold display mode changes only once when changing from pre-digestion hold to post-digestion hold, and when the state of pre-digestion hold number = 2 changes to the state of pre-digestion hold number = 1 The hold change pattern 2C in which the state of the hold display changes only once, and the state of the hold display changes when the state of the hold number before digestion = 2 changes to the state of the hold number before digestion = 1, and the hold before digestion A hold change pattern 2D or the like is provided in which the state of the hold display further changes when changing from to hold after digestion. Similarly, hold display on hold notice determination table 3 used when hold 3 lights (pre-digestion hold number = 3) and hold notice decision table 4 used when hold 4 lights (pre-digestion hold number = 4) A plurality of pending change patterns are provided in which the display mode of the pending display is set to change a predetermined number of times until the is consumed.

In addition, as the display mode (including the initial display mode) of the pending display set in the pending change pattern, the pending display is displayed in either white (basic color), blue, yellow, or red. A display mode is provided. Then, when determining a pending change pattern from the pending notice determination table, as a result of changing the display mode of the pending display to the end, the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of white (basic color)→blue→yellow→red. is set to In other words, when the lottery result is specified as a big hit as the preliminary judgment information, the holding change pattern in which the display mode of the final holding display is a display mode (for example, red) with a high expectation of the big hit is determined with a high probability, and the preliminary judgment is performed. When a lottery result specifies a loss (loss, reach loss) as information, a hold change pattern in which the display mode of the final hold display is a display mode (e.g., white) with a low degree of expectation for a big hit is determined with a high probability. When the display mode of the final reserved display is displayed in the display mode with a high degree of expectation for the big win, the player's expectation for the big win game is heightened.

In addition, in the pending change pattern, the display mode of the pending display does not change in the reverse order of white→blue→yellow→red, and whether the display mode of the pending display is maintained when the pending display is completed. , or the next display mode is set to be a display mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. Therefore, even if the display mode of the pending display is displayed in a display mode with a low degree of expectation for a big hit, there is still a possibility that the display mode will change to a mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit when the pending display is completed. Aspects can be drawn to the end with anticipation.

Also, in the pending change pattern, the display mode of the pending display does not necessarily need to change in the order of blue→yellow→red after being displayed in white (basic color). Start from (for example, start with yellow from the beginning due to the hold change pattern when hold 1 is lit), skip one or more display modes and change to the next display mode (for example, hold change pattern when hold 2 is lit) It is also set to change from white (basic color) to red). Therefore, even if there are few opportunities (number of reservations) for the display mode of the pending display to change, the display mode of the pending display can be displayed in a display mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. Further, even if the display mode of the pending display is displayed in a display mode with a low degree of expectation for a big hit, it is not possible to predict which display mode the next display mode will change, and the display mode of the pending display is displayed to the end. It can attract attention with anticipation.

Further, in this embodiment, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a to produce various sound effects corresponding to the display mode of the hold display after the change. The sound is sent from speakers (for example, the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4, etc. provided on the door frame 3 and the body frame 4, etc.). In this embodiment, the sound effect is set in advance according to the display mode (color) of the hold display after the change. For example, if the display mode of the hold display after the change is blue, the effect When the sound effect "beep" is output and the display mode of the hold display after the change is yellow, the sound effect "beep, pico" is output, and the display mode of the hold display after the change When is red, the sound effect "pico pico" is output.

Further, in this embodiment, the initial color of the pending display is preset to white as described above. This white color is the same as the white color set as the color of the pending display when the pending change suggestion effect is not performed.

Further, in the pending notice determination table, only when a big hit is specified as the preliminary determination information from the preliminary determination command, a special pending change pattern of rainbow color may be determined as the display mode of the final pending display. By determining such a special pending change pattern, when the display mode of the pending display is displayed in a rainbow color, it is determined that the lottery result will be a big hit when the pending display is consumed, and the jackpot game is played. Players' expectations for the game are increasing.

In addition, in the pending notice determination table, when a failure is specified as preliminary determination information from a preliminary determination command, a pending change pattern of white (basic color) or blue is determined as the display mode of the final pending display. , When the jackpot and reach are specified as the advance judgment information from the advance judgment command, it is set possible to determine the hold change pattern that becomes yellow or red as the display mode of the final hold display. Therefore, when the display mode of the pending display is displayed in yellow or red, it is confirmed that the ready-to-win effect is executed at least after the pending display is extinguished, and the player's expectation for the big win game increases. It's like

In addition, in the present embodiment, by determining the pending change pattern when adding the pending display before digestion, a series of change contents until the display mode of the pending display finally changes is determined. As a determination method thereof, when the display of the pending display is started, only the display mode of the pending display at the start and the final display mode of the pending display may be determined. Then, if the display mode of the pending display at the start and the final display mode of the pending display are different, at least the final display mode of the pending display before the target pending display is terminated is displayed, it may be determined how the display mode of the pending display changes each time the timing at which the display mode of the pending display can be changed arrives. Even with such a determination method, it is possible to sequentially change the display mode of the pending display until the pending display on the effect display device 1600 or the decoration main body 3511 ends.

Next, a description will be given of the pending change suggesting effect that is performed in addition to the pending notice effect. The pending change suggestion effect is a effect that suggests the possibility that the display mode of the pending display will change during the display period of the pending display (pre-digestion pending display, post-digesting pending display). That is, in the above-described pending notice effect, during the display period of the pending display, each time the variable display of the decorative pattern (variable display of the special symbol) is started (the start condition is satisfied), the pending display based on the pending change pattern The display mode can be changed, and at the timing when the display mode of the suspension display changes, a suspension change suggestion effect suggesting the possibility that the display mode of the suspension display will change can be executed.

Specifically, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts the variable display of the decorative symbols (variable display of the special symbols) (the start condition is satisfied), the display mode of the pending display changes based on the pending change pattern. determines whether or not, selects a pending change suggesting effect determination table corresponding to the determination result, and compares the determination value set in the pending change suggesting effect determining table with the read random number for determining the pending change suggesting effect. By doing so, one suggestive effect pattern is determined from a plurality of suggestive effect patterns set in the pending change suggestive effect determination table.

In the pending change suggesting effect determination table, a plurality of types of suggesting effect patterns are set, and suggesting effect pattern 1 that does not execute any of the pending change suggesting effects Effect pattern), suggestive effect pattern 2 (a specific character image precedes the change in the display mode of the pending display) in which a pending change suggestive effect is performed in which a specific image or the like appears prior to the change in the display mode of the pending display etc., and a pattern that performs an effect that suggests the possibility of changing depending on the type of the character image, etc.) is set. Note that the pending change suggestion effect determination table is stored in the control ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, in the pending change suggestive effect determination table, the distribution of judgment values for each of the above-described suggestive effect patterns is approximately the same, and the appearance rate of each pending change suggestive effect is approximately the same. However, the rate of appearance of each pending change suggesting effect may be different.

[13. Grayscale production]
Next, as an example of an effect displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 according to various commands from the main control board 1310, grayscale by VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a described above A grayscale effect will be described in which the setting mode is expanded and various image elements displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are switched from full-color images to grayscale images. 194 to 196, examples of effects displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when performing a grayscale effect will be briefly described below. FIG. 194 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a gray scale rendering, FIG. 195 is an explanatory diagram following FIG. 194, and FIG. 196 is an explanatory diagram following FIG. Here, shown in FIG. 107, based on the various commands from the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. Peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a shown in FIG. 171) performs a pending change suggesting effect (holding notice effect) without grayscale effect, and peripheral control IC 1510a of peripheral control board 1510 performs a pending change suggesting effect with grayscale effect. (Holding advance notice effect) and will be briefly explained.

The grayscale effect is executed by performing a grayscale effect availability lottery for determining whether or not to perform the grayscale effect at a predetermined time, and determining to perform the grayscale effect. Specifically, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is based on the winning of the game ball in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (the start condition is established) and the pending number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 and When the advance determination command is received, the selection of the above-described pending notice determination table, the type of pending change pattern set in the pending notice determination table, and the suggested production pattern are determined, regardless of the determination results, A lottery will be held to determine whether grayscale production is possible. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the present embodiment can set the execution of the gray scale effect at the same time as the setting of the pending notice effect and the pending change suggesting effect, and in parallel with the various pending change suggesting effects described above. It is possible to proceed with the grayscale effect, or proceed with the grayscale effect independently of the various pending change suggestive effects described above. In addition, in this embodiment, the probability that it is decided to perform some pending change suggestion is set to 1/20. is set to 1/50, and the probability that the grayscale rendition is performed in parallel with the pending change suggestive rendition is less frequent than the probability that the grayscale rendition is not performed in parallel with the pending change suggestive rendition. is set to

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines to perform the grayscale effect in the grayscale effect availability lottery, it sets the grayscale effect flag indicating the execution of the grayscale effect to ON, and the main control board 1310 performs the following. Start grayscale rendition when starting pending digestion of . When the grayscale effect is started, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is instructed so that the grayscale setting mode by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is developed, and various image elements displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. When switching from a full-color image to a grayscale image and performing light emission control of various LEDs provided on the door frame 3 including the decorative body 3511 and the game board 5, all the light emission colors of the various LEDs are changed to white. to start. Since various processes related to grayscale effect are continuously performed while the grayscale effect flag is set to ON, the processing of the grayscale setting mode by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is performed only when the grayscale effect flag is set to ON. This is repeated when each frame is generated during the set period. As for the end time of the grayscale effect, which will be explained in the example of effect described later, a predetermined end time is set. The performance will end.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a draws a lottery as to whether or not to perform a pending change suggesting effect by adding a hold when the main control board 1310 is executing a pending operation while the grayscale effect is already being performed. When performing the pending change suggesting effect, it is set so as not to newly perform the gray scale effect lottery. This is because the grayscale effect is already being performed, so it prevents the grayscale effect from being overwritten and unnecessarily extended. This is to prevent the scale effect from being canceled.

Next, a description will be given of examples of effects in which the pending change suggesting effect and the grayscale effect proceed in parallel or not in parallel. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a of this embodiment starts progressing the effect displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 based on various commands from the main control board 1310, it instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a. 194(a), a background image 1640 representing outer space (the earth and the moon) is displayed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and the front side of the background image 1640 is , left decorative pattern 1650a on the left side of the display area of the effect display device 1600, middle decorative pattern 1650b in the center of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and right decorative pattern 1650c on the right side of the display area of the effect display device 1600. Start each variable display. At this time, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a recognizes that there are two game balls (two balls on hold) that have not yet been put into play, and when the holding change suggesting effect is not performed, , the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is instructed to display a first pending display 1655a in white, which is on the near side of the background image 1640, from the upper center to the upper right side of the display area of the effect display device 1600, as a pending display. , and a second reserved display 1655b having a white color. At this time, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a illuminates the decoration main body 3511 with white, blue, yellow, or red, for example, so as to correspond to the variable display of the current decoration pattern. A plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the underside movable decoration body decoration substrate 3512 shown in FIG. 130 are controlled.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to change the background image 1640 so that the background image 1640 is visible when the left decorative pattern 1650a, the middle decorative pattern 1650b, and the right decorative pattern 1650c are variably displayed. The left decorative pattern 1650a is from the upper left to the lower left of the display area, the middle decorative pattern 1650b is from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right decorative pattern 1650c is from the upper right to the right of the display area. The reels are variably displayed toward the bottom as if they were rotating.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to stop displaying the left decorative pattern 1650a, the middle decorative pattern 1650b, and the right decorative pattern 1650c. Upon receipt of various commands from the main control board 1310 based on the reception of game balls to the game ball, a reservation display is performed to convey the number of reserved balls that have not yet been played.

For example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to stop display the left decorative pattern 1650a, the middle decorative pattern 1650b, and the right decorative pattern 1650c. If it is recognized that there are 3 balls in total, and it is determined that the pending change suggestion effect will not be performed for the pending addition that has increased by 1 ball, the right side of the second pending display 1655b is displayed as a pending display. display a third pending indication 1655c having a white color in the . As a result, the three suspended balls are arranged in the order from the upper center to the upper right side of the display area of the effect display device 1600: the first suspended display 1655a having white, the second suspended display 1655b having white, and the second suspended display 1655b having white. 3 pending display 1655c is displayed in a row.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to increase the number of held balls from 3 to 1 by the time the left decorative pattern 1650a, the middle decorative pattern 1650b, and the right decorative pattern 1650c are stopped and displayed. When recognizing that there are 4 balls at the same time, a specific pending change pattern (for example, white → blue → yellow → red → When it is decided to perform a pending change suggestive effect (a suggestive effect pattern 1 effect) corresponding to the pending change pattern corresponding to the change of red), as a pending display, white to the right of the third pending display 1655c displays a fourth pending display 1655d having . As a result, the four reserved balls are arranged in the order of the first reserved display 1655a having white, the second reserved display 1655b having white, and the third reserved display 1655b having white, from the upper center to the upper right of the display area of effect display device 1600 A pending display 1655c and a fourth pending display 1655d having a white color are displayed in a row in this order. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and then, as shown in FIG. The right decorative pattern 1650c is stopped and displayed at the pattern 3 to notify that it is lost.

[13-1. Suspension Change Suggestion Rendering Without Grayscale Rendering]
194(c), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to perform the holding change suggesting effect and not to perform the gray scale effect, as shown in FIG. 194(c). Along with the hold digestion by 1310, the left decorative pattern 1650a, the middle decorative pattern 1650b, and the right decorative pattern 1650c are variably displayed, and it is recognized that there are 4 to 3 balls on hold, as shown in FIG. 194(b). The second pending display 1655b to the fourth pending display 1655d are moved one by one to the left, and from the upper center to the upper right side of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the first pending display 1655a having white, the white A second pending display 1655b having a blue color and a third pending display 1655c having a blue color are displayed in a row in this order. In other words, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as the third pending display 1655c to perform the pending change suggesting effect shown in FIG. The color of the fourth reserved display 1655d determined in red is changed from white to blue when the left decorative pattern 1650a, the middle decorative pattern 1650b, and the right decorative pattern 1650c are variably displayed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to stop and display the left decorative pattern 1650a, the middle decorative pattern 1650b, and the right decorative pattern 1650c to notify that it is out.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to variably display the left decorative pattern 1650a, the middle decorative pattern 1650b, and the right decorative pattern 1650c as the main control board 1310 suspends and digests. , recognizing that there are 3 to 2 balls on hold, moving the second holding display 1655b and the third holding display 1655c shown in FIG. A first pending display 1655a having white and a second pending display 1655b having yellow are displayed in a line in order from the upper center of the display area to the upper right. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to change the color of the third pending display 1655c shown in FIG. 194(c) from blue to yellow as the second pending display 1655b. proceed with the performance. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to stop and display the left decorative pattern 1650a, the middle decorative pattern 1650b, and the right decorative pattern 1650c to notify that it is out.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to variably display the left decorative pattern 1650a, the middle decorative pattern 1650b, and the right decorative pattern 1650c as the main control board 1310 suspends and digests. , recognizing that there is one ball out of two on hold, moves the above-described second hold display 1655b one to the left, and displays the first hold display in red in the upper center of the display area of the effect display device 1600. Display 1655a. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as the first pending display 1655a to change the color of the above-described second pending display 1655b from yellow to red to proceed with the effect. At this time, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, when the main control board 1310 is in the hold state, increases the number of holds by 1 to 2, and instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as a hold display, A second pending display 1655b having a white color is displayed to the right of the first pending display 1655a (here, it is assumed that the lottery for the pending change suggesting effect for this pending addition has been lost (no pending change suggesting effect is performed)). . As a result, the two pending balls are arranged in a line in the order of the first pending display 1655a having red color and the second pending display 1655b having white color from the upper center to the upper right side of the display area of the effect display device 1600. Is displayed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and then, as shown in FIG. The right decorative pattern 1650c is stopped at the pattern 6 to notify that it is lost.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to, as shown in FIG. and the right decorative pattern 1650c are variably displayed, while recognizing that there are two to one reserved balls, the second reserved display 1655b shown in FIG. A first pending display 1655a having a white color is displayed in the upper center of the display area of 1600 . At this time, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is mounted on the underside movable decorative body decoration substrate 3512 shown in FIG. 130 so that the color of the first reservation display 1655a shown in FIG. A plurality of full-color LEDs are controlled to start the decoration body 3511 emitting red light. In other words, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a controls the decoration main body so as to become the red of the fourth pending display 1655d determined as the final color of the pending display in the case where the pending change suggesting effect shown in FIG. 194(b) is performed. 3511 luminous decoration is started.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to stop and display the left decorative pattern 1650a and the right decorative pattern 1650c with the same pattern (symbol 7) as shown in FIG. 195(f). to form a reach, and continue the variable display of the middle decorative pattern 1650b.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a so that, as shown in FIG. The background image 1640 is switched to a background image 1645 that expresses warp navigation that allows interstellar travel, leading to super reach. In addition, in this embodiment, since multiple types are set in advance as super reach (the background image is different, some take a long time to develop into super reach, and some ), and when reach is formed and develops into super reach, the background image 1640 representing outer space (the earth and the moon) in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 corresponds to the type of super reach. Background images (e.g., representations of supply bases on Earth, representations of docking to supply ships, representations of lunar bases, representations of escaping from black holes, approaching giant meteorites, etc.) , and encounters with unidentified ships, etc.).

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to place the pressing operation portion 303 shown in FIG. A button effect is displayed in which the simulated button figure 1647 moves upward. At this time, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to move the left decorative pattern 1650a, the middle decorative pattern 1650b, and the right decorative pattern 1650c toward the lower left side of the display area of the effect display device 1600. The left decorative pattern 1650a and the right decorative pattern 1650c are stopped and displayed as the same pattern (symbol 7), and the middle decorative pattern 1650b continues to be variably displayed. After that, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to stop display the middle decorative symbol 1650b with the symbol 6 to notify that it is lost.

Here, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to set a middle decorative pattern 1650b as a pattern different from the left decorative pattern 1650a and the right decorative pattern 1650c, as shown in FIG. 196(i). 6) is stopped and displayed, and a normal background image 1640 representing outer space (the earth and the moon) is displayed from a background image 1645 representing warp navigation capable of interstellar movement over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600. (back to the original normal background image 1640), and the left decorative pattern 1650a, the middle decorative pattern 1650b, and the right decorative pattern 1650c stopped and displayed on the lower left side of the display area of the effect display device 1600 are returned to their original positions. While enlarging to , it is stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 . Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to variably display the left decorative design 1650a, the middle decorative design 1650b, and the right decorative design 1650c as the main control board 1310 suspends and digests.

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to stop and display the middle decorative symbol 1650b at symbol 7 in FIG. After that, a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state occurs. In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to go to the effect shown in FIG. proceed.

[13-2. Suspended Change Suggestion Rendering with Grayscale Rendering]
Returning to FIG. 194, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to perform left decorative design 1650a, middle decorative design 1650b, and right decorative design 1650c as shown in FIG. 194(b). is displayed in a stopped state, and then the pending change suggesting effect is performed without the gray scale effect, the effect shown in FIG. 194(c) is progressing. On the other hand, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to develop the grayscale setting mode when performing the pending change suggestion effect and performing the grayscale effect in parallel. Following 194(b), as shown in FIG. 194(r), all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are grayed out by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as the main control board 1310 suspends the processing. When converting to a scale and performing light emission control of various LEDs provided on the door frame 3 including the decoration main body 3511 and the game board 5, the process of changing the light emission color of all the various LEDs to white is started. Here, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to display the left decorative pattern 1650a, the middle decorative pattern 1650b, and the right decorative pattern 1650c converted to grayscale in the display area of the effect display device 1600. is variably displayed, and recognizing that there are 4 to 3 reserved balls, the second reserved display 1655b to the fourth reserved display 1655d shown in FIG. From the upper center to the upper right side of the display area of the display device 1600, a first reserved display 1655a having a color converted from white to grayscale, a second reserved display 1655b having a color converted to grayscale from white, and blue. to a third reserved representation 1655c having colors converted to grayscale. In other words, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as the third pending display 1655c to perform the pending change suggesting effect shown in FIG. The color of the fourth reserved display 1655d determined to be red is produced by changing from white to blue and converted to a grayscale color when the left decorative pattern 1650a, the middle decorative pattern 1650b, and the right decorative pattern 1650c are variably displayed. progress. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to stop and display the left decorative pattern 1650a, the middle decorative pattern 1650b, and the right decorative pattern 1650c to notify that it is out.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to display all images in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by means of the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as the main control board 1310 suspends the processing. Convert to grayscale. Here, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to variably display the left decorative pattern 1650a, the middle decorative pattern 1650b, and the right decorative pattern 1650c in the display area of the effect display device 1600, Recognizing that there are 3 to 2 balls on hold, the second holding display 1655b and the third holding display 1655c shown in FIG. From the upper center of the area to the upper right side, displayed in a row in the order of a first reserved representation 1655a having white converted to grayscale and a second reserved representation 1655b having yellow converted to grayscale. do. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to change the color of the third pending display 1655c shown in FIG. 194(r) from blue to yellow as the second pending display 1655b. Proceed with the color converted to grayscale. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to stop and display the left decorative pattern 1650a, the middle decorative pattern 1650b, and the right decorative pattern 1650c to notify that it is lost.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to display all images in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by means of the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as the main control board 1310 suspends the processing. Convert to grayscale. Here, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to variably display the left decorative pattern 1650a, the middle decorative pattern 1650b, and the right decorative pattern 1650c. Recognizing that, the above-described second pending display 1655b is moved one place to the left, and the first pending display 1655a having a color obtained by converting red to grayscale is displayed in the upper center of the display area of the effect display device 1600. do. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as the first pending display 1655a to change the color of the above-described second pending display 1655b from yellow to red and convert it into a grayscale color. Proceed with the production. At this time, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, when the main control board 1310 is in the hold state, increases the number of holds by 1 to 2, and instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as a hold display, A second pending display 1655b having a color converted from white to gray scale is displayed to the right of the first pending display 1655a (here, the lottery for the pending change suggesting effect for this pending addition was lost (the pending change suggesting effect was shall not)). As a result, the two suspended balls are arranged from the upper center to the upper right side of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the first suspended display 1655a having a color obtained by converting red to grayscale, and the white to grayscale. A second pending display 1655b having the same color is displayed in a row. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and then, as shown in FIG. The right decorative pattern 1650c is stopped at the pattern 6 to notify that it is lost.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and as shown in FIG. Converts all images displayed in the display area to grayscale. Here, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to variably display the left decorative pattern 1650a, the middle decorative pattern 1650b, and the right decorative pattern 1650c. 194(s), the second reserved display 1655b shown in FIG. 1 Display pending display 1655a. At this time, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a changes the color of the first reservation display 1655a shown in FIG. A plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the underside movable decorative body decoration substrate 3512 shown in 130 are controlled to start the luminous decoration of the decorative body 3511 . In other words, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not change the red of the fourth pending display 1655d determined as the final color of the pending display in the case of performing the pending change suggestion effect shown in FIG. The luminous decoration of the decoration main body 3511 is started.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to stop and display the left decorative pattern 1650a and the right decorative pattern 1650c with the same pattern (symbol 7) as shown in FIG. 195(u). to form a reach, and continue the variable display of the middle decorative pattern 1650b. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and then ends the gray scale rendering just before the super reach shown in FIG. 195(g). In this embodiment, the predetermined timing after the end of the normal reach and before the development to the super reach is set to the end of the gray scale effect. The grayscale effect flag is turned OFF, and the process of converting all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to grayscale by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is completed, and the pending change shown in FIG. In the case of performing a suggestive effect, the process of changing the luminous decoration of the decoration main body 3511 to white instead of red as the fourth reserved display 1655d determined as the final color of the reserved display ends. In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a terminates the process of changing all the emission colors of the various LEDs to white when controlling the light emission of the various LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively.

In this embodiment, as described above, multiple types of super reach are set in advance (the background image is different, some take a long time to develop into super reach, some take a short time, and different ), and when reach is formed and develops into super reach, a background image 1640 in which outer space (the earth and the moon) are represented in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed as the type of super reach. and corresponding background images (for example, one representing a supply base on Earth, one representing a docking to a supply ship, one representing a lunar base, one representing escaping from a black hole, a giant One that expresses the approach of a meteorite, one that expresses an encounter with an unidentified ship, etc.). As a result, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set a plurality of timings for ending the grayscale effect, and a full-color image that allows the player to distinguish colors depending on the timing for ending the grayscale effect. The type of effect image can be made different.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to proceed to the performance that develops to Super Reach shown in FIG. 196(g). As a result, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the full-color image background image 1645, full-color image left decorative design 1650a, full-color image middle decorative design 1650b, full-color image The right decorative pattern 1650c and the first reserved display 1655a having the white color of the full-color image are switched to, and the whole is returned to the original full-color image. In the case where the pending change suggesting effect shown in 194(b) is performed, the fourth pending display 1655d determined as the final color of the pending display is switched to red and returns to the original color. In addition, all the luminescent colors of the various LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 correspond to the production of this super reach from white until the grayscale production ends when proceeding to the production that develops to super reach. switch to the luminescent color (full-color luminescent mode).

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to proceed to the button presentation shown in FIG. 196(h), proceed to the presentation shown in FIG. Along with the pending digestion by the main control board 1310, the left decorative design 1650a, the middle decorative design 1650b, and the right decorative design 1650c are variably displayed.

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to stop and display the middle decorative symbol 1650b at symbol 7 in FIG. After that, a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state occurs. In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to perform a grayscale effect if the above-described FIG. 195(u) is not followed by the super reach shown in FIG. finish. In other words, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the process of converting all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 into grayscale by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the pending change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 194(b). In the case where it is performed, the fourth pending display 1655d determined as the final color of the pending display is not red, and the decoration main body 3511 is changed to white as the light-emitting decoration. 196(i) above by instructing the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

194(r) to FIG. 195(u), in the pending change suggesting effect that performs the grayscale effect shown in FIG. 194(r) to FIG. All the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIGS. It is difficult to determine to what color it has changed (suspended change). This makes it possible to hide the suggestion of the expected value by the pending display in the grayscale presentation.

194(r) to 195(u), all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are suspended changes without grayscale effects. All the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIGS. 194(c) to 195(f) in the suggestive effect are converted to grayscale. As a result, when performing a hold change by setting any one of a plurality of predetermined hold change patterns, even if a hold change is performed using the same hold change pattern, the screen described above In the screen data of one frame that defines the above, when the grayscale setting mode is not specified as the object processing command (that is, without performing the grayscale effect) and the full-color image is used to perform the effect, and the one frame that defines the screen described above Depending on whether the grayscale setting mode is specified as an object processing command in the screen data (that is, the grayscale effect is performed) and the effect is performed using a grayscale image, it is possible to create a different effect that gives a completely different impression to the player. can.

Further, when the grayscale effect is finished, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a ends the process of converting all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 into grayscale by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, In the case where the suspension change suggesting effect shown in b) is performed, the fourth suspension display 1655d determined as the final color of the suspension display is not set to red, and the light emission decoration of the decoration main body 3511 is changed to white. 196(g), the display area of the effect display device 1600 changes from an image whose entirety has been converted to grayscale to a full-color background image 1645, The left decorative pattern 1650a of the full-color image, the middle decorative pattern 1650b of the full-color image, the right decorative pattern 1650c of the full-color image, and the first reserved display 1655a having the white color of the full-color image are switched, and the whole returns to the original full-color image, The luminous decoration of the decoration main body 3511 changes from the color changed to white to the red of the fourth reserved display 1655d determined as the final color of the reserved display in the case of performing the reserved change suggesting effect shown in FIG. 194(b). and return to the original color. In other words, while the grayscale production is in progress, the suggestion of the expected value is hidden by the pending display. By releasing the value, it is possible to proceed with an extremely novel production in which the expected value can be suggested by the pending display.

195(t) to FIG. 195(u), in the suspension change suggestion effect with the grayscale effect shown in FIG. 195(u), the blue decoration shown in FIG. The luminous decoration of the main body 3511, the luminous decoration of the decoration main body 3511 in yellow shown in FIG. It is difficult to distinguish the color of the pending display from the color of the luminous decoration of the main body 3511 . This makes it possible to hide the suggestion of the expected value due to the luminous decoration of the decoration main body 3511 in the grayscale presentation.

Also, when changing the color of the hold display, various speakers (for example, vibration speaker 354 provided in door frame 3 or main body frame 4, top center speaker 462, top side (Speaker 464, main body frame speaker 622 of main body frame 4, etc.), so that the player himself/herself hears and compares how the color of the pending display has changed from one color to another by the sound effect. can enjoy the progress of the game, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the player even in the gray scale presentation.

194(r) to FIG. 195(u), in the pending change suggesting effect that performs the grayscale effect shown in FIG. 194(r) to FIG. Since all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIGS. Since there is no need to store in advance in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 shown in FIG. 171, variations in rendering can be increased without increasing the capacity of image data.

[14. About volume adjustment]
Next, the volume control function installed in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described below.

First, as volume control means that can be operated by the game management side (hall side) (that cannot be operated by the players), the peripheral control board 1510 has a main set value for the volume set in predetermined steps (for example, high, medium, low). 3 stages) is provided. When the game management side (hall side) operates the volume adjustment switch 1510d, a volume adjustment operation signal is input to various parallel I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a through the peripheral control input circuit. The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a is a vibration speaker provided on the door frame 3, the body frame 4, etc., at the main setting value of the volume corresponding to the input volume adjustment operation signal based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. 354 , the top central speaker 462 , the top side speaker 464 , the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 , and other speakers can output sound effects.

In addition, as a volume control means that can be operated by the player, the effect operation unit 300 has a predetermined level of sub-set value of the volume (for example, 6 levels from 1 to 6. 6 is the maximum) when the player rotates it. A rotary operating portion 302 of a rotary drive unit 340 is provided which can be adjusted to . This sub-set value can be adjusted in 6 stages regardless of the setting stage of the main set value, but the volume that the player can actually hear changes based on the set stage of the main set value. That is, the volume that the player can actually hear is based on the value obtained by multiplying the main setting value and the sub setting value. , and when the main set value is "low" and the sub set value is "1", the volume is the minimum. When the player operates the rotation operation unit 302, a detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347 provided in the rotation drive unit 340 and a detection signal from the second rotation detection sensor 348 are transmitted through the peripheral control input circuit. are input to various serial I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The peripheral control IC 1510a monitors whether or not the rotary operation unit 302 has been operated, and when it is determined that the rotary operation unit 302 has been operated in the right direction, the volume sub-set value is adjusted according to the amount of operation. When it is determined that the rotary operation unit 302 has been operated in the left direction, processing for lowering the volume sub-set value is performed according to the operation amount.

Then, in the peripheral control IC 1510a, the sound volume adjustment processing by the rotary operation unit 302 is performed during a period before the game is started (demonstration display, etc. can be performed) because the symbol variation corresponding to the big hit determination has not yet been performed. ), as well as during the period when the game is started and the symbol variation according to the big hit determination is being executed, the reception by the player is allowed, and when a more important effect appears, the volume By making it possible to flexibly change the setting of the value, the interest in the game is maintained. It should be noted that the volume adjustment processing by the rotary operation unit 302 is executed during a period before the start of the game (demonstration display, etc., can be performed) when the symbol variation corresponding to the big hit determination has not yet been performed. When the volume sub-setting value is changed, a setting confirmation sound (for example, a “beep” sound effect) corresponding to the volume sub-setting value after the change is output from various speakers, while the game continues. When the sound volume adjustment process is executed by the rotary operation part 302 and the sub-set value of the sound volume is changed during the period when the pattern variation according to the judgment of the big hit is executed after the start, the setting confirmation sound is not output. I'm doing it. This is because there is a possibility that no effect sound is output during a period during which a demo display or the like can be performed. Since there is a high possibility that any of the effects sounds are being output during the period when the setting confirmation sound is being output, the player can be made to recognize the volume by the change in the effects sound itself. I'm trying to prevent it from being put away.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 to adjust the volume (change the sub-set value) while the symbol variation is being performed. During the period during which the symbol variation is executed, at least during the period during which a specific effect using the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302 or pressing operation unit 303) that can be operated by the player is executed, Even if the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302, the volume is restricted so as not to be adjusted.

First, as an effect during execution of symbol variation, a case where an operation effect that can change the effect by the player rotating the rotary operation unit 302 will be described with reference to FIG. 197 . As an operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302, for example, the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 from among a plurality of types of selected images displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600. One of the selected images is selected, and after a predetermined period of time, the selected image selected by the player is changed to an image suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 197, during the period from timing t1 after the start of the symbol variation to timing t3 after the elapse of a predetermined period, a plurality of types of selection images are displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600. In order to select one of the selection images, an instruction effect is performed to instruct the player to rotate the rotation operation section 302 . In addition, during the period from timing t2 after the start of the command effect to timing t3 at the end of the command effect, a performance operation acceptance period is set during which the rotation operation of the rotary operation unit 302 is allowed to be accepted. During this effect operation acceptance period, the selection of the selected image is not confirmed, and the player can switch the selection of the selected image by rotating the rotary operation unit 302 .

Then, at timing t3, which is the end point of the instruction effect, the selection of the selected image is confirmed with the end of the effect operation accepting period. In addition, during a period from timing t3 at which the instruction performance is terminated to timing t4 after the elapse of a predetermined period, an operation corresponding performance is performed in which the confirmed selection image changes to an image suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win. . That is, in the operation corresponding performance, as a result of the player selecting the selection image by rotating the rotation operation unit 302, it is possible to know what degree of expectation for the big win is suggested.

Further, when an operation performance consisting of an instruction performance and an operation corresponding performance is executed, the sound volume is adjusted during a period from timing t0 before starting the instruction performance to timing t5 after the end of the operation corresponding performance. A volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be on. That is, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be ON for a period longer than the period from timing t1 to timing t4 during which the operation effect is executed. In the peripheral control IC 1510a, when the volume change prohibition flag is in the off state, the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 to change the volume sub-set value, and the volume change prohibition flag is in the on state. , even if the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302, the process of changing the volume sub-set value is not performed. In this way, by prohibiting the volume adjustment by the rotating operation of the rotary operation unit 302 at least during the period in which the operation effect consisting of the instruction effect and the operation corresponding effect is being executed, the player's unintended effect can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the volume adjustment from being performed. In the peripheral control IC 1510a, when the volume change prohibition flag is ON, even if the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302, the process of changing the volume sub-set value is not performed. Even when such sub set value change is restricted, when the game management side (hall side) operates the slide type volume adjustment switch 1510d, the process of changing the main set value of the volume is performed. there is

More specifically, the volume is changed not only during the period from timing t1 to timing t4 when the operation effect is executed, but also from timing t0 (for example, two seconds before) before timing t1 at which the operation effect is started. The prohibition flag is controlled to be on. For example, when the volume change prohibition flag is turned on from timing t1, which is the start point of the operation effect, the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated before and after the start of the operation effect in order to adjust the volume. In the operation effect, there is a possibility that a selection image is selected unintentionally by the player. On the other hand, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be turned on from timing t0 before timing t1, which is the start point of the operation effect, so that the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302 before and after timing t0. Even if the player is doing so, the player becomes aware that the sound volume cannot be adjusted during the period from the timing t0 to the timing t1, and it is possible to prevent the selection of the selection image not intended by the player in the operation presentation. can.

In addition, the volume is changed not only during the period from the timing t1 to the timing t4 when the operation presentation is executed, but also for the period until the timing t5 (for example, 2 seconds later) after the timing t4 at which the operation presentation ends. The prohibition flag is controlled to be on. For example, when the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be turned off from timing t4, which is the end of the operation effect, the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated before and after the end of the operation effect. , there is a possibility that the volume is adjusted unintentionally by the player. On the other hand, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be ON for a period from timing t4, which is the end point of the operation effect, to timing t5 after timing t4. Even if the player rotates the sound volume, the sound volume is not adjusted, and it is possible to prevent the sound volume from being adjusted unintentionally by the player after the end of the operation presentation.

Next, as an effect during the execution of symbol variation, a case where a driving effect is performed in which the rotation operation part 302 is rotationally driven without the player rotating the rotation operation part 302 will be described with reference to FIG. 198. . Even when such a drive effect using the rotary operation unit 302 is performed, the player is allowed to continue for a period longer than the period during which the drive effect is executed, as in the case of the operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302 described above. Even if the user rotates the rotary operation unit 302, the volume is not adjusted.

As shown in FIG. 198, during a period from timing t1 after the start of symbol variation to timing t2 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a driving effect of rotationally driving the rotary operation unit 302 is performed. Note that the driving performance using the rotary operation unit 302 is performed as a performance suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than when the driving performance is not performed.

Further, when the driving performance using the rotary operation part 302 is executed, it is prohibited to adjust the volume during the period from the timing t0 before the start of the driving performance to the timing t3 after the end of the driving performance. volume change prohibition flag is turned on. In other words, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be ON for a period longer than the period from timing t1 to timing t2 during which the driving effect is executed. In this way, by prohibiting the volume adjustment at least during the period in which the driving performance using the rotary operation unit 302 is being executed, the player can drive the rotary operation unit 302 by rotating the rotary operation unit 302 or the like. It is possible to prevent the performance from being hindered.

More specifically, the volume is changed not only during the period from timing t1 to timing t2 during which the drive effect is executed, but also from timing t0 (for example, two seconds before) before timing t1 at which the drive effect is started. The prohibition flag is controlled to be on. For example, when the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be ON from timing t1 at which the driving performance is started, the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated before and after the driving performance is started in order to adjust the volume. There is a possibility that the execution of the driving performance will be hindered. On the other hand, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be turned on from timing t0 before timing t1, which is the start point of the driving effect, so that the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302 before and after timing t0. Even if it does, it becomes possible to notice that the sound volume cannot be adjusted during the period from timing t0 to timing t1, and it is possible to prevent the execution of the driving performance from being hindered.

In addition, the volume is changed not only during the period from the timing t1 to the timing t2 when the driving performance is executed, but also for the period until the timing t3 (for example, 2 seconds later) after the timing t2 at which the driving performance ends. The prohibition flag is controlled to be on. For example, when the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be in the OFF state from timing t3, which is the end point of the drive effect, the rotary operation unit 302 is restarted even though the rotational drive of the rotary operation unit 302 is temporarily stopped by the drive effect. There is a possibility that the rotation operation will be performed and the execution of the driving effect will be hindered. On the other hand, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be ON for a period from timing t2, which is the end point of the driving performance, to timing t3, so that it is recognized that the driving performance has ended. The player can rotate the rotary operation unit 302 to adjust the sound volume later, and it is possible to prevent the execution of the driving performance from being hindered.

Next, as an effect during execution of symbol variation, a case where the player presses the pressing operation section 303 to change the effect will be described with reference to FIG. 199 . In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the pressing operation portion 303 is provided near the rotary operation portion 302 so that the rotary operation portion 302 is positioned around the pressing operation portion 303 . Even when such an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed, similar to the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 described above, the player is allowed to Even if the user rotates the rotary operation unit 302, the volume is not adjusted. Further, as an operation effect using the pressing operation part 303, for example, the player presses the pressing operation part 303 a predetermined number of times (one time or a plurality of times) on the screen of the effect display device 1600. ) When the player instructs to perform a pressing operation, and the player presses the pressing operation unit 303 for the number of times instructed, an image indicating the degree of expectation for a big hit is displayed. In the operation effect using the pressing operation part 303, an effect in which the pressing operation part 303 protrudes may be performed before the player instructs to press the pressing operation part 303 a predetermined number of times. The effect in which the pressing operation part 303 protrudes is performed as an effect suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than in the case where the pressing operation part 303 does not protrude.

As shown in FIG. 199, during a period from timing t1 after the start of symbol variation to timing t3 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the player presses the pressing operation unit 303 a predetermined number of times on the screen of the effect display device 1600. (It may be performed once or multiple times.) An instruction effect for instructing the pressing operation is performed. In addition, during the period from timing t2 after the start of the command effect to timing t3 at which the command effect ends, an effect operation reception period is set during which the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is permitted to be accepted. This effect operation reception period ends when the player presses the pressing operation unit 303 the number of times indicated on the screen of the effect display device 1600, or when a predetermined period of time elapses. , along with this, the instruction effect is also terminated.

During a period from timing t3, which is the end point of the instruction production, to timing t4 after a predetermined period of time has passed, an operation corresponding production for displaying an image suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win is displayed on the screen of the production display device 1600. done. In other words, in the operation corresponding performance, the player can know what kind of big win expectation is suggested as a result of the player pressing the pressing operation section 303 the number of times indicated on the screen of the performance display device 1600 .

Further, when an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 consisting of an instruction effect and an operation corresponding effect is executed, during a period from timing t0 before the start of the instruction effect to timing t5 after the end of the operation corresponding effect , a volume change prohibition flag that prohibits volume adjustment is controlled to be on. In other words, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be ON for a period longer than the period from timing t1 to timing t4 during which the operation effect is executed. Here, the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are integrally configured as the effect operation unit 301. Since the rotation operation unit 302 is positioned around the pressing operation unit 303, the player can press the operation unit 302. There is a possibility that the rotary operation unit 302 is erroneously operated when the operation unit 303 is pressed. However, even if the player erroneously operates the rotary operation unit 302, it is prohibited to adjust the sound volume during at least the period during which the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 including the instruction effect and the operation corresponding effect is being executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the sound volume from being adjusted unintentionally by the player.

More specifically, not only the period from the timing t1 to the timing t4 when the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is executed, but also the timing t0 (for example, 2 seconds before), the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be ON. For example, when the volume change prohibition flag is turned on from timing t1, which is the start point of the operation effect, the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated before and after the start of the operation effect in order to adjust the volume. After the start of the operation presentation, there is a possibility that the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed unintentionally by the player due to an erroneous operation. On the other hand, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be turned on from timing t0 before timing t1, which is the start point of the operation effect, so that the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302 before and after timing t0. Even if the player is doing so, he or she becomes aware that the sound volume cannot be adjusted during the period from timing t0 to timing t1, and after the start of the operation presentation, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 unintended by the player due to an erroneous operation. can be prevented from happening.

Further, not only the period from timing t1 to timing t4 during which the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is executed, but also timing t5 (for example, two seconds later) after timing t4 at which the operation effect ends. The volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be ON for the period up to . For example, when the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be turned off from timing t4, which is the end of the operation effect, the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed before and after the end of the operation effect. , there is a possibility that the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated by an erroneous operation, and the volume is adjusted unintentionally by the player. On the other hand, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be ON for a period from timing t4, which is the end point of the operation effect, to timing t5, so that the player presses operation unit 303 before and after timing t4. Even if the player presses , the rotary operation part 302 is not rotated by an erroneous operation after the end of the operation presentation, and the unintended sound volume adjustment by the player can be prevented.

As described above, when the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is executed, the player rotates during the period from the timing t0 before the start of the instruction effect to the time t5 after the end of the operation corresponding effect. Even if the operation unit 302 is rotated, the volume is prohibited from being adjusted. , a specific notification such as "Cannot change volume". For example, during the period from timing t1 to timing t4 during which the operation effect using the pressing operation section 303 is executed, the player rotates the rotating operation section 302 when pressing the pressing operation section 303. There is a possibility that the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated to adjust the volume without noticing that the volume adjustment is prohibited. However, even in such a case, by giving the above-described specific notification, even if the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302, the player can clearly recognize that the volume will not be adjusted. It is possible to prevent the rotation operation of 302 from being performed uselessly.

Next, a specific effect example in the case where the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 to adjust the sound volume during the period in which the symbol variation is executed will be described with reference to FIG. .

First, when a command relating to the variation pattern is transmitted from the main control board 1310 side to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the display of the decorative pattern is started on the screen of the effect display device 1600 (Fig. 200(A)). When it is determined that the rotary operation unit 302 has been operated in the right direction during the period in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed, processing for increasing the volume sub-set value according to the amount of operation is performed. conduct. At this time, at the bottom of the screen of the effect display device 1600, a volume adjustment bar whose display amount is increased or decreased according to the increase or decrease of the sub-set value of the volume is displayed. The sub-set value of the volume that rises accordingly is displayed on the volume adjustment bar (FIG. 200(B)). On the screen of the effect display device 1600, an area in which the variable display of decorative patterns is performed and an area in which a volume adjustment bar is performed are divided. The adjustment bar prevents the variable display of the decorative pattern from being hidden, and prevents the deterioration of the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the rotary operation unit 302 has been operated in the left direction during the period in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed, processing for lowering the volume sub-set value according to the amount of operation is performed. conduct. At this time, at the bottom of the screen of the effect display device 1600, a volume adjustment bar whose display amount is increased or decreased according to the increase or decrease of the sub-set value of the volume is displayed. Accordingly, the sub-set value of the volume lowered accordingly is displayed on the volume adjustment bar (Fig. 200(C)).

Then, after the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 is stopped, the changed volume sub-set value is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the effect display device 1600 until a predetermined period (for example, 1.8 seconds) elapses. 200(D) and (E)).

As described above, during the period in which the symbol variation is executed, when the operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302, the drive effect using the rotary operation unit 302, and the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 are performed sets the volume change prohibition flag to an ON state at a point in time (for example, two seconds before) before these effects are started, and even if the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302, the volume is not adjusted. I try not to In this regard, after the volume change prohibition flag is turned on, although the volume sub-set value displayed on the volume adjustment bar does not increase or decrease on the screen of the effect display device 1600, As shown in (E), the volume display bar displaying the changed volume sub-setting value is continuously displayed for a predetermined period. Therefore, even if the volume adjustment is suddenly prohibited, the player can know at which volume sub-set value the volume adjustment has been prohibited, and the discomfort of the player can be reduced.

Further, in the above, when the operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302, the driving effect using the rotary operation unit 302, and the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 are performed, the operation effect is performed rather than starting these effects. From the time the previous volume change prohibition flag is turned on (for example, 2 seconds ago), the volume adjustment bar displaying the changed volume sub-setting value is continuously displayed. The volume adjustment bar is erased before the production starts. In other words, even after the volume change prohibition flag is turned on, during the period in which the volume adjustment bar is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600, after the volume change prohibition flag is turned on, the effect described above (rotation operation unit 302 , the driving effect using the rotary operation unit 302, and the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303) are started. Thus, at the start of the operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302, the drive effect using the rotary operation unit 302, and the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303, the volume adjustment bar is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of these effects from deteriorating.

In the present embodiment, the volume can be adjusted by the player rotating the rotary operation unit 302 while the symbol variation is being performed. During the period, if an operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302, a driving effect using the rotary operation unit 302, or an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed, the operation effect will start from the period during which these effects are being executed. The volume change prohibition flag is turned on for a long period of time so that even if the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302, the volume is not adjusted. In addition, during the volume adjustment prohibition period in which the volume change prohibition flag is ON, the operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302, the driving effect using the rotary operation unit 302, and the operation using the pressing operation unit 303 are performed again. When any of the performances is performed, the volume change prohibition flag, which was scheduled to be turned off after the end of the original performance, is kept on so that the volume adjustment prohibition period is extended. . As a result, during the period in which the symbol variation is executed, any one of the operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302, the driving effect using the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed. Even if the same effect is performed again later, it is possible to reliably prevent unintended sound volume adjustment by the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed, the operation effect (operation Until the timing t5 after the end of the corresponding effect), the volume change prohibition flag is turned on so that even if the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302, the volume is not adjusted. Also, the volume change prohibition flag may be turned off at a timing after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the end of the instruction effect in which the rotary operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated in the operation effect. In other words, the volume change prohibition flag may be controlled to be ON for a period longer than the period during which the command effect is executed among the operation effects. You may control to an OFF state before completion|finish of the operation corresponding production|presentation after instruction|indication production|presentation. Among the operation effects, the instruction effect requires the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, whereas the operation corresponding effect after the instruction effect requires the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. However, since the result of the operation is only notified, even if the volume adjustment prohibition period is set for a period longer than the period during which the instruction effect is executed among the operation effects, the player's Unintended volume adjustment can be prevented.

Further, in the present embodiment, during the period during which the symbol variation is executed, not only the operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302 and the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 are performed, but also the symbol variation is executed. Even during the period when the jackpot game is not executed or during the period when the jackpot game is being executed, when either the operation performance using the rotary operation unit 302 or the operation performance using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed, those performances are performed. is being executed, the volume change prohibition flag is turned on so that even if the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302, the volume is not adjusted. For example, when the above-described suspension notice effect is executed, the display mode of the suspension display can be changed each time the variable display of the decorative symbols (variable display of the special symbols) is started (the start condition is satisfied). , before the symbol variation is started, any one of a plurality of types of selected images displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is selected by the player rotating the rotating operation unit 302. When the selected image is selected and the pattern variation is started, the selected image selected by the player can execute an operation performance such that the selected image is changed to the display mode of the pending display based on the pending change pattern. In such a case, the volume change prohibition flag is turned on in a period spanning the execution of continuous symbol variations so that the period during which symbol variations are not executed is included, and the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302. Even if it does, the volume adjustment is not performed. Further, for example, when a jackpot game is executed, in a specific round (for example, the first round), the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 to select any one song (selected image). Then, it is possible to execute an operation presentation in which the music selected by the player is played from the speaker. In this way, either the operation effect using the rotary operation part 302 or the operation effect using the pressing operation part 303 is performed during the period spanning the execution of the continuous pattern variation or the period during which the big hit game is being executed. is carried out, by providing a volume adjustment prohibition period over a period longer than the period during which the performances are executed, it is possible to prevent the volume adjustment not intended by the player.

After the completion of the symbol variation, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has passed without the symbol variation being performed again, the player can only adjust the sound volume by rotating the rotary operation unit 302. Instead, the player can rotate the rotary operation unit 302 to adjust the amount of light in the effect display device 1600 . For example, in the peripheral control IC 1510a, in addition to monitoring whether the rotary operation unit 302 has been operated, it also monitors whether the pressing operation unit 303 has been operated. When it is determined to that effect, it is switched to the light amount adjustment. When it is determined that the rotary operation unit 302 has been operated in the right direction during the light amount adjustment, processing is performed to increase the set value of the light amount (luminance) according to the amount of operation, and the rotary operation unit 302 is turned to the left. When it is determined that a direction operation has been performed, processing is performed to decrease the set value of the amount of light (luminance) in accordance with the amount of operation. On the other hand, during the period in which the symbol variation is executed, even if it is determined that the pressing operation unit 303 has been operated, the light amount adjustment is not switched to the light amount adjustment, and the light amount adjustment not intended by the player is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the performance during execution of the pattern variation from becoming difficult to see.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, during the period from timing t0 to timing t5 when the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 (see FIG. 199) is executed, the player presses the rotation operation unit 302. When the rotating operation is performed, a specific notification such as "Cannot change the volume" is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600 to make the user aware that the volume adjustment is prohibited. Such a specific notification may also be made when the used operation effect is performed. For example, during the period during which the symbol variation is being executed, if the operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302 (see FIG. 197) is performed, from the period during which the operation effect is being executed (timing t1 to t4) The volume change prohibition flag is turned on for a long period of time (timings t0 to t5) so that even if the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302, the volume is not adjusted. During the periods (timings t0 to t2, timings t3 to t5) that are not the effect operation valid period, when the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302, the player is made aware that volume adjustment is prohibited. A specific notification may be provided. Note that during the periods (timings t0 to t2, timings t3 to t5) that are not the effect operation valid period, the volume adjustment is prohibited, not during the period during which the rotation operation of the rotary operation unit 302 is required for the operation effect. Although there is a possibility that the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated in order to adjust the volume, the specific notification described above makes the user clearly aware that the volume will not be adjusted, and the rotary operation is performed. It is possible to prevent the rotating operation of the part 302 from being performed uselessly. In such a case, the specific notification is not the sound output from the speaker, but the light emitted from various decorative substrates or the display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 so that the effect sound related to the operation effect is not obstructed. (such as displaying "cannot change volume"). Similarly, during the drive effect (FIG. 198) in which the rotary operation unit 302 is rotationally driven, the period (timings t0 to t1, From timing t2 to t3), the specific notification described above may be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, during the period in which the symbol variation is executed, if any of the operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302 and the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed, the operation effect (operation Until the timing t5 after the end of the corresponding effect), the volume change prohibition flag is turned on so that even if the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302, the volume is not adjusted. On the other hand, when various movable body movements are performed following the operation effect by performing the rotation operation of the rotation operation part 302 or the pressing operation of the pressing operation part 303, a predetermined period of time from the end of the operation period of the movable body is performed. It is preferable to keep the volume change prohibition flag ON until the timing after the elapse of . In this way, by prohibiting the volume adjustment by rotating the rotary operation unit 302 during the motion period of the movable body following the operation effect, it is possible to concentrate on the motion of the movable body. .

Further, in the present embodiment, when the operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302 is performed during the period during which the symbol variation is executed, the volume The change prohibition flag is turned on so that even if the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302, the volume is not adjusted. When the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 without turning on the volume change prohibition flag during the period when the special operation performance is executed, the change of the volume and the reflection in the performance are performed in parallel. may be performed. As such a special operation effect, for example, there is an effect in which the player is requested to raise or lower the sound volume by rotating the rotary operation unit 302 .

[15. About the common operation section]
Next, in the above-described embodiment, an operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302 and an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 are described. may be configured. FIG. 201 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as another embodiment viewed from the front right.

As shown in FIG. 201, the door frame 3 of this configuration is provided with a push-type common operating portion 255 (double-purpose button) on the right side of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 in the depth direction. This common operation section 255 is provided at a position where it can be pressed in the depth direction with the index finger when the player properly rotates the handle 182, and is more conspicuous than the rotation operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303. In order to prevent this from happening, there is no lighting decoration with many LEDs like the rotary operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303. ing. Note that the common operation portion 255 is not limited to the door frame 3, and may be provided in another portion as long as it can be operated when the handle 182 is rotated. Further, the common operation unit 255 may not be able to change the volume sub-set value for the effect sound.

The common operation section 255 described above is effective when an operation presentation using the rotary operation section 302 and an operation presentation using the pressing operation section 303 are performed. Specifically, in this configuration, when the player side operates the common operation unit 255, a detection signal from the common operation unit detection sensor is input to various serial I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. It's like The peripheral control IC 1510a monitors the operation status of the common operation unit 255 during the effect operation effective period in the operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, and receives a detection signal from the common operation unit detection sensor to perform a common operation. When it is determined that the operation unit 255 has been operated, the effect operation effective period of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is terminated, and it is assumed that the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 has been operated. Execute the corresponding operation corresponding production. That is, in this configuration, when performing an operation presentation using the pressing operation portion 303, if the common operation portion 255 is pressed instead of pressing the pressing operation portion 303, it is assumed that the pressing operation portion 303 has been operated. Correspondence production will progress. Also, if the common operation portion 255 is pressed instead of pressing the pressing operation portion 303 in the projecting state, it is assumed that the pressing operation portion 303 has been operated, and the operation corresponding effect progresses. Based on the operation of the common operation unit 255, processing is performed to drive the pressing operation unit 303 that has not been operated so as to return to the normal state (not the protruded state). Further, when performing an operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302, pressing the common operation unit 255 instead of rotating the rotary operation unit 302 rotates the rotary operation unit 302 in a specific direction (for example, clockwise (rightward)). )), it is assumed that the rotation operation unit 302 has been rotated to the right, and the operation corresponding presentation progresses. As described above, in this configuration, a plurality of operation units (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) having different operation modes can be used by the common operation unit 255, and the player operates the handle 182 to play the game. While shooting the ball B, various operation performances can be performed with one hand, which enhances convenience.

More specifically, when performing an operation effect using the pressing operation part 303 in the projecting state, if the pressing operation part 303 in the projecting state is not pressed, the pressing operation part 303 is displayed after a predetermined effect time has elapsed. 303 is driven to return to the normal state (not the protruded state). 303 is considered to have been operated, and the operation-corresponding effect progresses. Then, a process of driving the pressing operation portion 303 that is not in the protruded state is performed so as to return it to the normal state (the state that is not in the protruding state). Similarly, when performing an operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, a predetermined portion of the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated by a predetermined vibration means (vibration speaker, vibration motor drive, etc.) and the rotation operation is performed. The player does not have to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 when the vibration effect that gives the player a feeling of vibration is performed through the unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, or when the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed. In the case where the driving performance of rotating (self-propelled) the rotary operation unit 302 is performed at this time, if the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are not operated, the vibration and driving due to the vibration performance will occur after a predetermined performance time elapses. A process for ending the rotation driving by the effect is performed, but if the common operation portion 255 is pressed instead of operating the rotation operation portion 302 or the pressing operation portion 303, it is assumed that the rotation operation portion 302 or the pressing operation portion 303 has been operated. In this case, even before the predetermined performance time elapses, when the common operation unit 255 is operated, the vibration due to the vibration effect and the rotation due to the drive effect are generated. Processing for terminating the drive is performed. As a result, when the common operation portion 255 is pressed instead of operating the rotary operation portion 302 or the pressing operation portion 303, the protrusion state of the pressing operation portion 303, the vibration caused by the vibration effect, and the rotational drive caused by the drive effect are inadvertently continued. It is possible for the player to recognize that the rotation operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 are considered to have been operated.

Further, when performing an operation effect of changing the pressing operation part 303 in the normal state (not the protruded state) to the protruding state when the pressing operation part 303 is pressed, if the pressing operation part 303 is not pressed, a predetermined effect time is required. After the lapse of time, a process is performed to drive the pressing operation portion 303 to the projecting state. If the common operation portion 255 is pressed instead of pressing the pressing operation portion 303, it is assumed that the pressing operation portion 303 has been operated, and an operation corresponding presentation is performed. In this case, even before the predetermined effect time elapses, when the common operation unit 255 is operated, the pressing operation unit 303 that has not been operated is driven into a projecting state. Processing will be performed. Similarly, when the rotation operation portion 302 or the pressing operation portion 303 is operated, a predetermined portion of the pachinko machine 1 vibrates by a predetermined vibration means (vibration speaker, driving a vibration motor, etc.) and the rotation operation portion 302 or the pressing operation is performed. When a vibration effect is performed through the unit 303 to give a feeling of vibration to the player, or when a drive effect is performed in which the rotary operation unit 302 is rotationally driven (self-propelled) without the player rotating the rotary operation unit 302. , if the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are not operated, after a predetermined presentation time has elapsed, a process of starting vibration due to the vibration effect and rotation driving due to the driving effect is performed. If the common operation portion 255 is pressed instead of operating the operation portion 303, it is assumed that the rotation operation portion 302 or the pressing operation portion 303 has been operated, and the operation corresponding effect progresses. Even before the time elapses, when the common operation unit 255 is operated, the process of starting the vibration by the vibration effect and the rotational drive by the drive effect is performed. As a result, when the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, at that time, the pressing operation unit 303 changes to the projecting state, the vibration due to the vibration effect, or the driving effect. Since the rotational drive is started, the player can recognize that the rotation operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 are considered to have been operated.

In addition, in the course of the game, as an operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, a continuous hit effect requiring multiple pressing operations on the pressing operation unit 303, and a left and right direction with respect to the rotation operation unit 302 or a long operation effect (long-press effect, long-twist effect, etc.) that requires a long time to operate the same operation unit of the pressing operation unit 303 or the rotary operation unit 302. is executed, the specific operation mode is performed on the condition that the above-described common operation unit 255 is operated in a combined mode (for example, long press) associated with the above-described specific operation mode. The operation of the common operation section may also be reflected in the required operation presentation.

In addition to the above, when the player side operates the rotary operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 in an operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, a predetermined vibration means (vibration speaker or vibration motor driving etc.) causes a predetermined portion of the pachinko machine 1 to vibrate and give a feeling of vibration to the player through the rotary operation portion 302 or the pressing operation portion 303, even when the common operation portion 255 is operated, In the same way as when the rotation operation part 302 or the pressing operation part 303 is operated, a predetermined part of the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated by vibration means (vibration speaker, vibration motor drive, etc.), and the vibration is transmitted to the player through the common operation part 255. You may make it give a feeling. As a result, it is possible to more effectively achieve the above-described game effect of enhancing convenience.

Instead of the above, the common operation unit 255 may be configured to change the volume sub-set value for the effect sound. For example, when changing the volume sub-setting value, pressing the common operation unit 255 instead of rotating the rotary operation unit 302 is equivalent to rotating the rotary operation unit 302 clockwise (to the right). behavior. Furthermore, as in the above-described embodiment, when an operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302, a driving effect using the rotary operation unit 302, and an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 are performed, the volume change prohibition flag is turned on, and the role of the common operation unit 255 may be switched from the volume operation to the effect operation to the rotary operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 . That is, during the volume adjustment prohibition period in which the volume change prohibition flag is turned on, even if the common operation unit is pressed, the volume is not adjusted, and it is assumed that the rotary operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated. You may make it progress the production|presentation corresponding to operation by pressing. In this way, by prohibiting not only the rotary operation unit 302 but also the common operation unit 255 from adjusting the volume, it is possible to prevent the volume from being adjusted unintentionally by the player.

The common operation unit 255 described above is effective when an operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302 and an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 are performed. After providing a plurality of types of operation effects using the operation effect and the pressing operation unit 303, among the plurality of types of operation effects, an operation effect with a high occurrence frequency (occurrence rate) (for example, about 1/3 relatively When an operation effect used to develop a pre-reach variable dialogue effect set with a high effect execution probability is performed, the common operation unit 255 is enabled, and an operation effect with a low occurrence frequency (for example, about 1/100 The common operation unit 255 may be invalidated when an operation effect used for progressing the cut-in effect during reach for which a relatively low effect execution probability is set is performed. As a result, when an operation presentation with a high occurrence frequency is performed, the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be operated by pressing the common operation unit 255 instead of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. However, when an operation effect with a low occurrence frequency is performed, even if the common operation unit 255 is pressed, the rotation operation unit 302 or the rotation operation unit 302 or the It is not considered that the pressing operation part 303 has been operated, and the operation effect does not progress (the operation corresponding effect is not performed). That is, when an operation effect with a low frequency of occurrence is performed, the operation effect progresses only when the rotary operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated instead of the common operation unit 255 . As a result, when an operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302 and an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 are performed, the originally requested operation of the operation unit can be performed according to the frequency of occurrence of the operation effect. It is possible to let the player experience the original fun of the operation performance of the rare mode as much as possible, and to give sharpness to the participation in the operation performance. In addition, when it is set as such a form, it may be as follows. For example, even if it is an operation effect that occurs infrequently, only when the number of executions reaches a predetermined number of times (one time or multiple times) after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the operation effect is not performed. If the common operation portion 255 is pressed instead of operating the rotation operation portion 302 or the pressing operation portion 303, it is assumed that the rotation operation portion 302 or the pressing operation portion 303 has been operated, similarly to the operation effects that occur frequently. The operation presentation may progress. In this manner, by changing the conditions under which the common operation unit 255 functions as a substitute for the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 according to the progress of the game, the common operation unit 255 can be used more preferably.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the application avoidance of the common operation unit 255 is switched according to the frequency of occurrence of the operation effect, but the following may be done. For example, after providing a plurality of types of operation effects using the rotary operation unit 302 and operation effects using the pressing operation unit 303, the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated among the plurality of types of operation effects. The common operation unit 255 may be disabled when an operation presentation with a predetermined action is performed, and the common operation unit 255 may be enabled when an operation presentation without a predetermined action is performed. . Note that the operation effect in which a predetermined action is imparted includes an operation effect of changing the normal state (not the protruding state) to the protruding state when the pressing operation unit 303 in the normal state (not the protruding state) is pressed, or a rotating operation. When the portion 302 or the pressing operation portion 303 is operated, a predetermined portion of the pachinko machine 1 vibrates by a predetermined vibration means (vibration speaker, driving of a vibration motor, etc.), and the player moves through the rotating operation portion 302 or the pressing operation portion 303. Vibration effects that give a feeling of vibration to the player, drive effects that rotate (self-run) the rotary operation unit 302 without the player rotating the rotary operation unit 302, and the like. As a result, of the operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302 and the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303, an operation effect is performed in which a predetermined action is given when the rotary operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated. In this case, since the common operation unit 255 is disabled, the originally requested operation of the operation unit can be performed, and the predetermined action imparted by the operation effect can be performed.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the application avoidance of the common operation unit 255 is switched according to the frequency of occurrence of the operation effect, but the following may be done. For example, after providing a plurality of types of operation effects using the rotary operation unit 302 and operation effects using the pressing operation unit 303, among the plurality of types of operation effects, an operation effect with a low degree of expectation for a big hit is performed. , the common operation part 255 may be enabled, and the common operation part 255 may be disabled when an operation effect with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is performed. As a result, when an operation effect using the rotary operation part 302 and an operation effect using the pressing operation part 303 are performed, the originally requested operation of the operation part can be performed according to the degree of expectation of the operation effect. It is possible to give sharpness to the participation in the operation production. When the operation effect using the pressing operation part 303 is performed among the operation effects using the rotary operation part 302 and the operation effect using the pressing operation part 303, the common operation part 255 is enabled and the rotation operation is performed. When an operation effect using the unit 302 is performed, the common operation unit 255 may be disabled. As described above, in the operation effect using the pressing operation portion 303, even if the common operation portion 255 is pressed instead of pressing the pressing operation portion 303, the same feeling of pressing can be given. 302, if the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of rotating the rotary operation unit 302, the operation feeling will be different. It is possible to maintain the feeling of operation that can be done. Furthermore, apart from the common operation unit 255 as a substitute for the pressing operation unit 303, a position similar to the common operation unit 255 (a position where the player can press the handle 182 in the depth direction when the player properly rotates the handle 182) is provided. ) may be provided with an alternative rotation operation section as an alternative to the rotation operation section 302 . As an alternative rotation operation unit as an alternative to the rotation operation unit 302, although it has the same configuration as the rotation operation unit 302, it is configured in a small and modest appearance, so that the player can use it like the rotation operation unit 302. can be rotated, and an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 is performed, the alternative rotation operation unit may be enabled. In this case, instead of rotating the rotation operation unit 302 Even if the alternative rotation operation part is rotated, the user can feel that the same rotation operation is performed.

In addition, during the period before the start of the game (demonstration display, etc.) when the symbol variation corresponding to the big hit determination has not yet been performed, it is determined whether the common operation unit 255 is enabled or not. Alternatively, when the common operation section 255 is enabled, the player may be allowed to switch the setting of the operation section to be enabled among the rotary operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 . For example, during a period during which a demonstration display or the like can be performed, a predetermined selection screen can be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600 by operating the pressing operation unit 303, and the "rotation screen" displayed as the selection screen is displayed. Enable the common operation unit 255 for both the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303”, “Enable the common operation unit 255 only for the rotation operation unit 302”, “For the pressing operation unit 303 The player selects the option desired by the player from among "enable the common operation unit 255 only" and "disable the common operation unit 255 for both the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303". good too. In this manner, by changing the operation unit that the common operation unit 255 functions as a substitute for the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 according to the taste of the player, the common operation unit 255 can be used more preferably. .

[16. Light guide effect using a light guide plate]
Next, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of light guide plates each capable of emitting light to display a pattern. Light guide effects using these light guide plates will be described below.

As described above, the plurality of light guide plates are attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500 in order from the front side in the front-rear direction (depth direction), and are transparent flat plates that close the frame of the center accessory 2500. A light guide plate 2610 , a transparent plate-shaped rear first light guide plate 3210 attached to the front side of the unit base 3201 and closing the frame of the unit base 3201 , and A transparent plate-shaped rear second light guide plate 3160 closing the inside of the frame is provided.

[16-1. Light guide effect using the back second light guide plate]
First, on the rear second light guide plate 3160, a fifth pattern 3161 (see FIG. 140) formed by a number of uneven fifth reflecting portions that reflect only light from the left and right directions forward, and a sixth pattern 3162 (see FIG. 141) formed by a number of uneven sixth reflecting portions that reflect forward only the light from the rear second light guide plate 3160. As the light guide effect, the fifth pattern 3161 is displayed by emitting light from the light guide plate LEDs 3171a of the pair of fifth pattern substrates 3171 provided on the left and right sides of the back second light guide plate 3160. FIG. 204 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 202, 21 left and right light guide plate LEDs 3171a are mounted on each of the pair of fifth pattern substrates 3171 in a state of being arranged in a row in the vertical direction. For at least 3 each of 1st to 3rd, 4th to 6th, 7th to 9th, 10th to 12th, 13th to 15th, 16th to 18th, and 19th to 21st among the 1st to 21st light guide plates The LEDs 3171a are grouped individually, and the LEDs 3171a for the light guide plate can be independently turned on/off for each group. When the back second light guide plate 3160 is caused to emit light to display the fifth pattern 3161, the first to third light guide plate LEDs 3171a in the pair of fifth pattern substrates 3171 are caused to emit light. Of the light-emitting regions divided into 7 with substantially equal areas in the vertical direction, the first light-emitting region A can emit light, and when the fourth to sixth LEDs 3171a for the light guide plate emit light, the second light-emitting region B emits light. When the seventh to ninth light guide plate LEDs 3171a are lighted, the third light emitting region C can be lighted, and when the tenth to twelfth light guide plate LEDs 3171a are lighted, the fourth light is emitted. The region D can be illuminated, and when the 13th to 15th light guide plate LEDs 3171a are illuminated, the fifth light emission region E can be illuminated, and when the 16th to 18th light guide plate LEDs 3171a are illuminated. , the sixth light emitting region F can be caused to emit light, and when the 19th to 21st light guide plate LEDs 3171a are caused to emit light, the seventh light emitting region G can be caused to emit light.

A fifth pattern 3161 luminous-displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160 is provided on substantially the entire surface of the back second light guide plate 3160, and is composed of a light guide decoration consisting of the letters "Chance!" Chance!”, and a light guide decoration (this In the embodiment, it is composed of a sandstorm-like background pattern). In this embodiment, in order to make the characters "Chance!" The form of formation of the fifth reflecting part (for example, the depth of engraving on the light guide plate, the width of the engraving, etc.) is varied so that the light guiding decoration is emphasized only in the fifth reflecting part of the character part. . In addition, as shown in the figure, the letter "Chance!" Since it is arranged in the area D, when the 10th to 12th light guide plate LEDs 3171a among the 1st to 21st light guide plate LEDs 3171a are lighted from the upper side, it is possible to light up and display the characters "Chance!". On the other hand, when the 10th to 12th light guide plate LEDs 3171a are extinguished and the light guide plate LEDs 3171a other than the 10th to 12th light guide plate LEDs 3171a are turned on, the character "Change!" The background pattern can be displayed by light emission.

As shown in FIG. 203, in the light guide effect in which the fifth pattern 3161 is displayed by light emission on the back second light guide plate 3160, the effect progresses so that the light emitting area of the back second light guide plate 3160 increases when a predetermined condition is established. , and finally, the fourth light-emitting area D is illuminated so that the character "Chance!" of the fifth pattern 3161 can be visually recognized. Specifically, when the light guide effect of emitting light to display the fifth pattern 3161 is started, first, as shown in FIG. By causing the LED 3171a to emit light, the first light emitting region A is caused to emit light, and by causing the 19th to 21st light guide plate LEDs 3171a to emit light, the seventh light emitting region G is caused to emit light. That is, in the first light-emitting region A and the seventh light-emitting region G, a sandstorm-like background pattern appears by light-emitting those light-emitting regions, making it difficult to visually recognize the screen display of the effect display device 1600 positioned on the rear side. However, in the second light emitting region B, the third light emitting region C, the fourth light emitting region D, the fifth light emitting region E, and the sixth light emitting region F, these light emitting regions are not displayed by light emission, The screen display of the display device 1600 is in a state in which it can be visually recognized. The light guide plate LEDs 3171a mounted on the pair of fifth pattern substrates 3171 are all side-view type full-color LEDs. A luminous display is provided.

In addition, in the back rear decoration effect unit 3150 of the present embodiment, only for the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3172a that emit light to display the sixth pattern 3162 of the back second light guide plate 3160, between the back second light guide plate 3160 Similarly, a condenser lens is arranged between the rear second light guide plate 3160 and the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a that emit light to display the fifth pattern 3161. may Such a condensing lens can condense the light spreading from the light guide plate LED 3171a and suppress unnecessary diffusion. When the 19th to 21st light guide plate LEDs 3171a are caused to emit light, light leakage causes other light emitting regions (light emitting regions other than the first light emitting region A and the seventh light emitting region G) to emit light. It is possible to prevent luminous display. In addition, among the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a that emit light to display the fifth pattern 3161, only a part of the light guide plate LEDs 3171a may be provided with a condenser lens between the rear second light guide plate 3160 and the light guide plate LEDs 3171a. . For example, when the fourth light-emitting region D is illuminated by emitting light from the 10th to 12th light guide plate LEDs 3171a described later among the 1st to 21st light guide plate LEDs 3171a in order from the top, the back second light guide plate 3160 Since all the light emitting areas are illuminated, there is no need to prevent light leakage from the 10th to 12th light guide plate LEDs 3171a. Only, a condensing lens may be arranged between the rear second light guide plate 3160 and the rear second light guide plate 3160 .

As shown in FIG. 203(b), after the first luminous region A and the seventh luminous region G are luminous-displayed, a predetermined condition for luminous-displaying the remaining luminous regions is established, and these luminous displays are performed. In addition, by emitting light from the 4th to 6th light guide plate LEDs 3171a among the 1st to 21st light guide plate LEDs 3171a from the upper side, the second light emitting region B is illuminated to enlarge the sandstorm-like background pattern, and 16 to 18 By causing the second light guide plate LED 3171a to emit light, the sixth light emitting region F is illuminated to enlarge the sandstorm-like background pattern. That is, in the first light-emitting region A, the second light-emitting region B, the sixth light-emitting region F, and the seventh light-emitting region G, by lighting these light-emitting regions, a sandstorm-like background pattern appears, and the background pattern appears on the rear side. Although the screen display of the effect display device 1600 is in a state where it is difficult to see, the third light emitting area C, the fourth light emitting area D, and the fifth light emitting area E are not illuminated, The screen display of the effect display device 1600 is in a state in which it can be visually recognized. Note that, even at this stage, the light guide plate LED 3171a is caused to emit white light, so that white light emission display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 203(c), after the first light-emitting region A, the second light-emitting region B, the sixth light-emitting region F, and the seventh light-emitting region G are light-emission-displayed, the remaining light-emission regions are light-emission-displayed. When the conditions are met, in addition to these light-emitting displays, the third light-emitting region C is light-emitting by lighting the 7th to 9th light guide plate LEDs 3171a among the 1st to 21st light guide plate LEDs 3171a from the top. In addition to further enlarging the sandstorm-like background pattern, the 12th to 15th light guide plate LEDs 3171a are caused to emit light, thereby causing the fifth light-emitting region E to emit light, thereby further enlarging the sandstorm-like background pattern. In other words, in the first light emitting region A, the second light emitting region B, the third light emitting region C, the fifth light emitting region E, the sixth light emitting region F, and the seventh light emitting region G, by causing these light emitting regions to emit light, A sandstorm-like background pattern appears, making it difficult to see the screen display of the effect display device 1600 located on the rear side. The screen display of the effect display device 1600 is in a state in which it can be visually recognized. Note that, even at this stage, the light guide plate LED 3171a is caused to emit white light, so that white light emission display is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 203(d) and (e), after the luminescence display of the luminescence regions excluding the fourth luminescence region D is performed, a predetermined condition for luminescence display of the remaining luminescence regions is satisfied. In addition to these light emission displays, the fourth light emitting region D is caused to emit light by causing the 10th to 12th light guide plate LEDs 3171a among the 1st to 21st light guide plate LEDs 3171a to emit light from the top. In other words, by causing substantially all of the light emitting areas of the back second light guide plate 3160 to emit light, substantially all of the screen display of the effect display device 1600 positioned on the rear side becomes difficult to see due to the sandstorm-like background pattern. In addition to that, in the fourth light emitting area D, the characters "Chance!" of the fifth pattern 3161 are lightly displayed. At this stage, by causing the light guide plate LED 3171a to emit light in any one of white, blue, red, multicolor, etc., all the light emitting regions of the rear second light guide plate 3160 emit light in a predetermined emission color. making it possible. In addition, multicolor can be exemplified by causing the light guide plate LEDs 3171a to emit light in different colors for each light emitting region, or by causing each of the three light guide plate LEDs 3171a in each light emitting region to emit light in different colors.

By the way, the light guide effect of causing the back second light guide plate 3160 to emit light to display the fifth pattern 3161 is a part of the hold change suggestion effect that suggests the possibility that the display mode of the hold display will change as described above. It is performed in combination with the suggestive production. Specifically, in the present embodiment, as the suspension notice effect, during the display period of the suspension display (pre-digestion suspension display, post-digestion suspension display), the variable display of the decorative pattern (variable display of the special symbol) is started (started) Each time the condition is satisfied, the display mode of the pending display can be changed based on the pending change pattern. Then, the post-digestion pending display related to the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed by emitting light from the LED mounted on the underside movable decorative body decoration board 3512. main body 3511), but at the timing when the display mode of the post-digestion hold display changes, light guide effect is performed to display the fifth pattern 3161 on the back second light guide plate 3160, and post-digestion hold. It suggests the possibility that the display mode of the display will change.

More specifically, when it is determined that the post-digestion pending display does not change, it is suggested that the luminous regions other than the fourth luminous region D among the plurality of types of suggestive rendering patterns are displayed in a luminous state and ended (turned off). Effect pattern A (A1 to A3 described later) can be determined. For example, as a suggestive effect pattern A in which the light-emitting regions other than the fourth light-emitting region D are light-emitting and displayed, after light-emitting the first light-emitting region A and the seventh light-emitting region G, a predetermined light-off time (for example, 2 seconds) Suggestive effect pattern A1, the first light emitting region A and the seventh light emitting region G, and the second light emitting region B and the sixth light emitting region F are turned off in this order for a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds). Suggestive production pattern A2, first light emitting region A and seventh light emitting region G, and second light emitting region B, in which the light emitting display is enlarged every time and then turned off after a predetermined light-off time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed. And the sixth light emitting region F, the third light emitting region C, and the fifth light emitting region E are expanded in this order every predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds), and then a predetermined light-off time ( For example, there is a suggestive effect pattern A3 in which they are turned off after 2 seconds. On the other hand, if it is determined that the post-digestion pending display will change, the first and seventh light emitting regions G, the second light emitting regions B and the sixth light emitting regions B and sixth The luminous display of the luminous region F, the third luminous region C, the fifth luminous region E, and the fourth luminous region D is expanded in this order every predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds), and the reverse luminous region is displayed. A suggestive effect pattern B can be determined in which substantially all light emitting areas of the second light guide plate 3160 are turned off after a predetermined turn off time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed. In other words, in the light guide effect of displaying the fifth pattern 3161 on the back second light guide plate 3160, if the fourth light emitting region D is not light-emitting, it is suggested that the post-digestion hold display does not change. On the other hand, when substantially all light emitting regions of the back second light guide plate 3160 including the fourth light emitting region D are light-emitting, it suggests that the post-digestion hold display changes. As a result, after the start of the light guide effect, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the character "Chance!"

Further, in the present embodiment, when substantially all the light emitting regions of the back second light guide plate 3160 including the fourth light emitting region D are displayed to emit light and the post-digestion holding display is changed, the back second light guide plate including the fourth light emitting region D At the same time that substantially all light-emitting regions of the light guide plate 3160 are turned off (with the lapse of a predetermined turn-off time), the post-extinguishing hold display is changed. As a result, in addition to drawing attention to whether or not the character "Chance!" It is also possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the hold display appears, and it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation until the light emitting area of the back second light guide plate 3160 is turned off. In addition, as another example instead of this, when substantially all the light emitting regions of the back second light guide plate 3160 including the fourth light emitting region D are displayed by light emission to change the post-digestion holding display, the back light including the fourth light emitting region D After substantially all the light emitting regions of the second light guide plate 3160 are turned off, after a predetermined delay time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, the post-digestion hold display may be changed. Even after the light emitting area of the light plate 3160 is turned off, the player's expectation can be maintained.

In addition, when almost all the light emitting regions of the rear second light guide plate 3160 are light-emitting and displayed, the light-emitting regions are light-emitting and displayed in any one of white, blue, red, and multicolor. The suggestive performance pattern is determined in the order of blue, red, and multicolored luminescent colors so that the degree of expectation that the post-digestion holding display will change to a display mode with a high degree of expectation for a big win is high. That is, for example, when substantially all the light-emitting regions of the back second light guide plate 3160 are displayed in white, the post-digestion hold display has a low probability of changing to a display mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. When almost all the light emitting areas of the second light guide plate 3160 are displayed in red light, there is a high probability that the post-digestion hold display will change to a display mode with a high expectation of a big hit. As a result, when almost all the light emitting regions of the back second light guide plate 3160 are light-emitting and displayed, the light-emitting color plays a role of prior suggestion, and whether the light-emitting region is light-emitting and displayed in the highly anticipated light-emitting color. can also be brought to attention. In addition, in the process in which substantially all of the light emitting regions of the back second light guide plate 3160 emit light, the color of the light emitting regions already displayed may be changed (for example, the first light emitting region A and the seventh light emitting region When the region G was luminescently displayed, it emitted white light. red light emission, etc.), thereby not only whether or not the next light emitting region expands until substantially all the light emitting regions of the back second light guide plate 3160 are displayed light emitting, but also whether the color of the light emitting region changes. You can expect change.

As another example, when substantially all of the light-emitting regions of the back second light guide plate 3160 are light-emitting displayed, light-emitting display may be performed in a light-emitting color corresponding to the display mode after the post-digestion hold display is changed. . For example, when substantially all of the light emitting regions of the back second light guide plate 3160 are illuminated in red, the display mode of the post-digestion suspension display is changed by changing the display mode of the post-digestion suspension display to red. Before that, it becomes possible to grasp the display mode after the change.

Also, as another example, the light guide effect of causing the back second light guide plate 3160 to emit light to display the fifth pattern 3161 may be performed not as a hold change suggesting effect but as a effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit. For example, after the start of the light guide effect, the more the luminous area displayed in the back second light guide plate 3160 increases, the higher the expectation of the big win is, and furthermore, substantially all the luminescence of the back second light guide plate 3160 When an area is displayed with light emission, the more the light emission color of the light emission area is displayed, the higher the expectation of the big win is, so that the light guide performance is expected to be noticed. be able to. In the case of such another example, the screen display of the effect display device 1600 that can be visually recognized through the light-emitting area that is not light-emitting, for example, "the effect display in which the enemy character is gradually crushed" is displayed on the back second light guide plate. Combination display may be performed according to 3160 luminous display and non-luminous areas. In this way, by displaying a special effect image in accordance with the expansion of the light emitting area of the back second light guide plate 3160, it is possible to further enhance the light guide effect in which the fifth pattern 3161 is displayed by light emission in stages. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the luminous area displayed in the rear second light guide plate 3160 is enlarged every time a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) elapses. After an instruction image such as "press the button!" For example, when it is determined to expand the luminous area displayed in the back second light guide plate 3160 as a suggestive effect pattern, the player presses the pressing operation unit 303 to expand the luminous area. is expanded, and when it is determined not to expand the light emitting area displayed by light emission on the back second light guide plate 3160, even if the player presses the pressing operation unit 303, the light emitting area is not enlarged. . In this way, unless the player presses the pressing operation portion 303, the luminous area that is illuminated and displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160 is not enlarged. This makes it possible to further enhance the light guide performance in which the fifth pattern 3161 is displayed by light emission on the back second light guide plate 3160 in stages.

As described above, in the light guide effect in which the fifth pattern 3161 is displayed by light emission on the back second light guide plate 3160, after the light emission display of the light emission regions excluding the fourth light emission region D, the predetermined condition is satisfied (elapsed of the predetermined time). of the fifth pattern 3161, by luminous display of the fourth luminous area D, which is smaller than the luminous area. In this way, even though substantially all of the light-emitting regions of the back second light guide plate 3160 are configured to perform light-emitting display, substantially all of the light-emitting regions do not suddenly display light-emitting regions, except for the fourth light-emitting region D. Since the light-emitting area can be light-emitting and displayed first, attention can be drawn to the characters "Chance!" can be made

In addition, in the light guide effect of displaying the fifth pattern 3161 on the back second light guide plate 3160, the first light emitting region A and the seventh light emitting region G, and the The second light-emitting region B and the sixth light-emitting region F, and the third light-emitting region C and the fifth light-emitting region E are sequentially light-emitting. In this way, before the fourth light-emitting region D is light-emitting and displayed, the light-emitting regions other than the fourth light-emitting region D can be light-emitting and displayed so as to increase step by step. Even a player who pays attention to the display can smoothly transition to visually recognizing the light emitting display of the rear second light guide plate 3160 positioned in front of the player, so that the player does not feel stress. can. In addition, before the fourth light-emitting region D is light-emission-displayed, whether the light-emission-display is performed so that the light-emission regions other than the fourth light-emission region D increase stepwise, that is, the fourth light-emission region D is light-emitted. They can be looked forward with anticipation to see if they get the chance to display.

Next, a specific effect example in the case where the light guide effect of causing the back second light guide plate 3160 to emit light to display the fifth pattern 3161 will be described with reference to FIG. 204 .

First, when a command related to the variation pattern is transmitted from the main control board 1310 side to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the screen of the effect display device 1600 starts the variable display of decorative symbols (Fig. 204(A)). At this time, the post-retention display related to the variable display of the decorative pattern is illuminated on the back side effect unit 3500 (decorative body main body 3511 of the back side movable decorative body 3510) based on the retention change pattern.

Then, when a hold change pattern in which the hold display changes after digestion is determined, and as a hold change suggestive effect, a suggestive effect pattern in which substantially all the light emitting areas of the back second light guide plate 3160 are light-emitting is determined. In this case, the light guide plate LEDs 3171a corresponding to the first light emitting region A and the seventh light emitting region G of substantially all the light emitting regions of the rear second light guide plate 3160 are caused to emit white light. The first light-emitting region A and the seventh light-emitting region G are displayed in white (FIG. 204(B)). Further, after the light emission display of the first light emitting region A and the seventh light emitting region G, the light guide plate LEDs 3171a corresponding to the second light emitting region B and the sixth light emitting region F based on establishment of a predetermined condition (elapse of a predetermined time) is emitted in white, and the second emission region B and the sixth emission region F are displayed in white, and then, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the passage of a predetermined time), the third emission region C and the fifth emission region E By causing the light guide plate LEDs 3171a corresponding to , to emit white light, the third light emitting region C and the fifth light emitting region E are displayed to emit light in white. In this way, the luminous area luminous-displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160 increases step by step, so that the screen display of the effect display device 1600 that the player can visually recognize decreases step by step.

After the light emission display of the light emitting regions excluding the fourth light emitting region D, the light guide plate LED 3171a corresponding to the fourth light emitting region D is caused to emit light based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (elapse of the predetermined time). The characters "Chance!" of the fifth pattern 3161 are displayed in the fourth light emitting area D by light emission (Fig. 204(C)). As a result, substantially all of the light emitting regions of the back second light guide plate 3160 are displayed by light emission. , rainbow colors, and the like.

In addition, when substantially all of the light emitting areas of the back second light guide plate 3160 are illuminated, substantially all of the screen display of the effect display device 1600 located on the rear side is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the effect display. On the screen of the device 1600, at a position on the rear side of the characters "Chance!" . In this way, by using the screen display of the effect display device 1600 to assist the characters "Chance!" of the fifth pattern 3161 luminescently displayed in the fourth luminous area D, the characters can be highlighted. It is possible to improve the visibility of the light-emitting display. Further, due to failure of the light guide plate LED 3171a corresponding to the fourth light emitting area D, the letters "Chance!" Even if there is not, by visually recognizing the screen display of the effect display device 1600, it is possible to recognize that there is a chance to change the post-digestion pending display.

Then, substantially all light emitting regions of the back second light guide plate 3160 are displayed by light emission, and after the above-mentioned predetermined light-off time has passed, all of the light guide plate LEDs 3171a are turned off, and light emission display for substantially all light emitting regions is completed. In contrast, on the screen of the effect display device 1600, the characters "Chance!" Approximately the same screen display is continuously displayed (FIG. 204(D)). In this way, even after the light guide effect of causing the fifth pattern 3161 to emit light on the back second light guide plate 3160 is completed, substantially the same characters as the characters "Chance!" By continuously displaying the screen display, the player who pays attention to the light emitting display of the back second light guide plate 3160 can smoothly transition to visually confirming the screen display of the effect display device 1600 located on the rear side. It can be visually recognized without a sense of incongruity even when proceeding to the subsequent performance. In addition, when the fifth pattern 3161 is displayed by light emission on the back second light guide plate 3160, the back and bottom effect unit The post-digestion holding display related to the variable display of the decorative pattern displayed in light emission on 3500 (decorative main body 3511 of the back movable decorative body 3510) is changed based on the holding change pattern, and the decorative pattern is changed. He is trying to suggest the big-hit expectation with respect to a display.

[16-2. Light guide production using multiple light guide plates and movable decorations]
Next, on the front side of the effect display device 1600, a front light guide plate 2610 and a back first light guide plate 3210 are arranged in order from the front side in the front-rear direction (depth direction) as a plurality of light guide plates each capable of emitting light to display a pattern. , and a back second light guide plate 3160 are provided. As the movable decorations, a decoration body 3321 of the back right movable decoration 3320 in the back right movable production unit 3310, a decoration body 3411 of the back up movable decoration 3410 in the back up production unit 3400, and a back rear movable production unit A decoration main body 3121 of the rear back movable decoration 3120 in 3110 and a decoration main body 3511 of the back lower movable decoration 3510 in the back lower production unit 3500 are provided. A light guide effect using these multiple light guide plates and multiple movable decorations will be described with reference to FIGS. 205 to 207. FIG.

FIG. 205 shows a side cross-sectional view for explaining the positional relationship among the effect display device 1600, the plurality of light guide plates, and the plurality of movable decorations. As shown in FIG. 205, a front light guide plate 2610 , a back first light guide plate 3210 , and a back second light guide plate 3160 are provided on the front side of the effect display device 1600 .

In addition, between the front light guide plate 2610 and the back first light guide plate 3210, there are a decoration main body 3321 of a back right movable decorative body 3320 in the back right movable effect unit 3310 and a back upward movable decorative body in the back upward effect unit 3400. A decoration body main body 3411 of 3410 and a decoration body main body 3511 of the back bottom movable decoration body 3510 in the back bottom effect unit 3500 are provided. Then, the decoration main body 3321 of the back right movable decoration 3320 is positioned from above between the front light guide plate 2610 and the back first light guide plate 3210 so as to be positioned on the front side of the effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing. Appearance is possible (see FIG. 155). In addition, the decoration main body 3411 of the back upper movable decoration 3410 is positioned from above between the front light guide plate 2610 and the back first light guide plate 3210 so as to be positioned on the front side of the effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing. Although it is possible to appear, when it appears at the same time as the decoration main body 3321 of the back right movable decoration 3320, it is positioned behind the decoration main body 3321 of the back right movable decoration 3320 (Fig. 159). In addition, the decoration main body 3511 of the back lower movable decoration 3510 is positioned from above between the front light guide plate 2610 and the back first light guide plate 3210 so as to be positioned on the front side of the effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing. Appearance is possible (see FIG. 158).

Also, between the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160, a decoration main body 3121 of the back rear movable decoration 3120 in the back rear movable effect unit 3110 is provided. Then, the decoration main body 3121 of the back rear movable decoration 3120 is positioned between the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160 at a predetermined timing so as to be positioned on the front side of the effect display device 1600. It can appear from above (see FIG. 153).

By the way, the light guide effect using a plurality of light guide plates and a plurality of movable decorations is part of the hold change suggestion effect that suggests the possibility that the display mode of the hold display will change as described above. is performed in combination with Specifically, in the present embodiment, as the suspension notice effect, during the display period of the suspension display (pre-digestion suspension display, post-digestion suspension display), the variable display of the decorative pattern (variable display of the special symbol) is started (started) Each time the condition is satisfied, the display mode of the pending display can be changed based on the pending change pattern. Then, the post-digestion pending display related to the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed by emitting light from the LED mounted on the underside movable decorative body decoration board 3512. main body 3511), but at the timing when the display mode of the post-digestion hold display changes, a light guide effect is performed using a plurality of light guide plates and a plurality of movable decorations, and the post-digestion hold display is performed. It suggests the possibility that the display mode will change.

As a plurality of movable decorations, a decoration main body 3321 of the back right movable decoration 3320 in the back right movable production unit 3310, a decoration main body 3411 of the back up movable decoration 3410 in the back up production unit 3400, and a back rear movable production. When a suggestive effect pattern is executed in which the decoration body 3121 of the back-rear movable decoration 3120 in the unit 3110 and the decoration body 3321 of the back-right movable decoration 3320 can appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600. will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206 is a timing chart showing the light emitting states of a plurality of light guide plates and the operation state of the decoration main body 3321 of the back-right movable decoration 3320. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 206, first, on the screen of the effect display device 1600, an instruction image such as "Press the button!" . Then, the second pattern 2622 (see FIG. 126) is displayed on the front light guide plate 2610 by the LED mounted on the second pattern board 2612 . In addition, when the second pattern 2622 is displayed by light emission on the front light guide plate 2610, the back rear effect unit 3100, the back middle effect unit 3200, the back right effect unit 3300, the back upper effect unit 3400, and the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 are displayed. By performing the light emission effect of the effect unit 3600 and the like (see FIG. 127), not only the front light guide plate 2610 but also the decorative pattern of the game panel 1100 on the game board 5 provided around it is light-embellished. . Furthermore, the decoration pattern of the game panel 1100 is the same color as the second pattern 2622 displayed on the front light guide plate 2610, and is decorated with light for the same period. As the decorative pattern of the game panel 1100, a decoration that can be integrated with the second pattern 2622 displayed by light emission on the front light guide plate 2610, which is provided on the front side of the plurality of light guide plates, is applied. , both the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100 emit light of the same color for the same period of time, so that a continuous light emitting decoration can be realized. Thus, at the start of the light guide performance, the entire game board 5 is decorated with light emission, which can give a great impact to the player and make the player pay attention to the subsequent progress of the performance.

In addition, when the player presses the pressing operation part 303 and proceeds to the subsequent performance, the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern of the game panel 1100 on the game board 5 is finished, and the third The player can concentrate on the luminous display of the pattern 3211 and the luminous display of the sixth pattern 3162 on the back second light guide plate 3160, so that he can pay attention to whether or not the hold display changes after digestion. In addition, other than the light guide effect in this example of effect, either the front light guide plate 2610 or the game panel 1100 is displayed in a light emitting manner. Effect of luminous display of the second pattern 2622, luminous decoration of the decorative pattern of the game panel 1100 without luminous display of the second pattern 2622 on the front light guide plate 2610, and mere luminous decoration of the decorative pattern of the game panel 1100 during normal operation. , can also be executed.

When the player presses the pressing operation portion 303, whether or not to proceed to the subsequent presentation depends on whether or not it is determined that the post-digestion hold display is to be changed. That is, when it is determined that the post-digestion pending display does not change, even if the player presses the pressing operation unit 303, the decoration main body 3321 of the back-right movable decoration 3320 does not move to the effect display device 1600. It does not appear on the front side, so that the pending display does not change after digestion.

When the player does not press the pressing operation portion 303, the decoration main body 3321 of the back-right movable decoration 3320 does not appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600, but after that, the post-digestion hold display is displayed. If it is determined to change, the post-digestion reserved display using the decoration main body 3511 of the underside movable decoration 3510 is changed, and if it is determined that the post-digestion reserved display does not change. , so that the pending display does not change after digestion. In this manner, whether or not the player presses the pressing operation section 303 determines whether or not the subsequent performance proceeds, thereby encouraging the player to participate in the light guide performance. can be done.

On the other hand, when the player presses the pressing operation section 303 and it is determined that the post-digestion hold display will change, first, the decoration main body 3321 of the back-right movable decoration 3320 is moved to the effect display device. Make it appear on the front side of 1600. Triggered by the emergence of the decoration body main body 3321 of the back right movable decoration body 3320, the second pattern 2622 is displayed on the front light guide plate 2610 by light emission, and the rear first position located on the rear surface side of the front light guide plate 2610 is changed. The light guide plate 3210 is switched to a state in which the third pattern 3211 is displayed by light emission. That is, the light emission display of the second pattern 2622 on the front light guide plate 2610 is finished, and the third pattern 3211 (see FIG. 143) is emitted on the back first light guide plate 3210 by the LED mounted on the third pattern substrate 3221. display. Then, continuously, from the state where the third pattern 3211 is illuminated on the back first light guide plate 3210, the sixth pattern 3162 is emitted on the back second light guide plate 3160 located on the rear surface side of the back first light guide plate 3210. Switch to the displayed state. That is, the light emitting display of the third pattern 3211 on the rear first light guide plate 3210 is finished, and the sixth pattern 3162 is displayed on the rear second light guide plate 3160 by the LED mounted on the sixth pattern substrate 3172 (see FIG. 141). illuminate.

In this way, with the appearance of the decoration main body 3321 of the back-right movable decoration 3320 as a trigger, the second pattern 2622 is displayed on the front light guide plate 2610, and the back side located on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610 is displayed. After switching in order to the state in which the first light guide plate 3210 is illuminated with the third pattern 3211 and the state in which the sixth pattern 3162 is illuminated on the back second light guide plate 3160 located on the rear side of the back first light guide plate 3210, , the decoration main body 3511 of the back-lower movable decoration 3510 is caused to appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600, and the post-digestion hold display that is light-emitting and displayed on the decoration main body 3511 of the back-lower movable decoration 3510 is changed to a hold change. It is made to change based on the pattern, and suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit with respect to the variable display of the decorative pattern. Further, when the decoration main body 3511 of the back lower movable decoration 3510 appears on the front side of the effect display device 1600, the light emitting display of the sixth pattern 3162 on the back second light guide plate 3160 is terminated.

In the above, when the player presses the pressing operation unit 303, the decoration main body 3321 of the back-right movable decoration 3320 among the plurality of movable decorations can appear on the front side of the production display device 1600. Although the case where the pattern is executed has been described, the decorative body main body 3411 of the back upper movable decorative body 3410, the decorative body main body 3121 of the back rear movable decorative body 3120, or a plurality of them appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600. Possible suggestive production patterns are also provided. Specifically, in addition to the suggestive production pattern in which the decoration body 3321 of the back-right movable decoration 3320 may appear, the suggestive production pattern in which the decoration body 3411 of the back-upward movable decoration 3410 may appear, and the back-right movable decoration. A suggestive production pattern in which both the decorative main body 3321 of the body 3320 and the decorative main body 3411 of the back upper movable decorative body 3410 can appear, and a suggestive production pattern in which the decorative main body 3121 of the rear movable decorative body 3120 can appear are provided. ing. The timing at which these movable decorations appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600 is the same as the timing at which the decoration main body 3321 of the back-right movable decoration 3320 described above appears.

In addition, the decoration main body 3321 of the back right movable decoration 3320 appears, the decoration main body 3411 of the back upper movable decoration 3410 appears, the decoration main body 3321 of the back right movable decoration 3320 and the back upper movable decoration 3410 appear. It is suggested that, in the order of the appearance of all decoration bodies 3411 and the appearance of the decoration bodies 3121 of the back-rear movable decoration 3120, the degree of expectation that the post-digestion holding display will change to a display mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit will increase. The performance pattern is determined. That is, for example, when the decoration body 3321 of the back-right movable decoration body 3320 appears when the player presses the pressing operation part 303, the after-digestion hold display is a display mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. However, when the decorative body main body 3121 of the rear movable decorative body 3120 appears, there is a high probability that the post-digestion hold display will change to a display mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. It's becoming As a result, when the player presses the pressing operation section 303, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which one of the plurality of movable decorations will appear. As another example, the order of the movable decorations that can appear on the front side of the performance display device 1600 may be used as an indication of the degree of expectation for a big hit.

At the start of the light guide effect, both the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100 emit light of the same color for the same period, and the light emission colors are white, blue, red, and multicolor. The suggestive performance pattern is determined in the order of colors so that the degree of expectation that the post-digestion holding display changes to a display mode with a high degree of expectation for a big win increases. That is, for example, when the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100 are displayed in white, the probability that the post-digestion hold display changes to a display mode with a high expectation of a big win is low, whereas the front light guide plate 2610 and When the game panel 1100 is illuminated in red, there is a high probability that the post-consumption pending display will change to a display mode with a high expectation of a big hit. As a result, when the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100 are luminescently displayed at the start of the light guide effect, the luminescent color plays a role of prior suggestion, and these areas are luminescently displayed in the highly anticipated luminescent color. It can also attract attention. With the appearance of the decoration main body 3321 of the back right movable decoration 3320 as a trigger, the second pattern 2622 is displayed on the front light guide plate 2610, and the third pattern 3211 is emitted on the back first light guide plate 3210. In the process of sequentially switching to the displayed state and the state in which the sixth pattern 3162 is luminescently displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160, the luminescent colors of the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100 that have already been luminescently displayed are continued. . However, in this process, the luminescent colors of the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100 that have already been luminescently displayed may be changed (for example, when the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100 are luminescently displayed, the luminescent color is white. However, when the rear first light guide plate 3210 is subsequently luminous-displayed, red light is emitted, etc.). You can expect change.

As another example, when the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100 are luminescently displayed at the start of the light guide effect, they are luminescently displayed in a luminescent color corresponding to the display mode after the post-digestion hold display is changed. good too. For example, when front light guide plate 2610 and game panel 1100 are illuminated in red, by changing the display mode of post-digestion suspension display to red, before the display mode of post-digestion suspension display changes , the display mode after the change can be grasped.

As described above, in the light guide effect using a plurality of light guide plates and a plurality of movable decorations, after the second pattern 2622 is displayed by light emission on the front light guide plate 2610, for example, the decoration main body 3321 of the back right movable decoration 3320 appears on the front side of the effect display device 1600, the state in which the third pattern 3211 is light-emitting on the first back light guide plate 3210, the state in which the sixth pattern 3162 is light-emitting on the second back light guide plate 3160, are switched in order. That is, since the decoration main body 3321 of the back right movable decoration 3320 is provided between the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160, the decoration main body 3321 of the back right movable decoration 3320 is straddled. Then, the state where the second pattern 2622 is displayed on the front light guide plate 2610 is switched to the state where the third pattern 3211 is displayed on the rear first light guide plate 3210 by light emission. As a result, when the second pattern 2622 is displayed by light emission on the front light guide plate 2610, the decoration main body 3321 of the back right movable decoration 3320 can be visually recognized through the front light guide plate 2610. When the luminous display of the second pattern 2622 on the front light guide plate 2610 is finished, the decoration main body 3321 of the rear right movable decorative body 3320 located on the rear surface side of the front light guide plate 2610 and the rear first light guide plate 3210 luminous display of the second pattern 2622 Since the three patterns 3211 are switched to a state in which the three patterns 3211 can be clearly visually recognized, the rear surface side of the front light guide plate 2610 is gradually revealed, which is a novel effect, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

By the way, as described above, the decorative body main body 3321 of the back-right movable decorative body 3320 is formed in a shape that imitates a hatchet. and The machete blade on the lower side is painted silver. In addition, the decoration main body 3321 is formed with a crack pattern decoration that spreads radially around the central part in the vertical direction near the tip. Then, the back-right movable decoration 3320 can be decorated by lighting the center LED 3323a of the back-right movable decoration decoration substrate 3323 so that the central part of the crack pattern of the decoration main body 3321 shines. By illuminating the peripheral LEDs 3323b of the right movable decorative body decoration substrate 3323, the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3321 and the crack pattern can be decorated with light emission.

In addition, the decoration main body 3321 has a transparent area indicated by diagonal lines in FIG. 207 . That is, the decoration main body 3321 is surrounded by an area in which the crack pattern decoration is formed in the upper half part in the vertical direction and an area in which the machete blade is formed in the lower side. The lower half portion is formed transparent. For this reason, in the light guide effect using a plurality of light guide plates and a plurality of movable decorations, for example, when the decoration main body 3321 of the back right movable decoration 3320 appears on the front side of the effect display device 1600, decoration is performed. When the third pattern 3211 is luminously displayed on the back first light guide plate 3210 positioned on the rear surface side of the body main body 3321, the luminous display is performed on the back first light guide plate 3210 through the transmission region formed in the decorative body main body 3321. It is possible to visually recognize the third pattern 3211 that is on. In addition, at the stage where the decoration main body 3321 of the rear right movable decoration 3320 appears on the front side of the effect display device 1600, light emission is displayed on the rear first light guide plate 3210 through the area where the decoration main body 3321 is not positioned. It is possible to visually recognize the third pattern 3211 that is on. In this way, not only the area where the decoration main body 3321 of the back-right movable decoration 3320 is not located, but also the transmission area formed in the decoration main body 3321 passes through the rear surface side of the decoration main body 3321. By making the third pattern 3211 luminescently displayed on the one light guide plate 3210 visible, the front-rear relationship between the third pattern 3211 luminescently displayed on the back first light guide plate 3210 and the decoration body 3321 is emphasized, A performance with a three-dimensional effect can be realized.

Further, in a light guide effect using a plurality of light guide plates and a plurality of movable decorations, for example, when the decoration main body 3321 of the back right movable decoration 3320 appears on the front side of the effect display device 1600, the back right movable decoration By appropriately lighting the central LED 3323a of the body decoration board 3323, the central part of the crack pattern of the decoration main body 3321 is lit up, and by lighting the peripheral LED 3323b of the back-right movable decorative body decoration board 3323, The outer edge and crack pattern of the decoration main body 3321 are decorated with light emission. Therefore, when the second pattern 2622 is luminously displayed on the front light guide plate 2610, the luminous display of the second pattern 2622, the luminous decoration of the decoration main body 3321 located on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610, overlap in a visible state, and at the stage where the third pattern 3211 is displayed on the back first light guide plate 3210 by light emission, the light emission display of the third pattern 3211 and the front side of the back first light guide plate 3210 The luminous decoration of the decorative body main body 3321 positioned thereover overlaps in a visually recognizable state. In this way, the light emission display of the second pattern 2622 on the front light guide plate 2610, the light emission decoration of the decorative body main body 3321, and the light emission display of the third pattern 3211 on the back first light guide plate 3210 are superimposed on each other. can be visually recognized in multiple layers, and it is possible to realize an effect with a sense of depth.

A front light guide plate 2610, a back first light guide plate 3210, and a back second light guide plate 3160 are provided in order from the front side in the front-rear direction (depth direction) on the front side of the effect display device 1600. However, even if light emission is displayed on these light guide plates, the screen of the effect display device 1600 positioned on the rear side can be visually recognized through the light guide plates. Similarly, on the front side of the effect display device 1600, there are a decoration main body 3321 of the back right movable decoration 3320, a decoration main body 3411 of the back upper movable decoration 3410, and a decoration main body 3121 of the back rear movable decoration 3120. , and the decoration main body 3511 of the back and bottom movable decoration 3510 are provided so that they can appear. Through the screen, the screen of the effect display device 1600 positioned on the rear side can be visually recognized. Then, on the screen of the effect display device 1600, by displaying an image related to the light emission display for the plurality of light guide plates and the light emission decoration for the plurality of movable decorations, the plurality of light guide plates and the plurality of movable decorations can be used. It will be possible to assist the light guide production that was used.

Further, in the light guide effect using a plurality of light guide plates and a plurality of movable decorations, after the second pattern 2622 is light-emitting displayed on the front light guide plate 2610, for example, the decoration main body 3321 of the back-right movable decoration 3320 performs the effect display. Triggered by the appearance on the front side of the device 1600, the state in which the third pattern 3211 is displayed on the back first light guide plate 3210 and the state in which the sixth pattern 3162 is displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160 are switched in order. ing. That is, in such a light guide presentation, light emission display is performed on the plurality of light guide plates and light emission decoration is performed on the movable decorations in order from the front side in the front-rear direction (depth direction). As a result, it is possible to smoothly shift the visual recognition to the luminescence display of the light guide plate which is switched one after another, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling stress. In addition, in the light guide effect, it is possible to make the user pay attention with anticipation to whether or not the display can be switched to the light-emitting display of the light guide plate located on the rear side.

Further, in the light guide effect using a plurality of light guide plates and a plurality of movable decorations, for example, when the decoration main body 3321 of the back-right movable decoration 3320 appears, the second pattern 2622 is applied to the front light guide plate 2610. After switching in order to a luminous display state, a luminous display state of the third pattern 3211 on the first back light guide plate 3210, and a state of luminous display of the sixth pattern 3162 on the second back light guide plate 3160, the back bottom movable decorative body The post-digestion pending display displayed by light emission on the decoration main body 3511 of 3510 is changed. In addition, as the plurality of movable decorations, the decoration main body 3321 of the back right movable decoration 3320, the decoration main body 3411 of the back upper movable decoration 3410, and the decoration main body 3121 of the back rear movable decoration 3120 are all displayed. When appearing on the front side of the device 1600, the back side movable decoration 3510 on which the post-digestion reservation display is light-emitting is operated toward the decoration main body 3511, and these movable decorations move toward the post-digestion reservation display. By acting as a As a result, in the light guide effect, it is determined whether or not any of the plurality of movable decorations operates before the post-extinguishing hold display displayed by light emission on the decoration main body 3511 of the back movable decoration 3510 changes. can be brought to attention with expectation.

[17. jackpot games]
[17-1: Another example of game area]
An example of the jackpot game of the present embodiment will be described below. FIG. 209 is a front view showing another example of a game board in a pachinko machine, showing the inside of a game area in which game balls circulate with the game panel made opaque. Differences from FIG. 107 will be described.

In the game area 5a, instead of the gate part 2003, a normal figure start opening 2010, which is a start opening for starting a normal lottery, is provided. When the game ball B hit to the right wins the normal figure start opening 2010, the normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 From the payout device 580, the big winning opening A predetermined number of game balls (for example, 1, 2 or 3) smaller than the number of game balls won in 2005 are paid out to the upper tray 201 .

In addition, the processing by the CPU of the main control MPU and the peripheral control IC 1510a when the game ball B has entered the normal figure start port 2010 is the game ball B entering the gate unit 2003 except for the above-described game ball payout. This is the same as the processing by the main control MPU and the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the case.

In addition, the game area 5a is further provided with a jackpot start gate unit 2009 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. As shown in FIG. The jackpot start gate portion 2009 is arranged in the vicinity of the right end in the front view in the game area 5a and substantially in the center in the vertical direction. As will be described later, when the game ball B passes through the jackpot start gate portion 2009 in the jackpot start gate portion valid state, a jackpot game is started. In order to make a smooth transition to the big win game in the big win start gate part valid state, the big win start gate part 2009 has various winning openings and out openings 1008 on the path along which the game ball B in the game area 5a flows and on the path. It is desirable to be arranged in a more advanced position (that is, upstream from the various prize-winning openings and the out-opening 1008).

[17-2: Another example of control configuration]
FIG. 210 shows another example of a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. Differences from FIG. 171 will be described. The main control board 1310 is connected to the normal pattern starting port sensor 3005 for detecting the game ball B received in the normal pattern starting port 2010 instead of the gate sensor 2401 . In addition, the main control board 1310 is connected to a jackpot start gate sensor 3004 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the jackpot start gate section 2009 . Detection signals from the jackpot start gate sensor 3004 and the normal pattern start gate sensor 3005 are respectively input to the main control I/O port via the main control input circuit. Further, in the present embodiment, for example, non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used for the jackpot start gate sensor 3004 and the normal pattern start gate sensor 3005 .

[17-3. Another example of jackpot determination processing]
First, another example of the big-hit determination process will be described with respect to differences from the big-hit determination process of FIG. 182 . If the big hit flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process in step S122 with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. By doing so (step S122), the type of the big hit is determined, and the mode (stop design of the first special symbol) at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined kind of the big hit is determined (step S123). ). In addition, in step S122 for the second symbol random number, if the big hit flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU is the second symbol random number read in step S102 of the second special symbol normal process and FIG. 211 ( It is compared with the symbol determination table shown in B). The symbol determination table is stored, for example, in the ROM of the main control MPU.

As shown in FIGS. 211(A) and 211(B), the symbol determination table shows the correspondence between the jackpot type, distribution, and the time until the jackpot start gate section is enabled in each special random number. The "time until the jackpot start gate section becomes effective" is the time from when the jackpot pattern stops appearing on the pattern display until the jackpot start gate section 2009 becomes effective. is set as the waiting time set in the interval timer. It should be noted that the trigger for turning the jackpot start gate unit 2009 from the valid state to the invalid state is only the start of the jackpot game and the operation of the RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 .

[17-4. Another example of jackpot control processing]
Regarding the jackpot control processing of this chapter, differences from the above description using FIGS. 186 to 188 will be described. The main control MPU activates the jackpot start gate unit 2009 after the standby time set in the interval timer in step S401 has elapsed. When the game ball B passes through the jackpot start gate portion 2009 in the enabled state, the main control MPU refers to the round distribution table shown in FIG. A mouth opening pattern is determined, and the state is shifted to a jackpot game state. In addition, there may be an interval of a predetermined time (for example, 0.008 seconds) from when the game ball B passes through the jackpot start gate section 2009 to when the jackpot game starts (opening of the jackpot for the first time).

The round allocation table in FIG. 212 shows, for example, the correspondence between the jackpot type, the number of rounds, the allocation, and the big winning opening opening pattern. The operation schedule of the big winning opening 2005 in each round of each big winning opening opening pattern is described in the big winning opening opening pattern table shown in FIG. Incidentally, the round distribution table and the big winning opening pattern table are stored, for example, in the ROM of the main control MPU.

For example, when the "6R time-saving pattern 1" stops as the first special symbol, the jackpot start gate unit 2009 becomes effective 5.000 seconds after the stop, and the game ball B hits the jackpot start gate unit in the effective state. After passing through 2009, the main control MPU refers to the round distribution table, and shifts to the jackpot game state of the number of rounds 6 and the big winning opening opening pattern A corresponding to "6R time saving pattern 1".

An example of an operation schedule in the big winning opening opening pattern of FIG. 213 will be described. In the example of FIG. 213, there are operation schedules a to e as operation schedules for the large winning opening 2005 for each round in the large winning opening opening pattern.

In the operation schedule a, the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.000 seconds) and then closed for a predetermined time (for example, 2.000 seconds). In the operation schedule b, the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a short period of time (for example 1.840 seconds) and then closed for a predetermined time (for example 2.000 seconds). In the operation schedule c, the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example 1.840 seconds) and then closed for a predetermined time (for example 2.000 seconds). In the operation schedule d, the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (2.000 seconds) and then closed for a predetermined time (for example, 2.000 seconds). In the operation schedule e, the big prize winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (eg 1.840 seconds), closed for a predetermined time (eg 2.000 seconds), and opened for a long time (eg 25.000 seconds) and then opened for a predetermined time ( 2.000 seconds) to close.

It should be noted that the time when a predetermined time (for example, 8.000 seconds) has elapsed since the opening of the large winning opening in the operation schedule b and operation schedule e is the timing for setting the valid state flag in step S420 (that is, the game ball B is placed in the second receiving port 2008). It is the timing to be in a state to be controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state by being accepted. The timing for resetting the valid state flag is when a predetermined time has elapsed since the valid state flag was set, or when the round in which the valid state flag was set ends.

In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 8.000 seconds) has passed since the opening of the large winning opening in the operation schedule b and operation schedule e (that is, the timing of setting the valid state flag), the main control MPU is the second reception opening of step S436 2008 to open state. The main control MPU closes the second reception port 2008 in step S434 when a predetermined time has passed since the second reception port 2008 was opened, or when the round in which the second reception port 2008 was opened has ended. Execute the process to control the

Therefore, in the round in which the big winning hole 2005 is opened according to the operation schedule e, if the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a so as to circulate on the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit), the jackpot game state. can be shifted to a high-probability state after the end of That is, the player has "6R time saving pattern 3", "6R time saving pattern 4", "16R time saving pattern 5", "4R time saving pattern 1", "4R time saving pattern 2", and "16R time saving pattern". In the jackpot game state corresponding to "pattern 3" and "pattern 4 with 16R short working hours", by continuously executing "right-handed", the state is shifted to a high-probability state after the jackpot game state is finished with an extremely high probability. can be done.

In addition, the time saving flag in the description of FIG. 187 may exist in a plurality of types. For example, there may be a time saving flag A corresponding to a time saving state with a large number of continuations (for example, 130 times) and a time saving flag B corresponding to a time saving state with a small number of times of continuation of the time saving state (for example, 100 times). For example, the main control MPU, in step S425, when it is determined that the second reception port passage flag is set, sets the high probability flag and the time saving flag A in step S426, the second reception port passage flag If it is determined that it is not set, only the time saving flag B is set in step S426.

Also, in FIG. 187, after all rounds are completed, an example of setting the time saving flag and the high probability flag is explained, but the main control MPU is the round in which the operation schedule b and the operation schedule e are implemented (that is The processing of steps S425 to S427 may be executed at the end of the round in which the second receiving port 2008 is controlled to be open.

Further, the main control MPU may set the time saving flag A and the high probability flag in advance at the start of the jackpot game. In this case, when the main control MPU determines that the second reception port passage flag is set in step S425, the processing of step S426 is not executed, and the second reception port passage flag is set in step S425. If it is determined that it is not, the time saving flag A and the high probability flag are reset and the time saving flag B is set in step S426.

Further, the main control MPU may set the time saving flag B at the start of the jackpot game. In this case, when the main control MPU determines that the second reception port passage flag is set in step S425, it resets the time saving flag B in step S426 and sets the time saving flag A and the high probability flag. If it is determined in step S425 that the flag for passage through the second receiving port is not set, the process of step S426 is not executed.

[17-5: Jackpot game]
The jackpot game of this chapter will be described below. When the game ball B wins in the regular pattern starting hole, a predetermined number (for example, 1, 2, or 3) of game balls less than those in the big win hole 2005 are paid out.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a receives the jackpot start command, it displays on the effect display device 1600 a display indicating that the jackpot game has been won. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays a display prompting a predetermined operation on the effect display device 1600 when the standby time set in the interval timer in step S401 elapses (that is, when the jackpot start gate unit 2009 becomes valid). . Specifically, for example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a display prompting so-called right-handed hitting in order to enter the game ball B into the big-hit start gate portion 2009 and start the big-hit game.

It should be noted that the jackpot start gate portion 2009 is in a valid state, and before the game ball B enters the jackpot start gate portion 2009, when the operation of the operation portion such as the pressing operation portion 303 is detected, the peripheral control IC 1510a The CPU may execute an effect suggesting the number of rounds determined by the round distribution table after the game ball B enters the jackpot start gate section 2009 . It is preferable that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not execute an effect prompting the user to operate the operation unit for executing an effect suggesting the number of rounds. If the effect prompting the operation of the operation part is executed, the player may give priority to the operation of the operation part over the execution of the right-hand shot by operating the handle 182, which may lead to a delay in the progress of the game. It is from. In other words, it is desirable that the presentation prompting the user to operate the operating unit is a hidden presentation.

In addition, in the sorting pattern table of FIG. 212, the symbol type and the number of rounds are in a one-to-one correspondence. In such a case, even if the jackpot start gate section 2009 is in an effective state and the number of rounds is not determined before the game ball B enters the jackpot start gate section 2009, the type of the jackpot pattern. The number of rounds may be specified by In such a case, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a executes an effect to prompt the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect indicating the number of rounds described above, and when the operation unit is operated, a jackpot symbol is displayed. Suggestion of the number of rounds corresponding to the type on a one-to-one basis and confirmation display (for example, 16R confirmation effect, etc.) may be performed.

In addition, when the jackpot start gate portion 2009 is in a valid state and the operation of the operation portion such as the pressing operation portion 303 is detected before the game ball B enters the jackpot start gate portion 2009, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may enable selection of music during the jackpot game, or enable change of the image displayed on the performance display device 1600 during the jackpot game. In addition, when the game ball B wins in one of the starting holes when the jackpot start gate section 2009 is in an active state, it is preferable that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not output the starting hole winning sound. When the jackpot start gate part 2009 is in an effective state, the game ball B entering the jackpot start gate part 2009 should be prioritized over winning the game ball B in one of the start ports. This is to clearly communicate

Also, when the game ball passes through the jackpot start gate portion 2009, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may display on the effect display device 1600 a display indicating the number of rounds determined by the round allocation table. The display may be a display indicating a specific number of rounds, or may be an effect indicating the number of balls released, such as "big win" or "big win".

For example, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a wins a "super-jackpot" with a large number of balls, the CPU once executes an effect indicating a "big-win" with a small number of balls, and then executes a promotion effect indicating the "super-jackpot". may be executed. In this case, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, for example, before the end of the "jackpot" and "super jackpot" branch rounds (4 rounds and 6 rounds in this embodiment), for example, during the branch round or from the branch round During the previous round, etc., an effect indicating a "super big hit" is executed.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may execute an effect to make the player recognize that the "big win" has been upgraded to the "super big win" by the light emission of various light guide plates and the operation of various movable bodies. Further, in the present embodiment, since it is determined whether or not to be controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state in a specific round (4R in the big win opening pattern table shown in FIG. 213), the jackpot When an effect (for example, variable probability promotion effect, etc.) that suggests being controlled to a high probability state after the end of the game state is executed, it is desirable to be executed before the specific round.

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a controls the effect sound output when the game ball B wins in the big winning hole 2005 during the jackpot game, and the general winning hole 2001 (not limited to the winning hole, other general winning holes). (which may include a mouth) may be determined to be the same as the sound effect output when the game ball B wins. Thus, to make a player feel as if more game balls than the maximum winning number to the big winning hole 2005 in one round enter the big winning hole 2005 without giving a disadvantage to the hole. can be done.

Also, in this case, during the period when the big winning hole 2005 is not open (including other than the big winning game state), the sound effect output when the game ball B wins the general winning hole 2001 It is desirable that the sound effect is different from that output when the game ball B wins. Moreover, even if the game ball B wins the general winning hole 2001, the effect sound does not have to be output.

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, instead of the general winning opening 2001, during the jackpot game, when the game ball B has won the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, or the normal figure starting opening 2010, etc. The sound effect to be output and the sound effect to be output when the game ball B wins in the general winning hole 2001 may be determined to be the same sound effect.

Referring to FIG. 209, the normal figure start opening 2010 is on the path through which the game ball B launched toward the large winning opening 2005 in the game area 5a passes, and the position preceding the large winning opening 2005 on the route. (that is, upstream from the big winning opening 2005). That is, a portion of the game ball B launched toward the big winning opening 2005 is configured to enter the normal figure starting opening 2010 . Therefore, even if the player hits to the right at a short firing interval (for example, the shortest interval of 0.6 seconds) during the jackpot game, the specified number of openings of the big winning port 2005 (for example, 10) or more prize winning openings 2005 can be suppressed.

Also, when the game ball B wins in the normal figure starting port 2010, as described above, a smaller number of game balls (for example, 1 or 3) than when winning the big winning port 2005 are paid out. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls paid out in one round from becoming excessively large. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the player without imposing an excessive burden on the hole. In addition, in order to further suppress the burden on the hole, it is desirable that the number of game balls to be paid out when the game ball B wins the normal figure starting port 2010 is one. Further, as a result, the number of game balls put out per unit time during the big win game can be suppressed and the time of the big win game state can be lengthened without excessively increasing the total number of game balls put out during the big win game. .

However, in the round of the operation schedule in which the big winning hole 2005 is open for a long time, only the game balls B enter the big winning hole 2005 in a number smaller than the specified number (for example, 10) in one opening of the big winning hole 2005. In such a case, complaints may arise from players. Therefore, in the operation schedule to open the large winning opening 2005 for a long time, the position of the normal figure start opening 2010, the opening time of the large winning opening 2005, and The winning probability of the normal pattern during the big hit game and the opening time of the second start door 2411 (specifically, for example, the winning probability of the normal pattern is set to 0 during the big hit game. Open the second start door 2411 In addition, it is necessary to set in advance such as shortening the opening time of the second start door 2411 even though the winning probability of the normal symbol is not 0 during the jackpot game. The opening time (for example, 29.000 seconds)/shooting interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) is the number of game balls B heading for the big winning hole 2005 in one opening time of the big winning hole 2005. It is desirable that the setting is made so that more than half of the players win the prize in the special prize opening 2005 .

In addition, the starting opening for performing a lottery to open the winning opening with the opening device (for example, the second starting opening 2004 with the second starting opening door 2411, the big winning opening 2005 with the big winning opening door 2413), It is desirable that all of the openings have prize balls. If there is no prize ball even if the game ball B enters the starting hole for performing the lottery, even if the lottery result to open the opening device is obtained, for example, the game ball B owned by the player When it is the last one ball, a situation arises in which the game ball B cannot win a prize in the open prize winning opening. As described above, since the starting openings for performing the lottery for opening the winning openings with the opening device are all winning openings with prize balls, in such a situation, the player can newly release the game ball B. It is possible to avoid the situation of making additional purchases.

In addition, it is desirable that the normal map starting port 2010 and the second starting port 2004 are configured, for example, as one unit and located in the vicinity of each other. In addition, as shown in FIG. 209, the normal figure starting opening 2010 is on the path through which the game ball B launched toward the big winning opening 2005 in the game area 5a passes, and the second starting opening on the path. It is arranged upstream of the door 2411 .

In FIG. 209, the obstacle nail is not illustrated, but the game ball B that does not enter the normal pattern starting port 2010 and flows downward in the normal pattern starting port 2010 is guided to the second starting port 2004 , obstacle nails are placed. Temporarily, the second starting port 2004 is arranged on the path through which the game ball B launched toward the big winning port 2005 in the game area 5a passes, and upstream of the normal figure starting port 2010 on the path. Then, the game ball B entering the second start port 2004 hinders the entry of the game ball B to the normal figure start port 2010, and thus the second start despite being in the time saving state A situation may occur in which the opening frequency of the mouth 2004 is low. In order to prevent the occurrence of such a situation, as described above, the normal figure start opening 2010 is on the path through which the game ball B launched toward the big winning opening 2005 in the game area 5a passes, and It is desirable to be arranged upstream of the second starting door 2411 on the route. On the other hand, if it is a game machine of the idea that the player wants to enjoy the time saving state for a long time, the positional relationship between the normal figure start port 2010 and the second start port 2004 may be reversed.

Moreover, it is desirable that the number of prize balls in the normal figure starting port 2010 and the number of prize balls in the second starting port 2004 are the same (for example, one). Suppose that the number of prize balls in one starting port (for example, the second starting port 2004) is set to be large (for example, set to two). In this case, the normal figure start port 2010 and the second start port 2004 are located in the vicinity, and the player cannot easily determine which start port the game ball B has won, so the prize ball assumed by the player A situation may occur in which the number of prize balls actually paid out from the pachinko machine 1 is smaller than the number. Specifically, for example, although the game ball B has won the normal figure start port 2010, the player misunderstands that the game ball B has won the second start port 2004, that is, the player has two However, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 1 will pay out only one prize ball. If such a situation occurs, there is a risk that the player will complain that the number of prize balls in the hole is insufficient. As described above, such a situation can be avoided by setting the same number of prize balls in the normal figure starting port 2010 and the second starting port 2004 located in the vicinity.

In addition, the normal figure start opening 2010 and the second start opening 2004 have been described as one unit, but not limited to this, the member that constitutes the normal figure start opening 2010 and the big winning opening 2005 It may consist of one unit. In this case, the normal figure start opening 2010 is arranged upstream of the large winning opening door 2413 on the route through which the game ball B launched toward the large winning opening 2005 in the game area 5a passes, and on the route. By doing so, the number of game balls put out per unit time during the big win game can be suppressed and the time of the big win game state can be lengthened.

On the other hand, the normal figure start port 2010 is on the path through which the game ball B that was launched toward the big winning port 2005 in the game area 5a but did not win the big winning port 2005 passes, and the big winning on the route It may be arranged downstream of the entrance door 2413 . In such a case, while the large winning opening door 2413 is open, the game ball B launched toward the large winning opening 2005 does not face the normal figure starting opening 2010, but in the interval between rounds, the large winning opening The game ball B launched toward 2005 heads toward the normal pattern starting port 2010. - 特許庁As a result, the jackpot game state can be advanced smoothly, and the ordinary lottery can be performed early in the time-saving state transitioned after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, for example, the member constituting the normal figure start opening 2010 and the member constituting the center accessory 2500 may be configured in one unit, or the member constituting the normal figure start opening 2010 and the big winning opening 2005 The constituent member and the member constituting the center accessory 2500 may be configured as one unit. By appropriately integrating at least two of the normal figure start opening 2010, the big prize opening 2005, the center accessory 2500, and the second start opening 2004, the installation process can be shortened.

In addition, when the jackpot game is won multiple times across only the advantageous game state (high probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state, and high probability time saving state) after the end of the jackpot game state, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a When the cumulative number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game reaches a predetermined number (for example, a multiple of 2500, or a number of 2500 or more and the last three digits are "000"), the cumulative number of payouts reaches A display indicating that the predetermined number has been reached may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 .

In addition, when the second special symbol fluctuates continuously from the time saving state after the time saving state ends, and the big hit game is won in the change, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a wins the big win game in the advantageous game state after the big win game ends. It may be considered as That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may use the total number of payouts including the number of game balls paid out in the big hit game for the total display.

Specifically, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, for example, when the cumulative payout number of game balls reaches 2500, displays the cumulative display such as "Get 2500!" 2 to 3 seconds). It should be noted that, when there is a new winning in the big winning opening 2005 while the cumulative display is being displayed on the effect display device 1600, it is desirable that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not count up the cumulative display. However, even in this case, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs count display for counting the total number of game balls put out in one big hit game, the total display is not counted up. It is desirable to count up the count display.

It should be noted that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a receives a jackpot end command from the main control MPU at the end of the final round of the jackpot game, and executes the ending effect of the jackpot game. Therefore, just before the big win game ends (for example, when the remaining two game balls B enter the big win hole 2005 in the final round of the big win game, the big win game ends), the game ball B enters the big win hole 2005. When the cumulative number of payouts reaches a predetermined number due to winning (for example, when the final round of the big win game ends when the remaining one game ball B enters the big winning hole 2005), There is a possibility that the ending effect will start immediately after the cumulative display is displayed, and the cumulative display cannot be displayed for a predetermined time. However, even in this case, it is desirable that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a executes the cumulative display without changing the display time in order to give the player a feeling of excitement.

However, in the final round of the jackpot game, when the remaining one game ball B enters the big win port 2005, the game ball enters the big win port 2005 in a state where the big win game ends, and the total number of payouts is reduced to a predetermined number. is reached, the cumulative display is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 . That is, the cumulative display is an effect of displaying the cumulative number of payouts in a plurality of jackpot games, and is an effect showing that the current state is a state in which winning to the big winning hole 2005 is permitted.

It should be noted that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the game ball B has entered the big winning opening 2005 in the state where the big winning game ends when the remaining one game ball B enters the big winning opening 2005 in the final round of the big winning game. Even when the cumulative number of payouts reaches a predetermined number, the cumulative display may be displayed in an area on the effect display device 1600 that does not overlap the area where the ending effect is displayed. If the ending effect can be recognized, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may display part or all of the total display on the area where the ending effect is displayed.

In addition, in the above description of the cumulative display, "the state in which the jackpot game ends when the remaining two game balls B enter the jackpot 2005 in the final round of the jackpot game" is replaced with "the jackpot game ends in the final round of the jackpot game." State that the remaining open time of the mouth 2005 is within a predetermined range (for example, more than 1.0 seconds and less than 2.0 seconds)", and "At the final round of the jackpot game, the remaining one game ball B is a big winning opening. A state in which the jackpot game ends when a prize is won in 2005" may be read as "a state in which the remaining opening time of the jackpot game opening 2005 in the final round of the jackpot game is a predetermined value or less (for example, 1.0 seconds or less)". . The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may use not only the effect display device 1600 but also various movable bodies, various lamps, various speakers, various light guide plates, and the like in the effect during the jackpot game.

In addition, although an obstacle nail is not shown in FIG. 209, the branch as to whether or not the right-handed game ball B enters the normal figure start hole 2010 is realized by an obstacle nail planted in the game area 5a. ing. The game ball B that did not enter the normal figure start port 2010 is guided to the second start port 2004, and the game ball B that was led to the second start port 2004 but did not enter the second start port 2004 wins a big prize. It is led to mouth 2005 . In addition, the game ball B that did not win the normal figure start opening 2010 touches the obstacle nail until it passes through the big winning opening door 2413 from when it arrives just beside from the center of the member constituting the normal figure start opening 2010 never. A game ball B that was guided to the big winning hole 2005 but did not enter the big winning hole 2005 is a general winning hole 2001 (Fig. 209 An obstacle nail is planted so as to lead to a general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the first starting opening 2002 (hereinafter this general winning opening 2001 is also referred to as the final winning opening).

Here, the number of winnings to each winning hole in the time saving state and the number of winnings to each winning hole in the jackpot game state will be described. In the following description, the number of prize balls when the game ball B wins the normal figure start port 2010 is 1, the number of prize balls when the game ball B wins the second start port 2004 is 1, and the number of prize balls when the game ball B wins the second start port 2004. The number of prize balls when the game ball B wins in the winning hole 2005 is 15, and the number of prize balls when the game ball B wins in the last prize winning hole is 3.

First, the number of winnings to each winning opening in the time saving state will be described. In order to increase the number of fluctuations of special symbols per unit time in the time-saving state compared to the non-time-saving state, it is necessary to plant an obstacle nail so that the game ball B is moderately won in the second start port 2004. There is Further, in order to open the second starting port 2004 in the time saving state, it is necessary to plant an obstacle nail so as to allow the game ball B to win moderately to the normal figure starting port 2010 as well.

When the player hits the game ball B to the right at a short firing interval (for example, the shortest interval of 0.6 seconds), the game ball B is, for example, about 35 per minute, and wins the normal figure start port 2010. Obstacle nails are planted to prevent As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period during which the ordinary lottery is not performed in the time saving state. Therefore, the second starting port 2004 is opened moderately, and the second starting port 2004 is also moderately (for example, when the player hits the game ball B to the right with a short firing interval, about 50 balls per minute). Ball B will win.

In the time-saving state, when the number of game balls paid out is larger than the number of game balls B hit (so-called ball-out rate exceeds 1), it is an excessive burden on the hole. When the player hits the game ball B to the right with a short shooting interval, the number of the game balls B that are launched in one minute is about 100, so both the normal figure start port 2010 and the second start port 2004 win prizes. The number of game balls B that do not are 15 (out of 100 game balls B launched in one minute, 35 game balls B enter the normal figure start port 2010, and the remaining 65 game balls 50 game balls B out of B enter the second starting port 2004). In addition, the total number of payouts of game balls B to the normal figure starting port 2010 per minute and the number of game balls B to be paid out to the second starting port 2004 per minute is 85 pieces.

An obstruction nail is planted so that the remaining 15 game balls B may go to the final fort winning opening. Since the number of game balls to be paid out when the game ball B enters the final prize-winning port is three, five or more game balls B out of the 15 game balls B enter the final prize-winning port. If you win, the ball output rate in the time saving state will exceed 1. Therefore, among the game balls B heading to the last fort winning opening (that is, the game balls B hit to the right in the time saving state, the game balls that did not win either the normal figure start opening 2010 or the second start opening 2004 It is desirable that the obstacle nail is planted so that the ratio of the game balls B that enter the final winning opening to B) is, for example, less than 1/5.

In addition, if the number of payouts when the game ball B wins the final prize-winning hole is 1, the ball payout rate will never exceed 1 in the time-saving state, which increases the burden on the hall. never. However, there are players who lose interest in the game because they know that the payout rate will never exceed 1. Therefore, in order to allow the player to maintain some expectation for the ball payout rate, the number of payouts when the game ball B wins the final prize winning opening is a number greater than 1 (for example, 2 or 3). is desirable.

Next, the number of winnings to each winning opening in the jackpot game state will be described. Since the normal pattern starting port 2010 is a non-movable winning prize port (that is, a winning prize port that is always open), the normal pattern per minute when the player hits the game ball B to the right at a short firing interval in the jackpot game state The number of game balls B that enter the starting port 2010 is 35, the same as in the time saving state. Even in the jackpot game state, although the ordinary lottery is performed based on the winning of the game ball B in the normal figure start opening 2010, the ordinary lottery is not won or even if the ordinary lottery is won, the second start opening is for a very short time. 2004 is not opened, it is difficult to enter the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 in the jackpot game state.

Therefore, almost all or all of the game balls B (65 per minute in the above example) that did not enter the normal pattern starting port 2010 among the game balls B hit to the right by the player at a short firing interval or all of them win big prizes. Although it goes to the opening 2005, not all the game balls heading to the big winning opening 2005 win the big winning opening. This is because there is an interval between rounds. When the interval time between rounds is, for example, 2.000 seconds, about 80% of the game balls headed for the big winning opening 2005 enter the big winning opening 2005, and the other game balls are the last bastion. Obstacle nails are planted so as to go to the winning entrance.

That is, in the time-saving state, when the player hits the game ball B to the right with a short firing interval, 35 per minute in the normal figure start port 2010, 50 per minute in the second start port 2004, and a large winning port In 2005, 0 game balls B per minute and less than 3 game balls per minute enter the final winning opening. On the other hand, in the jackpot game state, when the player hits the game ball B to the right with a short firing interval, 35 per minute at the normal start port 2010, 0 per minute at the second start port 2004, and a big prize. 52 (65×80%) game balls B enter the opening 2005 per minute, and less than 3 game balls B enter the final winning opening per minute.

That is, the number of game balls B entering the second starting hole 2004 in the time saving state and the number of game balls B entering the big winning hole 2005 in the big win game state are almost the same. Therefore, in the time saving state, the winning number of the game ball B to the normal figure starting port 2010, the winning number of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004, and the winning number of the game ball B to the last fort winning port , is the ratio of the number of game balls B winning to the regular start opening 2010, the number of game balls B winning to the big winning opening 2005, and the number of game balls B going to the final winning opening in the jackpot game state. It is almost the same as the ratio of the number of prizes won. In other words, in the time-saving state and the jackpot game state, although the types of the winning openings for winning the game balls B are partially different, the ratio of the number of the game balls B winning the respective winning openings is substantially the same.

In addition, as described above, the normal pattern starting port 2010 is arranged upstream of the second starting port 2004, but in the time saving state, the number of game balls B winning per minute to the normal pattern starting port 2010 It is desirable that obstacle nails are planted so that the number of game balls B winning per minute into the second starting port 2004 is greater. This is because even if the game ball B wins into the normal figure start opening 2010, the lottery for opening the big winning opening 2005 (that is, the special lottery for the big hit) is not performed.

In addition, in the time-saving state, when the player hits the game ball B to the right with a short firing interval, the total number of game balls B heading for the big winning opening 2005 and the final winning opening per minute (15 in the above example) number), the number of game balls B that enter the normal figure start port 2010 per minute when the player hits the game ball B to the right at a short firing interval in the jackpot game state (35 in the above example) ) is also characteristic. If this is reversed, the time of the big win game state will be shortened, and the player will not be able to enjoy the big win game state for a long time, and the number of game balls B entering the second start port 2004 in the time saving state will decrease. This is because there is a possibility that the time-saving game state may be prolonged.

In the time-saving state, when the player hits the game ball B to the right with a short firing interval, the total number of game balls B heading for the big winning opening 2005 and the final winning opening per minute (15 in the above example) ), the number of game balls B that enter the normal figure start port 2010 per minute when the player hits the game ball B to the right at a short firing interval in the jackpot game state (35 in the above example) Even if the number of game balls B is greater than the number of winning prizes in the jackpot game state, the number of game balls B won in one opening of the jackpot 2005 does not fall below a specified number (for example, 10) (in the above example, 65, but the upper limit is 90), if the game balls B are directed to the big winning opening 2005, the number of game balls acquired by the player in the jackpot game state does not decrease.

Also, only in the case of the jackpot game state, when the game ball B enters the normal figure starting port 2010, it is desirable that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a predetermined effect. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs, as a predetermined effect, for example, the same winning sound as the winning sound output when the game ball B wins the big winning hole 2005, or when the game ball B wins the big winning hole 2005. A winning sound different from the winning sound output when the game is played is output, and the effect display device 1600 teaches that the game ball B has won the normal figure start port 2010.例文帳に追加

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 15101a appeals to the player that the game ball B has entered the normal figure start slot 2010 in this way, so that many game balls B have entered the winning slot in the jackpot game state. The player can feel the fact, and thus the interest is maintained. It is more preferable that the peripheral control IC 1510a causes various lamps to emit light, moves various movable bodies, and causes various light guide plates to emit light in accordance with the above-described predetermined effects.

In addition, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is controlled in the jackpot game state (from the start of the right-handed instruction to the start of the jackpot game ending effect), the normal pattern start A privilege may be given to the player when the cumulative number of winnings of the game ball B into the mouth 2010 reaches a predetermined number. The predetermined number is preferably a value smaller than the cumulative total of game balls B that enter the big winning opening 2005 in one big winning game, such as 50, for example. For example, in a jackpot game of 16 rounds, when the prescribed number of prizes per round (when the prescribed number of game balls B enter the big prize winning opening 2005, the opening of the big winning prize opening 2005 in one round ends) is 10. , 16×10=160 game balls B enter the big winning opening 2005 in one big win game, so the predetermined number is 160 or less.

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a provides benefits, for example, by increasing the number of songs that can be selected during the jackpot game when the next jackpot is won, or when there is a hold on the special symbol variation in the jackpot game state. Executes an effect suggesting whether or not the player has won a big win, or makes the stage effect (background) displayed after the end of the big win game state a special dedicated stage, or makes people expect whether or not they have won a big win. Release the notice effect and the reach effect (that is, the notice effect and the reach effect appear only when the cumulative number of winnings of the game ball B to the normal figure start port 2010 reaches a predetermined number in the jackpot game state possible production). When such a privilege can be granted, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays a message such as "If the total number exceeds a predetermined number..." Even better.

[18. L5 production]
[18-1: Pseudo continuous effect]
The L5 effect, which is an example of the specific effect in this embodiment, will be described below. First, the pseudo continuous effect will be described. Pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the operation of changing the decorative pattern and ending the variation of the decorative pattern is executed multiple times during one change of the first special pattern display device or the second special pattern display device. . "Terminate the variation of the decorative symbols" includes, for example, a mode in which a part or all of the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and the player is made to recognize that the variation of the decorative symbols is once terminated. In other words, the pseudo-continuous effect is a effect that makes it appear that a single variation of the decorative pattern has caused a plurality of variations. A pseudo-continuous effect in which the action is performed twice is also referred to as a pseudo-single effect, and a pseudo-continuous effect in which the action is performed three times is also referred to as a pseudo-double effect. In addition, during one fluctuation of the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device, the second operation is called pseudo 1, and the third operation is called pseudo 2. At the start of the action after the second time in the pseudo continuous effect, the number of times may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 .

In this chapter, it is assumed that there is only one variation pattern table for big wins, that is, the variation pattern table for big wins is common to all types of big wins. Also, in this chapter, it is assumed that there is only one variation pattern table at the time of loss, that is, the variation pattern table is common to loss with reach and loss without reach. However, as described with reference to FIG. 183, the variation pattern table is based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). A plurality of types may be provided. Also, as described with reference to FIG. 183, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss may be separately provided with a fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss with reach and a fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss without reach.

First, an example of the big-hit determination process in this chapter will be described with respect to differences from the big-hit determination process of FIG. 180 . The main control MPU, in step S115, as a result of comparison between the selected jackpot determination table and the first special random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process, when it is determined to be off, steps S117 to step S119 The big hit determination process is ended without executing the process of .

Subsequently, for an example of the first variation pattern setting process in this chapter, differences from the first variation pattern setting process of FIG. 183 will be described. When the main control MPU determines that the jackpot flag is set in step S141, it selects a variation pattern table for jackpot in step S142. Also, when the main control MPU determines that the jackpot flag is not set in step S141, the main control MPU selects the fluctuation pattern table at step S145 without executing the processing of steps S143 and S144.

FIG. 214 is an example of a variation pattern table for a big hit. FIG. 215 is an example of a variation pattern table at the time of deviation. The variation pattern table contains, for example, a variation number for identifying a variation pattern, a variation pattern, the effect executed in the variation pattern, the variation time of the variation pattern, the allocation for which the variation pattern is selected, correspondence is described.

The effect content in the variation pattern table indicates the content of the SP reach or the movie reach in the variation pattern in which the SP reach or the movie reach is executed. It is assumed that the barbell reach which is the movie reach, the mahjong reach which is the SP reach 2, the rock-paper-scissors reach which is the SP reach 1, and the normal reach, in this order, have the highest degree of expectation for a big hit. For example, in the variation pattern of "normal reach + pseudo 1 series", the variation of the decorative symbol is performed twice during one variation of the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator, and the second decorative symbol It is a variation pattern in which a normal reach effect is executed in variation.

In step S148, the main control MPU sets the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the variation timer, but changes the variation time according to the determined variation pattern and the start memory number at the start of the variation. good too. For example, when the determined variation pattern is a predetermined variation pattern (e.g., no reach) and the number of starting memories is large (e.g., the number of starting memories is 3 or more), the main control MPU shortens the fluctuation time You may

[18-2: About look-ahead effects]
The look-ahead effect will be described below. The look-ahead effect is a effect that suggests the result of the special lottery in the variation before the variable display of the special symbols is started. FIG. 216 is an example of a look-ahead effect table. The look-ahead effect table shows, for example, the correspondence between the variation number and the distribution of the look-ahead effect.

In the look-ahead effect table, "None" indicates that the look-ahead effect is not executed. "Stop symbol same color" indicates a so-called same-color symbol pre-reading effect for stopping decorative symbols of the same color in the effect display device 1600, and "L5" indicates an L5 effect to be described later.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, in the effect control process of step S602, according to the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU and the allocation indicated by the look-ahead effect table, whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect, and When the look-ahead performance is to be executed, which look-ahead performance is to be executed is determined. In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, for example, determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect. If it is a variation pattern in which SP reach or movie reach is executed), the execution of look-ahead effect in the target variation may be prohibited regardless of the distribution of the look-ahead effect table.

Also in such a case, it goes without saying that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not have to prohibit the prefetch effect. Specifically, for example, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines to execute the pending look-ahead effect in a state in which the effect display device 1600 is not displaying a pending display, such as during SP reach or movie reach, It is preferable to change the pending color and display it when the pending display is resumed on the effect display device 1600 . At that time, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a special sound indicating that the look-ahead effect has been executed instead of the normal sound output when the look-ahead effect is not executed when the game ball B has won the starting hole. good. Also, in this state, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines to execute so-called same-color symbol prefetching, there may be a case where the same-color symbols cannot be used due to the decorative symbols that stop when the reach is out of reach. In this case, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may execute processing such as changing the type of prefetch effect to be executed or prohibiting execution of the prefetch effect.

[18-3: L5 production]
An example in which the L5 effect is executed as a look-ahead effect will be described below. The L5 effect is a look-ahead effect in which the big-hit expectation degree index (consisting of L1 to L5) displayed on the effect display device 1600 is promoted step by step. The degree of expectation for a big hit is higher in the order of L5, L4, L3, L2 and L1 (initial state). In addition, in the L5 effect, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation index displayed on the effect display device 1600 is not lowered in the middle while the L5 effect continues. Also, in the L5 effect, when the big win expectation degree index is promoted to a specific stage, the big win is confirmed or the probability variation is confirmed. In addition, in the L5 effect, only the jackpot expectation degree indicator in the middle stage may be determined to be a big hit or a variable probability (specifically, for example, L4 is a big hit, a confirmed big hit, or a variable probability but none of L5 need be determined).

In the L5 effect, when the jackpot expectation degree index is promoted to L5, a predetermined effect (barbell reach, which is movie reach in this embodiment) with a high degree of expectation for big win is executed. In addition, when the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L5, there is a specific effect that suggests that the barbell reach will be performed (for example, a success effect that the barbell can be raised, or a next notice effect of a specific reach effect (such The barbell reach may be executed after an effect )) that foretells that a specific reach effect will be executed.

It is desirable that the L5 effect be executed with a variation corresponding to a variation pattern in which the variation time is not shortened even when the start memory number at the start of variation is large. Specifically, the L5 effect may be executed by limiting to a variation pattern in which SP reach 1, 2 and movie reach are performed, or a variation pattern in which a pseudo run always occurs.

However, in the variation corresponding to the variation pattern in which the variation time is shortened when the start memory number at the time of variation start is large, the fake L5 effect may be executed. The fake L5 performance includes, for example, a performance in which the jackpot expectation index is only promoted to a predetermined value or less (for example, L3 or less) and does not develop into a ready-to-win performance, and a jackpot expectation that suggests an increase in the jackpot expectation index. and an effect in which the index remains in the initial state (L1) and does not develop into a ready-to-win effect. However, even in the fake L5 performance, when the big win expectation degree index is promoted to a predetermined value or higher, a performance with a high degree of big win expectation such as a ready-to-win performance or a simulated continuous performance is executed.

In this chapter, like L1 to L5, the jackpot expectation index is expressed by the numerical values displayed on the effect display device 1600, but it is not always necessary to use numerical values, and the jackpot expectation index can be, for example, various Light emitting colors of light guide plates and various lamps, sounds from various speakers, or various effects displayed on the effect display device 1600 (colors and sizes of characters, images, etc. displayed on the effect display device 1600, or effects such as dialogue content).

Referring to the variation patterns in FIGS. 214 and 215, the variations for which barbell reach is performed are variations with variation numbers 10, 11, 12, 24, 25, and 26. FIG. Since the barbell reach is not executed in the variation in the other variation pattern, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, when executing the L5 effect for the variation in the other variation pattern, prevents the jackpot expectation index from being promoted to L5 (that is, the maximum Control the production so that it can only be promoted to L4 in ).

FIG. 217 is an example of an L5 production promotion pattern table. The L5 effect promotion pattern table shows, for example, the correspondence between the promotion pattern indicating the promotion timing of the jackpot expectation index in the L5 effect and the distribution of the promotion pattern. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines to execute the L5 effect as the look-ahead effect in step S602, it selects the promotion pattern of the L5 effect according to the distribution of the L5 effect promotion pattern table.

It should be noted that the retention 1 variation in the L5 effect promotion pattern table is the variation that precedes the variation determined to execute the L5 effect as the look-ahead effect (hereinafter also referred to as the L5 target variation), and is the L5 target variation. Shows the variation that was reserved at the time of winning corresponding to . The H2 variation in the L5 effect promotion pattern table is the variation one before the H1 variation, and indicates the variation that was suspended at the time of winning corresponding to the L5 target variation. The H3 fluctuation in the L5 effect promotion pattern table is the fluctuation one before the H2 fluctuation, and indicates the fluctuation that was held at the time of winning corresponding to the L5 target fluctuation.

In addition, when the prize corresponding to the L5 target variation does not exist, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a assumes that there is no column "at the start of the maintenance 3 variation" in the L5 effect promotion pattern table. , to determine the promotion pattern. The same applies to the case where there is no suspension of the 2nd variation at the time of winning corresponding to the L5 target variation and the case where there is no suspension of the 1st variation at the time of winning corresponding to the L5 target variation. Also, an L5 effect promotion pattern table may be prepared in advance according to each pending state at the time of winning corresponding to the L5 target variation.

Further, when the variation pattern of the L5 target variation is a variation pattern that does not execute the pseudo-continuation, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a controls the column "at the start of pseudo-1" and the column "at the time of pseudo-2 start" in the L5 effect promotion pattern table. Determine the promotion pattern assuming that the column of is not present. If the variation pattern of the L5 target variation is a series of pseudo variation patterns (that is, a variation pattern that performs pseudo 1 but does not perform pseudo 2), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a selects " Determine the promotion pattern assuming that the "Pseudo 2 Start" column does not exist. Also, an L5 effect promotion pattern table corresponding to each variation pattern of the L5 target variation may be prepared in advance.

In addition, when the variation pattern of the L5 target variation is a variation pattern that does not execute a pseudo-run and a pattern in which the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L5 is selected, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts the L5 target variation. It is also possible to carry out another effect in which it is confirmed that the jackpot expectation degree index will be promoted to L5 by the time the game is played. Also, if the variation pattern of the L5 target variation is a variation pattern that does not execute a pseudo-run, there is a high possibility that the variation time is relatively short. It may be performed together with the start of L5 target variation.

Further, when the variation pattern of the L5 target variation is a variation pattern in which the barbell reach is not executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a selects from the L5 effect promotion pattern table a promotion pattern in which the jackpot expectation degree index is not promoted to L5. . That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 217, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a selects one of promotion patterns numbered 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, and 10. FIG. In this case, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads, for example, "at the time of barbell reach development" in the L5 promotion pattern table as "at the time of reach development".

When the L5 target variation wins, there are holds corresponding to the H1 variation, H2 variation, and H3 variation, and when the variation number of the variation pattern of the L5 coping variation is 12 (movie reach + pseudo double) , L5 effect promotion pattern table, the promotion pattern of number 5 is selected. In this case, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays the initial state of the jackpot expectation level L1 on the performance display device 1600 at the time of winning the L5 target variation, and displays the jackpot expectation level L1 on the performance display device 1600 until the end of the maintenance 3 variation. do.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a raises the level of expectation for the big hit on the performance display device 1600 to L2 at the start of the second variation, and displays the level of expectation for the big win L2 on the performance display device until just before the pseudo 1 start of the L5 target variation. . Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a raises the expectation level of the big win on the performance display device 1600 to L3 at the start of the simulation 1, raises the expectation level of the big win on the performance display device 1600 to L4 at the start of the simulation 2, and when the barbell reach develops. The degree of expectation for a big hit on the performance display device 1600 is raised to L5. Although an example of raising the jackpot expectation degree index at a predetermined timing has been described, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a executes a predetermined raising effect (shutter effect by the back second light guide plate 3160, etc.) at the timing, and the raising Needless to say, the jackpot expectation degree index may be raised after performing the performance.

It should be noted that, like the promotion patterns numbered 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, and 10 in FIG. 217, even if the jackpot expectation index does not reach L5, there is a promotion pattern that develops into a barbell reach with a high jackpot expectation. preferably. This is because even if the big-win expectation degree index is not raised to L5, the player can have a sense of expectation for the big-win, and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed. In addition, it is desirable that the total distribution of promotion patterns that develop into barbell reach even if the jackpot expectation index is not promoted to L5 is 50% or less of the total.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 217, the jackpot expectation index at the time of L5 target variable winning in all promotion patterns is L1, but there is a promotion pattern in which the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L2 or higher at the time of L5 target variable winning. good too.

Also, in the example of FIG. 217, the jackpot expectation indicator develops to L5 at the earliest at the start of L5 target fluctuation, but before the start of L5 target fluctuation (for example, at the start of H1 fluctuation, H2 fluctuation start There may be a promotion pattern in which the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L5 at time, at the start of 3 fluctuation, or at the time of L5 target fluctuation winning, etc.). In addition, when the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L5 before the start of the L5 target variation, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a special effect in the case where the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L5 before the start of the L5 target variation. It may be executed from the start of the target change.

[18-4: Specific example 1 of L5 production]
A specific example of the L5 effect will be described below. 218A and 218B, the variation pattern of the L5 target variation is a variation pattern in which barbell reach and pseudo double are performed, and the promotion pattern with the number 3 in the L5 effect promotion pattern table of FIG. 217 was selected. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an outline|summary of L5 production|presentation.

The effect display device 1600 includes a jackpot expectation index display area 1660 . In addition, it is assumed that a color indicating each jackpot expectation index is determined in advance. In the following, it is assumed that L1 is associated with white, L2 with blue, L3 with green, L4 with red, and L5 with gold.

In the jackpot expectation index display area 1660, information indicating the current jackpot expectation index is displayed. In the jackpot expectation index display area 1660, for example, "L1", "L2", "L3", and "L4" are displayed on a circle, and "L5" is displayed at the center of the circle. Assume that the highlighted jackpot expectation index at the 12 o'clock position on the circle in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660 is the value of the current jackpot expectation index.

Also, when the current jackpot expectation level index is L5, "L5" in the jackpot expectation level index display area 1660 remains positioned at the center and "L5" is highlighted. In the following, it is assumed that highlighting is performed using a color corresponding to the above-described jackpot expectation index.

In the L5 effect of the promotion pattern of number 3, the big hit expectation index remains at L1 until just before the start of the L5 target variation. Therefore, at the start of the L5 target variation, "L1" is displayed at the 12 o'clock position on the circle in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660, and only "L1" is highlighted (white star corresponding to L1). displayed in the figure). Incidentally, as the highlighting of the big-hit expectation index, for example, the big-hit expectation index may be enlarged or blinked.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a generates a pseudo-continuous symbol, which is a symbol indicating the start of re-fluctuation in the pseudo-continuous effect (the left decorative symbol is "5", the middle decorative symbol is "6", and the right decorative symbol is "5" in FIG. 218A). The symbol "7") is stopped on the effect display device 1600 in the L5 target variation. As shown in FIG. 218A, a predetermined decorative symbol combination may be used as a pseudo-continuous symbol, or a dedicated symbol not included in the decorative symbols (number symbols) may be stopped as a pseudo-continuous symbol.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the back second light guide plate 3160 to emit light in blue, which is the color corresponding to L2, which is the index of expectation for a big hit after promotion at the start of pseudo 1, after stopping the pseudo consecutive symbols. .

In the light emission of the back second light guide plate 3160 in the L5 effect, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the light emission area of the back second light guide plate 3160 to gradually increase ( For example, the light emitting regions of the rear second light guide plate 3160 may be sequentially illuminated so that the shutter is closed. In this case, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sequentially causes the light emitting areas to emit light in a color corresponding to the pre-promoting big hit expectation index, and after all the light emitting areas emit light, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes all the light emitting areas to emit light. Light may be emitted in a color corresponding to the expectation index.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, in the example of the L5 effect in FIGS. 218A and 218B, causes all the light emitting areas of the back second light guide plate 3160 overlapping the decoration pattern and the hold display on the effect display device 1600 to emit light. However, the light emitting area overlapping the decoration pattern on the effect display device 1600 or the light emitting area overlapping the suspension display on the effect display device 1600 may not emit light.

In addition, in the light emission of the back second light guide plate 3160 in the L5 effect, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a emits light so that the player cannot visually recognize the area on the effect display device 1600 that overlaps the light emitting area for each light emitting area. Alternatively, the area on the effect display device 1600 that overlaps with the light emitting area may be controlled to emit light so that the player can see it.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the area on the effect display device 1600 that overlaps with the light emitting area to be visible to the player, a predetermined display is displayed in the area visible to the player on the effect display device 1600. (For example, predetermined characters, a title logo, etc.) may be performed. Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the area on the effect display device 1600 that overlaps with the light emitting area to be visible to the player, as in the example of FIG. Characters of "Chance!"

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the light emission of the back second light guide plate 3160 at the start of the simulation 1, and in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660, "L2" is positioned in the 12 o'clock direction on the circle. Rotate the circle and highlight "L2" (displayed in the blue star-shaped figure corresponding to L2).

It should be noted that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is arranged so that the light emission area of the back second light guide plate 3160 gradually decreases as in the examples of FIGS. The light emission of the light emitting regions may be stopped sequentially (for example, so that the shutter opens).

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, when the jackpot expectation index is promoted (for example, when the back second light guide plate 3160 emits light, when the back second light guide plate 3160 stops emitting light, or in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660 When the circle rotates, etc.), a display ("L2!" in FIG. 218A) indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit has been promoted may be made in an area other than the degree of expectation for a big hit index display area 1660 of the effect display device 1600.

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may move various movable bodies when the jackpot expectation index is promoted, or may cause various lamps to emit light in a color corresponding to the jackpot expectation index after promotion, for example. good. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may output a predetermined sound effect corresponding to each of the jackpot expectation index from various speakers when the jackpot expectation index is promoted.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the pseudo consecutive symbols on the effect display device 1600 again. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the back second light guide plate 3160 to emit light in green, which is the color corresponding to L3, which is the index of expectation for a big hit after promotion at the start of pseudo 2, after stopping the pseudo consecutive symbols. .

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the light emission of the back second light guide plate 3160 at the start of the simulation 2, and in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660, "L3" is positioned in the 12 o'clock direction on the circle. Rotate the circle and highlight "L3" (displayed in the green star-shaped figure corresponding to L3).

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the left decorative design and the right decorative design in the ready-to-win state in the effect display device 1600. FIG. Subsequently, after stopping the ready-to-win pattern, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the back second light guide plate 3160 to emit light in gold, which is the color corresponding to L5, which is the index of expectation for a big win after promotion at the time of development of the ready-to-win barbell. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the light emission of the back second light guide plate 3160 before starting the barbell reach, and highlights "L4" and "L5" in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660 ("L4" is displayed in a red star-shaped figure corresponding to L4, and "L5" is displayed in a gold star-shaped figure corresponding to L5).

Here, since the jackpot expectation index has been promoted to L5, L4, which has a lower jackpot expectation than L5, has been promoted (meaning that it exceeds L4 for the player), and L4 is also highlighted. When it is confirmed that the degree of expectation for a big win will be promoted to L5, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a continues to display an index indicating the degree of expectation for a big win until barbell reach starts as shown in FIG. 218B. However, at the stage where it is confirmed that the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L5, after highlighting L5 for a predetermined time (for example, a short time of about 2 seconds), the jackpot expectation in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660 A dedicated effect may be executed by erasing the display of the indicator (for example, erasing the display by means of an effect such as bursting chains in the area where the jackpot expectation index is displayed).

In addition, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a promotes the jackpot expectation index to "L5", the display by the effect display device 1600, the light emission by various lamps, the sound by various speakers, and the operation of various movable bodies are all temporarily You can stop it automatically. As a result, the player can be surprised and expect a big win. Furthermore, the CPU of the peripheral control 1510a causes the various lamps to emit light of the same color (for example, red), and then displays a predetermined pattern (for example, the sixth pattern 3162 in FIG. 141 or the third pattern in FIG. 143) on the back second light guide plate 3160. 3211 etc.) may be displayed.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a starts barbell reach in the effect display device 1600 . The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays a display (“L5 promoted” in FIG. 218B) indicating the final promotion state of the jackpot expectation degree in an area other than the jackpot expectation index display area 1660 of the effect display device 1600. Up, for example, until the L5 target variation ends.

[18-5: Specific example 2 of L5 effect]
Another example of the L5 effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 219A, 219B, and 219C. 219A, 219B, and 219C, the variation pattern of the L5 target variation is a variation pattern in which barbell reach and pseudo double are performed, and the promotion pattern with number 13 in the L5 effect promotion pattern table of FIG. 217 is It is an explanatory diagram showing an outline example of the selected L5 effect. Further, it is assumed that the fluctuations corresponding to the Ho 1 fluctuation, the Ho 2 fluctuation, and the Ho 3 fluctuation are reserved at the time of winning corresponding to the L5 target fluctuation.

In the L5 effect of the promotion pattern with the number 13, the big hit expectation index remains at L1 until just before the start of the H2 variation. Therefore, at the start of the 3 target variation, "L1" is highlighted (displayed in a white star-shaped figure corresponding to L1) at the 12 o'clock position on the circle in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660. ing.

It should be noted that at the timing when the big win expectation degree indicator is not promoted, such as the start of the 3rd fluctuation of this promotion pattern, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a suggests to the player that the big win expectation degree index may be promoted. Alternatively, the promotion display device 1600 or the like may be used to perform a fake promotion effect, which is a production in which the big hit expectation degree index is not promoted.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the rear second light guide plate 3160 to emit light in green, which is the color corresponding to L3, which is the jackpot expectation index after promotion at the start of the maintenance 2 fluctuation after the maintenance 3 fluctuation is completed. Let

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the light emission of the back second light guide plate 3160 at the start of the 2 fluctuation, and in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660, "L3" is positioned in the 12 o'clock direction on the circle. The circle is rotated to , and "L3" is highlighted (displayed in the blue star-shaped figure corresponding to L3). Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, for example, does not immediately rotate the circle so that L3 is positioned in the 12 o'clock direction on the circle. The circle may be rotated so that it is positioned at 12 o'clock, and immediately rotated so that L3 is positioned at 12 o'clock on the circle.

In addition, as described above, at the start of the second fluctuation, the jackpot expectation index is promoted from "L1" to "L3" without going through "L2". In such a case, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not have to highlight "L2", which is the expected jackpot index that was not passed through, as shown in FIG. 219A.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not highlight the jackpot expectation index that has not been passed through, so that the player can recognize the progress of promotion of the jackpot expectation index. In particular, for example, there is a difference between the jackpot expectation when the jackpot expectation index is promoted in order from L1 to L5 and the jackpot expectation when the jackpot expectation index is skipped over 1 or more and promoted to the jackpot expectation index L5. If there is, the player can estimate the degree of expectation for the big win by recognizing the background of the promotion of the degree-of-expectation index, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest in the game. In other words, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a clearly indicates how the jackpot expectation level index was promoted to L5 in the L5 effect.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts holding 1 fluctuation. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not perform the promotion performance of the big hit expectation index at the start of the holding 1 variation. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the back second light guide plate 3160 to emit gold light corresponding to L5, which is the jackpot expectation degree index after the promotion of the L5 target variation, after the end of the variation of the holding 1.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the light emission of the back second light guide plate 3160 when the L5 target variation starts, and highlights "L5" in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660 (golden star corresponding to L5 (displayed in the figure of the shape). In the example of FIG. 219B, at the start of the L5 target variation, since the jackpot expectation index is promoted from "L3" to "L5" without going through "L4", the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is the jackpot expectation "L4" in index display area 1660 is not highlighted.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the pseudo-continuous symbol, which is a symbol indicating the start of the re-variation in the pseudo-continuous effect, on the effect display device 1600 in the L5 target variation. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts simulation 1 in the effect display device 1600. FIG.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the effect display device 1600 to stop the pseudo-continuous symbol, which is a symbol indicating the start of the re-fluctuation in the pseudo-continuous effect, on the effect display device 1600 again. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts pseudo 2 in the effect display device 1600. FIG.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the decorative symbols in the ready-to-win state on the effect display device 1600. FIG. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a starts barbell reach in the effect display device 1600 .

219A, 219B, and 219C, the jackpot expectation index is promoted in the look-ahead production for the L5 target variation using the hold variation, and the jackpot expectation is further promoted in the L5 target variation. to realize a series of performances. In addition, the L5 effect of the promotion patterns of numbers 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 10 in the L5 effect promotion pattern table of FIG. To realize a series of performances in which the degree of expectation for a big win is further promoted in a simulated continuous performance of L5 object variation. By realizing a series of these effects, the player can gradually get a sense of expectation for a big win between a plurality of effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is used when the jackpot expectation index is promoted from L1 to L5 in order, when one or more jackpot expectation indices are skipped and promoted to the jackpot expectation index L5, and when promoted to L5. 218B and 219B (for example, the display effect "L5 promoted" displayed in FIG. 219B) may be changed.

[18-6: Another Example of L5 Production Promotion Pattern Table]
The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the L5 effect promotion pattern table of FIG. 220 may be used to sequentially draw the promotion lottery of the degree of expectation for a big hit at a predetermined timing by using the L5 effect promotion pattern table shown in FIG.

FIG. 220 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the L5 effect promotion pattern table. Differences from the L5 effect promotion pattern table of FIG. 217 will be described. The L5 effect promotion pattern table in FIG. 220 shows the correspondence between the promotion pattern indicating the promotion probability of the jackpot expectation index at the promotion timing of the jackpot expectation and the distribution of the promotion pattern.

For example, if the number 1 promotion pattern is selected, with a probability of 1/20 at the start of the maintenance 3 fluctuation, with a probability of 1/10 at the start of the maintenance 2 fluctuation, and with a probability of 1/20 at the start of the maintenance 1 fluctuation, L5 1/10 probability at the start of the target variation, 1/10 probability at the start of Pseudo 1, 1/10 probability at the start of Pseudo 2, and 1/10 probability at the time of development of Barbell Reach. do.

The promotion pattern of number 1 in FIG. 220 is unlikely to be elected for jackpot expectation degree index promotion at the time of pending digestion, but is likely to be elected for jackpot expectation degree index promotion in L5 target fluctuation. The promotion pattern of number 2 in FIG. 220 is likely to be elected for jackpot expectation degree index promotion at the time of reservation digestion, but it is difficult to be elected for jackpot expectation degree index promotion in L5 target fluctuation. The promotion pattern of number 3 in FIG. 220 is likely to win the jackpot expectation index promotion at the time of holding and the jackpot expectation index promotion in the L5 target variation. The promotion pattern of number 4 in FIG. 220 is unlikely to be elected to the jackpot expectation index promotion at the time of reservation digestion and the jackpot expectation index promotion in the L5 target variation.

In addition, FIG. 220 shows only promotion patterns in which the jackpot expectation index is not promoted at the time of winning corresponding to the L5 target variation, but the jackpot expectation index promotion lottery is performed even at the time of winning corresponding to the L5 target variation. There may be promotion patterns that In addition, as a pattern for the jackpot expectation index to be promoted to L5, the first pattern to be promoted to L5 during the L5 target change, and the first pattern to be promoted to L5 after the winning corresponding to the L5 target change and before the start of the L5 target change. There is a second pattern and a third pattern that is promoted to L5 at the time of winning corresponding to the L5 target variation, but the appearance ratio is high in the order of the first pattern, the second pattern, and the third pattern. It is desirable that the promotion probabilities and distributions in each promotion pattern of the L5 effect promotion pattern table are set so as to be as follows. This is to keep the player's sense of expectation for the promotion of the jackpot expectation degree indicator for a long time.

Also, promotion probabilities and allocations in each promotion pattern in the L5 effect promotion pattern table may be set so that the appearance ratio increases in order of the second pattern, the first pattern, and the third pattern. Even when the promotion probability and distribution are set in this manner, the player's expectation for the promotion of the big-hit expectation index can be maintained for a long time. In other words, it is important that the promotion probability and distribution are set so that the appearance ratio of the third pattern is the lowest.

In addition, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a wins the jackpot expectation index promotion lottery, the jackpot expectation index in the performance display device 1600 may be promoted by one level, or the number of stages to be promoted is selected by lottery, and the performance is performed. The jackpot expectation index on the display device 1600 may be promoted by the number of stages.

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may determine whether or not to finally promote the big hit expectation index to L5 when determining the variation pattern of the L5 target variation. Specifically, for example, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a selects a variation pattern in which the barbell reach is not executed, it determines not to raise the jackpot expectation index to L5, and selects a variation pattern in which the barbell reach is executed. If so, it is determined whether or not the jackpot expectation level index is promoted to L5 at a predetermined rate.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines not to promote the jackpot expectation index to L5, if the jackpot expectation indicated by the promotion result of the jackpot expectation index promotion lottery becomes L5, regardless of the promotion result. The promotion performance of the jackpot expectation index is not executed. Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines not to raise the jackpot expectation index to L5, the jackpot expectation index promotion lottery may not be executed after the jackpot expectation index reaches L4.

In addition, after the jackpot expectation index reaches L5, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may discard the winning result even if the jackpot expectation index promotion lottery is won, or may not execute the jackpot expectation index promotion lottery. desirable. In addition, as described above, when the jackpot expectation degree index reaches L5 before the start of L5 target variation, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, from the start of L5 target variation, the big hit expectation index before the start of L5 target variation A dedicated effect in the case of being promoted to L5 may be executed from the start of the L5 target variation.

[18-7: Concrete example of end of L5 effect]
An example of the ending effect when the jackpot is not won in the L5 effect will be described below with reference to FIG. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines to execute the L5 effect that the jackpot is not won based on the determination result notification command received in step S125, at the end of the L5 target variation, it indicates, for example, that the jackpot was not won. A display is made on the effect display device 1600 ("Unfortunately..." in FIG. 221).

Furthermore, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, at the end of the L5 target variation, for example, performs a display that covers the entire jackpot expectation index display area 1660, and then displays the jackpot expectation index display area 1660 in the initial state ( "L1" is displayed at the 12 o'clock position on the circle in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660, and only "L1" is highlighted).

[19. Secret timer announcement effect]
[19-1: Specific Example 1 of Secret Timer Notice Effect]
An example of the secret timer notice effect, which is the specific effect of the present embodiment, will be described below with reference to FIGS. 222 and 223. FIG. FIG. 222 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a secret timer advance notice effect. FIG. 223 is an explanatory diagram showing a timetable of the secret timer advance notice effect.

The secret timer notice effect is an effect with a high expectation of winning a big hit after the remaining time indicated by the timer displayed at the start of the secret timer notice effect (for example, an effect indicating that a pseudo-run will start, an effect that the big win is confirmed, It is an effect that executes a display and sound such as "Chance!" to raise expectations for a big hit. Hereinafter, an example will be described in which a simulated 1 start notice effect (hereinafter simply referred to as start notice effect) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the remaining time indicated by the timer has elapsed, and then simulated 1 is executed. That is, an example will be described in which the effect with a high degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is the pseudo-continuous effect.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a refers to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU in step S601. It decides whether or not to execute the advance notice effect. An example in which the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines to execute the secret timer announcement effect will be described below.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, on the effect display device 1600 at the start of fluctuation, a timer indicating the time until the start notice effect is displayed. In the examples of FIGS. 222 and 223, the start announcement effect is executed after 30 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, and the simulation 1 starts to be executed after 35 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, for example, performs a display that counts down the remaining time of the timer displayed on the effect display device 1600 each time one second elapses until three seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a puts the timer in the non-display state in the effect display device 1600 when 4 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation. From this point on, the player counts the remaining time until the start notice effect with his/her body clock.

Although the description is omitted in FIG. 222 for the sake of simplicity, as shown in the timetable of FIG. 223, for example, in parallel with the secret timer advance notice effect, other main notice effects such as character effects may be executed. desirable.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays a predetermined character on the effect display device 1600, for example, 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, on the effect display device 1600, an image of the character walking on the effect display device 1600, for example, when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays an image of the character jumping on the effect display device 1600, for example, when 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a again displays the timer indicating the remaining time of 3 seconds on the effect display device when, for example, 27 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and furthermore, the character is displayed from the depth direction of the effect display device 1600. The performance display device 1600 displays an image that looks like hitting the performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, for example, after re-displaying the timer on the effect display device 1600, sets the remaining time of the timer displayed on the effect display device 1600 to 1 until 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. Displays a countdown every second that elapses. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a redisplays on the effect display device 1600 a timer that counts down from the remaining three seconds. In this case, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a re-displays the timer on the effect display device 1600, the timer is re-displayed suddenly (that is, without prior notice of re-displaying the timer). A surprise can be given to the player.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a hides the timer when, for example, 30 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation (that is, when the remaining time of the timer is 0 seconds), and produces a display such as "Pseudo continuous!!!" A start notice performance to be displayed on the display device 1600 is executed, and furthermore, the performance display device 1600 is displayed on the performance display device 1600 with an image in which the performance display device 1600 looks like it is broken by the character hitting the performance display device 1600. - 特許庁

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, for example, after 31 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, simulates continuous symbols (in FIG. 222, the left decorative symbol is "5", the middle decorative symbol is "6", the right decorative symbol is ”) is stopped on the effect display device 1600 . Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts pseudo 1, for example, when 35 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation.

For example, in a normal timer announcement effect in which the timer is not hidden and the remaining time is counted down, the player can always reliably grasp the remaining seconds, so that the effect is less unexpected. In addition, the player can guess the effect that will occur when the remaining time of the timer reaches 0 seconds from the flow of other effects being executed while the timer notice effect is being executed. Since there is a possibility, it is difficult to feel the unpredictability of the presentation (see the column of “time until timer remaining 0 seconds” in FIG. 223).

On the other hand, in the secret timer announcement effect, the timer is temporarily hidden. Therefore, in the secret timer notice effect, once the timer is hidden (in the example of FIG. 223, after 4 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation), the player counts the remaining time with his/her body clock. It is highly probable that the human body clock cannot count the seconds accurately. For example, in the example of FIG. 223, when the remaining time of the hidden timer is 5 seconds, the remaining time in the player's body clock is 0 seconds. That is, the player's body clock advances faster than the actual elapsed time.

In the example of FIG. 223, the main notice effect (character effect) is executed in parallel with the timer notice effect. The effect executed as the main notice effect when the player's own body clock reaches 0 seconds is the effect in which the character jumps. likely expected the timer to reappear and count down. When there are a plurality of types of jump effects with different expectations, when the remaining timer time reaches 0 second, the player selects a character effect with a slightly improved level of expectation (for example, the character jumps while wearing an aura). There is a high possibility that an aura jump effect) will be displayed. When the degree of expectation for the big win in the pseudo-continuous performance is higher than the degree of expectation for the big win in the aura jump performance, even if the aura jump performance appears, the player cannot raise the expectation for the big win.

However, in the example of FIG. 223, the timer is not redisplayed when the remaining time in the player's body clock reaches 3 seconds, so the player feels uncomfortable. Furthermore, when the remaining time in the player's body clock reaches 0 seconds, contrary to the player's expectation, a normal jumping effect appears instead of the aura jumping effect, and the player feels a further sense of incompatibility. Anticipation is heightened. Since the timer is always displayed in the normal timer notice performance, the player appears when the remaining time of the timer reaches 0 by the flow of the notice performance progressing in parallel with the timer notice performance. Performance can be predicted to some extent. However, in the secret timer notice, although the effect that appears when the remaining time of the timer reaches 0 is predetermined, the player's body clock goes wrong and the player's body clock goes out of order. You can improve your expectations.

In addition, when the player's body clock advances slower than the actual elapsed time, the timer indicating "remaining 3 seconds" is displayed even though the player feels that there is still plenty of time remaining on the timer. is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the unexpectedness of the effect can be felt.

In the secret timer notice effect, the time during which the timer is not displayed (22 seconds from 4 seconds to 26 seconds in Figure 222) is the remaining time after the timer is displayed again (Figure 222). 3 seconds after 27 seconds at 222). When the timer is in the non-display state for a long time, there is a high possibility that the difference between the body clock of the player and the actual elapsed time becomes large, so that the player can feel the unexpectedness of the performance. Because it becomes

In other words, when another main notice effect (the character effect in the example of FIG. 223) is executed while the timer is in the non-display state in the secret timer notice effect, the player can determine the remaining time of his body clock and the other A sense of exhilaration can be obtained by estimating the performance when the remaining time of the timer becomes 0 from the performance.

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a controls the output of sound effects by various speakers, the operation of various movable bodies, the light emission of various lamps, the light guide of various light guide plates, etc. in the other main notice effects in the secret timer notice effect. It is desirable to execute them together. In this way, by executing various effects in the other main notice effect, the player's attention is directed to the other main notice effect, and the difference between the player's body clock and the actual elapsed time is large. This is because there is a high possibility that the effect will be achieved, and the player can feel the unexpectedness of the presentation.

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs sound effects from various speakers, operates various movable bodies, emits light from various lamps, guides light from various light guide plates, and the like in the other main notice effects. , the effect display device 1600 may display an effect indicating that the secret timer advance notice effect is being executed while the timer is not displayed. Specifically, for example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, on the effect display device 1600, a display such as "timer notice is operating" while the timer is not displayed. It is desirable that the effect is not the effect indicating the remaining time of the timer. As a result, even when the player's attention is drawn to the other main notice effect, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting that the secret timer notice effect is being executed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a normal timer notice effect (timer notice effect in which the timer continues to count down without being hidden) may be selectable. In this case, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for winning a big win in the secret timer advance notice effect is set higher than the degree of expectation for winning a big win in the normal timer advance notice effect. By doing so, the player can get an exhilarating feeling at the branching point (when 27 seconds have passed in FIG. 222) as to whether or not the timer is hidden. In addition, since the expectation of winning the jackpot of the secret timer notice effect is high, the player feels exhilarated by the appearance of the secret timer notice effect, and there is a possibility that the difference between the player's body clock and the actual elapsed time will increase. This is because the price increases, and the unexpectedness of the presentation can be felt.

In addition, in order to suppress the player's excessive exhilaration when the secret timer notice effect appears, and to prevent the deviation between the player's body clock and the actual elapsed time from becoming excessive, the normal timer notice The selection rate of the effect may be set so that the rate of appearance of the secret timer advance notice effect is higher than the rate of appearance of the effect.

[19-2: Concrete Example 2 of Secret Timer Notice Effect]
224A and 224B are explanatory diagrams showing another example of the secret timer advance notice effect. Differences from FIG. 222 will be described. 224A and 224B in that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a executes a pre-announcement effect suggesting that the timer will be redisplayed a predetermined time before the timer is redisplayed and the countdown is restarted. The advance notice effect is different from the secret timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. It is desirable that the time during which the advance notice effect is executed is shorter than the countdown time after the timer is redisplayed (more than 3 seconds in the example of FIG. 224B).

In the example of FIG. 224A, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a executes a pre-announcement effect of displaying a display of "Zawazawa..." on the effect display device 1600 for one second in the timer non-display state 24 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. do. It should be noted that the advance notice effect may be a effect showing the count of time. Specifically, for example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may perform an effect display in the area where the timer was displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the advance notice effect, or may emit a heartbeat sound from various speakers every second. Alternatively, a sound such as the second hand advances may be output.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may temporarily display a timer indicating the remaining time on the effect display device 1600 a predetermined number of times (for example, two times as the upper limit) during the timer non-display state period. Specifically, for example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may redisplay the 1-second timer on the effect display device 1600 every 10 seconds after hiding the timer.

In the example of FIGS. 224A and 224B, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may redisplay the timer showing the remaining time for one second after 13 seconds and 23 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, for example. When the timer indicating the remaining time is temporarily displayed during the timer non-display state period, if the number of times of display can be selected from one or two, one is selected rather than two. It is desirable that the ratio is set to be high. This is because the greater the number of times the timer is temporarily displayed during the timer non-display state period, the less likely the player's body clock will be out of order, and the less likely the player will feel the unexpectedness of the presentation.

If the player feels a great sense of exhilaration due to the secret timer notice effect, there is a possibility that the difference between the player's body clock and the actual elapsed time will become very large. By temporarily displaying a timer indicating the remaining time on the effect display device 1600, the deviation is temporarily corrected.

Note that the secret timer advance notice effect, in which the effect display device 1600 temporarily displays the timer indicating the remaining time during the timer non-display state period, does not display any timer indicating the remaining time on the effect display device 1600 during the timer non-display state period. It is desirable to select at a smaller rate than the advance notice effect.

In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which a timer indicating the remaining time is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the secret timer advance notice effect. For example, a sound indicating the remaining time may be output from various speakers.

Also, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may execute a secret timer notice effect using a look-ahead effect. It is assumed that a secret timer notice effect is defined in the look-ahead table as a look-ahead effect.

For example, when the hold corresponding to the first variation having the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed wins, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a refers to the look-ahead table and selects the secret timer advance notice effect at a predetermined rate. . When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a selects the secret timer notice effect as the look-ahead effect, for example, the remaining time of the variation being executed, the change time of the pending change, and the start notice of the secret timer notice effect of the first variation are displayed. The sum of the time until the effect and the remaining time of the timer in the initial display of the secret timer advance notice effect is determined, and the timer indicating the remaining time is displayed on the effect display device 1600.例文帳に追加In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, in the look-ahead stage (that is, after winning a prize corresponding to the first variation and before the start of the first variation), before displaying the timer, displays a specific It is also possible to execute a display effect showing a rough advance notice, or a display effect showing that a low-expectation advance notice such as "a hot notice is coming soon" is eliminated.

Other contents of the secret timer advance notice effect are the same as those of the secret timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. It should be noted that the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a may temporarily display the timer indicating the remaining time even at the start of the variation in which the start notice effect in the secret timer notice effect is executed.

[20. Example of visual recognition region and movable body motion securing region]
Next, an effect using game balls in the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 provided on the upper rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the pachinko machine 1, a movable body motion securing region for securing the motion region of the movable body, and To explain an example of a pachinko machine which enables various checks and inspections to be easily performed without removing a game board from the front of the pachinko machine.

225 and 226 are schematic diagrams showing longitudinal sections of the pachinko machine 1, mainly showing the configuration around the game panel 1100 (game board 5). The game panel 1100 is made of a transparent resin material as described above, and has a plurality of obstacle nails planted therein. A front unit 2000 is attached to the front side of the game panel 1100, and an effect display device 1600, which is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and can display a predetermined effect image, and a back unit 3000 are attached to the rear side. It is attached. The rear unit 3000 is covered with a rear box (unit base) 3010 made of transparent resin on its rear surface, upper surface, lower surface and side surfaces. The rear unit 3000 is composed of a control device and a display device to be mounted, and forms a unit main body. The back unit 3000 has the above-described back box 3010, and the back box 3010 has decorations around the effect display device 1600 in a front view (back front decoration 3601 of the back front effect unit 3600, back middle effect). decoration of the unit 3200, decoration of the back rear effect unit 3100), and one or more movable bodies (back rear movable decoration 3120, back right movable decoration 3320, back top movable decoration 3410) are provided. ing. The movable body is normally housed in the upper part of the back unit 3000 (preferably hidden by the ornamental body and cannot be viewed from the front), and during operation it operates so as to appear in front of the effect display device 1600. (See Figures 151 to 157). In other words, the movable body is accommodated between the decorations, and the decoration has a hole in which the movable body is accommodated. It should be noted that the movable body may be accommodated in the gaps between the plurality of decorations attached to the front side of the game panel 1100 (the recessed portion of the decoration formed by the plurality of decorations). That is, the decorative body is arranged at a position avoiding the space in which the movable body is accommodated.

These holes and gaps function as an upward visibility enabling area for making the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 visible. Unit 550 is visible. The hole and gap allow the movable body to rise to the upper part of the back unit 3000 (the position of the back box 3010). You will hide in the shadows. The inner surface of the back box 3010 may be exposed in this hole or gap. In other words, since the movable range of the movable body can be increased, the movable body can be moved in various modes, and a highly interesting performance action can be realized. It functions as an operation securing area. Furthermore, a notch portion may be provided in which a position corresponding to the movable body of the back case 3010 is notched. That is, the dispensing base unit 550 may be visible through the notch portion of the back box 3010 . By providing the back box 3010 with a notch, the range of motion of the movable body can be further widened.

In addition, the holes and gaps are provided at positions that are hidden by the decorative members and the cell sheet when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the player's side. visible only to

A top plate 551a that constitutes part of the dispensing base unit 550 is provided on the top of the back box 3010, and at least a portion of the top plate 551a is transparent (white in FIGS. 225 and 226). shown), the upper part of the top plate 551a is transparent and visible.

Next, the outline of the configuration of the dispensing base unit 550 provided on the upper part of the back box 3010 will be described. As shown in the longitudinal sectional view of FIG. 225, the payout base unit 550 is provided with a tank 552 in which game balls supplied from the island facilities are stored. Therefore, when the movable body moves (descent), the bottom surface of the tank 552 can be seen through the back box 3010 and the top plate 551a when viewed from the upper right side of the game area 5a on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. there is

The tank 552 is provided on the upper part of the back unit 3000 as shown in FIG. may be configured. Since the bottom surface of the second tank portion 552n of the tank 552 is positioned below the bottom surface of the first tank portion 552m, the second tank portion 552n is connected to the tank rail 553 and the game balls flow out toward the payout unit 560. . Game balls are supplied to the tank 552 from island facilities, and static electricity is generated by friction between the game balls and the inner surface of the tank 552 . Therefore, the tank 552 may be made of a conductive resin. However, since the conductive resin is a colored resin (generally black) due to the conductive filler mixed therein, the inside of the tank 552 cannot be visually recognized from below. Therefore, if all or at least a part of the bottom surface of the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent resin material (parts shown in white in FIGS. 225 and 226), the game balls and tank stored in the tank 552 A game ball flowing down the rail 553 can be visually recognized. Both the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 function as payout ball supply means. For receiving, it is preferably provided as a groove-shaped passage on the downstream side starting from the boundary with the tank 552 .

Also, when the tank 552 has a shape as shown in FIG. 226, not only the bottom surface of the first tank portion 552m but also the portion of the second tank portion 552n on the back side of the rear unit 3000 (for example, the front side surface and the bottom surface) can be visually recognized. As such, at least a portion of the back box 3010 may be configured to be transparent. The back box 3010 may be entirely transparent, or may be partially transparent so that the tank 552 can be visually recognized.

In the example shown in FIG. 225, a part of the bottom surface of the tank 552 is made of a transparent resin material. can be created with By also making the front side surface of the tank 552 from a transparent resin material, the visible area of the tank 552 from the front side of the game area 5a can be widened. Although an example in which the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are provided above the top plate 551a has been shown, the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are positioned directly above the back unit 3000 without interposing the top plate 551a. may be provided.

In addition, depending on the shape of the tank 552, a tank rail 553 for flowing game balls from the tank 552 to the payout unit 560 is attached to the upper part of the back unit 3000, and the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are connected to the payout unit 560. It functions as a payout ball supply means that supplies the Looking at the upper left side of the game area 5a from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 can be visually recognized through the holes and gaps of the ornaments, the back box 3010 and the top plate 551a. Furthermore, a side visibility enabling area is provided on the left side of the game area 5a by the hole and the gap of the ornament, and the pachinko machine 1 is provided on the left side of the pachinko machine 1 through the side visibility enabling area from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and a tank is provided. The ball flow path between 553 and the payout unit 560 and the payout unit 560 may be visible. In this way, when the movable body is in motion (for example, when it is lowered or moved horizontally), the configuration of the base unit 550 such as the tank 552, the tank rail 553, the external terminal plate 558, and the like is reduced to the position where the decorative body is not arranged. It is visible through the transparent portions of the back box 3010 and the top plate 551a from the holes and gaps, which are regions (see FIG. 229).

The movable body mainly operates during the game, but the movable body is moved to the lowest operating position ( For example, a mode (for example, an inspection mode) may be provided in which it is lowered to the lowest position. In addition, when the power is turned on, the stop time at the maximum movement position is lengthened (for example, 3 seconds) during the initial movement to the lowest movement position of the movable body, and the upper part of the game area 5a is looked into during the stop time at this maximum movement position. may be the time when the payout base unit 550 becomes visible.

Also, the light emitted from the top of the pachinko machine 1 passes through the gaps between the game balls and the transparent portion of the bottom surface of the tank 552 . In particular, when the movable body is in motion, the light emitted from the top of the pachinko machine 1 passes through the transparent portion of the top plate 551a and the upper visible region and enters the upper portion of the game region 5a. Normally, the movable body operates during a performance in which the expectation of a big win is high, during a big win game, and in a game of a predetermined number of times after the big win game (for example, a game state advantageous to the player such as ST), and during this time, the game is played. A large number of balls are paid out to the player. As a result, a large number of game balls stored in the tank 552 move in a large flow, and the positions of gaps between the game balls stored in the tank 552 change with time. The light that is emitted from and enters the upper part of the game area 5a fluctuates, causing movement in the light.

Furthermore, since the movable body and the decorative body emit light when the movable body operates, the light from the movable body and the decorative body is reflected on the game ball in the tank 552, and the light fluctuates in the game area 5a. In particular, a light-emitting body or a decorative body that irradiates the upper side of the game area 5a without irradiating the direction of the game area 5a is provided, and the light from the decorative body is reflected by the game ball in the tank 552 or the tank rail 553. brings the light that fluctuates to the game area 5a. Therefore, for example, it is possible to provide an effect using light that fluctuates like light reflected or refracted on a water surface. For example, when producing a carp swimming in a pond, it is possible to produce an effect in which the light shining on the surface of the water appears to sway in the water. Note that a dedicated lamp may illuminate the dispensing base unit 550 (the tank 553 and the tank rail 553) instead of the movable body and the decorative body.

Note that the movable body is not limited to one that simply moves in front of the effect display device 1600 , and a special body that moves upward to approach the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 after moving in front of the effect display device 1600 . You may employ what contains a movable part. By moving the special movable part closer to the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (to approach the visible area), the player's line of sight can be guided upward where the ball tank 552 and the like are installed. Also, a light-emitting means such as an LED may be mounted on this special movable portion to irradiate the game ball in the tank 552 or the tank rail 553 with light. In this case, the movable body having the special movable portion and the effect of the reflected light of the game ball received by the game ball in the tank 552 or the tank rail 553 are combined to realize a new effect that has never existed before, thereby improving the game interest. become.

Even if the special movable part has a light emitting part and irradiates the game ball with the light emitted by itself, the special movable part has a reflection part and reflects the light emitted by the other lamp and irradiates the game ball. good too. The light from the special movable portion irradiates the game balls in the tank 552 and the tank rail 553, and the optical decoration effect of the game balls in the tank 552 and the like can be enhanced.

It should be noted that the special movable portion may be moved to a position where the game ball in the tank 552 or the tank rail 553 is irradiated with light during operation. A form in which the direction is changed so as to face upward may be used. Furthermore, even if the special movable part itself does not move, the light path to the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 is blocked by other movable bodies in the normal state, and during operation, the movement of the movable body causes The tank 552 and the tank rail 553 may be illuminated through the optical path.

In a normal state (for example, an initial state), the special movable portion is made difficult to be visually recognized by other parts of the movable body, and is preferably made visible when the movable body is operated. Also, the extra moveable part may be obscured by other parts of the moveable body even in the active state. Also, the special movable part may emit light when the movable body is in motion, or may emit light in the normal state.

As described above, the light emitted by the special movable portion to the game ball is reflected by the game ball, and when the movable body is in motion, it passes through the transparent portion of the top plate 551a and the upper visible region, and passes through the transparent portion of the top plate 551a and the upper visible region. Insert on top. Usually, the movable body operates during a performance with a high expectation for a big win, during a big win game, and in a predetermined number of games after the big win game. For example, in a jackpot state, a large number of game balls are paid out to the player and the movement of the game balls in the tank 552 becomes vigorous, so that the light irradiated to the tank 552 fluctuates and the light moves to create a sparkling effect. occur. In addition, in a game state that is advantageous to the player such as a high probability state (for example, during variable probability) or ST, the number of game balls entering the starting ports 2002 and 2004 increases due to the time saving function, and the movement of the game ball in the tank 552 is large. As a result, the light irradiated to the tank 552 fluctuates, causing movement in the light and a sparkling effect. In addition, since the frequency of movement of the movable body increases in the high-probability state, the chances of the light reflected by the game balls in the tank 552 entering the game area 5a increase. In this way, when the game ball stored in the tank 552 moves, the direction of light reflection changes, so the light emitted from the movable body and reflected by the game ball in the tank 552 fluctuates, causing the light to move. Perceived as if they were born and glittered.

In addition, although the game ball in the tank 552 reflects light, the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 may be provided with a reflecting member for reflecting the light irradiated from below (that is, the game area 5a side). As a result, decoration is performed by dynamic light from the game ball moving in the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 and static light from the reflecting member, so that more diverse decorations are possible.

Also, the movable body preferably performs a performance operation by switching between a first special expectation level performance that emits light at a standby position (for example, a non-operating state such as an initial position) and a second special expectation level performance that emits light at an operating position. At this time, by setting the emission time of the second special expectation performance longer than that of the first special expectation performance and performing together with the performance by the light transmitted through the gaps between the game balls in the tank 552 or reflected by the game balls, The types of performances can be increased, and performances with high expectations can be executed. In addition, in the second special expectation performance, it is possible to notify that a specific game state is reached by a special light emission mode (for example, a rainbow light emission mode that indicates a hit confirmation that appears only in the second special expectation performance).

Furthermore, it is preferable to provide a reflecting portion made of metal plating or the like on at least part of the upper portion and the front surface of the movable body. In the normal state, the reflecting portion is located near the tank 552 (that is, the position near the back cover) in the visible region, and the reflecting portion further reflects the light reflected by the game ball in the tank 552 to the player side. Decoration may be done by reflection. In addition, the reflective portion may be provided on both the upper surface and the front surface, or may be provided on either the upper surface or the front surface. Moreover, it is preferable that the reflecting portion moves to a position where the light is reflected in the direction of the tank 552 when the movable body is operated. Furthermore, a reflecting portion may be provided not on the movable body but on a decorative member fixedly provided near the tank 552 to reflect the light from the game ball in the tank 552 toward the player. When a decorative member having a fixed reflecting portion is provided at a position close to the tank 552, the decorative member is made invisible to the player by the movable body in a normal state, but is easily visible when the movable body operates. should be set to Then, by irradiating the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 with the reflected light from the reflecting portion of the decorative member that has become easy to see due to the movement of the movable body, the optical decoration by the reflected light of the decorative member that suddenly appears. Together, it is possible to improve the interest of the movable body motion presentation.

Up to this point, the tank 552 is irradiated with light from above and the tank 552 is irradiated with light from below. Light from a hall ceiling light or the like may be incident on the tank 552 . For this reason, a non-light-transmitting cover portion that prevents light from entering the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 is placed above (upper portion) the transparent portion of the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 through which light is transmitted from at least the top to the bottom. should be provided. By covering all or part of the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 with this covering part, the light entering the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 from above is shielded, and the light from the above-mentioned game board side is blocked. Only the game balls in the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are reflected. That is, unnecessary light is prevented from entering from the island equipment side, unintended light is prevented from leaking from the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 to the game board side, and the effect of the light from the game board side is enhanced. be able to perform adequately. In addition, it is preferable to adopt a material having a low light reflectance such as a black resin as the impermeable cover portion for shielding the light.

Moreover, a cover portion made of white or fluorescent resin or metal having high light reflectance may be provided above (upper portion) the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 . As a result, the light from the game board side is not reflected by the game balls in the tank 552 or the tank rail 553, and the light passing upward through the gaps between the game balls is reflected to the game board side by the cover portion. Thus, the light from the game board side can be suitably used without leaking. It should be noted that both the above-described non-light-transmitting cover portion and the cover portion made of a material having a relatively high light reflectance may be used. In this case, a non-light-transmitting cover (especially a cover made of black resin with low light reflectance) is provided for the tank 552 in which a large amount of game balls stay, so that a small amount of game balls can be stored compared to the tank 552. If the tank rail 553 on which the tank rail 553 stays is provided with a cover made of a material having a relatively high light reflectance, the light from the game board side can be used to produce a suitable effect. In addition, since the tank rail 553 allows the game ball from the tank 552 to flow down along a long path in the horizontal direction, the tank rail 553 has an opaque cover (especially a black color with a low light reflectance). A cover portion made of resin) and a cover portion made of a material having a relatively high light reflectance are provided so that the degree of reflection of light varies depending on the cover portion within the same tank rail 553. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In this way, since the gap between the game balls in the tank 552 changes according to the movement of the game balls in the tank 552, the game balls irradiated from the top of the pachinko machine 1 pass through the gaps and are inserted into the upper part of the game area 5a. The light appears to flicker. In addition, since the direction of light reflection changes according to the movement of the game ball in the tank 552, the light emitted from the movable body and reflected by the game ball in the tank 552 appears to fluctuate. For this reason, the light is perceived as moving and glittering. In this way, by providing a transparent portion in the upper visible region (holes and gaps of the decorative body), the bottom surface of the tank 552, and the top plate 551a, the light that enters the game region 5a fluctuates, creating an unprecedented new I can perform.

The back cover 640 is configured so that it can be opened from the back side. As shown in FIG. 225, the abutting portion between the back cover 640 and the top plate 551a may have a gap in consideration of the ventilation of the electronic devices in the back unit 3000. As shown in FIG. 640 and the top plate 551a may be overlapped to prevent foreign matter from being inserted into the rear unit 3000. FIG. 225, the contact portions may be provided at the upper and lower ends of the back cover 640, or as shown in FIG. good too. Further, when the upper part of the back cover 640 is folded back as shown in FIG. 227, the folded back cover 640 and the top plate 551a may be in contact with each other.

The abutting portion between the back cover 640 and the top plate 551a is difficult to see from the front of the pachinko machine 1, and is normally hidden by the movable body, so that it does not interfere with the player's game, but it is movable. When lowering the body, by looking at the upper side of the game area 5a from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the body frame 4 is not released from the outer frame 2 through the upper visible area and the side visible area. The contact portion between the back cover 640 and the top plate 551a can be visually recognized, and the open/closed state of the back cover 640 can be confirmed. In particular, when the upper part of the back cover 640 is folded back so that the folded back cover 640 and the top plate 551a are in contact with each other, the folding line and the contact line where the ends are in contact with each other are parallel to each other. It should be configured as follows. That is, if an incorrect foreign object is inserted in the simultaneous contact of the ends, the folding line and the contact line will not be parallel, and the part that is parallel in the normal state will have a different shape, giving a sense of discomfort. This makes it easier for the hall clerk to discover fraud during inspection.

Further, the abutment portion between the back cover 640 and the top plate 551a may be provided at a position overlapping another member when the player looks into the upper part of the game area 5a. Further, the abutting portion between the back cover 640 and the top plate 551a may be provided at a position where it is hidden behind another member when the player looks into the upper part of the game area 5a. For example, when the back cover 640 is normally closed, certain members may not be visible through the upper visibility area. In this way, when an illegal foreign object or the like is inserted into the abutting portion between the back cover 640 and the top plate 551a, a sense of incongruity arises due to the fact that the state is different from the normal state, and the hall clerk makes a mistake during the inspection. easier to discover.

Ribs may be provided at the ends of the back cover 640 so that when the back cover 640 is closed, the ribs and the ribs provided on the back cover 640 are aligned with each other, making it easy to see that the back cover 640 is normally closed. . This rib may be provided for structural reinforcement of the back cover 640 or may be provided as a mark for checking the open/closed state. A clear mark (for example, a colored portion) is provided at the end of the back cover 640, and when the back cover 640 is closed, the position of the mark (colored portion) provided on the back cover 640 matches the position, and the back cover 640 is normal. It may be easy to understand that it is closed to

228 (sectional view at a position different from that in FIG. 225), the payout base unit 550 is provided with a tank rail 553 for guiding game balls from the tank 552 to the payout unit 560. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when the movable body is in motion (descent), when viewed from the upper left side of the game area 5a on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the tank rail 553 passes through the upper visible area, the back cover 640, and the top plate 551a. It is visible. The tank rail 553 has a bottom opening (for example, the left and right ends of the bottom surface) downward, and is provided with a hole (the part shown in white in FIG. By moving, dust adhering to the game ball falls downward through the hole. Dust falling from the grooves of the tank rail 553 accumulates on the top plate 551a. In other words, the top plate 551a functions as a dust receiving portion in which dust accumulates, and maintenance such as periodic cleaning is desirable. For this reason, the top plate 551a is preferably made of colorless and transparent resin so as not to hinder the visibility of accumulated dust. Thus, by making the top plate 551a visible from the game area 5a, it is possible to determine whether or not the top plate 551a needs to be cleaned without opening the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2. FIG. In addition, the concept of "dust" in the specification of the present application includes all foreign matter that can adhere to the game ball, such as smaller dust.

In addition, without providing the top plate 551a, the top surface of the back box 3010 is positioned below the tank rail 553 so that the outer top surface of the back box 3010 collects dust dropped from the tank rail 553, and the back box 3010 functions as a dust receiving part. It may be configured to In addition, the back cover 640 folded back on the upper surface of the back box 3010 may be configured to function as a dust receiving portion, or the outer upper surface of the back cover 640 may be positioned below the tank rail 553 to serve as a dust receiving portion. Alternatively, the back cover 640 and the top plate 551a may be positioned below the tank rail 553 and both function as a dust receiving portion.

The dust receiving portion of the top plate 551a cannot be visually recognized when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, and is normally hidden by the movable body, so that it does not spoil the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 for the player. When the movable body descends, the top of the game area 5a is viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, so that the body frame 4 is not opened from the outer frame 2, and the dust receiving portion of the top plate 551a passes through the upper visible area. is easily visible.

Furthermore, a tank rail 553 can be visually recognized behind the garbage receiving portion of the top plate 551a which can be visually recognized by looking into the upper side of the game area 5a on the far side of the center accessory 2500 from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. If the tank rail 553 is made of an opaque resin, the dust receiving portion becomes dark and the dust is assimilated with the background color, making it difficult to visually recognize the dust accumulated on the top plate 551a. For this reason, by making the tank rail 553 and the tank 552 positioned around it of transparent resin, the part where the dust accumulates is brightened by being illuminated by the ceiling light of the game hall, and the behind the dust is the game ball. Since it has a metallic color, the presence or absence of dust and the amount of storage can be easily recognized. Also, since the game balls are moving while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation, they can be easily distinguished from static garbage. It is preferable to make the dust receiving portion colorless and transparent so that the dust accumulated in the dust receiving portion can be easily found. A player can visually recognize the garbage that has been collected, which may lead to a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. For this reason, by forming the garbage receiving portion from a colored transparent resin, while suppressing the player's visual recognition of the garbage during the game, the colored garbage can be prevented from being illuminated by a hall clerk, for example, when cleaning the garbage. It is possible to easily check how much dust is accumulated in the transparent dust receiver, and to meet the requirements of both the player and the hall.

Furthermore, as shown in the longitudinal sectional view of FIG. 228, the payout base unit 550 is provided with an external terminal plate 558 for electrically connecting the island equipment and the hall computer and for outputting signals relating to the operation of the gaming machine. be done. For this reason, when the movable body is in motion (at the time of descent), when viewed from the upper left side of the game area 5a on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the external terminal plate can be seen through the upper visible area, through the back box 3010 and the top plate 551a. 558 is visible. The external terminal board 558 may be mounted within the case to constitute an external terminal board unit, and the external terminal board unit may be visible. Note that the external terminal board unit may be composed of only the external terminal board 558 .

Also, as shown in FIG. 228, the external terminal plate 558 may be installed at an angle so that the cable connecting portion can be visually recognized from the front side of the game area 5a through the upper visible area. If the cable connecting portion is visible from the front side of the game area 5a, it is possible to determine whether the communication line to the hall computer is disconnected. For example, as shown in FIG. 228, an external terminal plate 558 having a cable connecting portion on its rear surface may be installed with an inclination to the rear side so that the cable connected to the rear surface can be seen from the game area 5a. Also, although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 having the cable connecting portion on the upper surface may be installed tilted forward so that the cable connected to the upper surface can be seen from the game area 5a.

The external terminal board 558 outputs a signal to notify the hall computer of an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1, which is important for the security of the pachinko machine 1. I have a plan. Therefore, by making the external terminal plate 558 visible from the game area 5a through the upper visible area, it is possible to determine whether or not the external terminal plate 558 is illegal without opening the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2.

Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the locking unit 650 may be made visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the lateral visibility enabling area on the left side of the game area 5a when the movable body is moved. For this reason, when the movable body operates and comes out from the back of the left decorative body into the game area 5a, when looking at the left side of the game area 5a from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the locking unit 650 (in particular, the door frame) The hook 652 and the hook 653 for the outer frame are visible. In this manner, when the movable body is moved, the locking unit 650 can be visually recognized by looking into the left side of the game area 5a from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, so that it is possible to determine whether or not the key is illegal.

Above the back box 3010, in addition to the external terminal plate 580, a board for effect control may be arranged. When a plurality of boards can be seen through the upper visibility enabling area when looking in from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the external terminal board 558 to be checked by the hall employee is made different from the other boards and checked. It is preferable that the substrates to be connected can be clearly distinguished to facilitate inspection of the external terminal plate 558 . For example, the colors of the resists of the external terminal board 558 and other substrates may be changed, or the entire surface of the substrate may be silk-printed in white.

When white silk printing is applied to the entire surface of the board, the light reflectance of the board increases, so the above-mentioned effect of reflecting the light emitted from the game board side and passing through the gaps between the game balls and returning it to the game board side is achieved. can get. Also, a white silk-printed substrate may be provided on the inner surface of the back box (unit base) 3010 to enhance the decorative effect of light. By providing the board at a very close position on the inner surface of the back box (unit base) 3010, the arrangement of the decorative members is not hindered.

[21. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the transparent frame-shaped front structural member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a is attached to the rear side so as to close the inside of the frame, and a plurality of The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 of the transparent flat plate-like game panel 1100 having the game area 5a formed on the front side, with the obstacle nails N planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, is placed on the upper right side with respect to the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. After having an opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 at a position eccentric to the center accessory 2500, in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the center of the game area 5a and the opening 1112 through the center of the opening 1112 The side of the eccentric direction of the opening 1112 is defined as a decorative pattern non-formation region 1102, and the opposite side is defined as a decorative pattern formation region 1101, with the line perpendicular to the line connecting the center of the Since the decorative pattern 1150 for decorating the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is formed on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the pattern forming region 1101, the panel decoration LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 that allow light to enter from the side surface of the panel plate 1110 is not illuminated, the light from the light-emitting ornaments and the effect display device 1600 provided in the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the light from the lights installed nearby. The appearance of the decoration pattern 1150 changes in various ways depending on the light from other pachinko machines, and the position of the eyes of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the inside of the game area 5a which has a distinctly different impression (atmosphere) from that of the conventional pachinko machine in which the decorative sheet is pasted on the game panel, thereby strongly attracting the player's interest. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to the players, and the decoration of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 can be enjoyed by the players to suppress the decline of the players' interests.

Then, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is caused to emit light, the light incident from the side surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is reflected forward by the decoration pattern 1150, so that it can be seen through the transparent panel plate 1110. Since the decorative pattern 1150 appears to shine and the rear surface of the panel board 1110 can be decorated with light, the decorative pattern 1150 can be conspicuous, the appearance of the game area 5a can be improved, and the player can enjoy. The interest can be strongly attracted, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced. In addition, by making the decorative pattern 1150 emit light, it is possible to make the appearance of the decorative pattern 1150 different from when the decorative pattern 1150 is not decorated with light. Since the luminescence of the decoration of the plate 1110) can be shown, the luminous decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 makes the player think that something good will happen, such as the arrival of a chance. It is possible to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, the decorative pattern 1150 is formed in the radiation portion 1151 formed within the normal light guide region 1103 within a predetermined range from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 in the game panel 1100 and outside the normal light guide region 1103. It is composed of a radiation part 1151 and a radiation light guide part 1152 that reflects light incident from the side surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 forward and guides it to the radiation part 1151 that is away from the normal light guide area 1103. 1152 of the decorative pattern 1150 guides the light to the radiating portion 1151 which is normally formed outside the light guiding region 1103. Therefore, even the radiating portion 1151 far from the panel decoration LED 1130a can It is possible to light-embellish with the same brightness as that of the radiating part 1151 near the decorative LED 1130a, and the entire decorative pattern 1150 can be uniformly light-embellished, and the appearance of the light-emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 can be improved. can.

In addition, since light can be guided from the panel decoration LED 1130a to the radiation part 1151 at a distant position by the radiant light guide part 1152, the panel decoration LED 1130a can be partially positioned with respect to the outer peripheral side of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. , the decoration pattern 1150 can be uniformly illuminated. As a result, it is not necessary to arrange the panel decoration LEDs 1130a over the entire circumference of the panel plate 1110, and the panel decoration LEDs 1130a can be arranged at the upper left and lower left positions in front view where it is easy to secure space. It is possible to prevent the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from becoming smaller in order to secure the arrangement space for the LED 1130a.

Furthermore, in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, through the center of the opening 1112 eccentrically penetrating to the upper right for mounting the center accessory 2500, the center and the opening of the game area 5a (panel plate 1110) The width of the panel plate 1110 is narrow on the side of the eccentric direction of the opening 1112 (upper right side), and the opposite side (lower left side) is the panel The width of the plate 1110 is wide, and the wide side is the decorative pattern forming region 1101, and the narrow side is the decorative pattern non-forming region 1102. Therefore, the wide decorative pattern forming region 1101 of the panel plate 1110 Since the decorative pattern 1150 is formed at the bottom, the decorative pattern 1150 becomes large and can be easily seen, so that the player can enjoy the decoration of the decorative pattern 1150. - 特許庁In addition, since the decorative pattern 1150 is not formed in the narrow decorative pattern non-formation region 1102 of the panel plate 1110, the appearance of the game region 5a is poor even if the decorative pattern 1150 is not formed in this region. Therefore, it is possible to avoid wastefully forming the decorative pattern 1150 in a narrow, hard-to-see region, and reduce the labor required to form the decorative pattern 1150 .

In addition, since the decorative pattern 1150 is formed on a portion of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 (decorative pattern forming area 1101), the decorative pattern 1150 is formed on the entire rear surface of the panel plate 1110. As compared with the case where the decoration pattern 1150 is formed, it is possible to reduce the labor required to form the decoration pattern 1150, and to suppress the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, a predetermined radius in front view centered on a specific obstacle nail N1 that affects the game contents among the plurality of obstacle nails N is set as a decoration prohibited area 1104, and the decoration prohibited area 1104 is avoided. A decorative pattern 1150 is formed as follows. As a result, when a large number of game balls B abut on the specific obstacle nail N1, the specific obstacle nail N1 is distorted or tilted, making it impossible to provide the preset flow of the game balls B. In order to prevent this, the decorative pattern 1150 is not formed around the specific obstacle nail N1 (decoration prohibited area 1104) when the specific obstacle nail N1 is struck and adjusted to the preset state. It is possible to make it easy to see the current distortion condition of N1, and to facilitate maintenance of the specific obstacle nail N1. In addition, since the decorative pattern 1150 is not formed around the specific obstacle nail N1, even if the specific obstacle nail N1 is struck during maintenance, the impact transmitted from the specific obstacle nail N1 to the panel plate 1110 will cause a specific obstacle. The stress is attenuated to some extent by the time it reaches the decorative pattern 1150 near the nail N1, and even if the stress is concentrated, the weakened force does not cause the panel plate 1110 to crack or split. Therefore, maintenance of the specific obstacle nail N1 can be easily performed.

Further, since the decoration prohibition area 1104 is provided, it is possible to clarify the portion of the panel plate 1110 where the decorative pattern 1150 can be formed, so that the decorative pattern 1150 is unnecessary for the specific obstacle nail N1. It is possible to avoid moving away from the game, and it is possible to easily form more colorful decorative patterns 1150, and it is possible to form highly decorative decorative patterns 1150, which further enhances the appeal to players. be able to.

In addition, since the decorative pattern 1150 is formed by avoiding the specific obstacle nail N1 by the decoration prohibition area 1104, the decorative pattern 1150 is formed behind the site where the obstacle nail N is implanted, excluding the specific obstacle nail N1. Since some of the obstacle nails N are planted so as to overlap with the decorative pattern 1150, the tip of the obstacle nail N is irradiated with light by the decorative pattern 1150 decorated with light emission, so as to remove the obstacle. The tip of the nail N can be made to shine, and the player can be entertained by seeing a luminous performance which cannot be seen in the past pachinko machines in which the obstacle nail N and the tip shine.

In addition, when the decorative pattern 1150 is illuminated by the panel decoration LED 1130a, the light of the illuminated decoration can also cause the portion between the outer circumference and the inner circumference of the front constituent member 1000 outside the game area 5a to emit light. can. Since the portion between the outer circumference and the inner circumference of the front component member 1000 can be decorated with light emission by the light emission decoration of the decorative pattern 1150, the function display unit 1400 and the certificate stamp pasting portion 1012 attached to the portion can be illuminated. Since it is possible to irradiate the attached certificate stamp with light from behind, the function display unit 1400 and the certificate stamp can be decorated with light emission, and the conventional pachinko machine does not emit light. By decorating the unit 1400 and the certificate stamp with light emission, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player. It is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, the always visible decorative pattern 1150 has a portion along the outer edge facing the inside of the back front decorative substrate 3603 in the back front effect unit 3600 arranged behind the game panel 1100. , the portion of the decorative pattern 1150 makes it difficult to recognize the outer edge of the back front decorative substrate 3603 when viewed through the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 . In addition, since the decorative pattern 1150 has a portion along the outer edge of the back front decorative substrate 3603, the decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 and the shape (decoration) of the back front decorative substrate 3603 are similar. Therefore, the back front decorative substrate 3603 and the decorative pattern 1150 can display a decoration with a sense of unity, and a decoration with a sense of depth can be displayed, thereby improving the appearance of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. be able to.

Furthermore, when the light guide plate LED 2612a, the light guide plate LED 3172a, and the light guide plate LED 3221a are not emitting light, the front light guide plate 2610, the rear second light guide plate 3160, and the rear first light guide plate 3210 are transparent. , the front light guide plate 2610, the rear second light guide plate 3160, and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 arranged behind the rear first light guide plate 3210 can be visually recognized from the front, and the panel plate of the game panel 1100 A decorative pattern 1150 formed on 1110 can be visually recognized. In this state, when any one of the light guide plate LED 2612a, the light guide plate LED 3172a, and the light guide plate LED 3221a and the panel decoration LED 1130a are caused to emit light, the second pattern 2622 of the front light guide plate 2610 and the second pattern 2622 of the back second light guide plate 3160 are caused to emit light. Since it is possible to show the player a luminous decoration in which the decoration of one of the six patterns 3162 and the third pattern 3211 of the first back light guide plate 3210 and the decoration pattern 1150 are integrated, the player has a strong impact. can be given, can strongly attract the player's interest, can make the player think that something good will happen, and heighten the expectation for the game and make it interesting. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect display device 1600 is arranged so as to be visible through the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. A transparent back first light guide plate 3210 and a back second light guide plate 3160 are arranged in front, and a transparent light guide plate extending from the outside of the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160 to the inside position. A back-center decorative lens 3202 and a back-back decorative lens 3152 are arranged. Then, the light guide plate LED 3171a of the fifth pattern substrate 3171, the light guide plate LED 3172a of the sixth pattern substrate 3172, the light guide plate LED 3221a of the third pattern substrate 3221, and the light guide plate LED 3222a of the fourth pattern substrate 3222. , the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160 are in a transparent state, and the rear effect display device 1600 is seen through the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160. It is possible to visually recognize the effect image displayed on the back side, and the displayed effect image can be enjoyed.

In this state, when the light guide plate LED 3172a or the light guide plate LED 3221a, and the LEDs 3203a, 3221b, 3222b, 3153a, 3171b, and 3172b are caused to emit light, the effect display device 1600 appears in front of the effect display device 1600 in the center of the front view game area 5a. , a third pattern 3211 or a sixth pattern 3162 as a specific pattern in which a specific object (broken glass) is drawn is displayed by light emission, and around the third pattern 3211 or the sixth pattern 3162, the third pattern A unit base 3151, a rear decorative lens 3152, a unit base 3201, and a central rear decorative lens 3202 having the same shape as the objects of 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 are decorated with light emission, and the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 emit light. The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 becomes difficult to see due to the display and the luminescence decoration of the unit base 3151, the back rear decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back and middle decorative lens 3202, and the third pattern 3211 displayed by light emission. Alternatively, the sixth pattern 3162 and the unit base 3151 decorated with light emission, the rear rear decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the central rear decorative lens 3202 are conspicuously visible.

That is, the light emitting display of the third pattern 3211 or the sixth pattern 3162 by the back first light guide plate 3210 or the back second light guide plate 3160, and the light emission of the unit base 3151, the back rear decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back middle decorative lens 3202. When the light emitting effect by the decoration is executed, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 becomes difficult to see, and instead, the third pattern 3211 or the sixth pattern 3162, the unit base 3151, the back rear decorative lens 3152, Since the unit base 3201 and the decorative lens 3202 in the back and inside are conspicuously visible, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and make the player think that something good will happen to the player, thereby giving the player a sense of anticipation for the game. can be raised. At this time, the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 are separated from the unit base 3151, the back rear decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back middle decorative lens 3202 in the front-rear direction. , and the sixth pattern 3162, the unit base 3151, the back rear decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back middle decorative lens 3202 overlap in the front-rear direction. Alternatively, it appears as if it is retracting backward, and a three-dimensional pattern with a sense of perspective can be displayed by light emission, which can make the player wonder. The light emission performance by the second light guide plate 3160, the unit base 3151, the back rear decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back middle decorative lens 3202 can be made difficult to get tired of, and the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second guide plate The player can be entertained by the light emission performance by the light plate 3160, the unit base 3151, the back-rear decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back-middle decorative lens 3202, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. can.

In addition, a transparent unit base 3151, a back rear decorative lens 3152, a unit base 3201, and a back middle decorative lens 3202 formed in the same shape as the specific target portion drawn as the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 are provided. , the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 are provided in front and behind the rear first light guide plate 3210 and the rear second light guide plate 3160, and at least three members with different positions in the front and rear direction are provided. As a result, it is possible to further emphasize the perspective when each light is emitted, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

Furthermore, the inner end surfaces of the back-middle decorative lens 3202 and the back-rear decorative lens 3152 are inclined, and the LEDs 3203a, 3221b, 3222b, LED 3153a, LED 3171b, and LED 3172b are arranged to be the back-middle decorative lens 3202 and the back-rear decorative lens. 3152, the inside of the rear decorative lens 3202 and the rear decorative lens 3152 are irradiated with light in a direction parallel to the surfaces of the rear first light guide plate 3210 and the rear second light guide plate 3160. Therefore, the light irradiated to the inside of the back-middle decorative lens 3202 and the back-rear decorative lens 3152 is reflected forward on the inner end face (outer peripheral edge facing inward) and radiated forward. The outer peripheral edges facing the inside of the back-center decorative lens 3202 and the back-back decorative lens 3152 can be decorated with light emission in a belt shape, making it easy for the player to recognize the shapes of the back-center decorative lens 3202 and the back-back decorative lens 3152. In addition, the center-back decorative lens 3202 and the rear-back decorative lens 3152 can be emphasized, and the outer peripheral shapes of the center-back decorative lens 3202 and the rear-back decorative lens 3152 are emphasized, so that the rear first light guide plate 3210 and the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 of the back second light guide plate 3160, and the back-center decorative lens 3202 and the back-rear decorative lens 3152 are different from each other in the front-rear direction. It is possible to perform light emission production of a three-dimensional pattern with a greater sense of perspective.

In addition, the inner end surfaces (outer peripheral edges facing inward) of the back-center decorative lens 3202 and the back-back decorative lens 3152 are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. And the outer peripheral edge of the back rear decorative lens 3152 has a different reflection direction (or refraction direction) from the flat front surface, so the light of the lighting in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and other pachinko machines Depending on the state of the light irradiated into the game area 5a from the front, such as light from the back, the front surfaces of the back-center decorative lens 3202 and the back-back decorative lens 3152 may appear transparent, whereas the back-center decorative lens 3202 and the back-center decorative lens 3202 may appear transparent. The outer peripheral edge of the rear decorative lens 3152 looks shiny or translucent, so that the player can easily recognize the shape and existence of the back-middle decorative lens 3202 and the rear-back decorative lens 3152. The decoration effect in the game area 5a by the inner-back decorative lens 3202 and the rear-back decorative lens 3152 can be enhanced.

In addition, after the rear first light guide plate 3210 and the rear second light guide plate 3160 are spaced apart in the front-rear direction, objects as the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 drawn on each are arranged in chronological order. , the objects drawn as the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 are displayed in chronological order or in reverse chronological order. When the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 of each of the second light guide plates 3160 are sequentially lighted and displayed, the player can see the light emitting effect with movement, so that the player can hardly get tired of the game. In addition to being able to amuse the players, it is possible to give a strong impact to the players to make them think that something good is going to happen to them, to heighten their expectations for the games and reduce their interest. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is provided, by displaying the effect image matched with the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 that are light-emitting, A collaboration effect by the decorative lens 3202 or the rear-back decorative lens 3152 and the effect image (for example, effect in which the character displayed as the effect image causes the third pattern 3211 or the sixth pattern 3162 to emit light to break the glass, or 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 light emitting display can be used to make the character of the effect image appear by breaking the glass, etc.). A decrease can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the back rear movable decorative body 3120 in the back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is in the standby position, the transparent game panel that defines the rear end of the game area 5a is displayed. Through 1100 (panel board 1110), an effect display device 1600 that displays an effect image in the center of the game area 5a in a front view is positioned, and the effect display device 1600 is located in front of and above the effect display device 1600. A back-back movable decorative body 3120 of a large back-back effect unit 3100 extending so as to straddle the display screen in the left-right direction is positioned. In this state, the lock member 3141 is in the lock position, and the lock protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 of the back rear movable decorative body 3120 is in contact with the regulation portion 3141c of the lock member 3141 from above. Movement of the back movable decorative body 3120 to the lower side than 3141c is regulated. Further, the lock member 3141 is urged from the unlocked position side to the locked position side via the transmission slider 3142 by the lock spring 3143, and the stopper 3141e comes into contact with the rotation restricting member 3144, thereby moving from the locked position to the unlocked position. is restricted from rotating to the opposite side.

Then, according to the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area 5a, the lock member 3141 is moved to the locked position by the downward movement of the slide guide 3134 driven by the rear rear drive motor 3135 of the rear rear movable mechanism 3130. When the back movable decoration 3120 is turned to the release position, the restricting portion 3141c moves to a position where it does not come into contact with the lock protrusion 3122a of the back rear movable decoration 3120, so that the gravity acting on the back rear movable decoration 3120 causes the effect display device. It falls (moves) to the moving end (lowering position) on the lower side so as to traverse the front of 1600 . When the slide guide 3134 is moved upward after the back rear movable decorative body 3120 is dropped, the locking member 3141 is rotated from the unlocked position to the locked position by the biasing force of the lock spring 3143 . After that, when the back movable decorative body 3120 is moved upward by the slide guide 3134 of the back movable mechanism 3130, the lock projection 3122a of the back movable decorative body 3120 comes into contact with the guide portion 3141d of the lock member 3141, thereby locking. The member 3141 rotates to the release position side, and the rear movable decorative body 3120 can move upward to a position beyond the restricting portion 3141c of the locking member 3141 . Then, when the lock projection 3122a of the rear movable decorative body 3120 moves upward from the locking member 3141, the locking member 3141 is rotated to the locked position by the biasing force of the lock spring 3143, and the movable rear decorative body 3120 moves upward in the front view. It will return to the state where it is located in the upper part in the game area 5a.

In this way, when the lock member 3141 is moved from the locked position to the unlocked position by the transmission slider 3142 of the back-rear movable mechanism 3130 according to the game state, a large back-rear movable decoration straddling the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction. 3120 falls (moves) so as to traverse the front side of the effect display device 1600, so that the back and rear movable decorative body 3120 blocks the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the player can The movement of the back-back movable decoration 3120 can be noticed, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back-back movable decoration 3120.例文帳に追加In addition, by dropping the large back movable decorative body 3120, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back movable decorative body 3120. It is possible to make a person strongly think that an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous will occur, and to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

By the way, the back movable decorative body 3120 is sized to straddle the performance display device 1600 in the left and right direction, and both ends in the left and right directions are attached so as to be movable by the slide shafts 3132, respectively. tends to incline relative to the left-right direction (horizontal). On the other hand, when unlocking the rear movable decorative body 3120 by the locking member 3141, the restricting portion 3141c of the locking member 3141 is positioned on the opposite side of the downward movement of the rear movable decorative body 3120. The lock member 3141 is rotated so as to move upward, making it difficult for the lock projection 3122a of the back rear movable decorative body 3120 to come off from the restricting portion 3141c. As a result, even if the back movable decorative body 3120 is tilted, the locking projection 3122a does not come off from the restricting portion 3141c, and the movable back decorative body 3120 can be prevented from falling downward without permission. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the back movable decorative body 3120 from falling arbitrarily, so that the player is prevented from feeling distrust due to the arbitrarily falling of the back movable decorative body 3120.例文帳に追加In addition, the lock can be released at a desired timing according to the game state to drop the back rear movable decorative body 3120, and the performance effect by the movable performance using the back rear movable decorative body 3120 can be surely exhibited. be able to.

In addition, since the performance display device 1600 is provided, the performance image is displayed on the performance display device 1600 so that the player can also be entertained by the performance image, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. can be done. Furthermore, by displaying a performance image that matches the movement of the rear movable decorative body 3120 on the performance display device 1600 capable of displaying the performance image, a collaboration performance (for example, , an effect such that the back-back movable decorative body 3120 is moved by the character displayed as the effect image, or an effect such that the character is moved by the movement of the back-back movable decorative body 3120, etc.) can be performed. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with various performances and to suppress the decrease in interest.

Further, as described above, when unlocking the back rear movable decorative body 3120, the lock member 3141 is rotated so that the restricting portion 3141c moves upward, so that the effect display device 1600 can be moved. By forming the rear movable decorative body 3120 with a size that straddles in the left-right direction, even if the weight of the movable rear decorative body 3120 increases, the lock protrusion 3122a of the movable rear decorative body 3120 can be disengaged from the restricting portion 3141c. Since it can be made difficult, the back rear movable decorative body 3120 can be sufficiently locked with one locking member 3141 . Since only one locking member 3141 is provided, there is no need to secure a space for providing them, compared to the case where a plurality of locking members 3141 are provided. space can be made as small as possible, and the rear movable decorative body 3120 can be made relatively large and conspicuous.

Furthermore, since the lock member 3141 is attached near the upward movement end of the back rear movable decorative body 3120, the lock member 3141 moves from the restricting portion 3141c (standby position) to the downward movement end (lowered position). The distance can be made as long as possible. Therefore, the back movable decorative body 3120 falls over a long distance, so that the interest of the player can be easily attracted to the back movable decorative body 3120, and a strong impact can be given to the player. , the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the locking member 3141 is attached near the upper moving end of the rear movable decorative body 3120, there is a certain distance (space) between the locking member 3141 (regulating portion 3141c) and the upper moving end. ), it is possible to secure a space in which the restricting portion 3141c can move upward when the locking member 3141 is rotated from the locked position to the unlocked position by the back rear movable mechanism 3130, and the lock is secured. The member 3141 can be reliably rotated to the release position, and the locking member 3141 can lock or unlock the movement of the rear movable decorative body 3120 .

In addition, since the lock member 3141 is provided with the obliquely extending guide portion 3141d, the back movable decorative body 3120 is locked by the back movable mechanism 3130 when it is moved upward and returned to the original position. Even if the member 3141 is not rotated to the release position side, the lock projection 3122a comes into contact with the guide portion 3141d as the back rear movable decorative body 3120 moves, so that the lock member 3141 is automatically rotated to the release position side. can be moved. Therefore, when returning the back movable decorative body 3120 to the original state, it is not necessary to control the back rear drive motor 3135 of the back movable mechanism 3130, and the load applied to the performance control can be reduced, resulting in overload. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being entertained and losing interest due to the unstable performance control.

Furthermore, since the stopper 3141e of the lock member 3141 abuts against the rotation restricting member 3144, the rotation from the locked position to the opposite side to the unlocked position is restricted. Even if a strong force acts downward from the lock projection 3122a side of the back movable decoration 3120, the lock member 3141 rotates to the opposite side to the unlocked position, and the lock projection 3122a of the back movable decoration 3120 rotates. can be prevented from coming off the restricting portion 3141c, and the back movable decorative body 3120 can be reliably prevented from falling without permission.

Further, after the slide guide 3134 is moved downward by driving the rear driving motor 3135 of the rear rear moving mechanism 3130 to rotate the lock member 3141 from the lock position to the release position via the transmission slider 3142, the rear rear driving motor 3135 is driven to move the rear rear. When the slide guide 3134 is moved upward by the back drive motor 3135 in order to return the decorative body 3120 to its original state, the lock member 3141 is automatically rotated from the unlocked position to the locked position by the biasing force of the lock spring 3143. Therefore, even if the locking member 3141 is not returned to the lock position by the rear rear movable mechanism 3130 after the rear rear movable mechanism 3130 releases the lock and the rear rear movable decorative body 3120 is dropped, the lock spring 3143 returns the lock member 3141 to the locked position. be able to. Therefore, it is not necessary to drive (control) the rear rear drive motor 3135 of the rear rear movable mechanism 3130 just to return the locking member 3141 to the locked position (original state), so that the load applied to the performance control can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the player from being entertained due to the unstable performance control due to the overload, and from losing interest.

In addition, since the back movable decorative body 3120 is moved (dropped) downward by gravity that is always acting, it is necessary to provide a mechanism for moving the back movable decorative body 3120 downward. In addition, the configuration related to the movement of the back movable decorative body 3120 can be simplified, the configuration related to the movement can be made compact, and the back movable decorative body 3120 can be reduced by the amount of the compacted space. It is possible to increase the size, and the back movable decorative body 3120 can be conspicuous to strongly attract the player's interest, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the back movable mechanism 3130 for moving the back movable decoration 3120 upward is provided, the locking member 3141 and the back movable mechanism 3130 prevent the back movable decoration 3120 from falling. can be prevented. In other words, since the locking member 3141 and the slide guide 3134 of the back movable mechanism 3130 can be double-locked, the back movable decorative body 3120 is prevented from accidentally falling to the lower moving end. It is possible to prevent this, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, as a result of the lottery based on the establishment of the starting condition, the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 in FIG. 107 as a display device, image information storage means 168, and a peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 168 as effect pattern setting means and image display control means.

Peripheral control IC 1510a as effect pattern setting means can set the effect pattern related to the lottery from among a plurality of patterns based on the result of the lottery. Specifically, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, based on various commands from the main control board 1310 (command corresponding to the first special lottery result or command corresponding to the second special lottery result), a plurality of types of effects When one of the patterns is set (determined), various schedule data corresponding to this set (determined) pattern are set (determined) from among a plurality of types of various schedule data.

The effect display device 1600 as a display device can display effect images corresponding to pattern effects set by the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Peripheral data ROM 1520a as image information storage means stores image data such as background images, character images, pattern images, etc. for drawing various effect images on effect display device 1600 as image information constituting effect images. is possible.

The peripheral control IC 1510a as image display control means generates drawing data of an image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 as the effect image from the image information stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600. It is possible.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player can be made to recognize the degree of expectation for winning by the aspect of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the process of progressing the effect. Specifically, by changing the display mode of the reserved display from the execution of the reserved display before digestion as the reserved display to the end of the execution of the reserved display after digestion, the decorative pattern based on the reserved display (variable display of special symbols), it is possible to execute a holding notice performance that suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit.

Peripheral control IC 1510a as image display control means, when carrying out a pending change suggestion effect accompanied by a grayscale effect assuming that a predetermined condition is satisfied, produces an effect corresponding to the pattern effect set by peripheral control IC 1510a as effect pattern setting means. As an image, it is possible to generate a special effect image that has undergone specific processing different from normal and display it on the effect display device 1600, or to generate a normal effect image that is not subjected to this specific processing. It is possible to make it difficult to identify the aspect of Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a changes all images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to By converting all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIGS. r) to FIG. 195(u), a special effect image used for the pending change suggesting effect with grayscale effect shown in FIG. 194(c) to FIG. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the mode from the normal effect image used for the suggestive effect.

While the performance of the pattern set by the peripheral control IC 1510a as the performance pattern setting means progresses, the peripheral control IC 1510a as the image display control means continues to generate a special performance image and display it on the performance display device 1600. By generating a period during which a grayscale effect is performed as a specific period (for example, a frame of one screen for a predetermined number of frames), a effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is generated for this specific period. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify the degree of expectation for winning through the display device 1600, and after the end of this specific period, the degree of expectation for winning can be identified by the player through the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. It's easy to do. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a, in the hold change suggesting effect accompanied by the grayscale effect shown in FIGS. 194(r) to 195(u), uses the All images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIGS. It is difficult to determine from what color to what color (suspended change) the color of . As a result, in the grayscale presentation, by hiding the suggestion of the expected value by the pending display, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify the expected value (expectation for winning). Then, when the peripheral control IC 1510a proceeds to the effect that develops to Super Reach shown in FIG. The background image 1645, the left decorative pattern 1650a of the full-color image, the middle decorative pattern 1650b of the full-color image, the right decorative pattern 1650c of the full-color image, and the first reserved display 1655a having the white color of the full-color image are switched to, and the whole is the original full-color image. , and the luminous decoration of the decoration main body 3511 is changed from the color of white to the fourth reserved display determined as the final color of the reserved display in the case of performing the reserved change suggesting effect shown in FIG. Switch to 1655d red to return to the original color. As a result, after the end of the grayscale effect, the expectation value (hit expectation) can be easily identified by the player by suggesting the expectation value by the pending display.

In this way, while the performance of the pattern set by the peripheral control IC 1510a as the performance pattern setting means progresses, the peripheral control IC 1510a as the image display control means generates a special performance image and displays it on the performance display device 1600. By generating a specific period in which the performance is continuously performed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify the degree of expectation for winning through the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the specific period. After the end of the specific period, the player can easily identify the degree of expectation of winning through the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing a new effect with simple control.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player can adjust the sound volume by rotating the rotary operation unit 302 during the game performance period in which the symbol variation and the jackpot game are executed. During the performance period, when the operation performance using the rotary operation unit 302 and the driving performance using the rotary operation unit 302 are performed, the volume change prohibition flag is set for a period longer than the period during which these performances are executed. is turned on so that even if the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302, the volume is not adjusted. According to this, it is possible to prevent the sound volume from being adjusted unintentionally by the player by rotating the rotary operation unit 302, thereby suppressing the loss of interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player can adjust the sound volume by rotating the rotary operation unit 302 during the game performance period in which the symbol variation and the jackpot game are executed. During the performance period, when the operation performance using the pressing operation part 303 is performed, the volume change prohibition flag is turned on at least during the period during which the operation performance using the pressing operation part 303 is executed, and the player is restricted so that volume adjustment is not performed even if the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated. According to this, when the pressing operation part 303 is operated in response to the operation effect using the pressing operation part 303, the rotation operation part 302 located in the vicinity of the pressing operation part 303 is erroneously operated. It is possible to prevent the sound volume from being adjusted and to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the rotary operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the volume, a volume adjustment bar indicating the adjusted volume is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600, When a predetermined period elapses after receiving the final adjustment, the sound volume adjustment bar is erased, and while the rotation operation unit 302 is being operated during the game performance period during which the symbol variation and the big win game are executed. , when the volume change prohibition flag that restricts (prohibits) volume adjustment is turned on, the display of the volume adjustment bar that is displayed when the volume change prohibition flag is turned on is changed to the volume The display is continued even after the change prohibition flag is turned on. According to this, even if the volume change prohibition flag is turned on while the rotary operation unit 302 is being operated during the game performance period, it is possible to determine at what volume the adjustment is restricted. As you can see, it is possible to continue to display the volume adjustment bar even after the volume change prohibition flag is turned on, and it is possible to cause discomfort when the volume adjustment is suddenly restricted. It is possible to reduce the loss of interest in games.

Further, in one example of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the normal figure start opening 2010 is on the path through which the game ball B launched toward the big winning opening 2005 in the game area 5a passes, and on the path. It is arranged at a position preceding the prize winning opening 2005 . That is, a portion of the game ball B launched toward the big winning opening 2005 is configured to enter the normal figure starting opening 2010 . As a result, even when the player hits to the right with a short firing interval during the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress the winning of a specified number or more in one opening of the big winning port 2005.例文帳に追加In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the game ball B wins the normal figure starting hole 2010, a smaller number of game balls than when winning the big winning hole 2005 are paid out. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the number of game balls paid out in one round of the jackpot game becomes excessive. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the player without imposing an excessive burden on the hole.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a specific effect (L5 effect), the jackpot expectation index is promoted in the look-ahead effect for the L5 target variation using the hold variation, and the jackpot expectation is increased in the L5 target variation. Realize a series of performances that will further promote you. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the specific effect (L5 effect), the jackpot expectation index is promoted in the look-ahead effect for the L5 target change using the pending change, and in the pseudo-continuous effect of the L5 target change To realize a series of performances for further elevating the degree of expectation for a big hit. By realizing a series of these effects, the player can gradually get a sense of expectation for a big win between a plurality of effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a specific effect (secret timer advance notice effect), a highly anticipated effect (timer) different from the main advance notice effect is temporarily hidden on the effect display device 1600, and then fully displayed. After a certain amount of time, the effect with high expectation is displayed again on the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁As a result, the player can feel the unexpectedness of the performance, and the interest in the game is improved. Further, when the highly expected effect different from the main notice effect is the timer notice effect, the effect display device 1600 temporarily hides the timer and then re-displays it, so that the player's body clock and the actual time can be changed. Since there is a deviation from the elapsed time, the player can particularly feel the unexpectedness of the presentation.

[22. example]
It goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and can be embodied in various forms as long as they fall within the technical scope of the present invention.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the decorative pattern 1150 is composed of a plurality of grooves linearly recessed, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be composed of a plurality of grooves, a plurality of linearly bulging ridges, or a plurality of point-like bulging projections.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the design (pattern) of the decorative pattern 1150 is a cracked pattern. , check pattern, basket weave pattern, scale pattern, pattern imitating characters in line with the concept of Pachinko machine 1, pattern imitating items in line with the concept of Pachinko machine 1, and logos in line with the concept of Pachinko machine 1. A pattern simulating a background in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, or the like may be used.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, only the decorative pattern 1150 is formed on the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 (game panel 1100), but the present invention is not limited to this. A decorative pattern 1150 is formed on the area 1101, and a decorative sheet decorated with the decoration is attached to the area 1102 where the decorative pattern is not formed. "Affixing a decorative sheet with a texture" may be used, or "After forming a decorative pattern 1150 in the decorative pattern forming area 1101, a part of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 may be covered so as to cover the decorative pattern 1150 from the rear. Alternatively, a decorative sheet with decorations may be attached to the entire surface.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the movable decorative body is always subjected to a force to move it to one side in the movement direction, and the back side to which a force to always move downward due to gravity is acting. Although the rear movable decorative body 3120 is shown, it is not limited to this, and is mounted so as to be movable in the left-right direction, and is always moved to one side in the moving direction by the biasing force of the elastic member. It may be a movable ornamental body on which a force acts, or a movable ornamental body which is mounted so as to be movable in the vertical direction and is always subjected to a force to move upward by an urging force of an elastic member. good too.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, when the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the pending change suggestion effect, the final color of the decorated circular pending display is determined, and the color of the pending display is changed from the initial color to the final color. As the main control board 1310 progresses toward the pending digestion, the performance changes so that the expected value increases, but in addition to the circular pending display, the triangular pending display In combination with the pending display, the color of the pending display may be changed from the initial color to the final color so that the expected value increases as the holding display by the main control board 1310 progresses. In this way, it is possible to hide the suggestion of the expected value by the pending display in the grayscale presentation.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control IC 1510a determines the timing and color of the color to be changed by lottery as a form of changing the color of the reserved display from the initial color to the final color (holding change pattern). However, various commands to be sent to the peripheral control IC 1510a are determined by lottery on the main control board 1310 side, or extracted from a predetermined table on the main control board 1310 side. It may be included.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a terminates the process of converting all images to be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 into grayscale by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a at the end of the grayscale effect. As a result, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the full-color image background image 1645, the full-color image left decorative design 1650a, the full-color image middle decorative design 1650b, the full-color image 1650b, and the full-color image 1650b are displayed from the image whose entirety has been converted to grayscale. The right decorative pattern 1650c is switched to the first reserved display 1655a having the white color of the full-color image, and the whole is returned (switched) to the original full-color image at once. Instead of returning (switching) from an image converted to grayscale to a full-color image all at once, the grayscale image is gradually released and gradually returned (switched) to a full-color image. good too. At this time, the background image 1645, the left decorative pattern 1650a, the middle decorative pattern 1650b, and the right decorative pattern 1650c of the image converted to the grayscale are gradually canceled to return (switch) to the full-color image, and finally, the first It may be configured such that the hold display 1655a is gradually released and returned (switched) to the full-color image.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, in the pending change suggestion effect accompanied by the grayscale effect, it is difficult to determine from what color to what color (suspended change) the color of the pending display However, it is not limited to such a pending change, but the expected value (expected degree) may be kept secret. For example, when the grayscale effect is not performed, if the expected value (expectation level) can be suggested using the color of the button by the effect of instructing the operation of the button on the screen, the effect of instructing the operation of this button is grayed out. By using the scale effect, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether the button is a red button or a blue button.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the grayscale setting mode is used in the screen data of one frame that defines the screen described above to conceal the effect related to the suggestion of the expected value (expectation level). In addition to the gray scale setting mode, another setting mode may be used to conceal the effect related to the suggestion of the expected value (expectation level). For example, using the mosaic setting mode described above, it can be difficult to distinguish between red pending display and blue pending display.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the grayscale setting mode is used in the screen data of one frame defining the screen described above to conceal the presentation of the suggestion of the expected value (expectation level). Not limited to the grayscale setting mode, when using other setting modes to conceal the production related to the suggestion of the expected value (expectation), the expected value (expectation) that will be a big hit is different for each setting mode You may do so. For example, compared with the expected value (expectation) that will be a big hit for the production set in the mosaic setting mode described above as another setting mode, with the expected value (expectation) that will be a big hit for the production set in the grayscale setting mode can be set higher.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment described above, in the pending change suggestive effect accompanied by the grayscale effect shown in FIGS. All the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIGS. , the background image 1645, the left decorative pattern 1650a, the middle decorative pattern 1650b, and the right decorative pattern 1650c are displayed in a full-color image without using the grayscale setting mode in the screen data of one frame that defines the screen described above. Alternatively, the grayscale setting mode may be used in the screen data of one frame defining the above-described screen for the pending display, and the rendering may be performed using a grayscale image. As a result, a grayscale effect can be performed on a partial area of the display area of the effect display device 1600, which is a reserved display area.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, one effect display device 1600 is provided on the game board 5 as the effect display device. A plurality of performance display devices may be provided in the vicinity of the pressing operation portion 303 of the door frame 3 or in the door frame right side decorative body 419 shown in FIG. In this case, for example, when the pending display is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the effect display device 1600 displays As all images displayed in the area, all images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIGS. On the other hand, for other effect display devices that do not perform such a reserved display, a full-color image effect is recommended without a grayscale effect.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, when changing the color of the hold display, various speakers (for example, the vibration speaker 354 provided in the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, etc., the top Although the center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, etc.), the same sound effect may be played when the color of the hold display is changed. . In this way, in the grayscale production, it is possible to make it difficult to determine from what color to what color the pending display color has changed from the sound effect, so the grayscale production ends and develops into super reach. The expected value is released by switching the reserved display hidden by the grayscale presentation to the final color of the reserved display in the presentation, thereby providing the player with a more innovative presentation.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the color of the pending display is changed, the sound effect corresponding to the color of the pending display is, for example, when the color of the pending display is white, the sound effect is "pico". , If the color of the hold display is blue, the sound effect will be "beep", if the color of the hold display is yellow, the sound effect will be "beep, piko", and the color of the hold display will be red In the case of , the sound effect is played with "beep-beep", but when the color of the hold display is changed, a difficult-to-distinguish sound effect may be played. For example, in addition to the reference time (1 second) as the time to play the sound effect "beep", the color of the hold display can be lengthened or shortened from white to red in increments of 0.2 seconds. Alternatively, the number of repetitions of the sound effect "beep" may be increased or shortened from white to red, or the sound effect corresponding to the color of the hold display may be The duration of "beep" and the number of times the sound effect "beep" is repeated may be combined. In this way, in the grayscale production, it is possible to make it difficult to determine from what color to what color the pending display color has changed from the sound effect, so the grayscale production ends and develops into super reach. The expected value is released by switching the reserved display hidden by the grayscale presentation to the final color of the reserved display in the presentation, thereby providing the player with a more innovative presentation.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has been described as an example, but the game machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to the pachinko machine. game machine) or a hybrid game machine that fuses a pachinko machine and a slot machine (plays a slot game using game balls). Here, a slot machine as a reel-type game machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 208 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

The slot machine 6000 comprises a front door 6002 and a main body 6004, as shown in FIG. Front door 6002 and body portion 6004 are connected to each other via hinges (not shown). The front door 6002 can be opened from the body portion 6004 by inserting a key into the keyhole 6005 provided at the right end of the front door 6002 and turning it clockwise with this hinge as the center of rotation.

A game panel 6006 is provided on the upper half of the front door 6002 , and a projecting portion projecting forward from the game panel 6006 is formed on the lower half of the front door 6002 . A medal slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 on this projecting portion. A storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are arranged on the lower half of the front door 6002 , and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024 . These bet buttons 6010, 6012, starting lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, accumulation settlement button 6022, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. It is The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004 .

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at approximately the center of the game panel 6006, and three variable rotating bodies (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 and production devices (not shown) are displayed through this display window. It is designed to be transparent. The three variable rotators (not shown) are attached and fixed to a body-side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the body portion 6004 . On the other hand, the production device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side mounting member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door 6002 .

On these variable rotators, translucent pattern belts printed with a plurality of patterns (for example, bells, watermelons, cherries, 7s, Vs, etc.) as pattern information are attached to the respective cylindrical frameworks. ing. Such cylindrical variable rotators are called reels or drums in game machines such as slot machines, and the output shafts of stepping motors (not shown) are connected to the respective variable rotators. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and by rotating the output shafts of the stepping motors, a plurality of types of patterns are continuously changed from the above display window from top to bottom. It looks like

The production device includes a plurality of movable production bodies (not shown), the above-described production display device 1600, various decorative substrates on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the above-described peripheral control unit 1500. Based on various commands from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1500 controls operation of a plurality of movable effect bodies, drawing control of the effect display device 1600, light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decoration boards, and the like. By performing various controls, the progress of production is controlled. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 described above. As described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are all made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate. ), the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the circuit board by means of metal round screws. It is configured to be the ground (GND).

A predetermined number of medals as game media are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008, and the main control board 1310 starts the variable display of pattern information based on the operation of the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right The variable display of the pattern information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the lapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) under the condition that the pattern information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals to a receiving tray 6026 as a game medium.

In addition, in the fusion game machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes the ball slot 6008', and the main control board 1310 has a predetermined number of game balls as game media inserted into the ball slot 6008', and the start lever 6014 is operated. Then, the variable display of the pattern information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) under the condition that the pattern information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls to a receiving tray 6026 as game media.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko machine 2... Outer frame 3... Door frame 4... Main body frame 5... Game board 5a... Game area 1300... Main control unit 1310... Main control board 1500... Production control unit 1501... Cover body 1502 Base body 1503 Wiring cover body 1510 Peripheral control board 1520 Peripheral data ROM board 1530 Liquid crystal output board 1600 Effect display device

Claims (1)

A game having a game plate portion having a game area formed thereon and a back unit provided behind the game plate portion, wherein a display means provided in the back unit can be visually recognized through an opening of the game plate portion board and
a body frame to which the game board is attached,
The body frame is provided with payout means for paying out game balls to a player and payout ball supply means for storing the game balls to be supplied to the payout means,
The back unit is
A unit base, a fixed decorative member attached to the unit base, and a movable body attached to the unit base, wherein the movable body supplies the payout balls in a state in which the game board is attached to the body frame. operable between an initial position below the means and an operating position;
The unit base is constructed using a transparent member capable of transmitting light, and the inner surface of the transparent member of the unit base is covered with the fixed decorative member below the payout ball supply means provided with the movable body. exposed areas without
At least a part of the payout ball supply means is made of a member that can transmit light so that the stored game balls are visible,
With the game board attached to the body frame, the unit base is exposed when the game board is viewed from the front but is not visible when the game board is viewed from the front through the opening. A gaming machine characterized in that the inner surface is visible and the game balls stored in the payout ball supply means are visible through the unit base at the portion of the exposed inner surface .

Images